Merged Approved Documents Jun2022
Merged Approved Documents Jun2022
Merged Approved Documents Jun2022
The Merged
Approved
Documents
Approved Document L Volume 1 and Volume 2 provides guidance on how to comply with Part L of
Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations and in a number of specific building regulations regarding
the energy efficiency requirements for dwellings and buildings other than dwellings.
Approved Document F Volume 1 and Volume 2 provides guidance on how to comply with Part F of
Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations and in a number of specific building regulations regarding
the ventilation requirements for dwellings and buildings other than dwellings.
Approved Document O provides guidance on how to comply with Part O of Schedule 1 to the
Building Regulations and in a number of specific building regulations. Approved Document O
applies to new residential buildings.
Approved Document S provides guidance on how to comply with Part S of Schedule 1 of the
Building Regulations, which mandates that the following properties should have a charge point:
• New dwellings with associated parking within the site boundary of the building
• New dwellings created through a material change of use, which have associated parking within
the site boundary of the building.
Date Amendment
July 2021 edition Incorporating 2020 editions of Approved
Document B1 and Approved Document B2
June 2022 edition Incorporating 2021 edition of Approved
Document L1, Approved Document L2, Approved
Document F1, Approved Document F2, Approved
Document O and Approved Document S
Using the Merged Approved Documents
How to use the Merged Approved Documents
This document combines the approved documents into a single PDF. Each approved document is
self-contained and has its own introduction. Each introduction relates only to the corresponding
approved document. Each introduction also contains information on when the document’s
guidance came into effect (or will come into effect). It is important to check that the version of
each approved document you are using remains current and is the correct version for your project.
Please refer to the Ministry of Housing, Communities and Local Government website to check,
and confirm with your building control body if in doubt.
Key features
The Merged Approved Documents enable the user to:
• undertake a word search across all of the approved documents
• cut and paste text and diagrams into other documents
• add notes to a saved copy
• use an index to access individual sections of the guidance
Correction to Approved Document K
The heading in section 1.18 of the online version of Approved Document K have been corrected
to match the print version.
Forthcoming changes
Please check the Ministry of Housing, Communities and Local Government’s website to ensure that
each approved document you are using is current for your project. This is particularly important in
relation to Approved Document B as this has been subject to frequent update. It is intended that
the Merged Approved Documents will be updated whenever an amendment or revision to an
approved document is made.
7
Materials and workmanship
APPROVED DOCUMENT
Regulation 7
* This approved document gives guidance for compliance with the Building Regulations for
building work carried out in England. It also applies to building work carried out on excepted
energy buildings in Wales as defined in the Welsh Ministers (Transfer of Functions) (No. 2) Order
2009.
The approved documents
The following is a high level summary of the Building Regulations relevant to most types of
building work. Where there is any doubt you should consult the full text of the regulations,
available at
www.legislation.gov.uk.
Building work
Regulation 3 of the Building Regulations defines ‘building work’. Building work includes:
a. the erection or extension of a building
b. the provision or extension of a controlled service or fitting
c. the material alteration of a building or a controlled service or fitting.
Regulation 4 states that building work should be carried out in such a way that, when work is
complete:
a. for new buildings or work on a building that complied with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations: the building complies with the applicable requirements of the Building
Regulations.
b. for work on an existing building that did not comply with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations:
(i) the work itself must comply with the applicable requirements of the Building Regulations
(ii) the building must be no more unsatisfactory in relation to the requirements than before
the work was carried out.
Section 1: Materials 4
Ways of establishing the fitness of materials 4
Short-lived materials 6
Materials susceptible to changes in their properties 6
Non-combustible materials in external walls of tall buildings 6
Section 2: Workmanship 7
Ways of establishing the adequacy of workmanship 7
Continuing control
0.2 There are no provisions under the Building Regulations for continuing control over the materials
used in building work following completion of the work. However, under section 19 of the Building
Act 1984, local authorities may impose conditions with regard to the proposed use of prescribed
short-lived materials, even when the plans conform to the regulations. However, no materials are
currently prescribed for the purpose of section 19.
This approved document gives guidance on how to meet regulation 7 of the Building
Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Materials and workmanship
7. (1) Building work shall be carried out—
(a) with adequate and proper materials which—
(i) are appropriate for the circumstances in which they are used,
(ii) are adequately mixed or prepared, and
(iii) are applied, used or fixed so as adequately to perform the functions for which they are
designed; and
(b) in a workmanlike manner.
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you will meet the requirements of regulation 7 if you satisfy both
of the following conditions.
a. Materials are of a suitable nature and quality in relation to the purposes and conditions of their
use.
b. Workmanship is such that, where relevant, materials are adequately mixed or prepared and
applied, used or fixed so as to perform adequately the functions for which they are intended.
Materials include:
a. manufactured products such as components, fittings, items of equipment and systems
b. naturally occurring materials such as stone, timber and thatch
c. backfilling for excavations in connection with building work.
Limitations
Regulation 7 applies to all building work. However, in accordance with regulation 8 and Schedule 1,
the standards of materials and workmanship need be no more than are necessary to:
a. for Parts A–D, F–K, N and P (except for paragraphs G2, H2 and J7) of Schedule 1: secure reasonable
standards of health or safety for people in or about the building
b. for Part E of Schedule 1: secure reasonable resistance to the passage of sound for the welfare
and convenience of people in or about the building
c. for Part L of Schedule 1: conserve fuel and power
d. for Part M of Schedule 1: provide access to buildings and their facilities for people.
Section 1: Materials
1.1 Building work must meet the functional requirements of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations.
Approved documents refer to materials covered by harmonised European product standards,
British Standards and other technical specifications. However, there is no obligation to adopt
any particular solution contained in an approved document in order to meet functional
requirements; the references are not exclusive and other materials may be suitable in the particular
circumstances.
Past experience
1.18 Past experience, such as use in an existing building, may show that the material can perform the
function for which it is intended.
Sampling
1.19 Under regulation 46 of the Building Regulations, local authorities have the power to take samples
as necessary to establish whether materials to be used in building work comply with the provisions
of the regulations.
1.20 Regulation 46 does not apply to any work specified in an initial notice or to any work for which a
final certificate has been given by an approved inspector and accepted by the local authority.
1.21 Regulation 8 of the Building (Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 provides that an approved
inspector, having given an initial notice which continues to be in force, may take samples of
material as are reasonable to establish within the limits of professional skill and care that regulation
7 of the Building Regulations or any other applicable regulations are complied with.
Short-lived materials
1.22 Some materials, in the absence of special care, may be considered unsuitable because of their rapid
deterioration in relation to the expected life of the building.
1.23 A short-lived material which is readily accessible for inspection, maintenance and replacement may
meet the requirements of the regulations if the consequences of failure are not likely to be serious
to the health or safety of people in and around the building.
1.24 If a short-lived material is not readily accessible for inspection, maintenance and replacement,
and the consequences of failure are likely to be serious for health or safety, it is unlikely that the
material will meet the requirements of the regulations.
1.25 As noted in paragraph 0.2, local authorities have the power to impose conditions on the use of
short-lived materials.
2.10 Under regulation 45 of the Building Regulations 2010, regulation 8 of the Building (Approved
Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 and section 33 of the Building Act 1984, building control bodies
have powers to make tests as they consider necessary to establish whether building work complies
with the requirements of regulation 7.
2.11 Those carrying out building work may voluntarily include testing in the activities they carry out to
demonstrate that the work complies with the requirements of the regulations.
Legislation
Building Act 1984 c.55 (as amended)
Building Regulations 2010 (SI 2010/2214) (as amended)
Building (Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (SI 2010/2215) (as amended)
Construction Products Regulation (305/2011/EU-CPR)
Gas Appliances Directive (2009/142/EC)
Pressure Equipment Directive (97/23/EC)
The Welsh Ministers (Transfer of Functions) (No. 2) Order 2009 (SI 2009/3019)
APPROVED DOCUMENT
© Crown Copyright 2018
A
Structure
APPROVED DOCUMENT A
RIBA Bookshops
RIBA Bookshop, 66 Portland Place, London W1B 1AD. Tel +44 (0)191 244 5557
The Building Centre Bookshop, 26 Store Street, London, WC1E 7BT. Tel +44 (0)20 7692 4040
APPROVED DOCUMENT
A1 Loading
A2 Ground movement
A3 Disproportionate collapse
n
Surrey TW9 4DU. Email: licensing@opsi.gov.uk. If you require this publication in
ts 3 4,
dm d 2 g 2 io
an alternative format please email alternativeformats@communities.gsi.gov.uk.
en 01 00
en an tin it
am 10 ora ed
20 rp 4
Cert no. TT-COC-002168
co 0
in 0
2
For use in England*
ONLINE VERSION
MAIN CHANGES MADE BY THE MAIN CHANGES IN THE APPROVED DOCUMENTS
2013 AMENDMENTS 2004 EDITION The following documents have been published
to give practical guidance about how to meet the
The main changes, which apply only to England*, Building Regulations. You can find the date of the
The 2004 edition replaced the 1992 Edition (with
are to: edition approved by the Secretary of State at
1994 and 2000 amendments edition). The main
• References to British Standard design changes were: www.planningportal.gov.uk.
standards Approved Document A
• Guidance on the sizing of timber floors and
• Guidance on disproportionate collapse roofs for traditional house construction Structure
removed, as the Timber Tables are now Approved Document B: Volume 1
• Wind maps
published by TRADA. Fire safety – Dwellinghouses
• Guidance on strip footings
• Map of basic wind speeds revised. Approved Document B: Volume 2
• Materials and workmanship Fire safety – Buildings other than dwellinghouses
• Stainless steel cavity wall ties specified for all
There have been no changes to Part A of houses regardless of their location. Approved Document C
Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations. Site preparation and resistance to contaminants
• Guidance on masonry walls to dwellings
extended. and moisture
MAIN CHANGES MADE BY THE
• Guidance on concrete foundations to houses Approved Document D
2010 AMENDMENTS revised. Toxic substances
The 2010 amendments reflect the Building • Guidance on the design and construction of Approved Document E
Regulations 2010 and Building (Approved domestic garages extensively updated. Resistance to the passage of sound
Inspectors etc) Regulations 2010. The changes
mainly reflect regulation number changes as • Disproportionate collapse: the Application Approved Document F
a result of re-ordering. There have been no Limit to Requirement A3 (ie. the 5 storey limit) Ventilation
amendments to the substantive requirements in removed to bring all buildings under control of Approved Document G
Part A of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations. Requirement A3. Sanitation, hot water safety and water efficiency
Approved Document H
Drainage and waste disposal
Approved Document J
Combustion appliances and fuel storage systems
Approved Document K
Protection from falling, collision and impact
Approved Document L1A
Conservation of fuel and power in new dwellings
Approved Document L1B
Conservation of fuel and power in existing
dwellings
Approved Document L2A
Conservation of fuel and power in new buildings
other than dwellings
Approved Document L2B
Conservation of fuel and power in existing
buildings other than dwellings
Approved Document M
Access to and use of buildings
Approved Document P
Electrical Safety – Dwellings
Approved Document 7
Materials and workmanship
* This approved document gives guidance for compliance with the Building Regulations for building work carried out in England. It also applies to building work
carried out on excepted energy buildings in Wales as defined in the Welsh Ministers (Transfer of Functions) (No. 2) Order 2009.
DIAGRAMS TABLES
1.
Size and proportion of residential 1.
Areas at risk from house
buildings of not more than three storeys 14 longhorn beetle 12
2.
Size and proportion of non-residential 2. Wall types considered in this section 13
buildings and annexes 15
3.
Minimum thickness of certain
3. Determination of wall thickness 16 external walls, compartment walls
and separating walls 16
4. Parapet walls: height 17
4. Imposed loads 18
5.
Maximum floor area enclosed by
structural walls 18 5. Cavity wall ties 23
6.
Map showing wind speed in m/s for 6.
Declared compressive strength of
maximum height of buildings 19 masonry units complying with
BS EN 771-1 to -5 25
7. Maximum height of buildings 21
7.
Normalised compressive strength of
8. Measuring storey and wall heights 22
masonry units of clay and calcium
9.
Declared compressive strength of silicate blocks complying with
masonry units 24 BS EN 771-1 and -2 25
10. Maximum span of floors 25 8. Value of Factor ‘X’ 29
11. Differences in ground levels 26 9. Lateral support for walls 29
12. Openings in a buttressing wall 27 10. Minimum width of strip footings 37
13. Buttressing 28 11. Building consequence classes 44
14. Sizes of openings and recesses 29
15. Lateral support by floors 30
16. Lateral support at roof level 31
17. Size and location of openings 32
18. Wall thickness 33
19. Lateral restraint at roof level 34
20. Proportions for masonry chimneys 35
21. Elevation of stepped foundation 36
22. Piers and chimneys 36
23. Foundation dimensions 36
24.
Area at risk of collapse in the event of
an accident 45
LIMITATION ON REQUIREMENTS
In accordance with Regulation 8, the
requirements in Part A of Schedule 1 to the
Building Regulations do not require anything
to be done except for the purpose of securing
reasonable standards of health and safety for
persons in or about the buildings.
Loading
A1. (1) The building shall be constructed so that the combined dead,
imposed and wind loads are sustained and transmitted by it to the
ground:
(a) safely; and
(b) without causing such deflection or deformation of any
part of the building, or such movement of the ground, as will impair
the stability of any part of another building.
(2) In assessing whether a building complies with sub-paragraph
(1) regard shall be had to the imposed and wind loads to which it is
likely to be subjected in the ordinary course of its use for the purpose
for which it is intended.
Ground movement
A2. The building shall be constructed so that ground movement
caused by:
(a) swelling, shrinkage or freezing of the subsoil; or
(b) land-slip or subsidence (other than subsidence arising
from shrinkage), in so far as the risk can be reasonably foreseen,
will not impair the stability of any part of the building.
Definitions
2.3 The following meanings apply to terms
throughout this section:
Buttressing wall A wall designed and
constructed to afford lateral support to another
wall perpendicular to it, support being provided
from the base to the top of the wall.
Cavity width The horizontal distance between
the two leaves of a cavity wall.
Compartment wall A wall constructed as a
compartment wall to meet the requirements of
regulation B3(2).
Dead load The load due to the weight of
all walls, permanent partitions, floors, roofs
and finishes including services, and all other
permanent construction.
Imposed load The load assumed to be produced
by the intended occupancy or use, including
the weight of movable partitions, distributed,
concentrated, impact, inertia and snow loads,
but excluding wind loads.
External walls
Internal load-bearing walls
Compartment walls
Separating walls
External walls
Internal load-bearing walls
Diagram 1 Size and proportion of residential buildings of not more than three storeys
See para 2C4
Thickness of walls that the number of wall ties per square metre is
not less than 2.5 ties/m2. Wall ties should also be
2C5 General wall thickness may be determined provided, spaced not more than 300mm apart
according to this section provided: vertically, within a distance of 225mm from the
a. conditions relating to the building of which vertical edges of all openings, movement joints
the wall forms part (see paragraphs 2C4, and roof verges. For selection of wall ties for use
2C14 to 2C16, 2C38); and in a range of cavity widths refer to Table 5. For
specification of cavity wall ties refer to paragraph
b. conditions relating to the wall (see paragraphs 2C19.
2C17 to 2C37) are met. (See Diagram 3.)
For external walls, compartment walls and
2C6 Solid external walls, compartment walls separating walls in cavity construction, the
and separating walls in coursed brickwork or combined thickness of the two leaves plus 10mm
blockwork: Solid walls constructed of coursed should not be less than the thickness determined
brickwork or blockwork should be at least by paragraph 2C6 and Table 3 for a solid wall of
as thick as 1/16 of the storey height. Further the same height and length.
requirements are given in Table 3.
2C9 Walls providing vertical support to
2C7 Solid external walls, compartment other walls: Irrespective of the material used
walls and separating walls in uncoursed stone, in the construction, a wall should not be less in
flints, etc.: The thickness of walls constructed thickness than any part of the wall to which it
in uncoursed stone, flints, clunches, bricks or gives vertical support.
other burnt or vitrified material should not be
less than 1.33 times the thickness determined 2C10 Internal load-bearing walls in brickwork
by paragraph 2C6. or blockwork (except compartment walls or
separating walls): All internal load-bearing walls
2C8 Cavity walls in coursed brickwork or should have a thickness not less than:
blockwork: All cavity walls should have leaves
at least 90mm thick and cavities at least 50mm (specified thickness from Table 3)
– 5mm
wide. The wall ties should have a horizontal 2
spacing of 900mm and a vertical spacing of
450mm, or alternatively should be spaced such Continued on page 17
Not exceeding 3.5m Not exceeding 12m 190mm for whole of its height
Exceeding 3.5m but not exceeding 9m Not exceeding 9m 190mm for whole of its height
Exceeding 9m but not exceeding 12m Not exceeding 9m 290mm from the base for the height of
one storey and 190mm for the rest of its height
except for a wall in the lowest storey of a three 2C14 Maximum floor area: The guidance of
storey building, carrying load from both upper this section assumes that no floor enclosed by
storeys, which should have a thickness as structural walls on all sides exceeds 70m2, and
determined by the equation or 140mm whichever that no floor without a structural wall on one side
is the greatest. exceeds 36m2. (See Diagram 5.)
2C11 Parapet walls: The minimum thickness 2C15 Imposed loads on roofs, floors and
and maximum height of parapet walls should be ceilings: The design considerations given in
as given in Diagram 4. this section are intended to be adequate for the
imposed loads given in Table 4.
2C12 Single leaves of certain external walls:
The single leaf of external walls of small single- 2C16 Maximum height of buildings: The design
storey non-residential buildings and of annexes guidance in this section is based on BS EN
need be only 90mm thick, notwithstanding 1991-1-4:2005 with its UK National Annex. The
paragraphs 2C38. maximum heights of buildings given in Table c
of Diagram 7 correlate to various site exposure
2C13 Modular bricks and blocks: Where walls
conditions and wind speeds. A map showing
are constructed of bricks or blocks having
wind speeds is given in Figure 1 of Diagram 6.
modular dimensions, wall thicknesses prescribed
in this section which derive from a dimension of
brick or block may be reduced by an amount not Conditions relating to the wall
exceeding the deviation from work size permitted 2C17 Maximum allowable length and height
by a British Standard relating to equivalent sized of the wall: This section does not deal with walls
bricks or blocks made of the same material. longer than 12m, measured from centre to centre
of buttressing walls, piers or chimneys providing
restraint, or with walls exceeding 12m in height
(see also Table 3).
Distributed loads
a. clay bricks or blocks to BS EN 771-1;
Roof 1.00kN/m² for spans not exceeding 12m b. calcium silicate bricks or blocks to BS EN
1.5kN/m² for spans not exceeding 6m
771-2;
Floors Distributed load: 2.00kN/m² c. concrete bricks or blocks to BS EN 771-3 or
Ceilings Distributed load: 0.25kN/m² BS EN 771-4;
together with concentrated load: 0.9kN d. manufactured stone to BS EN 771-5;
e. square dressed natural stone to the
2C18 Rules of measurement for heights of appropriate requirements described in
walls and storeys: The height of a wall or a BS EN 771-6.
storey should be measured in accordance with
the rules in Diagram 8. 2C21 Compressive strength of masonry units:
Minimum compressive strength requirements
for masonry units according to BS EN Standards
Construction materials and are given in Diagram 9, where the masonry units
workmanship indicated for Conditions A, B and C should
have declared compressive strengths of not
2C19 Wall ties: Wall ties should comply with less than the values given in Table 6. Normalised
BS EN 845-1 and should be material references compressive strengths for block sized clay and
1 or 3 in BS EN 845-1 Table A1 austenitic stainless calcium silicate masonry units not complying with
steel. Wall ties should be selected in accordance brick dimensional format are given in Table 7.
with Table 5 of this Approved Document.
Continued on page 25
23.5
24
23.5
23 23
22.5
22
21.5
22.5
21.5
23.5 23 22
22.5
24.5
Note: A more detailed approach for obtaining Factor O is given by Figure 3 Diagram 6.
Diagram 6 Map showing wind speeds in m/s for maximum height of buildings
1.40
0.5Ld
1.35 Orography
0.5z significant in
z shaded area
Steep slope < 1/3.3
1.30
-X +X
Lu Ld
1.25
Orography Factor O
1.15
1.10
Shallow slope ≤ 1/10
1.05
1.00
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5
X/Lu X/Ld
Figure 3a Orography Factor O for hills and ridges
1.40
1.5Ld
1.35
0.5z
Steep slope < 1/3.3 z
1.30 Orography
-X +X significant in
Lu shaded area
1.25
Orography Factor O
1.20
1.10
1.05
Table a Factor O
S < 2km 2 to 20km > 50km < 2km 2 to 20km > 50km
≤ 25 15 15 15 15 15 15
26 11.5 13.5 15 15 15 15
27 8 11 14.5 15 15 15
28 5.5 8 11 15 15 15
29 4 6.5 8.5 12.5 15 15
30 3 5 6.5 10 12.5 15
31 4 5.5 8.5 11 13.5
32 3.5 4.5 7 9.5 11.5
33 3 3.5 6 8 10
34 3 5.5 7 7.5
35 4.5 6.5 7.5
36 4 5.5 6.5
37 3.5 5 6
38 3 4.5 5.5
39 4 5
40 3.5 4.5
41 3 4
42 3.5
43 3.5
44 3
Notes:
1. Where face insulated blocks are used the cavity width should be measured from the face of the masonry unit.
2. The embedment depth of the tie should not be less than 50mm in both leaves.
3. For cavities wider than 175mm calculate the length as the nominal cavity width plus 125mm and select the nearest stock length. For wall ties
requiring embedment depths in excess of 50mm, increase the calculated tie length accordingly.
Block See Table 7 See Table 7 See Table 7 See Table 7 2.9* 2.9
Block See Table 7 See Table 7 See Table 7 See Table 7 7.3* 7.3
Block See Table 7 See Table 7 See Table 7 See Table 7 7.3* 7.3
C 15.0 21.0
Notes:
1. Values in this table are normalised compressive strengths (N/mm²). Compressive strengths of masonry units should be derived according to EN 772-1.
2. The table applies to clay and calcium silicate block masonry units where the work size exceeds 337.5mm in length or 112.5mm in height.
3. Group 1 masonry units have not more than 25% formed voids (20% for frogged bricks). Group 2 masonry units have formed voids greater than
25%, but not more than 55%.
Loading on walls
2C23 Maximum span of floors: The maximum
span for any floor supported by a wall is 6m
where the span is measured centre to centre of
bearing (see Diagram 10).
2C24 Other loading conditions:
a. Vertical loading on walls should be distributed.
This may be assumed for concrete floor
slabs, precast concrete floors, and timber
floors designed in accordance with section
2B, and where the bearing length for lintels is
150mm or greater. Where a lintel has a clear End restraint
span of 1200mm or less the bearing length
may be reduced to 100mm. 2C25 Vertical lateral restraint to walls
b. Differences in level of ground or other solid The ends of every wall should be bonded or
construction between one side of the wall otherwise securely tied throughout their full
and the other should be less than 4 times the height to a buttressing wall, pier or chimney.
thickness of the wall as shown in Diagram 11. Long walls may be provided with intermediate
c. The combined dead and imposed load buttressing walls, piers or chimneys dividing
should not exceed 70kN/m at base of wall the wall into distinct lengths within each storey;
(see Diagram 11). each distinct length is a supported wall for
the purposes of this section. The intermediate
d. Walls should not be subjected to lateral load buttressing walls, piers or chimneys should
other than from wind, and that covered by provide lateral restraint to the full height of the
paragraph 2C24(b). supported wall, but they may be staggered at
each storey.
2C26 Buttressing walls
If the buttressing wall is not itself a supported
wall its thickness T2 should not be less than:
Continued on page 27
a. half the thickness required by this section for to the wall. Piers should have a minimum
an external or separating wall of similar height width of 190mm (see Diagram 13);
and length less 5mm; or
b. the sectional area on plan of chimneys
b. 75mm if the wall forms part of a dwelling (excluding openings for fireplaces and flues)
house and does not exceed 6m in total height should be not less than the area required
and 10m in length; and for a pier in the same wall, and the overall
thickness should not be less than twice the
c. 90mm in other cases.
required thickness of the supported wall
The length of the buttressing wall should (see Diagram 13).
be at least 1/6 of the overall height of the
supported wall and be bonded or securely tied Openings, recesses, overhangs
to the supporting wall and at the other end to a
buttressing wall, pier or chimney. and chases
The size of any opening in the buttressing wall 2C28 General:
should be restricted as shown in Diagram 12. The number, size and position of openings and
2C27 Design criteria for piers and chimneys recesses should not impair the stability of a wall
providing restraint: or the lateral restraint afforded by a buttressing
wall to a supported wall. Construction over
a. piers should measure at least 3 times the openings and recesses should be adequately
thickness of the supported wall and chimneys supported.
twice the thickness, measured at right angles
Diagram 13 Buttressing
See para 2C27
2C29 Dimensional criteria for openings and Lateral support by roofs and floors
recesses:
2C32 A wall in each storey of a building should
The dimensional criteria are given in Diagram 14 extend to the full height of that storey, and have
and Table 8. horizontal lateral supports to restrict movement
No openings should be provided in walls below of the wall at right angles to its plane.
ground floor except for small holes for services
2C33 Floors and roofs should:
and ventilation, etc. which should be limited
to a maximum area of 0.1m² at not less than a. act to transfer lateral forces from walls to
2m centres. buttressing walls, piers or chimneys; and
2C30 Chases: b. be secured to the supported wall by
connections specified in paragraphs 2C34
a. vertical chases should not be deeper than 1/3 and 2C35.
of the wall thickness or, in cavity walls, 1/3 of
the thickness of the leaf; 2C34 The requirements for lateral restraint of
walls at roof and floor levels are given in Table 9
b. horizontal chases should not be deeper than and guidance on satisfying the requirements is
1/6 of the thickness of the leaf of the wall; given in paragraphs 2C35 and 2C36.
c. chases should not be so positioned as to 2C35 Walls should be strapped to floors above
impair the stability of the wall, particularly ground level, at intervals not exceeding 2m
where hollow blocks are used. and as shown in Diagram 15, by tension straps
conforming to BS EN 845-1. For corrosion
2C31 Overhangs:
resistance purposes, the tension straps should
The amount of any projection should not impair be material reference 14 or 16.1 or 16.2
the stability of the wall. (galvanised steel) or other more resistant
Continued on page 30
Solid or cavity: external Any length Roof lateral support by every roof forming a junction with the
compartment separating supported wall
Greater than 3m Floor lateral support by every floor forming a junction with the
supported wall
Internal load-bearing wall (not being Any length Roof or floor lateral support at the top of each storey
a compartment or separating wall)
specifications including material references 1 or d. where floors are at or about the same level
3 (austenitic stainless steel). The declared tensile on each side of a supported wall, and
strength of tension straps should not be less contact between the floors and wall is either
than 8kN. continuous or at intervals not exceeding 2m.
Where contact is intermittent, the points of
Tension straps need not be provided:
contact should be in line or nearly in line on
a. in the longitudinal direction of joists in houses plan (see Diagram 15(e)).
of not more than 2 storeys, if the joists are
2C36 Gable walls should be strapped to roofs as
at not more than 1.2m centres and have at
shown in Diagram 16(a) and (b) by tension straps
least 90mm bearing on the supported walls
as described in 2C35.
or 75mm bearing on a timber wall-plate at
each end, and Vertical strapping at least 1m in length should be
provided at eaves level at intervals not exceeding
b. in the longitudinal direction of joists in houses
2m as shown in Diagram 16(c) and (d). Vertical
of not more than 2 storeys, if the joists
strapping may be omitted if the roof:
are carried on the supported wall by joist
hangers in accordance with BS EN 845-1 a. has a pitch of 15° or more, and
of the restraint type described by additional
b. is tiled or slated, and
guidance given in BSI Published Document
PD 6697:2010 and shown in Diagram 15(c), c. is of a type known by local experience to be
and are incorporated at not more than 2m resistant to wind gusts, and
centres, and
d. has main timber members spanning onto the
c. when a concrete floor has at least 90mm supported wall at not more than 1.2m centres.
bearing on the supported wall (see Diagram
15(d)), and
a. the maximum permitted length of the opening The guidance given applies in the following
is to be 3m, measured parallel to the supported circumstances:
wall, and a. The floor area of the building or annexe does
b. where a connection is provided by means not exceed 36m².
other than by anchor, this should be provided b. The walls are solidly constructed in brickwork
throughout the length of each portion of the or blockwork using materials which comply
wall situated on each side of the opening, and with paragraphs 2C19 to 2C22.
c. where a connection is provided by mild steel c. Where the floor area of the building or annexe
anchors, these should be spaced closer than exceeds 10m² the walls have a mass of not
2m on each side of the opening to provide less than 130kg/m².
the same number of anchors as if there were
no opening, and Note: There is no surface mass limitation
recommended for floor areas of 10m² or less.
d. there should be no other interruption of
lateral support. d. Access to the roof is only for the purposes of
maintenance and repair.
e. The only lateral loads are wind loads.
(ii) Size and location of openings The only other openings permitted in a building
or annexe are for windows and a single leaf door.
One or two major openings not more than 2.1m
The size and location of these openings should
in height are permitted in one wall of the building
be in accordance with Diagram 17.
or annexe only. The width of a single opening or
the combined width of two openings should not (iii) Wall thickness and recommendations
exceed 5m. for piers
The walls should have a minimum thickness of 90mm.
Walls which do not contain a major opening (iv) Horizontal lateral restraint at roof level
but exceed 2.5m in length or height should be
Walls should be tied horizontally at no more than
bonded or tied to piers for their full height at not
2m centres to the roof structure at eaves level,
more than 3m centres as shown in Diagram 18a.
base of gables and along roof slopes as shown
Walls which contain one or two major openings
in Diagram 19 with straps fixed in accordance
should in addition have piers as shown in
with paragraphs 2C35 and 2C36. Where
Diagrams 18b and 18c. Where ties are used
straps cannot pass through a wall they should
to connect piers to walls they should be flat,
be adequately secured to the masonry using
20mm x 3mm in cross section, be in stainless
suitable fixings. Isolated columns should also
steel in accordance with paragraph 2C19, be
be tied to the roof structure (see Diagram 19).
placed in pairs and be spaced at not more than
300mm centre vertically.
Design provisions
2E2 The following design provisions relate to
foundations:
a. the foundations should be situated centrally
under the wall;
b. for foundations in chemically aggressive
soil conditions guidance in BS 8500-1 and
BRE Special Digest 1 should be followed.
In non-aggressive soils, concrete should
be composed of Portland cement to BS EN
197-1 and -2 and fine and coarse aggregate
conforming to BS EN 12620 and the mix
should comply with one of the following Diagram 22 Piers and chimneys
recommendations:
See para 2E2f
i. in proportion of 50kg of Portland cement
to not more than 200kg (0.1m3) of fine
aggregate and 400kg (0.2m3) of coarse
aggregate; or
ii. grade ST2 or grade GEN I concrete to
BS 8500-2;
c. minimum thickness T of concrete foundation
should be 150mm or P, whichever is the
greater, where P is derived using Table 10
and Diagram 23. Trench fill foundations may
be used as an acceptable alternative to strip
foundations;
d. foundations stepped on elevation should
overlap by twice the height of the step, by Diagram 23 Foundation dimensions
the thickness of the foundation, or 300mm,
whichever is greater (see Diagram 21). See para 2E2c
Type of ground 20 30 40 50 60 70
(including Condition Field test
engineered fill) of ground applicable Minimum width of strip foundations (mm)
I Not inferior to Requires at least a pneumatic In each case equal to the width of wall
Rock sandstone, limestone or other mechanically operated
or firm chalk pick for excavation
II Requires pick for excavation. 250 300 400 500 600 650
Gravel or sand Medium dense Wooden peg 50mm square in cross
section hard to drive beyond 150mm
III Can be indented slightly by thumb 250 300 400 500 600 650
Clay Stiff
Sandy clay Stiff
IV Thumb makes impression easily 300 350 450 600 750 850
Clay Firm
Sandy clay Firm
Re-covering of roofs
4.2 The re-covering of roofs is commonly
undertaken to extend the useful life of buildings.
Roof structures may be required to carry
underdrawing or insulation provided at a time
later than their initial construction. This section
provides guidance on determining whether such
work to a roof constitutes a material alteration
under the Building Regulations.
4.3 Where the work involves a significant
change in the applied loading the structural
integrity of the roof structure and the supporting
structure should be checked to ensure that
upon completion of the work the building is not
less compliant with Requirement A1 than the
original building.
4.4 A significant change in roof loading is
when the loading upon the roof is increased by
more than 15%. Consideration might also be
given to whether the roof covering being replaced
is the original as-built covering.
4.5 Where such checking of the existing roof
structure indicates that the construction is unable
to sustain any proposed increase in loading (e.g.
due to overstressed members or unacceptable
deflection leading to ponding), appropriate
strengthening work or replacement of roofing
members should be undertaken. This is classified
as a material alteration.
4.6 In carrying out the checks mentioned in
paragraph 4.3 an increase of stress in a structural
member arising from increased loading does
not necessarily indicate that the roof structure is
less compliant than the original roof provided an
adequate factor of safety is maintained.
4.7 Where work will significantly decrease
the roof dead loading, the roof structure and its
anchorage to the supporting structure should
be checked to ensure that an adequate factor
of safety is maintained against uplift of the roof
under imposed wind loading.
Disproportionate collapse
A3. The building shall be constructed so that in the event of an accident
the building will not suffer collapse to an extent disproportionate to
the cause.
Introduction
0.1 The guidance in Section 5 deals with the
means of meeting this performance criterion.
2a
Lower Risk Group 5 storey single occupancy houses
Hotels not exceeding 4 storeys
Flats, apartments and other residential buildings not exceeding 4 storeys
Offices not exceeding 4 storeys
Industrial buildings not exceeding 3 storeys
Retailing premises not exceeding 3 storeys of less than 2000m² floor area in each storey
Single-storey educational buildings
All buildings not exceeding 2 storeys to which members of the public are admitted and which contain floor areas
not exceeding 2000m² at each storey
2b
Upper Risk Group Hotels, blocks of flats, apartments and other residential buildings greater than 4 storeys but not exceeding
15 storeys
Educational buildings greater than 1 storey but not exceeding 15 storeys
Retailing premises greater than 3 storeys but not exceeding 15 storeys
Hospitals not exceeding 3 storeys
Offices greater than 4 storeys but not exceeding 15 storeys
All buildings to which members of the public are admitted which contain floor areas exceeding 2000m² but less
than 5000m² at each storey
Car parking not exceeding 6 storeys
3 All buildings defined above as Consequence Class 2a and 2b that exceed the limits on area and/or number
of storeys
Grandstands accommodating more than 5000 spectators
Buildings containing hazardous substances and/or processes
Notes:
1. For buildings intended for more than one type of use the Consequence Class should be that pertaining to the most onerous type.
2. In determining the number of storeys in a building, basement storeys may be excluded provided such basement storeys fulfil the robustness
requirements of Consequence Class 2b buildings.
3. BS EN 1991-1-7:2006 with its UK National Annex also provides guidance that is comparable to Table 11.
B
Fire safety
APPROVED DOCUMENT
Volume 1: Dwellings
Requirement B1: Means of warning and escape
Requirement B2: Internal fire spread (linings)
Requirement B3: Internal fire spread (structure)
Requirement B4: External fire spread
Requirement B5: Access and facilities for the fire service
Regulations: 6(3), 7(2) and 38
User requirements
The approved documents provide technical guidance. Users of the approved documents should
have adequate knowledge and skills to understand and apply the guidance correctly to the building
work being undertaken.
The following is a high level summary of the Building Regulations relevant to most types of
building work. Where there is any doubt you should consult the full text of the regulations,
available at www.legislation.gov.uk.
Building work
Regulation 3 of the Building Regulations defines ‘building work’. Building work includes:
a. the erection or extension of a building
b. the provision or extension of a controlled service or fitting
c. the material alteration of a building or a controlled service or fitting.
Regulation 4 states that building work should be carried out in such a way that, when work is
complete:
a. For new buildings or work on a building that complied with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations: the building complies with the applicable requirements of the Building
Regulations.
b. For work on an existing building that did not comply with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations:
i. the work itself must comply with the applicable requirements of the Building Regulations,
and
ii. the building must be no more unsatisfactory in relation to the requirements than before
the work was carried out.
Notification of work
Most building work and material changes of use must be notified to a building control body unless
one of the following applies.
a. It is work that will be self-certified by a registered competent person or certified by a registered
third party.
b. It is work exempted from the need to notify by regulation 12(6A) of, or Schedule 4 to, the
Building Regulations.
Index 153
Summary
0.1 This approved document has been published in two volumes. Volume 1 deals solely with dwellings,
including blocks of flats, while Volume 2 deals with all other types of building covered by the
Building Regulations.
Arrangement of sections
0.2 Requirements B1–B5 of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations are dealt with separately in one or
more sections. Each requirement is shown at the start of the relevant sections.
0.3 The provisions in this document have the following aims.
Requirement B1: When there is a fire, ensure both:
a. satisfactory means of sounding an alarm
b. satisfactory means of escape for people.
Requirement B2: Inhibit the spread of fire over internal linings of buildings.
Requirement B3: The building must be built such that all of the following are achieved in the event
of a fire:
a. the premature collapse of the building is avoided
b. sufficient fire separation is provided within buildings and between adjoining buildings
c. automatic fire suppression is provided where necessary
d. the unseen spread of fire and smoke in cavities is restricted.
Requirement B4: Restrict both:
a. the potential for fire to spread over external walls and roofs (including compliance with
regulations 6(4) and 7(2))
b. the spread of fire from one building to another.
Requirement B5: Ensure both:
a. satisfactory access for the fire service and its appliances
b. facilities in buildings to help firefighters save the lives of people in and around buildings.
Regulation 38: Provide fire safety information to building owners.
0.4 Guidance is given on each aspect separately, though many are closely interlinked. The document should
be considered as a whole. The relationship between different requirements and their interdependency
should be recognised. Particular attention should be given to the situation where one part of the
guidance is not fully followed, as this could have a negative effect on other provisions.
Management of premises
0.6 The Building Regulations do not impose any requirements on the management of a building, but
do assume that it will be properly managed. This includes, for example, keeping protected escape
routes virtually ‘fire sterile’.
Appropriate fire safety design considers the way in which a building will be managed. Any reliance
on an unrealistic or unsustainable management regime cannot be considered to have met the
requirements of the regulations.
Once the building is in use, the management regime should be maintained and a suitable risk
assessment undertaken for any variation in that regime. Failure to take proper management
responsibility may result in the prosecution of an employer, building owner or occupier under
legislation such as the Regulatory Reform (Fire Safety) Order 2005.
Property protection
0.7 The Building Regulations are intended to ensure a reasonable standard of life safety in a fire.
The protection of property, including the building itself, often requires additional measures.
Insurers usually set higher standards before accepting the insurance risk.
Many insurers use the RISCAuthority Design Guide for the Fire Protection of Buildings by the
Fire Protection Association (FPA) as a basis for providing guidance to the building designer on what
they require.
Further information on the protection of property can be obtained from the FPA website:
www.thefpa.co.uk.
Inclusive design
0.8 The fire safety aspects of the Building Regulations aim to achieve reasonable standards of health
and safety for people in and around buildings.
People, regardless of ability, age or gender, should be able to access buildings and use their
facilities. The fire safety measures incorporated into a building should take account of the needs
of everyone who may access the building, both as visitors and as people who live or work in it. It is
not appropriate, except in exceptional circumstances, to assume that certain groups of people will
be excluded from a building because of its use.
Alternative approaches
0.9 The fire safety requirements of the Building Regulations will probably be satisfied by following the
relevant guidance in this approved document. However, approved documents provide guidance for
some common building situations, and there may be alternative methods of complying with the
Building Regulation requirements.
If alternative methods are adopted, the overall level of safety should not be lower than the
approved document provides. It is the responsibility of those undertaking the work to demonstrate
compliance.
If other standards or guidance documents are adopted, the relevant fire safety recommendations
in those publications should be followed in their entirety. However, in some circumstances it
may be necessary to use one publication to supplement another. Care must be taken when using
supplementary guidance to ensure that an integrated approach is used in any one building.
Guidance documents intended specifically for assessing fire safety in existing buildings often
include less onerous provisions than those for new buildings and are therefore unlikely to be
appropriate for building work that is controlled by the Building Regulations.
Buildings for industrial and commercial activities that present a special fire hazard, e.g. those that
sell fuels, may require additional fire precautions to those in this approved document.
Sheltered housing
0.11 While many of the provisions in this approved document for means of escape from flats are
applicable to sheltered housing, the nature of the occupancy may necessitate some additional fire
protection measures. The extent of such measures will depend on the form of the development.
For example, a group of specially adapted bungalows or two storey flats, with few communal
facilities, will not need to be treated differently from other single storey or two storey
dwellinghouses or flats.
Title Group Purpose for which the building or compartment of a building is intended to be used
Assembly and 5 Place of assembly, entertainment or recreation, including any of the following:
recreation • bingo halls, broadcasting, recording and film studios open to the public, casinos,
dance halls
• entertainment, conference, exhibition and leisure centres
• funfairs and amusement arcades
• museums and art galleries, non-residential clubs, theatres, cinemas, concert halls
• educational establishments, dancing schools, gymnasia, swimming pool buildings,
riding schools, skating rinks, sports pavilions, sports stadia
• law courts
• churches and other buildings of worship, crematoria
• libraries open to the public, non-residential day centres, clinics, health centres and
surgeries
• passenger stations and termini for air, rail, road or sea travel
• public toilets
• zoos and menageries.
Industrial 6 Factories and other premises used for any of the following:
• manufacturing, altering, repairing, cleaning, washing, breaking up, adapting or
processing any article
• generating power
• slaughtering livestock.
Storage and 7(a) Either of the following:
other non-
residential(4) • place (other than described under 7(b)) for the storage or deposit of goods or materials
• any building not within purpose groups 1 to 6.
7(b) Car parks designed to admit and accommodate only cars, motorcycles and passenger
or light goods vehicles that weigh a maximum of 2500kg gross.
NOTES:
This table only applies to Part B.
See Approved Document B Volume 2 for guidance on buildings other than dwellings (purpose groups 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7).
1. Includes live/work units that meet the provisions of paragraph 3.24.
2. Includes any surgeries, consulting rooms, offices or other accommodation that meets all of the following conditions.
a. A maximum of 50m2 in total.
b. Part of a dwellinghouse.
c. Used by an occupant of the dwellinghouse in a professional or business capacity.
3. Where very large (over 18m in height or with a 10m deep basement) or unusual dwellinghouses are proposed,
some of the guidance for buildings other than dwellings may be needed.
4. All of the following are included in purpose group 1(c).
a. A detached garage a maximum of 40m2 in area.
b. A detached open carport a maximum 40m2 in area.
c. A detached building that consists of a garage and open carport, each a maximum of 40m2 in area.
These sections deal with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Means of warning and escape
B1. The building shall be designed and constructed so that Requirement B1 does not apply to any prison provided
there are appropriate provisions for the early warning under section 33 of the Prison Act 1952(a) (power to
of fire, and appropriate means of escape in case of provide prisons, etc.).
fire from the building to a place of safety outside the
building capable of being safely and effectively used
at all material times.
(a) 1952 c. 52; section 33 was amended by section 100 of
the Criminal Justice and Public Order Act 1994 (c. 33) and
by S.I. 1963/597.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B1 is met by achieving all of the following.
a. There are sufficient means for giving early warning of fire to people in the building.
b. All people can escape to a place of safety without external assistance.
c. Escape routes are suitably located, sufficient in number and of adequate capacity.
d. Where necessary, escape routes are sufficiently protected from the effects of fire and smoke.
e. Escape routes are adequately lit and exits are suitably signed.
f. There are appropriate provisions to limit the ingress of smoke to the escape routes, or to
restrict the spread of fire and remove smoke.
g. For buildings containing flats, there are appropriate provisions to support a stay put evacuation
strategy.
The extent to which any of these measures are necessary is dependent on the use of the building,
its size and its height.
Building work and material changes of use subject to requirement B1 include both new and existing
buildings.
General provisions
1.1 All dwellings should have a fire detection and alarm system, minimum Grade D2 Category LD3
standard, in accordance with the relevant recommendations of BS 5839-6.
A higher standard of protection should be considered where occupants of a proposed dwelling
would be at special risk from fire. Further advice on this is also given in BS 5839-6.
1.2 Smoke alarms should be mains operated and conform to BS EN 14604.
1.3 Heat alarms should be mains operated and conform to BS 5446-2.
1.4 Smoke and heat alarms should have a standby power supply, such as a battery (rechargeable
or non-rechargeable) or capacitor. More information on power supplies is given in clause 15 of
BS 5839-6.
NOTE: The term ‘fire alarm system’ describes the combination of components for giving an audible
and/or other perceptible warning of fire.
NOTE: In this document, the term ‘fire detection system’ describes any type of automatic sensor
network and associated control and indicating equipment. Sensors may be sensitive to smoke,
heat, gaseous combustion products or radiation. Automatic sprinkler systems can also be used to
operate a fire alarm system.
Large dwellinghouses
1.5 A large dwellinghouse has more than one storey, and at least one storey exceeds 200m2.
1.6 A large dwellinghouse of two storeys (excluding basement storeys) should be fitted with a Grade A
Category LD3 fire detection and alarm system, as described in BS 5839-6.
1.7 A large dwellinghouse of three or more storeys (excluding basement storeys) should be fitted with
a Grade A Category LD2 fire detection and alarm system as described in BS 5839-6.
Student accommodation
1.11 In student residences that are designed and occupied as a block of flats, separate automatic
detection should be provided in each self-contained flat where all of the following apply.
a. A group of up to six students shares the flat.
b. Each flat has its own entrance door.
c. The compartmentation principles for flats in Section 7 have been followed.
Where a total evacuation strategy is adopted, the alarm system should follow the guidance for
buildings other than dwellings in Volume 2 of Approved Document B.
Sheltered housing
1.12 The fire detection and alarm systems in flats should connect to a central monitoring point or alarm
receiving centre. The systems should alert the warden or supervisor and identify the individual flat
where a fire has been detected.
1.13 These provisions do not apply to the following.
a. The common parts of a sheltered housing development, such as communal lounges.
b. Sheltered accommodation in the 'residential (institutional)' or 'residential (other)' purpose groups
(purpose group 2(a) or 2(b)).
In these parts, means of warning should follow the guidance for buildings other than dwellings in
Volume 2 of Approved Document B.
Interface between fire detection and alarm systems and other systems
1.15 Fire detection and alarm systems sometimes trigger other systems. The interface between systems
must be reliable. Particular care should be taken if the interface is facilitated via another system.
Where any part of BS 7273 applies to the triggering of other systems, the recommendations of that
part of BS 7273 should be followed.
Dwellinghouses with one storey more than 4.5m above ground level
2.5 See Diagram 2.1c. The dwellinghouse should have either of the following.
a. Protected stairway – a stair separated by fire resisting construction (minimum REI 30) at all
storeys, that complies with one of the following.
i. Extends to a final exit (Diagram 2.2a).
ii. Gives access to a minimum of two ground level final exits that are separated from each
other by fire resisting construction (minimum REI 30) and fire doorsets (minimum E 20)
(Diagram 2.2b).
Cavity barriers or a fire resisting ceiling (minimum EI 30) should be provided above a protected
stairway enclosure (Diagram 2.3).
Unoccupied
a. b. space
4.5m max.
Escape via entrance hall. Escape via entrance hall.
Inner rooms provided with Inner rooms provided with
escape windows or doors. escape windows or doors.
Unoccupied
c. d. space
4.5m
Direction of escape
Protected stairway (minimum REI 30)
Note: This diagram must be read in conjunction with all of the relevant guidance given in section 2.
Diagram 2.1 Means of escape from dwellinghouses
a. b.
Final exit
Protected Fire resisting
stairway Fd construction
Fd Fd minimum REI 30
Fd
Fd Protected Final exit Fd Fire doorset
Fd
stairway minimum E 20
Final exit
SeeSee
para 2.52.5
para
4.5m
Protected Protected
stairway stairway
Dwellinghouses with two or more storeys more than 4.5m above ground level
2.6 See Diagram 2.1d. In addition to meeting the provisions in paragraph 2.5, the dwellinghouse should
comply with either of the following.
a. Provide an alternative escape route from each storey more than 7.5m above ground level. At the
first storey above 7.5m, the protected stairway should be separated from the lower storeys by
fire resisting construction (minimum REI 30) if the alternative escape route is accessed via either
of the following.
i. The protected stairway to an upper storey.
ii. A landing within the protected stairway enclosure to an alternative escape route on
the same storey. The protected stairway at or about 7.5m above ground level should be
separated from the lower storeys or levels by fire resisting construction (see Diagram 2.4).
b. Provide a sprinkler system throughout, designed and installed in accordance with BS 9251.
Example of
alternative exit Storey
in para 2.6(a) over 7.5m
(see definition in
Appendix A)
Fire resisting
construction
7.5m
minimum REI 30
4.5m
Fire door
Diagram 2.4 Fire separation in a dwellinghouse with two or more storeys more than 4.5m above
ground level
Passenger lifts
2.7 A passenger lift serving any storey more than 4.5m above ground level should be in either of the
following.
a. The enclosure to the protected stairway, as described in paragraph 2.5.
b. A fire resisting lift shaft (minimum REI 30).
See para
See2.10
para 2.10
Where escape from a
dwellinghouse is to an
Equal Mean roof level Enclosure to enclosed space with exit
space e.g. a only possible through other
Equal wall, fence, buildings (e.g. a courtyard or
building back garden), the length of
x min.
the space should exceed
whichever is the greater
x of the following.
Inner rooms
2.11 An inner room is permitted when it is one of the following.
a. A kitchen.
b. A laundry or utility room.
c. A dressing room.
d. A bathroom, WC or shower room.
e. Any room on a storey that is a maximum of 4.5m above ground level which is provided with an
emergency escape window as described in paragraph 2.10.
f. A gallery that complies with paragraph 2.15.
Galleries
2.15 A gallery should comply with one of the following.
a. It should be provided with an alternative exit.
b. It should be provided with an emergency escape window, as described in paragraph 2.10, where
the gallery floor is a maximum of 4.5m above ground level.
c. It should meet all the conditions shown in Diagram 2.6.
NOTES:
Basements
2.16 Basement storeys containing habitable rooms should have one of the following.
a. An emergency escape window or external door providing escape from the basement
(paragraph 2.10).
b. A protected stairway (paragraph 2.5a) leading from the basement to a final exit.
1100mm
zone 1800mm zone
above of fire resisting
top construction at
landing side of stairway
6m max.
height
without Fire doorset
weather (minimum E 30)
protection
Ground
level
Fire resisting window
(minimum RE 30)
Loft conversions
2.21 Where a new storey is added through conversion to create a storey above 4.5m, both of the
following should apply.
a. The full extent of the escape route should be addressed.
b. Fire resisting doors (minimum E 20) and partitions (minimum REI 30) should be provided,
including upgrading the existing doors where necessary.
NOTE: Where the layout is open plan, new partitions should be provided to enclose the escape
route (Diagram 2.2).
2.22 Where it is undesirable to replace existing doors because of historical or architectural merit, the
possibility of retaining, and where necessary upgrading, them should be investigated.
2.23 An alternative approach to that described in paragraph 2.21 would be to comply with all of the
following.
a. Provide sprinkler protection to the open-plan areas.
b. Provide a fire resisting partition (minimum REI 30) and door (minimum E 20) to separate the
ground storey from the upper storeys. The door should allow occupants of the loft room
access to a first storey escape window.
c. Separate cooking facilities from the open-plan area with fire resisting construction (minimum
REI 30).
Introduction
3.1 Separate guidance applies to means of escape within the flat and within the common parts of the
building that lead to a place of safety. Flats at ground level are treated similarly to dwellinghouses.
With increasing height, more complex provisions are needed.
3.2 The provisions in this section make the following assumptions.
a. Any fire is likely to be in a flat.
b. There is no reliance on external rescue.
c. Simultaneous evacuation of all flats is unlikely to be necessary due to compartmentation.
d. Fires in common parts of the building should not spread beyond the fabric in the immediate
vicinity. In some cases, however, communal facilities exist that require additional measures to be
taken.
3.3 Provisions are recommended to support a stay put evacuation strategy for blocks of flats. It is
based on the principle that a fire is contained in the flat of origin and common escape routes are
maintained relatively free from smoke and heat. It allows occupants, some of whom may require
assistance to escape in the event of a fire, in other flats that are not affected to remain.
Sufficient protection to common means of escape is necessary to allow occupants to escape
should they choose to do so or are instructed/aided to by the fire service. A higher standard of
protection is therefore needed to ensure common escape routes remain available for a longer
period than is provided in other buildings.
3.4 Paragraphs 3.6 to 3.23 deal with the means of escape within each flat. Paragraphs 3.25 to 3.89
deal with the means of escape in common areas of the building (including mixed use buildings in
paragraphs 3.76 and 3.77). Guidance for live/work units is given in paragraph 3.24.
General provisions
Mixed use buildings
3.5 In mixed use buildings, separate means of escape should be provided from any storeys or parts
of storeys used for the ‘residential’ or ‘assembly and recreation’ purpose groups (purpose groups
1, 2 and 5), other than in the case of certain small buildings or buildings in which the residential
accommodation is ancillary (see paragraphs 3.76 and 3.77)
Inner rooms
3.7 An inner room is permitted when it is one of the following.
a. A kitchen.
b. A laundry or utility room.
c. A dressing room.
d. A bathroom, WC or shower room.
e. Any room on a storey that is a maximum of 4.5m above ground level which is provided with
an emergency escape window as described in paragraph 3.6.
f. A gallery that complies with paragraph 3.13.
3.8 A room accessed only via an inner room (an inner inner room) is acceptable when all of the
following apply.
a. It complies with paragraph 3.7.
b. The access rooms each have a smoke alarm (see Section 1).
c. None of the access rooms is a kitchen.
Basements
3.9 Basement storeys containing habitable rooms should have one of the following.
a. An emergency escape window or external door providing escape from the basement (see
paragraph 3.6).
b. A protected stairway (minimum REI 30) leading from the basement to a final exit.
NOTES:
Fd
Fd
9m max.
Diagram 3.2 Flat where all habitable rooms have direct access to an entrance hall
.
ax
ma
m
9m
x.
Diagram 3.3 Flat with restricted travel distance from furthest point to entrance
Bedroom Bedroom
Bedroom Bath
Fd
Kitchen
Fd Fire doorset
Fire resisting construction (minimum REI 30)
between living and bedroom accommodation
Alternative exit
Flat entrance
Diagram 3.4 Flat with an alternative exit, but where all habitable rooms have no direct access
to an entrance hall
9m max.
Bathroom
Diagram 3.5 Multi-storey flat with alternative exits from each habitable room, except at
entrance level
Fd
Protected Fd Fd
landing
Fd
Protected
Fd entrance hall
Fd Fire doorset
NOT Fire resisting stair enclosure
ENTRANCE ENTRANCE (minimum REI 30)
WC
LEVEL LEVEL Alternative exit
Diagram 3.6 Multi-storey flat with protected entrance hall and landing
Live/work units
3.24 For flats serving as a workplace for both occupants and people who do not live on the premises,
provide both of the following.
a. A maximum travel distance of 18m between any part of the working area and either of the
following.
i. The flat entrance door.
ii. An alternative means of escape that is not a window.
If the travel distance is over 18m, the assumptions in paragraph 3.2 may not be valid. The design
should be considered on a case-by-case basis.
b. Escape lighting to windowless accommodation in accordance with BS 5266-1.
F F F F
F F F F
F Flat
Shaded areas indicate zones where ventilation should be
F F provided in accordance with paragraphs 3.50 to 3.53
(An external wall vent or smoke shaft located anywhere
in the shaded area)
F F F F F F F
Fd
F F F F F F F
30m max.
F F F F F F F
Fd
F F F F F F F
NOTES:
F F 1. The arrangements shown also apply to the top storey.
7.5m max. 2. For further guidance on the fire rating of the fire
doorsets from the corridor to the flat and/or stairway
refer to Appendix C, Table C1.
F Fd F F
F Flat
Fd Fire doorset
Shaded areas indicate zones where ventilation should be
F Fd F F provided in accordance with paragraphs 3.50 to 3.53
(An external wall vent or smoke shaft located anywhere
in the shaded area)
F F
F F
Fd F
Fd
Fd
Fd
* OV
4.5m
Fd
Fd
F
F Fd
F
NOTES:
F 1. The arrangements shown also apply to the top storey.
Fd 2. If the travel distance across the lobby in diagram (a) exceeds
4.5m, Diagram 3.7 applies.
Fd OV 3. Where, in Diagram (b), the lobby between the common stair and
the dwelling is omitted in small single stair buildings, an
automatic opening vent with a free area of at least 1m2 is required
Fd F at the top of the stair, which is operated automatically on
detection of smoke at any storey in the stair.
4. For further guidance on the fire rating of the fire doorsets from
b. SMALL SINGLE STAIR BUILDING the corridor to the flat and/or stairway refer to Appendix C,
WITH NO MORE THAN TWO FLATS Table C1.
PER STOREY
The door between stair and lobby should be
free from security fastenings. Fire resisting construction
OV Openable vent at high level for fire service use (1.0m2 minimum
If the flats have protected entrance halls, the free area); see paragraph 3.28e
lobby between the common stair and flat F Flat
entrance is not essential. Fd Fire doorset
Common stairs
Number of common stairs
3.59 A building should provide access to more than one common stair if it does not meet the criteria
for a single common stair (see paragraph 3.26 and 3.27).
Accommodation Accommodation
1800mm min. Fire resisting construction
of adjacent building enclosure
Fire resisting construction
1800mm 1800mm of protected stairway
Stair min. Stair min.
Non-fire resisting construction
Accommodation Accommodation
Configuration A Configuration B
No fire resistance
required for door
EXAMPLE a.
Fire resisting
window (minimum RE 30)
1100mm
zone above
top landing 1800mm zone
m
of fire resisting
1.8
construction at
side of stair
EXAMPLE b.
1100mm
zone above
top landing
6m maximum
1.8m height of stair
without weather
protection
m
1.8
9m zone of
fire resisting
construction
below stair
Ground level or
a roof or podium
served by an
independent
stairway
SECTION A–A SECTION B–B
B B
1.8m
1.8m
PLAN A
3.68 Any external escape stair should meet all of the following conditions (Diagram 3.11).
a. Doors to the stair should be fire resisting (minimum E 30) and be fitted with a self-closing
device, except for a single exit door from the building to the top landing of a downward-
leading external stair, provided it is the only door onto the landing.
Basement stairs
3.71 If a building does not meet the criteria of paragraph 3.28, an escape stair forming part of the only
escape route from an upper storey should not continue down to serve a basement storey. The
basement storey should be served by a separate escape stair.
3.72 Where multiple escape stairs serve the upper storeys, only one needs to end at ground level. Other
stairs may connect with the basement storeys if there is a protected lobby or a protected corridor
between the stairs and accommodation at each basement level.
Single steps
3.84 Single steps on escape routes should be prominently marked. A single step on the line of a
doorway is acceptable, subject to paragraph 3.107.
Fixed ladders
3.85 Fixed ladders should not be provided as a means of escape for members of the public. They should
only be provided where a conventional stair is impractical, such as for access to plant rooms which
are not normally occupied.
Door fastenings
3.91 In general, doors on escape routes (whether or not the doors are fire doorsets) should be either of
the following.
a. Not fitted with a lock, latch or bolt fastenings.
b. Fitted only with simple fastenings that are all of the following.
Direction of opening
3.94 The door of any doorway or exit should be hung to open in the direction of escape whenever
reasonably practicable. It should always be hung to open in the direction of escape if more than 60
people might be expected to use it during a fire.
Lifts
Fire protection of lift installations
3.99 Lift wells should comply with one of the following conditions.
a. Be sited within the enclosures of a protected stairway.
b. Be enclosed with fire resisting construction (minimum REI 30) when in a position that might
prejudice the means of escape.
3.100 A lift well connecting different compartments should form a protected shaft (see Section 7).
3.101 In buildings designed for phased evacuation or progressive horizontal evacuation, if the lift well is
not within the enclosures of a protected stairway, its entrance should be separated at every storey
by a protected lobby (minimum REI 30).
3.102 In basements and enclosed car parks, the lift should be within the enclosure of a protected
stairway. Otherwise, the lift should be approached only via a protected lobby or protected corridor
(minimum REI 30).
3.103 If a lift delivers into a protected corridor or protected lobby serving sleeping accommodation and
also serves a storey containing a high fire risk (such as a kitchen, communal areas, stores, etc.) then
the lift should be separated from the high fire risk area(s) by a protected lobby or protected corridor
(minimum REI 30).
3.104 A lift shaft serving storeys above ground level should not serve any basement, if either of the
following applies.
a. There is only one escape stair serving storeys above ground level and smoke from a basement
fire would adversely affect escape routes in the upper storeys.
b. The lift shaft is within the enclosure to an escape stair that terminates at ground level.
3.105 Lift machine rooms should be sited over the lift well where possible. Where buildings or part of a
building with only one stairway make this arrangement impractical, the lift machine room should
be sited outside the protected stairway.
This section deals with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (linings)
B2. (1) To inhibit the spread of fire within the building,
the internal linings shall—
(a) adequately resist the spread of flame over
their surfaces; and
(b) have, if ignited, either a rate of heat release
or a rate of fire growth, which is reasonable in
the circumstances.
(2) In this paragraph “internal linings” means the
materials or products used in lining any partition,
wall, ceiling or other internal structure.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B2 is met by achieving a restricted spread of flame
over internal linings. The building fabric should make a limited contribution to fire growth,
including a low rate of heat release.
It is particularly important in circulation spaces, where linings may offer the main means by which
fire spreads and where rapid spread is most likely to prevent occupants from escaping.
Requirement B2 does not include guidance on the following.
a. Generation of smoke and fumes.
b. The upper surfaces of floors and stairs.
c. Furniture and fittings.
Classification of linings
4.1 The surface linings of walls and ceilings should meet the classifications in Table 4.1.
Walls
4.2 For the purposes of this requirement, a wall includes both of the following.
a. The internal surface of internal and external glazing (except glazing in doors).
b. Any part of a ceiling which slopes at an angle greater than 70 degrees to the horizontal.
4.3 For the purposes of this requirement, a wall does not include any of the following.
a. Doors and door frames.
b. Window frames and frames in which glazing is fitted.
c. Architraves, cover moulds, picture rails, skirtings and similar narrow members.
d. Fireplace surrounds, mantle shelves and fitted furniture.
4.4 Parts of walls in rooms may be of lower performance than stated in Table 4.1, but no worse than
class D-s3, d2. In any one room, the total area of lower performance wall lining should be less than
an area equivalent to half of the room’s floor area, up to a maximum of 20m2 of wall lining.
Ceilings
4.5 For the purposes of this requirement, a ceiling includes all of the following.
a. Glazed surfaces.
b. Any part of a wall at 70 degrees or less to the horizontal.
c. The underside of a gallery.
d. The underside of a roof exposed to the room below.
Rooflights
4.7 Rooflights should meet the following classifications, according to material. No guidance for
European fire test performance is currently available, because there is no generally accepted test
and classification procedure.
a. Non-plastic rooflights should meet the relevant classification in Table 4.1.
b. Plastic rooflights, if the limitations in Table 4.2 and Table 12.2 are observed, should be a
minimum class D-s3, d2 rating. Otherwise they should meet the relevant classification in
Table 4.1.
Special applications
4.8 Any flexible membrane covering a structure, other than an air-supported structure, should comply
with Appendix A of BS 7157.
4.9 Guidance on the use of PTFE-based materials for tension-membrane roofs and structures is given in
the BRE report BR 274.
Windows
4.13 Thermoplastic material classified as a TP(a) rigid product may be used to glaze external windows to
rooms, but not external windows to circulation spaces. Approved Document K includes guidance
on the safety of glazing.
Rooflights
4.14 In rooms and circulation spaces other than protected stairways, rooflights may be constructed of
thermoplastic material if they comply with both of the following.
a. The lower surface is classified as TP(a) rigid or TP(b).
b. The size and location of the rooflights follow the limits in Table 4.2, Table 12.2 and Table 12.3.
Lighting diffusers
4.15 The following paragraphs apply to lighting diffusers forming part of a ceiling. Diffusers may be part
of a luminaire or used below sources of light. The following paragraphs do not apply to diffusers of
light fittings attached to the soffit of a ceiling or suspended beneath a ceiling (Diagram 4.1).
a. DIFFUSER FORMING PART OF CEILING b. DIFFUSER IN FITTING BELOW AND NOT FORMING
PART OF CEILING
Ceiling
Ceiling
4.16 Diffusers constructed of thermoplastic material may be incorporated in ceilings to rooms and
circulation spaces, but not to protected stairways, if both the following conditions are met.
a. Except for the upper surfaces of the thermoplastic panels, wall and ceiling surfaces exposed in
the space above the suspended ceiling should comply with paragraph 4.1.
b. Diffusers should be classified as one of the following.
i. TP(a) rigid – no restrictions on their extent.
ii. TP(b) – limited in their extent (see Table 4.2 and Diagram 4.2).
5m max.
Rooflight or
diffuser
NOTES:
Diagram 4.2 Layout restrictions on class D-s3, d2 plastic rooflights, TP(b) rooflights and TP(b)
lighting diffusers
dimension x
x min.
y min.
x min. y min.
dimension x
dimension y
Ceiling plan
Materials within this zone – at plane of ceiling – should comply with Table 4.1
Rooflights
Diagram 4.3 Layout restrictions on small class D-s3, d2 plastic rooflights, TP(b) rooflights and
lighting diffusers
These sections deal with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (structure)
B3. (1) The building shall be designed and constructed
so that, in the event of fire, its stability will be
maintained for a reasonable period
(2) A
wall common to two or more buildings shall be
designed and constructed so that it adequately
resists the spread of fire between those buildings.
For the purposes of this sub-paragraph a house in
a terrace and a semi-detached house are each to
be treated as a separate building.
(3) Where
reasonably necessary to inhibit the spread Requirement B3(3) does not apply to material alterations
of fire within the building, measures shall be to any prison provided under section 33 of the Prison Act
taken, to an extent appropriate to the size and 1952.
intended use of the building, comprising either or
both of the following—
(a) sub-division
of the building with fire-resisting
construction;
(b) installation
of suitable automatic fire
suppression systems.
(4) The building shall be designed and constructed so that
the unseen spread of fire and smoke within concealed
spaces in its structure and fabric is inhibited.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B3 is met by achieving all of the following.
a. For defined periods, loadbearing elements of structure withstand the effects of fire without
loss of stability.
b. Compartmentation of buildings by fire resisting construction elements.
c. Automatic fire suppression is provided where it is necessary.
d. Protection of openings in fire-separating elements to maintain continuity of the fire separation.
e. Inhibition of the unseen spread of fire and smoke in cavities, in order to reduce the risk of
structural failure and spread of fire and smoke, where they pose a threat to the safety of people
in and around the building.
The extent to which any of these measures are necessary is dependent on the use of the building
and, in some cases, its size, and on the location of the elements of construction.
Roof covering over this distance to be designated BROOF(t4) rated on deck of material
of class A2-s3, d2 or better. Roof covering and deck could be composite structure,
e.g. profiled steel cladding.
1500mm 1500mm
Double-skinned insulated roof sheeting should incorporate a band of material rated
class A2-s3, d2 or better, a minimum of 300mm in width, centred over the wall.
If roof support members pass through the wall, fire protection to these members
for a distance of 1500mm on either side of the wall may be needed to delay
distortion at the junction (see paragraph 5.9).
Boarding (used as a substrate) or timber tiling battens may be carried over the
wall provided that they are fully bedded in mortar (or other no less suitable
X
material) where over the wall.
1500mm 1500mm Double-skinned insulated roof sheeting with a thermoplastic core should
incorporate a band of material of class A2-s3, d2 at least 300mm wide centred
over the wall.
If roof support members pass through the wall, fire protection to these
members for a distance of 1500mm on either side of the wall may be needed to
Wall delay distortion at the junction (see paragraph 5.9).
Roofing battens and sarking felt may be carried over the wall.
NOTES:
1. Fire-stopping should be carried over the full thickness of the wall.
2. Fire-stopping should be extended into any eaves.
3 . The compartment wall does not necessarily need to be constructed of masonry.
At least The wall should be extended up through the roof for a height of at least
375mm At least
375mm 375mm above the top surface of the adjoining roof covering.
Roof
covering Where there is a height difference of at least 375 mm between two roofs or
Roof covering where the roof coverings on either side of the wall are BROOF(t4) rated, the
height of the upstand/parapet wall above the highest roof may be reduced to
Wall 200mm.
Diagram 5.3 Cavity walls excluded from provisions for cavity barriers
Additional guidance
6.3 If a loadbearing wall is any of the following, guidance in other sections may also apply.
a. A compartment wall (including a wall common to two buildings): Section 7.
b. Enclosing a place of special fire hazard: Section 7.
c. Protecting a means of escape: Sections 2 and 3.
d. An external wall: Sections 10 and 11.
e. Enclosing a firefighting shaft: Section 15.
6.4 If a floor is also a compartment floor, see Section 7.
Provision of compartmentation
7.1 All of the following should be provided as compartment walls and compartment floors and should
have, as a minimum, the fire resistance given in Appendix B, Table B3.
a. Any floor and wall separating a flat from another part of the building.
b. Any wall enclosing a refuse storage chamber.
c. Any wall common to two or more buildings.
Sprinklers
7.4 Blocks of flats with a top storey more than 11m above ground level (see Diagram D6) should be
fitted with a sprinkler system throughout the building in accordance with Appendix E.
NOTE: Sprinklers should be provided within the individual flats, they do not need to be provided in
the common areas such as stairs, corridors or landings when these areas are fire sterile.
Openings in compartmentation
Openings in compartment walls separating buildings or occupancies
7.19 Openings in a compartment wall common to two or more buildings should be limited to those for
either of the following.
a. A fire doorset providing a means of escape, which has the same fire resistance as the wall and is
fitted in accordance with the provisions in Appendix C.
b. The passage of a pipe that complies with the provisions in Section 9.
Protected shafts
7.21 Stairs and service shafts connecting compartments should be protected to restrict the spread of
fire between the compartments. These are called protected shafts. Walls or floors surrounding a
protected shaft are considered to be compartment walls or compartment floors.
The diagram shows three common examples which illustrate the principles. The elements enclosing the shaft (unless
formed by adjacent external walls) are compartment walls and floors.
Compartment wall
Fd Fd
External wall Fd Fd
Fd Fire doorset
The shaft structure (including any openings) should meet the relevant provisions for:
compartment walls (see paragraphs 7.5 to 7.19), external walls (see sections 10 and 11 and Diagram 3.10).
Protected Protected
shaft shaft
Corridor Lobby
Glazed Glazed
screen screen
Diagram 7.2 Uninsulated glazed screen separating protected shaft from lobby or corridor
8.1 Cavities in the construction of a building provide a ready route for the spread of smoke and flame,
which can present a greater danger as any spread is concealed. For the purpose of this document, a
cavity is considered to be any concealed space.
Cavity barrier
at top of cavity
Wall forming
Cavity barrier
protected Accommodation
around edges
escape route(1)
Sub-divide
extensive cavities
Accommodation
Compartment wall
Diagram 8.2 Cavity walls excluded from provisions for cavity barriers
NOTE:
Roof or floor cavity The ceiling should meet the following conditions.
a. Provide a minimum fire resistance of EI 30.
b. Be imperforate, except for an opening described in paragraph 5.24.
Ceiling surface/product exposed to c. Extend throughout the building or compartment.
cavity – class C-s3, d2 or better d. Not be easily demountable.
Arrangement A Arrangement B
Acceptable without cavity barriers Cavity barriers necessary
Cavity barrier
Insulation
The insulation should make contact with both skins of sheeting. See also Diagram 5.2a regarding the need for fire-stopping
where such roofs pass over the top of a compartment wall.
Diagram 8.4 Provisions for cavity barriers in double-skinned insulated roof sheeting
Introduction
9.1 The performance of a fire-separating element should not be impaired. Every joint, imperfect fit and
opening for services should be sealed. Fire-stopping delays the spread of fire and, generally, the
spread of smoke as well.
Alternative C: Sleeving
9.5 A pipe with a maximum nominal internal diameter of 160mm may be used with a sleeve made out
of a high melting point metal, as shown in Diagram 9.2, if the pipe is made of one of the following.
a. Lead.
b. Aluminium.
c. Aluminium alloy.
d. Fibre-cement.
e. uPVC (pipes should also comply with either BS 4514 or BS 5255).
A high melting point metal means any metal (such as cast iron, copper or steel) which, if exposed
to a temperature of 800°C, will not soften or fracture to the extent that flame or hot gas will pass
through the wall of the pipe.
Structure
Pipe specification (b) Sleeve (or pipe) 2. See Table 9.1 for materials specification.
of specification (a)
to be in contact 3. The sleeve should be class A1 rated.
with pipe
Protected lobby
Ductwork
serving area
Fd Fire doorset
Ductwork
serving area
Fd
Diagram 9.3 Ductwork passing through protected escape routes – method 2 or method 3
SeeSee
parapara
9.169.16
Protected stairway
Fd
Protected lobby
Fd
Smoke detection system in accordance with
SD
BS 5839-1 to activate ES damper
SD SD
Ductwork Ductwork Fd Fire doorset
serving area serving
area
Flues, etc.
9.23 The wall of a flue, duct containing flues or appliance ventilation duct(s) should have a fire
resistance (REI) that is at least half of any compartment wall or compartment floor it passes
through or is built into (Diagram 9.5).
Compartment
wall or floor
Flue wall
Flue walls should have a fire resistance of at least In each case flue walls should have a fire resistance of at least
one half of that required for the compartment wall one half of that required for the compartment wall and be of
or floor and be of class A1 construction. class A1 construction.
These sections deal with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010. Section 10 also refers to regulation 7(2) of the Building Regulations 2010.
Guidance on regulation 7(1) can be found in Approved Document 7.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
External fire spread
B4. (1) The external walls of the building shall adequately
resist the spread of fire over the walls and from
one building to another, having regard to the
height, use and position of the building.
(2) The
roof of the building shall adequately resist
the spread of fire over the roof and from one
building to another, having regard to the use and
position of the building.
Regulation
Regulation 7 – Materials and workmanship
(1) Building work shall be carried out—
(a) with adequate and proper materials which—
(i) are
appropriate for the circumstances in which
they are used,
(ii) are adequately mixed or prepared, and
(iii) are applied, used or fixed so as adequately
to perform the functions for which they are
designed; and
(b) in a workmanlike manner.
(2) Subject
to paragraph (3), building work shall be
carried out so that materials which become part
of an external wall, or specified attachment, of a
relevant building are of European Classification
A2-s1, d0 or A1, classified in accordance with BS EN
13501-1:2007+A1:2009 entitled “Fire classification
of construction products and building elements.
Classification using test data from reaction to fire
tests” (ISBN 978 0 580 59861 6) published by the
British Standards Institution on 30th March 2007 and
amended in November 2009.
Intention
Resisting fire spread over external walls
The external envelope of a building should not contribute to undue fire spread from one part of a
building to another part. This intention can be met by constructing external walls so that both of
the following are satisfied.
a. The risk of ignition by an external source to the outside surface of the building and spread of
fire over the outside surface is restricted.
b. The materials used to construct external walls, and attachments to them, and how they are
assembled do not contribute to the rate of fire spread up the outside of the building.
The extent to which this is necessary depends on the height and use of the building.
Introduction
10.1 The external wall of a building should not provide a medium for fire spread if that is likely to be a
risk to health and safety. Combustible materials and cavities in external walls and attachments to
them can present such a risk, particularly in tall buildings. The guidance in this section is designed
to reduce the risk of vertical fire spread as well as the risk of ignition from flames coming from
adjacent buildings.
Fire resistance
10.2 This section does not deal with fire resistance for external walls. An external wall may need fire
resistance to meet the requirements of Section 3 (Means of escape – flats), Section 6 (Loadbearing
elements of structures – flats) or Section 11 (Resisting fire spread from one building to another).
External surfaces
10.5 The external surfaces (i.e. outermost external material) of external walls should comply with the
provisions in Table 10.1. The provisions in Table 10.1 apply to each wall individually in relation to its
proximity to the relevant boundary.
Additional considerations
10.14 The provisions of regulation 7 apply in addition to requirement B4. Therefore, for buildings
described in regulation 7(4), the potential impact of any products incorporated into or onto the
external walls and specified attachments should be carefully considered with regard to their
number, size, orientation and position.
Introduction
11.1 The following assumptions enable a reasonable standard of resistance to the spread of fire to
be specified.
a. The size of a fire depends on the compartmentation within the building. A fire may involve a
complete compartment, but will not spread to other compartments.
b. The intensity of a fire is related to the building use, but can be moderated by a sprinkler system.
c. Fires in ‘residential’ and ‘assembly and recreation’ buildings (purpose groups 1, 2 and 5) represent
a greater risk to life.
d. A building on the far side of the relevant boundary meets both of the following conditions.
i. Has a similar elevation to the one in question.
ii. Is the same distance as the one in question from the common boundary.
e. The radiated heat passing through any part of the fire resisting external wall may be discounted.
11.2 Where regulation 7(2) applies, that regulation prevails over the provisions within this section.
11.3 If a reduced separation distance between buildings, or increased amount of unprotected area, is
required, smaller compartments should be considered.
Boundaries
11.4 The fire resistance of a wall depends on its distance from the relevant boundary (see Diagram
11.1). Separation distances are measured to boundaries to ensure that the location and design of
buildings on adjoining sites have no influence on the building under consideration.
11.5 The boundary that a wall faces is the relevant boundary (Diagram 11.2). It may be one of
the following.
a. The site boundary.
b. The centre line of a space where further development is unlikely, such as a road, railway, canal
or river.
c. An assumed notional boundary between two buildings on the same site (Diagram 11.3) where
either of the following conditions is met.
i. One or both of the buildings are in the ‘residential’ or ‘assembly and recreation’ purpose
groups (purpose group 1, 2 or 5).
ii. The buildings will be operated/managed by different organisations.
Wall on or very close to the Wall not on, or not very close Wall sufficiently distant from
relevant boundary: very limited to, but not sufficiently far from relevant boundary to be a
amounts of unprotected area relevant boundary that it can be a 100% unprotected area
wholly unprotected area
Relevant boundary
Amount of unprotected
area dependent on distance
from relevant boundary
NOTES:
This boundary is at less than
80 degrees to side C and is therefore This diagram sets out the rules
relevant to side C that apply in respect of a
boundary for it to be
considered as a relevant
boundary.
< 80°
For a boundary to be relevant
it should comply with one of
the following:
C
This boundary
This boundary coincides is parallel to a. Coincide with the side of
with and is therefore A Building B1 and therefore the building (A).
relevant to side A relevant to b. Be parallel to the side of the
side B1 building (B1 or B2).
B2 c. Be at an angle of maximum
80 degrees to the side
The boundary is of the building (C).
parallel to side B2
Site
boundary
Compliance with the provisions for Compliance with the provisions for
space separation in respect of building A space separation in respect of building B
NOTES:
The notional boundary should be set in the area between the two buildings using the following rules:
1. The notional boundary is assumed to exist in the space between the buildings and is positioned so that one of the buildings would
comply with the provisions for space separation having regard to the amount of its unprotected area. In practice, if one of the
buildings is existing, the position of the boundary will be set by the space separation factors for that building.
2. The siting of the new building, or the second building if both are new, can then be checked to see that it also complies, using the
notional boundary as the relevant boundary for the second building.
External walls on, and within 1000mm of, the relevant boundary
11.8 Unprotected areas should meet the conditions in Diagram 11.5, and the rest of the wall should be
fire resisting from both sides.
External surface materials facing the boundary should be class B-s3, d2 or better.
Diagram 11.4 Status of materials achieving class B-s3, d2 or worse as unprotected area
b b
a
b b The unprotected area
b b
of the external wall
of a stairway forming
a protected shaft
b may be disregarded
a for separation
distance purposes
Compartment Compartment
floor wall
Dimensional restrictions
Represents an unprotected area of not
more than 1m2 which may consist of a 4000mm minimum distance
two or more smaller areas within an
b 1500mm minimum distance
area of 1000mm1000mm
Diagram 11.5 Small unprotected areas that may be disregarded in assessing the separation
distance from the boundary
Canopies
11.12 Where both of the following apply, separation distances may be determined from the wall rather
than from the edge of the canopy (Diagram 11.6).
a. The canopy is attached to the side of a building.
b. The edges of the canopy are a minimum of 2m from the relevant boundary.
Canopies that fall within class 6 or class 7 of Schedule 2 to the regulations (Exempt Buildings and
Work) are exempt from the Building Regulations.
11.13 Space separation may be disregarded if a canopy is all of the following.
a. Free-standing.
b. Above a limited risk or controlled hazard.
c. A minimum of 1000mm from the relevant boundary.
NOTE: Projections from the building line, such as a canopy or a loading platform, can be ignored when
assessing separation distance. This does not apply where the canopy is enclosed by side walls.
Roofs
11.14 Roofs with a pitch of more than 70 degrees to the horizontal should be assessed in accordance
with this section. Vertical parts of a pitched roof, such as dormer windows, should be included
only if the slope of the roof exceeds 70 degrees.
It is a matter of judgement whether a continuous run of dormer windows that occupies most of a
steeply pitched roof should be treated as a wall rather than a roof.
Portal frames
11.15 Portal frames are often used in single storey industrial and commercial buildings where there may
be no need for fire resistance of the structure (requirement B3). However, where a portal framed
building is near a relevant boundary, the external wall near the boundary may need fire resistance
to restrict the spread of fire between buildings. It is generally accepted that a portal frame acts
as a single structural element because of the moment-resisting connections used, especially at
the column/rafter joints. Thus, in cases where the external wall of the building cannot be wholly
unprotected, the rafter members of the frame, as well as the column members, may need to be fire
protected. The design method for this is set out in SCI Publication P313.
NOTE: The recommendations in the SCI publication for designing the foundation to resist
overturning do not need to be followed if the building is fitted with a sprinkler system in
accordance with Appendix E.
NOTE: Normally, portal frames of reinforced concrete can support external walls requiring a similar
degree of fire resistance without specific provision at the base to resist overturning.
NOTE: Existing buildings may have been designed to comply with all of the following guidance,
which is also acceptable.
Method 1
11.17 This method applies to small buildings intended to be used for blocks of flats or dwellinghouses.
11.18 The building should not exceed three storeys in height (excluding basements) or 24m in length.
Each side of the building should meet the limits stated in Diagram 11.7. Any small unprotected areas
falling within the limits shown in Diagram 11.5 can be ignored.
SeeSee
para 11.1811.18
para
24m max.
Minimum distance (a) Maximum total area of
between side of building unprotected areas (m2)
and relevant boundary (m)
1 5.6
2 12
3 18
a
4 24
5 30
6 No limit
Relevant boundary
Method 2
11.19 This method may be used for buildings or compartments for which method 1 is not appropriate.
11.20 The building should not exceed 10m in height. Each side of the building should meet the limits
stated in Table 11.1. Any areas falling within the limits shown in Diagram 11.5 can be ignored.
Sprinkler systems
11.21 If a building is fitted throughout with a sprinkler system in accordance with Appendix E, either of
the following is permitted.
a. The boundary distance can be halved, to a minimum distance of 1m.
b. The amount of unprotected area can be doubled.
Introduction
12.1 ‘Roof covering’ describes one or more layers of material, but not the roof structure as a whole.
12.2 Provisions for the fire properties of roofs are given in other parts of this document.
a. Requirement B1 – for roofs that are part of a means of escape.
b. Requirement B2 – for the internal surfaces of rooflights as part of internal linings.
c. Requirement B3 – for roofs that are used as a floor and for roofs passing over a compartment wall.
d. Section 11 – the circumstances in which a roof is subject to the provisions for space separation.
Separation distances
12.3 Separation distance is the minimum distance from the roof, or part of the roof, to the relevant
boundary (paragraph 11.4). Table 12.1 sets out separation distances by the type of roof covering and
the size and use of the building.
In addition, roof covering products (and/or materials) defined in Commission Decision 2000/553/
EC of 6 September 2000, implementing Council Directive 89/106/EEC, can be considered to fulfil
all of the requirements for the performance characteristic ‘external fire performance’ without the
need for testing, provided that any national provisions on the design and execution of works are
fulfilled, and can be used without restriction.
12.4 The performance of rooflights is specified in a similar way to the performance of roof coverings.
Plastic rooflights may also be used.
Plastic rooflights
12.5 Table 12.2 and Diagram 12.1 set the limitations for using plastic rooflights whose lower surface has a
minimum class D-s3, d2 rating.
12.6 Table 12.3 sets the limitations for using thermoplastic materials with a TP(a) rigid or TP(b) (see also
Diagram 12.1) classification. The method of classifying thermoplastic materials is given in Appendix B.
12.7 Other than for the purposes of Diagram 5.2, polycarbonate or uPVC rooflights achieving a minimum
rating of class C-s3, d2 can be regarded as having a BROOF(t4) classification.
Rooflight*
max. area 5m2
3m minimum
between any * Or group of rooflights amounting to no more than 5m2
two rooflights
in any direction
NOTES:
Diagram 12.1 Limitations on spacing and size of plastic rooflights that have a class D-s3, d2 or
TP(b) lower surface
These sections deal with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Access and facilities for the fire service
B5. (1) The building shall be designed and constructed
so as to provide reasonable facilities to assist fire
fighters in the protection of life.
(2) Reasonable provision shall be made within the site
of the building to enable fire appliances to gain
access to the building.
Intention
Provisions covering access and facilities for the fire service are to safeguard the health and safety of
people in and around the building. Their extent depends on the size and use of the building. Most
firefighting is carried out within the building. In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B5 is met
by achieving all of the following.
a. External access enabling fire appliances to be used near the building.
b. Access into and within the building for firefighting personnel to both:
i. search for and rescue people
ii. fight fire.
c. Provision for internal fire facilities for firefighters to complete their tasks.
d. Ventilation of heat and smoke from a fire in a basement.
If an alternative approach is taken to providing the means of escape, outside the scope of this
approved document, additional provisions for firefighting access may be required. Where deviating
from the general guidance, it is advisable to seek advice from the fire and rescue service as early as
possible (even if there is no statutory duty to consult).
SeeSee para
para 13.413.4
Fire and rescue service vehicles should not have to reverse more than 20m from the end of an access road.
Building Exit
20m max.
Introduction
14.1 Fire mains are installed for the fire and rescue service to connect hoses for water. They may be
either of the following.
a. The ‘dry’ type, which are both of the following.
i. Normally kept empty.
ii. Supplied through a hose from a fire and rescue service pumping appliance.
b. The ‘wet’ type, which are both of the following.
i. Kept full of water.
ii. Supplied by pumps from tanks in the building.
There should be a facility to replenish a wet system from a pumping appliance in an emergency.
See paras
See15.2, 15.815.2,
paras and15.8
15.9and 15.9
7.5m
max.
Firefighting Firefighting
lift in lift in
lift shaft lift shaft
Minimum fire resistance REI 60 from both sides with E 30 Sa fire doors
NOTES:
1. Outlets from a fire main should be located in the firefighting 3. A firefighting lift is required if the building has a floor more
lobby or, in the case of a shaft serving flats, in the firefighting than 18m above, or more than 10m below, fire service vehicle
stairway (see Diagram b). access level.
2. Smoke control should be provided in accordance with BS 9999 4. This diagram is only to illustrate the basic components and is
or, where the firefighting shaft only serves flats, the provisions not meant to represent the only acceptable layout. The
for smoke control given in paragraph 3.49 may be followed firefighting shaft should be constructed generally in
instead. accordance with section 6 of BS 9999.
5. For the minimum fire resistance of lift doors see Table C1.
Fire
service
vehicle
access
level
Two or more
basement storeys
each exceeding
900m2
> 10m
NOTES:
F F F
60
m
Without sprinklers
c.
Floor plan within 60m hose laying distance of fire main outlet
4 5m
Floor plan within 45m hose laying distance of fire main outlet
F Hose reach
F Fire main outlet in firefighting shaft
d. e.
F H F F
45m
NOTES:
1. Hose laying distance should be measured from the fire main outlet along the route suitable for laying hose.
If this route is not known, the distance should be taken at two-thirds of the direct distance
External External
wall wall
Basement Basement
This section deals with the following regulation of the Building Regulations 2010.
Intention
The aim of this regulation is to ensure that the person responsible for the building has sufficient
information relating to fire safety to enable them to manage the building effectively. The aim of
regulation 38 will be achieved when the person responsible for the building has all the information
to enable them to do all of the following.
a. Understand and implement the fire safety strategy of the building.
b. Maintain any fire safety system provided in the building.
c. Carry out an effective fire risk assessment of the building.
17.1 For building work involving the erection or extension of a relevant building (i.e. a building to which
the Regulatory Reform (Fire Safety) Order 2005 applies, or will apply), or the relevant change of
use of a building, fire safety information should be given to the responsible person at one of the
following times.
a. When the project is complete.
b. When the building or extension is first occupied.
17.2 This section is a guide to the information that should be provided. Guidance is in terms of essential
information and additional information for complex buildings; however, the level of detail required
should be considered on a case-by-case basis.
Essential information
17.3 Basic information on the location of fire protection measures may be sufficient. An as-built plan of
the building should be provided showing all of the following.
a. Escape routes – this should include exit capacity (i.e. the maximum allowable number of people
for each storey and for the building).
b. Location of fire-separating elements (including cavity barriers in walk-in spaces).
c. Fire doorsets, fire doorsets fitted with a self-closing device and other doors equipped with
relevant hardware.
d. Locations of fire and/or smoke detector heads, alarm call points, detection/alarm control
boxes, alarm sounders, fire safety signage, emergency lighting, fire extinguishers, dry or wet fire
mains and other firefighting equipment, and hydrants outside the building.
e. Any sprinkler systems, including isolating valves and control equipment.
f. Any smoke control systems, or ventilation systems with a smoke control function, including
mode of operation and control systems.
g. Any high risk areas (e.g. heating machinery).
17.4 Details should be provided of all of the following.
a. Specifications of fire safety equipment provided, including routine maintenance schedules.
b. Any assumptions regarding the management of the building in the design of the fire safety
arrangements.
c. Any provision enabling the evacuation of disabled people, which can be used when designing
personal emergency evacuation plans.
NOTE: Except for the items marked * (which Basement storey A storey with a floor that, at some
are from the Building Regulations 2010), these point, is more than 1200mm below the highest level
definitions apply only to Approved Document B. of ground beside the outside walls. (However, see
NOTE: The terms defined below are key terms Appendix B, paragraph B26c, for situations where
used in this document only. Refer to BS 4422 for the storey is considered to be a basement only
further guidance on the definitions of common because of a sloping site.)
terms used in the fire safety industry which are Boundary The boundary of the land that belongs to
not listed below. a building, or, where the land abuts a road, railway,
Access room A room that the only escape route canal or river, the centre line of that road, railway,
from an inner room passes through. canal or river.
Alternative escape routes Escape routes that are *Building Any permanent or temporary building
sufficiently separated by direction and space or by but not any other kind of structure or erection. A
fire resisting construction to ensure that one is still reference to a building includes a reference to part
available if the other is affected by fire. of a building.
NOTE: A second stair, balcony or flat roof which Building control body A term that includes both
enables a person to reach a place free from danger local authority building control and approved
from fire is considered an alternative escape route inspectors.
for the purposes of a dwellinghouse. Cavity A space enclosed by elements of a building
Alternative exit One of two or more exits, each of (including a suspended ceiling) or contained within
which is separate from the other. an element, but that is not a room, cupboard,
circulation space, protected shaft, or space within a
Appliance ventilation duct A duct to deliver flue, chute, duct, pipe or conduit.
combustion air to a gas appliance.
Cavity barrier A construction within a cavity, other
Atrium (plural atria) A continuous space that passes than a smoke curtain, to perform either of the
through one or more structural floors within a following functions.
building, not necessarily vertically.
• Close a cavity to stop smoke or flame entering.
NOTE: Enclosed lift wells, enclosed escalator wells,
building services ducts and stairs are not classified • Restrict the movement of smoke or flame
as atria. within a cavity.
Automatic release mechanism A device that Ceiling Part of a building that encloses a room,
normally holds a door open, but closes it protected shaft or circulation space and is exposed
automatically if any one of the following occurs. overhead.
• Smoke is detected by an automatic device of a NOTE: The soffit of a rooflight, but not the frame,
suitable nature and quality in a suitable location. is included as part of the surface of the ceiling. An
upstand below a rooflight is considered as a wall.
• A hand-operated switch, fitted in a suitable
position, is operated. Circulation space A space (including a protected
stairway) mainly used as a means of access
• The electricity supply to the device, apparatus between a room and an exit from the building or
or switch fails. compartment.
• The fire alarm system, if any, is operated.
NOTE: A dwelling is a unit where one or more *External wall The external wall of a building
people live (whether or not as a sole or main includes all of the following.
residence) in either of the following situations. • Anything located within any space forming
• A single person or people living together as a part of the wall.
family. • Any decoration or other finish applied to any
• A maximum of six people living together as external (but not internal) surface forming part
a single household, including where care is of the wall.
provided for residents. • Any windows and doors in the wall.
*Dwellinghouse Does not include a flat or a • Any part of a roof pitched at an angle of more
building containing a flat. than 70 degrees to the horizontal if that part
of the roof adjoins a space within the building
to which persons have access, but not access
only for the purpose of carrying out repairs or
maintenance.
Perimeter (of a building) The maximum aggregate Purpose group A classification of a building
plan perimeter, found by vertical projection onto according to the purpose to which it is intended
a horizontal plane. (See Section 15 of Approved to be put. (See Table 0.1.)
Document B Volume 2.) Relevant boundary The boundary or notional
Pipe Includes pipe fittings and accessories. The boundary that one side of the building faces and/
definition of ‘pipe’ excludes a flue pipe and a or coincides with, and that is parallel or at an
pipe used for ventilating purposes, other than angle of a maximum of 80 degrees to that side of
a ventilating pipe for an above-ground drainage the building.
system. Rooflight A dome light, lantern light, skylight,
Place of special fire hazard A room such as any of ridge light, glazed barrel vault or other element to
the following. admit daylight through a roof.
a. Open fronted.
b. Separated from the remainder of
the building by a compartment
wall(s) and floor(s) having not less
than the period of fire resistance
specified in Table B4 in Appendix B.
Introduction
B1 Much of the guidance in this document is given in terms of performance classifications in relation
to British or European Standards. In such cases, it will be necessary to demonstrate that a system
or product can meet the relevant performance classification. This will be achieved if the system or
product complies with one of the following.
a. They should be in accordance with a specification or design that has been shown by a specific
test to be capable of meeting that performance classification.
b. They should have been designed by using relevant design standards in order to meet that
performance classification.
c. They should have been assessed by applying relevant test evidence, in lieu of carrying out a
specific test, as being capable of meeting that performance classification.
NOTE: Some products are subject to Classification Without Further Testing (CWFT). For the
purposes of this approved document, such products can be considered to have been shown to be
capable of meeting a performance specification as per paragraph B1a.
B2 Any test evidence used to demonstrate the fire performance classification of a product or system
should be carefully checked to ensure that it is applicable to the intended use. Small differences
in detail, such as fixing method, joints, dimensions, the introduction of insulation materials and air
gaps (ventilated or not), can significantly affect the performance.
B3 Assessments should not be regarded as a way to avoid a test where one is necessary. Assessments
should only be carried out where sufficient relevant test evidence is available. Relevant test
evidence is unlikely to be provided by test standards which have different classification criteria.
B4 Where it is proposed to assess the classification of a product or system in lieu of carrying out a
specific test (as in paragraph B1b), this should be done in accordance with the relevant standard for
extended application for the test in question and should include details of the test evidence that
has been used to support the assessment.
For performance classifications where there is no specific standard for extended application,
assessment reports should be produced in accordance with the principles of BS EN 15725 and
should include details of the test evidence that has been used to support the assessment. Further
information on best practice is provided in the Passive Fire Protection Federation’s Guide to
Undertaking Assessments in Lieu of Fire Tests.
NOTE: Regulation 7(2) limits components used in or on the external walls of certain buildings to
materials achieving class A2-s1, d0 or class A1 (see Section 10). Assessments cannot be used to
demonstrate compliance with this requirement.
B5 Tests and assessments should be carried out by organisations with the necessary expertise. For
example, organisations listed as ‘notified bodies’ in accordance with the European Construction
Reaction to fire
B6 Reaction to fire relates to the degree to which a product will contribute, by its own
decomposition, to a fire under specified conditions. Products, other than floorings, are classified
as A1, A2, B, C, D, E or F (with class A1 being the highest performance and F being the lowest) in
accordance with BS EN 13501-1. Class F is assigned when a product fails to attain class E. Untested
products cannot be classified in accordance with BS EN 13501-1.
Materials covered by the Classification Without Further Testing (CWFT) process can be found by
accessing the European Commission’s website https://eur-lex.europa.eu/.
B7 The classes of reaction to fire performance of A2, B, C, D and E are accompanied by additional
classifications related to the production of smoke (s1, s2, s3), with s1 indicating the lowest
production, and/or flaming droplets/particles (d0, d1, d2), with d0 indicating the lowest
production.
NOTE: When a classification includes s3, d2 this means that there is no limit set for smoke
production and/or flaming droplets/particles.
B8 To reduce the testing burden on manufacturers, BS EN 13238 defines a number of standard
substrates that produce test results representative of different end use applications. The
classification for reaction to fire achieved during testing is only valid when the product is used
within this field of application, i.e. when the product is fixed to a substrate of that class in its
end use. The standard substrate selected for testing should take account of the intended end use
applications (field of application) of the product and represent end use substrates that have a
density of a minimum of 75% of the standard substrate’s nominal density.
B9 Standard substrates include gypsum plasterboard (BS EN 520) with a density of 700+/-100kg/m3,
calcium silicate board (BS EN 14306) 870+/-50kg/m3 and fibre-cement board 1800+/-200kg/m3.
NOTE: Standard calcium silicate board is not representative of gypsum plasterboard end use (due
to the paper layer), but would be representative of most gypsum plasters (with densities of more
than 650kg/m3).
NOTE: Classifications based on tests using a plasterboard substrate would also be acceptable for
products bonded to a gypsum plaster end use substrate.
NOTE: The national classifications do not automatically equate with the transposed classifications
in the ‘BS EN 13501-1 classification’ column, therefore products cannot typically assume a European
class unless they have been tested accordingly.
NOTE: A classification of s3, d2 indicates that no limit is set for production of smoke and/or
flaming droplets/particles. If a performance for production of smoke and/or flaming droplets/
particles is specified, then only the European classes can be used. For example, a national class may
not be used as an alternative to a classification which includes s1, d0.
Thermoplastic materials
B11 Thermoplastic material is any synthetic polymeric material that has a softening point below 200°C
if tested to BS EN ISO 306 Method A120. Products formed from these materials cannot always be
classified in the normal way. In those circumstances the following approach can be followed.
B12 Thermoplastic materials used for window glazing, rooflights and lighting diffusers within suspended
ceilings do not need to meet the criteria within paragraph B19 onwards, if the guidance to
requirements B2 and B4 is followed.
Roofs
B15 Performance of the resistance of roofs to external fire exposure is measured in terms of
penetration through the roof construction and the spread of flame over its surface.
B16 Roof constructions are classified within the European system as BROOF(t4), CROOF(t4), DROOF(t4),
EROOF(t4) or FROOF(t4) in accordance with BS EN 13501-5. BROOF(t4) indicates the highest performance
and FROOF(t4) the lowest.
B17 BS EN 13501-5 refers to four separate roof tests. The suffix (t4) used in paragraph B16 indicates that
Test 4 is to be used for the purposes of this approved document.
NOTE: The national classifications do not automatically equate with the transposed classifications
in the European column, therefore products cannot typically assume a European class unless they
have been tested accordingly.
Fire resistance
B19 Common to all of the provisions of Part B of the Building Regulations is the property of fire
resistance. Fire resistance is a measure of one or more of the following.
a. Resistance to collapse (loadbearing capacity), which applies to loadbearing elements only,
denoted R in the European classification of the resistance to fire performance.
b. Resistance to fire penetration (integrity), denoted E in the European classification of the
resistance to fire performance.
c. Resistance to the transfer of excessive heat (insulation), denoted I in the European
classification of the resistance to fire performance.
B20 The standards of fire resistance necessary for a particular building are based on assumptions about
the severity of fires and the consequences should an element fail. Fire severity is estimated in very
broad terms from the use of the building (its purpose group), on the assumption that the building
contents (which constitute the fire load) are similar for buildings with the same use.
B21 Because the use of buildings may change, a precise estimate of fire severity based on the fire load
due to a particular use may be misleading. Therefore if a fire engineering approach of this kind is
adopted, the likelihood that the fire load may change in the future needs to be considered.
B22 Performance in terms of the fire resistance to be achieved by elements of structure, doors and
other forms of construction is classified in accordance with one of the following.
a. BS EN 13501-2.
b. BS EN 13501-3.
c. BS EN 13501-4.
B23 Fire resistance is measured in minutes. This relates to time elapsed in a standard test and should
not be confused with real time.
B24 The fire resistance necessary for different circumstances is set out in the following tables.
Table B3 Specific provisions of the test for fire resistance of elements of structure, etc.
Part of building Minimum Alternative minimum provisions when tested to Type of
provisions when the relevant part of BS 476(2) (minutes) exposure
tested to the Loadbearing Integrity Insulation
relevant European capacity(3)
standard
(minutes)(1)
1. Structural frame, R see Table B4 See Table B4 Not applicable Not applicable Exposed faces
beam or column.
2. Loadbearing wall R see Table B4 See Table B4 Not applicable Not applicable Each side
(which is not also separately
a wall described in
any of the following
items).
3. Floors(4)
a. between a shop and REI 60 or 60 min or 60 min or 60 min or From
flat above see Table B4 see Table B4 see Table B4 see Table B4 underside(5)
(whichever is (whichever is (whichever is (whichever is
greater) greater) greater) greater)
b. in upper storey R 30 and REI 15 30 min 15 min 15 min From
of two storey underside(5)
dwellinghouse (but
not over garage or
basement)
c. any other floor REI see Table B4 See Table B4 See Table B4 See Table B4 From
– including underside(5)
compartment floors.
4. Roofs
a. any part forming an REI 30 30 min 30 min 30 min From
escape route underside(5)
b. any roof that REI see Table B4 See Table B4 See Table B4 See Table B4 From
performs the underside(5)
function of a floor.
– with sprinkler system(3) 60 min 60 min 30 min† 30 min† 30 min† 60 min 120 min‡
4. Shop and commercial:
– without sprinkler 90 min 60 min 60 min 60 min 60 min 90 min Not
system permitted(6)
– with sprinkler system(3) 60 min 60 min 30 min† 60 min 60 min 60 min 120 min‡
5. Assembly and
recreation:
– without sprinkler 90 min 60 min 60 min 60 min 60 min 90 min Not
system permitted(6)
– with sprinkler system(3) 60 min 60 min 30 min† 60 min 60 min 60 min 120 min‡
6. Industrial:
– without sprinkler 120 min 90 min 60 min 90 min 90 min 120 min Not
system permitted(6)
– with sprinkler system(3) 90 min 60 min 30 min† 60 min 60 min 90 min 120 min‡
7. Storage and other non-
residential:
a. any building or part not
described elsewhere:
– without sprinkler 120 min 90 min 60 min 90 min 90 min 120 min Not
system permitted(6)
– with sprinkler system(3) 90 min 60 min 30 min† 60 min 60 min 90 min 120 min‡
C1 All fire doorsets should have the performance shown in Table C1, based on one of the following.
a. Fire resistance in terms of integrity, for a period of minutes, when tested to BS 476-22, e.g. FD 30.
A suffix (S) is added for doorsets where restricted smoke leakage at ambient temperatures is
needed.
b. As determined with reference to Commission Decision 2000/367/EC regarding the
classification of the resistance to fire performance of construction products, construction
works and parts thereof. All fire doorsets should be classified in accordance with BS EN 13501-2,
tested to the relevant European method from the following.
i. BS EN 1634-1.
ii. BS EN 1634-2.
iii. BS EN 1634-3.
c. As determined with reference to European Parliament and Council Directive 95/16/EC (which
applies to lifts that permanently serve buildings and constructions and specified safety
components) on the approximation of laws of Member States relating to lifts (‘Lifts Directive’)
implementing the Lifts Regulations 1997 (SI 1997/831) and calling upon the harmonised standard
BS EN 81-58.
C2 The performance requirement is in terms of integrity (E) for a period of minutes. An additional
classification of Sa is used for all doors where restricted smoke leakage at ambient temperatures is
needed.
C3 The requirement is for test exposure from each side of the doorset separately. The exception is lift
doors, which are tested from the landing side only.
C4 Any test evidence used to verify the fire resistance rating of a doorset or shutter should be
checked to ensure both of the following.
a. It adequately demonstrates compliance.
b. It is applicable to the complete installed assembly. Small differences in detail may significantly
affect the rating.
Until relevant harmonised product standards are published, for the purposes of meeting the
Building Regulations, products tested in accordance with BS EN 1634-1 (with or without pre-fire test
mechanical conditioning) that achieve the minimum performance in Table C1 will be deemed to
satisfy the provisions.
C5 All fire doorsets, including to flat entrances and between a dwellinghouse and an integral garage,
should be fitted with a self-closing device, except for all of the following.
a. Fire doorsets to cupboards.
b. Fire doorsets to service ducts normally locked shut.
c. Fire doorsets within flats and dwellinghouses.
Occupant number
D1 The number of occupants of a room, storey, building or part of a building is either of the following.
a. The maximum number of people it is designed to hold.
b. In buildings other than dwellings, the number of people calculated by dividing the area of
a room or storey(s) (m2) by a floor space factor (m2 per person) such as given in Table D1 for
guidance.
D2 Counters and display units should be included when measuring area. All of the following should
be excluded.
a. Stair enclosures.
b. Lifts.
c. Sanitary accommodation.
d. Any other fixed part of the building structure.
Width
D4 Width is measured according to the following.
a. For a door (or doorway), the clear width when the door is open (Diagram D1).
b. For an escape route, either of the following.
i. When the route is defined by walls: the width at 1500mm above finished floor level.
ii. Elsewhere: the minimum width of passage available between any fixed obstructions.
c. For a stair, the clear width between the walls or balustrades. On escape routes and stairs,
handrails and strings intruding into the width by a maximum of 100mm on each side may be
ignored. Rails used for guiding a stair-lift may be ignored, but it should be possible to park the
lift’s chair or carriage in a position that does not obstruct the stair or landing.
Diagram D3 Area
Highest point
of roof slope
Equal Mean roof
level
Lowest point
of roof slope Height of
building
Highest level
of ground
adjacent to Mean ground
outside walls level
Second
floor To count the number of storeys in a building,
or in a separated part of a building, count only at
the position which gives the greatest number and
First exclude any basement storeys.
floor
Ground
floor
Basement
Plant Roof
a. b.
a1 a2 a3 a4 a5
90°
Sprinkler systems
E1 Sprinkler systems installed in buildings can reduce the risk to life and significantly reduce the
degree of damage caused by fire within a building.
E2 Further recommendations for the provision of sprinklers are provided in the following sections:
Volume 1 – Dwellings
Functional Paragraph Title
requirement
B1 2.6 Dwellinghouses with two or more storeys more than 4.5m above ground level
B1 2.23 Loft conversions
B1 3.21 Internal planning of multi-storey flats
B3 Table B4 Minimum periods of fire resistance
B3 7.4 Sprinklers
B4 11.15 Unprotected areas and fire resistance – portal frames
B4 11.21 Methods for calculating acceptable unprotected area – sprinkler systems
B5 15.7 Provision of firefighting shafts
BS 5839-1 Code of practice for system design, BS 8414-1 Test method for non-loadbearing
installation, commissioning and maintenance of external cladding systems applied to the
systems in non-domestic premises [2017] masonry face of a building [2015 + A1 2017]
BS 5839-2 Specification for manual call points BS 8414-2 Test method for non-loadbearing
[1983] external cladding systems fixed to and
supported by a structural steel frame [2015 + A1
BS 5839-3 Specification for automatic release 2017]
mechanisms for certain fire protection
equipment [1988] BS 8519 Selection and installation of fire-resistant
power and control cable systems for life safety and
BS 5839-6 Code of practice for the design, fire-fighting applications. Code of practice [2010]
installation, commissioning and maintenance
of fire detection and fire alarm systems in BS 9251 Fire sprinkler systems for domestic and
domestic premises [2019] residential occupancies. Code of practice [2014]
BS 5839-8 Code of practice for the design, BS 9252 Components for residential sprinkler
installation, commissioning and maintenance of systems. Specification and test methods for
voice alarm systems [2013] residential sprinklers [2011]
BS 5839-9 Code of practice for the design, BS 9990 Non automatic fire-fighting systems in
installation, commissioning and maintenance of buildings. Code of practice [2015]
emergency voice communication systems [2011] BS 9991 Fire safety in the design, management and
BS 5867-2 Fabrics for curtains and drapes. use of residential buildings. Code of practice [2015]
Flammability requirements. Specification [2008] BS 9999 Fire safety in the design, management and
BS 5906 Waste management in buildings. Code of use of buildings. Code of practice [2017]
practice [2005]
Door and Hardware Federation (DHF) and Guild Steel Construction Institute (SCI)
of Architectural Ironmongers (GAI) (https://steel-sci.com)
(www.firecode.org.uk) SCI Publication P288 Fire Safe Design: A New
Hardware for Fire and Escape Doors [2012] Approach to Multi-storey Steel-framed Buildings,
Second Edition [2006]
Door and Shutter Manufacturers’ Association
(DSMA) SCI Publication P313 Single Storey Steel Framed
(www.dhfonline.org.uk) Buildings in Fire Boundary Conditions [2002]
Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Metal Doorsets Timber Research and Development Associations
[2010] (TRADA)
(www.trada.co.uk)
Fire Protection Association (FPA)
(www.thefpa.co.uk) Timber Fire Resisting Doorsets: Maintaining
Performance under the New European Test Standard
RISCAuthority Design Guide for the Fire Protection [2002]
of Buildings [2005]
Football Licensing Authority
(www.flaweb.org.uk/home.php)
Concourses [2006]
Glass and Glazing Federation (GGF)
(www.ggf.org.uk)
A Guide to Best Practice in the Specification and
Use of Fire-resistant Glazed Systems [2011]
RIBA Books
Online: www.architecture.com/ribabooks
Telephone: +44 (0)20 7496 8383
Email: sales@books.architecture.com
ISBN 978-1-914124-02-0
9 781914 124020
The Building Regulations 2010
B
Fire safety
APPROVED DOCUMENT
User requirements
The approved documents provide technical guidance. Users of the approved documents should
have adequate knowledge and skills to understand and apply the guidance correctly to the building
work being undertaken.
The following is a high level summary of the Building Regulations relevant to most types of
building work. Where there is any doubt you should consult the full text of the regulations,
available at www.legislation.gov.uk.
Building work
Regulation 3 of the Building Regulations defines ‘building work’. Building work includes:
a. the erection or extension of a building
b. the provision or extension of a controlled service or fitting
c. the material alteration of a building or a controlled service or fitting.
Regulation 4 states that building work should be carried out in such a way that, when work is
complete:
a. For new buildings or work on a building that complied with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations: the building complies with the applicable requirements of the Building
Regulations.
b. For work on an existing building that did not comply with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations:
i. the work itself must comply with the applicable requirements of the Building Regulations,
and
ii. the building must be no more unsatisfactory in relation to the requirements than before
the work was carried out.
Notification of work
Most building work and material changes of use must be notified to a building control body unless
one of the following applies.
a. It is work that will be self-certified by a registered competent person or certified by a registered
third party.
b. It is work exempted from the need to notify by regulation 12(6A) of, or Schedule 4 to, the
Building Regulations.
Section 8: Compartmentation/sprinklers 65
Provision of compartmentation 65
Sprinklers 69
Construction of compartment walls and compartment floors 69
Openings in compartmentation 72
Protected shafts 72
Section 9: Cavities 76
Provision of cavity barriers 77
Pathways around fire-separating elements 77
Extensive cavities 79
Construction and fixings for cavity barriers 80
Requirement B5: Access and facilities for the fire service 109
Intention 109
Index 168
Summary
0.1 This approved document has been published in two volumes. Volume 1 deals solely with dwellings,
including blocks of flats, while Volume 2 deals with all other types of building covered by the
Building Regulations.
Arrangement of sections
0.2 Requirements B1–B5 of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations are dealt with separately in one or
more sections. Each requirement is shown at the start of the relevant sections.
0.3 The provisions in this document have the following aims:
Requirement B1: When there is a fire, ensure both:
a. satisfactory means of sounding an alarm
b. satisfactory means of escape for people.
Requirement B2: Inhibit the spread of fire over internal linings of buildings.
Requirement B3: The building must be built such that all of the following are achieved in the event
of a fire:
a. the premature collapse of the building is avoided
b. sufficient fire separation is provided within buildings and between adjoining buildings
c. automatic fire suppression is provided where necessary
d. the unseen spread of fire and smoke in cavities is restricted.
Requirement B4: Restrict both:
a. the potential for fire to spread over external walls and roofs (including compliance with
regulations 6(4) and 7(2))
b. the spread of fire from one building to another.
Requirement B5: Ensure both:
a. satisfactory access for the fire service and its appliances
b. facilities in buildings to help firefighters save the lives of people in and around buildings.
Regulation 38: Provide fire safety information to building owners.
0.4 Guidance is given on each aspect separately, though many are closely interlinked. The document
should be considered as a whole. The relationship between different requirements and their
interdependency should be recognised. Particular attention should be given to the situation
where one part of the guidance is not fully followed as this could have a negative effect on other
provisions.
Management of premises
0.6 The Building Regulations do not impose any requirements on the management of a building, but
do assume that it will be properly managed. This includes, for example, keeping protected escape
routes virtually ‘fire sterile’.
Appropriate fire safety design considers the way in which a building will be managed. Any reliance
on an unrealistic or unsustainable management regime cannot be considered to have met the
requirements of the regulations.
Once the building is in use, the management regime should be maintained and a suitable risk
assessment undertaken for any variation in that regime. Failure to take proper management
responsibility may result in the prosecution of an employer, building owner or occupier under
legislation such as the Regulatory Reform (Fire Safety) Order 2005.
Property protection
0.7 The Building Regulations are intended to ensure a reasonable standard of life safety in a fire. The
protection of property, including the building itself, often requires additional measures. Insurers
usually set higher standards before accepting the insurance risk.
Many insurers use the RISCAuthority Design Guide for the Fire Protection of Buildings by the Fire
Protection Association (FPA) as a basis for providing guidance to the building designer on what
they require.
Further information on the protection of property can be obtained from the FPA website:
www.thefpa.co.uk.
Inclusive design
0.8 The fire safety aspects of the Building Regulations aim to achieve reasonable standards of health
and safety for people in and around buildings.
People, regardless of ability, age or gender, should be able to access buildings and use their
facilities. The fire safety measures incorporated into a building should take account of the needs
of everyone who may access the building, both as visitors and as people who live or work in it. It is
not appropriate, except in exceptional circumstances, to assume that certain groups of people will
be excluded from a building because of its use.
Alternative approaches
0.9 The fire safety requirements of the Building Regulations will probably be satisfied by following the
relevant guidance in this approved document. However, approved documents provide guidance for
some common building situations and there may be alternative methods of complying with the
Building Regulations’ requirements.
If alternative methods are adopted, the overall level of safety should not be lower than the approved
document provides. It is the responsibility of those undertaking the work to demonstrate compliance.
If other standards or guidance documents are adopted, the relevant fire safety recommendations
in those publications should be followed in their entirety. However, in some circumstances it
may be necessary to use one publication to supplement another. Care must be taken when using
supplementary guidance to ensure that an integrated approach is used in any one building.
Guidance documents intended specifically for assessing fire safety in existing buildings often
include less onerous provisions than those for new buildings and are therefore unlikely to be
appropriate for building work that is controlled by the Building Regulations.
Buildings for industrial and commercial activities that present a special fire hazard, e.g. those that
sell fuels, may require additional fire precautions to those in this approved document.
Shopping complexes
0.12 Although the guidance in this document may be readily applied to individual shops, shopping
complexes present different escape problems. The design of units within a shopping complex
should be compatible with the fire strategy for the complex as a whole. A suitable approach is
given in Annex E of BS 9999.
Schools
0.14 The design of fire safety in schools is covered by Building Bulletin 100, which should be used.
Building Bulletin 100 contains fire safety provisions that are outside the scope of the Building
Regulations.
Title Group Purpose for which the building or compartment of a building is intended to be used
Residential 2(a) Hospital, home, school or other similar establishment, where people sleep on the
(institutional) premises. The building may be either of the following:
• Living accommodation for, or accommodation for the treatment, care or
maintenance of, either:
– people suffering from disabilities due to illness or old age or other physical or
mental incapacity
– people under the age of 5 years.
• A place of lawful detention.
Residential 2(b) Hotel, boarding house, residential college, hall of residence, hostel or any other
(other) residential purpose not described above.
Title Group Purpose for which the building or compartment of a building is intended to be used
Office 3 Offices or premises used for any of the following and their control:
• administration
• clerical work (including writing, bookkeeping, sorting papers, filing, typing,
duplicating, machine calculating, drawing and the editorial preparation of matter
for publication, police and fire and rescue service work)
• handling money (including banking and building society work)
• communications (including postal, telegraph and radio communications)
• radio, television, film, audio or video recording
• performance (premises not open to the public).
Shop and 4 Shops or premises used for either of the following.
commercial • A retail trade or business (including selling food or drink to the public for
immediate consumption, retail by auction, self-selection and over-the-counter
wholesale trading, the business of lending books or periodicals for gain, the
business of a barber or hairdresser, and the rental of storage space to the public).
• Premises to which the public are invited either:
– to deliver or collect goods in connection with their hire, repair or other
treatment
– (except in the case of repair of motor vehicles) where the public themselves may
carry out such repairs or other treatments.
Assembly and 5 Place of assembly, entertainment or recreation, including any of the following:
recreation • bingo halls, broadcasting, recording and film studios open to the public, casinos,
dance halls
• entertainment, conference, exhibition and leisure centres
• funfairs and amusement arcades
• museums and art galleries, non-residential clubs, theatres, cinemas, concert halls
• educational establishments, dancing schools, gymnasia, swimming pool buildings,
riding schools, skating rinks, sports pavilions, sports stadia
• law courts
• churches and other buildings of worship, crematoria
• libraries open to the public, non-residential day centres, clinics, health centres and
surgeries
• passenger stations and termini for air, rail, road or sea travel
• public toilets
• zoos and menageries.
Industrial 6 Factories and other premises used for any of the following:
• manufacturing, altering, repairing, cleaning, washing, breaking up, adapting or
processing any article
• generating power
• slaughtering livestock.
Title Group Purpose for which the building or compartment of a building is intended to be used
These sections deal with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Means of warning and escape
B1. The building shall be designed and constructed so that Requirement B1 does not apply to any prison provided
there are appropriate provisions for the early warning under section 33 of the Prison Act 1952(a) (power to
of fire, and appropriate means of escape in case of provide prisons, etc.).
fire from the building to a place of safety outside the
building capable of being safely and effectively used
at all material times.
(a) 1952 c. 52; section 33 was amended by section 100 of
the Criminal Justice and Public Order Act 1994 (c. 33)
and by S.I. 1963/597.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B1 is met by achieving all of the following.
a. There are sufficient means for giving early warning of fire to people in the building.
b. All people can escape to a place of safety without external assistance.
c. Escape routes are suitably located, sufficient in number and of adequate capacity.
d. Where necessary, escape routes are sufficiently protected from the effects of fire and smoke.
e. Escape routes are adequately lit and exits are suitably signed.
f. There are appropriate provisions to limit the ingress of smoke to the escape routes, or to
restrict the spread of fire and remove smoke.
The extent to which any of these measures are necessary is dependent on the use of the building,
its size and its height.
Building work and material changes of use subject to requirement B1 include both new and existing
buildings.
General provisions
1.1 All buildings should have arrangements for detecting fire and raising the alarm. In most buildings,
fires are detected by people, either by sight or smell, and therefore often nothing more is needed.
1.2 In some small buildings/premises, the means of raising the alarm may be simple (for example, a
shouted warning). In assessing appropriate solutions, warnings need to be heard and understood
throughout the premises.
Interface between fire detection and alarm systems and other systems
1.17 Fire detection and alarm systems sometimes trigger other systems. The interface between systems
must be reliable. Particular care should be taken if the interface is facilitated via another system.
Where any part of BS 7273 applies to the triggering of other systems, the recommendations of that
part of BS 7273 should be followed.
Introduction
2.1 Means of escape should be provided from any point on a storey to the storey exit, for all types
of building. The general principle is that any person confronted by a fire within a building can turn
away from it and escape safely.
2.2 For small shop, office, industrial, storage and other similar premises, the guidance on small premises
(see section 4) may be followed instead of the provisions in this section, if they meet both of the
following conditions.
a. No storey has an area more than 280m2.
b. There is a maximum of two storeys plus a basement storey.
D
Exit Travel distance in a dead-end condition
should meet all of the following.
A a. Angle ABD should be at least 45 degrees.
Exit 45° min.
b. Distance CBA or CBD (whichever is less)
B should be no more than the maximum travel
distance given for alternative escape routes.
Table 2.2 Minimum number of escape routes and exits from a room, tier or storey
Maximum number of people Minimum number of escape routes/exits
60 1
600 2
More than 600 3
> 45° < 45° Alternative escape routes are not available from D because angle
D ADB is less than 45 degrees (therefore see Diagram 2.1).
C
There is also no alternative escape route from E.
Arrangement A Arrangement B
Exit Exit
Access room
Exit
PS L
L Lift
L S Services, toilets, etc.
Fd S Fd Fd Self-closing E 20 Sa fire doorsets
L Fda Possible alternative position for fire doorset
C Corridor off which accommodation opens
L PS Protected stairway
PS A Accommodation (e.g. office space)
C
Fda
A A
Exit
D
D
D = minimum 2m,
where N is greater
than 60
N = number of
people served
by ground floor
exit
W
Worked example
A ground floor storey exit serving 250 people shares a common final exit with a 1.2m wide stair.
Required final exit width = ((250/2.5) + (1.2360))/80 = 2.150m
Protected corridors
2.24 A corridor serving as part of the means of escape in any of the following circumstances should be
a protected corridor.
a. Every corridor that serves bedrooms.
b. Every dead-end corridor (excluding recesses and extensions a maximum of 2m deep, as shown
in Diagrams 2.7 and 2.8).
c. Any corridor shared by two or more occupancies (paragraph 2.17).
2m max. 2m max.
2m max.
See para 2.24
2m max. 2m max.
Corridor
2m max.
Diagram 2.7 Recesses off corridors
Corridor
2m max.
2m max.
See para 2.24
2m max.
2m max.
Protected Protected
stairway stairway
Example 1 Example 2
Protected Protected
stairway stairway
Example 1 Example 2
Division of corridors
2.26 A corridor providing access to alternative escape routes should be divided by fire doorsets fitted
with a self-closing device (and associated screens) where both of the following apply.
a. It is more than 12m long.
b. It connects two or more storey exits.
The fire doorsets (including any screens) should be approximately mid-way between the two storey
exits. They should safeguard the route from smoke, while considering the layout of the corridor
and any adjacent fire risks.
2.27 For buildings other than dwellings (purpose groups 2 to 7): if a cavity exists above the enclosures to
a corridor as described above (because the enclosures are not carried to full storey height or the
underside of the roof covering at the top storey), the potential for smoke to bypass the enclosure
should be restricted by one of the following methods.
a. Method 1 – Fitting cavity barriers on the line of the enclosure(s) to and across the corridor
(Diagram 2.9).
b. Method 2 – Dividing the storey using fire resisting construction that passes through the line of
the division of the corridor (Diagram 2.9). Any cavity above this division should be fitted with
cavity barriers on the line of division of the storey and the corridor.
c. Method 3 – Enclosing the cavity on the lower side by a fire resisting ceiling that extends
throughout the building, compartment or separated part.
Any door that could provide a path for smoke to bypass the division should be fitted with a self-
closing device (but need not necessarily be fire resisting).
Cavity barrier
Section A Section B
Fire resisting
construction
Cavity barrier
to ceiling
cavity
Cavity barrier
to ceiling
cavity above
fire resisting
Fd sub-division Fd
Cavity barriers
on line of corridor
enclosure to any
Fd cavity above Fd
A A B B
Fire resisting
sub-division.
Any cavity
above to have
cavity barriers
Fd Fd
Fd Fd
Fd
Fd
Fd Fd
Fd
Fd
Fd Fd
Fd Fd
Fd
Fd
Fd
Fd
Protected corridor Fd
Cavity barriers
2.29 Additional measures to safeguard means of escape from smoke are given in Section 10.
Bedrooms
2.42 Each bedroom in a care home should be enclosed in fire resisting construction (minimum REI 30)
with fire resisting doors (minimum E 30). Every corridor serving bedrooms should be a protected
corridor (see paragraph 2.24).
2.43 Bedrooms should not contain more than one single or double bed.
Ancillary accommodation
2.44 Ancillary accommodation such as all of the following should be enclosed by fire resisting
construction (minimum REI 30).
a. Chemical stores.
b. Cleaners’ rooms.
c. Clothes storage.
d. Day rooms.
e. Smoking rooms.
f. Disposal rooms.
g. Plant rooms.
h. Linen stores.
Sprinkler systems
2.46 When a sprinkler system is provided in accordance with Appendix E, the following variations to the
guidance given in paragraphs 2.35 to 2.45 are acceptable.
a. Fire doorsets to bedrooms do not need to be fitted with self-closing devices.
b. Protected areas may contain more than 10 beds.
c. Bedrooms may contain more than one bed.
If any of the variations are made, the management procedures should take account of the larger
number of residents that may need assistance, and the need to manually close bedroom doors
during sleeping hours.
Introduction
3.1 The limits on horizontal travel escape distances mean most people should be able to
independently reach a protected escape route or final exit. The following guidance also includes
measures for people who are unable to use stairs without help.
In larger buildings, some escape stairs may need to serve as firefighting stairs, and Section 17 will
also apply.
Provision of refuges
3.4 Refuges form part of the management plan and offer relatively safe areas for people to wait for a
short period only. Refuges should meet the following conditions.
a. Refuges should be provided on every storey (except ones consisting only of plant rooms) of
each protected stairway providing an exit from that storey.
b. Refuges do not need to be located within the stair enclosure, but should enable direct access
to the stair.
c. The number of refuge spaces does not need to equal the number of wheelchair users who
may be in the building. A single refuge may be occupied by more than one person during the
evacuation procedure.
3.5 The following are both examples of satisfactory refuges.
a. An enclosure such as a compartment (Diagram 3.1), protected lobby, protected corridor or
protected stairway (Diagram 3.2).
b. An area in the open air, such as a flat roof, balcony, podium or similar place, that meets both of
the following.
i. It is protected (or remote) from any fire risk.
ii. It has its own means of escape.
3.6 Refuges should be a minimum of 900mm 1400mm in size and accessible by someone in a
wheelchair. Where sited in a protected stairway, protected lobby or protected corridor, they should
not reduce the width of the escape route or obstruct the flow of people escaping.
3.7 Refuges should be provided with an emergency voice communication (EVC) system complying
with BS 5839-9. It should consist of Type B outstations communicating with a master station in
the building control room (if one exists) or next to the fire detection and alarm panel. In some
buildings, wireless technology may be more appropriate.
3.8 Refuges and evacuation lifts should be clearly identified. In protected lobbies and protected
stairways there should be a blue mandatory sign worded ‘Refuge – keep clear’ in addition to fire
safety signs.
3.9 Paragraph 5.32 gives guidance on using lifts, including evacuation lifts, during a fire.
Storey divided into two refuges by compartment wall (stairways not provided with wheelchair space).
NOTE: People occupying the left-hand compartment would not reach a refuge until they had entered the
right-hand compartment. Two fire doorsets in the partition are necessary in case access to one of the
doorsets is blocked by fire.
Wheelchair space
Discounting of stairs
3.14 Regardless of escape strategy, where two or more stairs are provided, it should be assumed
that one might not be available during a fire. Each stair should be discounted in turn to ensure
the capacity of the remaining stairs is adequate. This applies to buildings with or without a
sprinkler system.
3.15 Paragraph 3.14 does not apply if either of the following applies.
a. Escape stairs are protected by a smoke control system designed in accordance with BS EN 12101-6.
b. Escape stairs are approached on each storey (except the top storey) through a protected lobby.
Despite these exceptions, at least one storey exit still needs to be discounted (paragraph 2.21).
Simultaneous evacuation
3.16 The width of escape stairs should take account of the number of people using them while
evacuating all storeys at the same time. The following stairs should be designed to allow
simultaneous evacuation.
a. All stairs serving basements.
b. All stairs serving buildings with open spatial planning.
c. All stairs serving ‘residential (other)’ (purpose group 2(b)) or ‘assembly and recreation’
(purpose group 5) buildings.
Annexes B and C of BS 9999 include designs based on simultaneous evacuation.
3.17 The capacity of stairs of widths from 1000mm to 1800mm is given in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Capacity of stairs for basements and for simultaneous evacuation of the building
No. of Maximum number of people served by a stair of width:
floors
served
1000mm 1100mm 1200mm 1300mm 1400mm 1500mm 1600mm 1700mm 1800mm
1 150 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360
2 190 260 285 310 335 360 385 410 435
3 230 300 330 360 390 420 450 480 510
4 270 340 375 410 445 480 515 550 585
5 310 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660
6 350 420 465 510 555 600 645 690 735
7 390 460 510 560 610 660 710 760 810
8 430 500 555 610 665 720 775 830 885
9 470 540 600 660 720 780 840 900 960
10 510 580 645 710 775 840 905 970 1035
NOTES:
1. The capacity of stairs that serve more than 10 storeys may be obtained by using linear extrapolation.
2. The capacity of stairs not less than 1100mm wide may also be obtained by using the formulas in paragraph 3.18.
3. Unless a central handrail is provided, stairs with a rise of more than 30m should be a maximum width of 1400mm
(see paragraph 3.10).
4. Stairs wider than 2000mm should have a central handrail (see paragraph 3.11).
3.18 As an alternative to Table 3.2, the capacity of stairs 1100mm wide or wider can be found using
either of the following formulas:
a. P = 200W + 50 (W – 0.3)(N – 1)
b. W = P + 15N – 15 / 150 + 50N
where:
Worked examples
A 14 storey building contains 12 storeys of offices (ground + 11). The top two storeys contain flats
that are served by separate stairs. What is the minimum width needed for the stairs that serve
the office floors, for simultaneous evacuation? In the 11 above-ground-floor offices, 1200 people
use the stairs. (People in the ground floor offices do not use the stairs.) In this example, two
stairs are shown to satisfy the travel distance limitations.
a. The population is distributed evenly
The top office storey is at a height greater than 18m, therefore both stairs need lobby protection
(see paragraph 3.34). Because both stairs are entered at each level via a protected lobby, both
stairs can be assumed to be available (see paragraph 3.15).
P = 1200/2 = 600, N = 11
From the formula:
600 = 200W + 50 (W – 0.3)(11 – 1)
600 = 200W + (50W – 15)(10)
600 = 200W + 500W – 150
750 = 700W
W = 1070mm
Therefore both stairs should be at least 1070mm wide. But this needs to be increased to 1100mm,
because the formula applies to stairs 1100mm wide or wider (see paragraph 3.18).
This width will also be adequate when one storey exit is discounted as described in paragraph
2.21. It also complies with paragraph 3.10a (i.e. the stair widths are not less than the minimum
widths needed for 110 people in Table 2.3).
b. The population is not distributed evenly
(e.g. 1000 people occupy floors 1 to 9, and 200 occupy floors 10 and 11).
The top office storey is at a height greater than 18m, therefore both stairs need lobby protection
(see paragraph 3.34). Because both stairs are entered at each level via a protected lobby, both
stairs can be assumed to be available (see paragraph 3.15).
Phased evacuation
3.19 Phased evacuation cannot be used in every type of building, but can be advantageous for escape
stairs in high buildings. It requires supporting facilities, such as fire detection and alarm systems, to
be provided and maintained.
In a phased evacuation, the first people to be evacuated are those with reduced mobility and those
on the storey most immediately affected by the fire. If needed, subsequent evacuation is done two
floors at a time, reducing disruption in large buildings.
Phased evacuation enables stairs to be narrower than with simultaneous evacuation, and may be
used for any building provided it is not identified in paragraph 3.16.
Single steps
3.26 Single steps on escape routes should be prominently marked. A single step on the line of a
doorway is acceptable, subject to paragraph 5.22.
Fixed ladders
3.28 Fixed ladders should not be provided as a means of escape for members of the public. They should
only be provided where a conventional stair is impractical, such as for access to plant rooms which
are not normally occupied.
Accommodation Accommodation
1800mm min. Fire resisting construction
of adjacent building enclosure
Fire resisting construction
1800mm 1800mm of protected stairway
Stair min. Stair min.
Non-fire resisting construction
Accommodation Accommodation
Configuration A Configuration B
m
of fire resisting
1.8
construction at
side of stair
EXAMPLE b.
1100mm
zone above
top landing
6m maximum
1.8m height of stair
without weather
protection
m
1.8
9m zone of
fire resisting
construction
below stair
Ground level or
a roof or podium
served by an
independent
stairway
SECTION A–A SECTION B–B
B B
1.8m
1.8m
PLAN A
Basement stairs
3.40 An escape stair forming part of the only escape route from an upper storey should not continue
down to serve a basement storey. The basement storey should be served by a separate escape stair.
3.41 Where multiple escape stairs serve the upper storeys, only one needs to end at ground level. Other
stairs may connect with the basement storeys if there is a protected lobby or a protected corridor
between the stairs and accommodation at each basement level.
4.1 A ‘small premises’ is generally limited both in its size and in its number of occupants. When
undivided, all of its parts are likely to be clearly visible to occupants. Occupants of small premises
will be able to reach an exit quickly in an emergency and therefore a reduction in the number of
exits and stairs is acceptable.
This guidance is not applicable to small premises where highly flammable materials are sold, stored
or used.
4.2 Small premises should meet all of the following general conditions.
a. i. It should be single occupancy.
ii. It should not comprise more than a basement storey, ground storey and first storey.
iii. No storey should have a floor area more than 280m2.
b. Any kitchen or other open cooking arrangements should be at the extremity of any dead end
remote from the exits.
c. For a bar or restaurant, the seating or standing accommodation (Table D1) should be planned
for a maximum of 30 people per storey. The seating or standing accommodation for the ground
storey may be planned for 100 people if it has a final exit independent of the stair.
4.3 The following paragraphs only apply in place of those provisions elsewhere in this Approved
Document which relate to the following.
a. The number and position of exits and protected stairways.
b. Measuring distances of travel.
c. Open escape stairs.
For provisions other than those listed above, the guidance elsewhere in this Approved Document
should be followed.
Construction
4.4 Except in kitchens, ancillary offices and stores, floor areas should be undivided so exits are clearly
visible from all parts.
4.5 Store rooms should be enclosed with fire resisting construction (minimum REI 30).
18
x.
m ma
m
ax
18m
Protected
stairway
27
Protected m
ma
stairway x .
Ground storey
NOTE: Maximum floor area in any one storey 280m2. Restricted accommodation if used as a restaurant or bar.
Diagram 4.1 Maximum travel distances in a small two or three storey premises with a single
protected stairway to each storey
18
x.
m
ma
m
ax
18m
.
NOTES:
Basement or first storey 1. Maximum floor area in any one storey 90m2.
x .
ma
m
27
Diagram 4.2 Maximum travel distances in a small three storey premises with a single open stair
Example 1 Example 2
18
x.
m
ma
m
ax
18m
18m
.
.
ax
m
ma
m
x.
18
Protected
stairway
3m max. 3m max.
27 27
m m
Protected ma Protected ma
stairway x . stairway x.
18
x.
m ma
m
ax
18m
18m
.
.
ax
m
ma
m
x.
18
Protected
stairway
Basement Basement
NOTES:
2. Enclosed stair at ground storey level may be from either the basement or the first storey.
Diagram 4.3 Maximum travel distances in a small three storey premises with a single stair to
each storey
Introduction
5.1 This section applies to all buildings and deals with the design, construction and protection of
escape routes and service installations.
Door fastenings
5.7 In general, doors on escape routes (whether or not the doors are fire doorsets) should be either
of the following.
a. Not fitted with a lock, latch or bolt fastenings.
b. Fitted only with simple fastenings that are all of the following.
i. Easy to operate; it should be apparent how to undo the fastening.
Direction of opening
5.11 The door of any doorway or exit should be hung to open in the direction of escape whenever
reasonably practicable. It should always be hung to open in the direction of escape if either of the
following conditions applies.
a. More than 60 people might be expected to use it during a fire.
b. There is a very high risk of fire with potential for rapid fire growth, such as with some
industrial activities.
General provisions
Headroom in escape routes
5.16 Escape routes should have a minimum clear headroom of 2m. The only projections allowed below
this height are door frames.
Final exits
5.20 The width of a final exit should be at least the same as the minimum required width of the escape
route it serves.
Exit signs
5.28 Every doorway or other exit providing access to a means of escape, other than exits in ordinary
use (e.g. main entrances), should be distinctively and conspicuously marked by an exit sign in
accordance with BS ISO 3864-1 and BS 5499-4.
Advice on fire safety signs, including emergency escape signs, is given in the HSE publication Safety
Signs and Signals: Guidance on Regulations.
Some buildings may require additional signs to comply with other legislation.
Lifts
Evacuation lifts
5.32 Generally, lifts should not be used when there is a fire in the building, unless their use forms part
of a management plan for evacuating people and the following conditions are met.
a. Lifts are appropriately sited and protected.
b. Lifts contain safety features to ensure they remain usable during a fire.
Guidance on the design and use of evacuation lifts is given in Annex G to BS 9999.
5.33 Where a firefighting lift is provided, it can be used to evacuate disabled people. Management
plans should describe how this would be managed, and what will happen when the fire and rescue
service arrives.
This section deals with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (linings)
B2. (1) To inhibit the spread of fire within the building,
the internal linings shall—
(a) adequately resist the spread of flame over
their surfaces; and
(b) have, if ignited, either a rate of heat release
or a rate of fire growth, which is reasonable in
the circumstances.
(2) In this paragraph “internal linings” means the
materials or products used in lining any partition,
wall, ceiling or other internal structure.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B2 is met by achieving a restricted spread of flame
over internal linings. The building fabric should make a limited contribution to fire growth,
including a low rate of heat release.
It is particularly important in circulation spaces, where linings may offer the main means by which
fire spreads and where rapid spread is most likely to prevent occupants from escaping.
Requirement B2 does not include guidance on the following.
a. Generation of smoke and fumes.
b. The upper surfaces of floors and stairs.
c. Furniture and fittings.
Classification of linings
6.1 The surface linings of walls and ceilings should meet the classifications in Table 6.1.
Walls
6.2 For the purposes of this requirement, a wall includes both of the following.
a. The internal surface of internal and external glazing (except glazing in doors).
b. Any part of a ceiling which slopes at an angle greater than 70 degrees to the horizontal.
6.3 For the purposes of this requirement, a wall does not include any of the following.
a. Doors and door frames.
b. Window frames and frames in which glazing is fitted.
c. Architraves, cover moulds, picture rails, skirtings and similar narrow members.
d. Fireplace surrounds, mantle shelves and fitted furniture.
6.4 Parts of walls in rooms may be of lower performance than stated in Table 6.1, but no worse than
class D-s3, d2. In any one room, the total area of lower performance wall lining should be less than
an area equivalent to half of the room’s floor area, up to a maximum of:
a. 20m2 in residential accommodation.
b. 60m2 in non-residential accommodation.
Ceilings
6.5 For the purposes of this requirement, a ceiling includes all of the following.
a. Glazed surfaces.
Rooflights
6.8 Rooflights should meet the following classifications, according to material. No guidance for
European fire test performance is currently available, because there is no generally accepted test
and classification procedure.
a. Non-plastic rooflights should meet the relevant classification in Table 6.1.
b. Plastic rooflights, if the limitations in Table 6.2 and Table 14.2 are observed, should be a
minimum class D-s3, d2 rating. Otherwise they should meet the relevant classification in
Table 6.1.
Special applications
6.9 Any flexible membrane covering a structure, other than an air-supported structure, should comply
with Appendix A of BS 7157.
6.10 Guidance on the use of PTFE-based materials for tension-membrane roofs and structures is given in
BRE report BR 274.
Thermoplastic materials
General provisions
6.13 Thermoplastic materials that do not meet the classifications in Table 6.1 can be used as described
in paragraphs 6.14 to 6.18. No guidance for European fire test performance is currently available,
because there is no generally accepted test and classification procedure.
Thermoplastic materials are defined in Appendix B, paragraph B11. Classifications used here are
explained in paragraph B13.
Windows
6.14 Thermoplastic material classified as a TP(a) rigid product may be used to glaze external windows to
rooms, but not external windows to circulation spaces. Approved Document K includes guidance
on the safety of glazing.
Rooflights
6.15 In rooms and circulation spaces other than protected stairways, rooflights may be constructed
of thermoplastic material if they comply with both of the following.
a. The lower surface is classified as TP(a) rigid or TP(b).
b. The size and location of the rooflights follow the limits in Table 6.2 and in Table 14.2 and
Table 14.3.
Lighting diffusers
6.16 The following paragraphs apply to lighting diffusers forming part of a ceiling. Diffusers may be part
of a luminaire or used below sources of light. The following paragraphs do not apply to diffusers of
light fittings attached to the soffit of a ceiling or suspended beneath a ceiling (Diagram 6.1).
a. DIFFUSER FORMING PART OF CEILING b. DIFFUSER IN FITTING BELOW AND NOT FORMING
PART OF CEILING
Ceiling
Ceiling
5m max.
Rooflight or
diffuser
NOTES:
Diagram 6.2 Layout restrictions on class D-s3, d2 plastic rooflights, TP(b) rooflights and
TP(b) lighting diffusers
dimension x
x min.
y min.
x min. y min.
dimension x
dimension y
Ceiling plan
Materials within this zone – at plane of ceiling – should comply with Table 6.1
Rooflights
Diagram 6.3 Layout restrictions on small class D-s3, d2 plastic rooflights, TP(b) rooflights and
TP(b) lighting diffusers
These sections deal with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (structure)
B3. (1) The building shall be designed and constructed
so that, in the event of fire, its stability will be
maintained for a reasonable period
(2) A wall common to two or more buildings shall be
designed and constructed so that it adequately
resists the spread of fire between those buildings.
For the purposes of this sub-paragraph a house in
a terrace and a semi-detached house are each to
be treated as a separate building.
(3) Where reasonably necessary to inhibit the spread Requirement B3(3) does not apply to material alterations
of fire within the building, measures shall be to any prison provided under section 33 of the Prison Act
taken, to an extent appropriate to the size and 1952.
intended use of the building, comprising either or
both of the following—
(a) sub-division of the building with fire-resisting
construction;
(b) installation of suitable automatic fire
suppression systems.
(4) The building shall be designed and constructed so
that the unseen spread of fire and smoke within
concealed spaces in its structure and fabric is
inhibited.
Provision of compartmentation
All purpose groups
8.1 All of the following should be provided as compartment walls and compartment floors and should
have, as a minimum, the fire resistance given in Appendix B, Table B3.
8.2 A wall common to two or more buildings should be a compartment wall.
8.3 Parts of a building occupied mainly for different purposes should be separated from one another
by compartment walls and/or compartment floors. Compartmentation is not needed if one of the
different purposes is ancillary to the other. See paragraphs 0.23 and 0.24.
8.4 Effective compartmentation relies on both of the following.
a. Fire resistance should be continuous at the join between elements forming a compartment.
b. Any openings between two compartments should not reduce the fire resistance.
8.5 The lowest floor in a building does not need to be a compartment floor.
Protected shafts
8.6 Stairs and service shafts connecting compartments should be protected to restrict the spread of
fire between the compartments. These are called protected shafts. Walls or floors surrounding a
protected shaft are considered to be compartment walls or compartment floors.
A. EXAMPLE OF COMPARTMENTATION IN AN
UNSPRINKLERED SHOP see paragraph 8.11a
Roof
Storey not exceeding
B. COMPARTMENTATION
2000m²
IN TALL BUILDINGS
see paragraph 8.11b
Comp.
wall
Up to Storey exceeding
30m high 2000m² divided by
compartment wall
Comp.
wall
Storey exceeding
2000m² divided by
compartment wall
Roof covering over this distance to be designated BROOF(t4) rated on deck of material
of class A2-s3, d2 or better. Roof covering and deck could be composite structure,
e.g. profiled steel cladding.
1500mm 1500mm
Double-skinned insulated roof sheeting should incorporate a band of material rated
class A2-s3, d2 or better, a minimum of 300mm in width, centred over the wall.
If roof support members pass through the wall, fire protection to these members
for a distance of 1500mm on either side of the wall may be needed to delay
distortion at the junction (see paragraph 8.16).
b. RESIDENTIAL (OTHER), OFFICE, OR ASSEMBLY AND RECREATION USE, AND NOT MORE THAN 15M HIGH
Roof covering to be designated BROOF(t4) rated for at least this distance.
Boarding (used as a substrate) or timber tiling battens may be carried over the
wall provided that they are fully bedded in mortar (or other no less suitable
X
material) where over the wall.
1500mm 1500mm Double-skinned insulated roof sheeting with a thermoplastic core should
incorporate a band of material of class A2-s3, d2 at least 300mm wide centred
over the wall.
If roof support members pass through the wall, fire protection to these
members for a distance of 1500mm on either side of the wall may be needed to
Wall delay distortion at the junction (see paragraph 8.16).
Roofing battens and sarking felt may be carried over the wall.
NOTES:
1. Fire-stopping should be carried over the full thickness of the wall.
2. Fire-stopping should be extended into any eaves.
3. The compartment wall does not necessarily need to be constructed of masonry.
At least The wall should be extended up through the roof for a height of at least
375mm At least
375mm 375mm above the top surface of the adjoining roof covering.
Roof
covering Where there is a height difference of at least 375 mm between two roofs or
Roof covering where the roof coverings on either side of the wall are BROOF(t4) rated, the
height of the upstand/parapet wall above the highest roof may be reduced to
Wall 200mm.
Protected shafts
8.32 Any stair or other shaft passing directly from one compartment to another should be enclosed
in a protected shaft. Protected shafts should be used for the following only, but may also include
sanitary accommodation and washrooms.
a. Stairs.
b. Lifts.
c. Escalators.
d. Chutes.
e. Ducts.
f. Pipes.
g. Additional provisions apply for both of the following.
i. Protected shafts that are protected stairways: Sections 2 to 5.
ii. Stairs that are also firefighting stairs: Section 17.
The diagram shows three common examples which illustrate the principles. The elements enclosing the shaft (unless
formed by adjacent external walls) are compartment walls and floors.
Compartment wall
Fd Fd
External wall Fd Fd
The shaft structure (including any openings) should meet the relevant provisions for:
compartment walls (see paragraphs 8.15 to 8.31), external walls (see sections 12 and 13 and Diagram 3.3).
Protected Protected
shaft shaft
Corridor Lobby
Glazed Glazed
screen screen
Diagram 8.4 Uninsulated glazed screen separating protected shaft from lobby or corridor
9.1 Cavities in the construction of a building provide a ready route for the spread of smoke and flame,
which can present a greater danger as any spread is concealed. For the purpose of this document,
a cavity is considered to be any concealed space.
Cavity barrier
at top of cavity
Wall forming
bedroom(1) or Cavity barrier
Accommodation
protected around edges
escape route(2)
Cavity barrier at Compartment wall
bottom of cavity Floor cavity
Compartment floor
Ceiling cavity
Sub-divide
extensive cavities
Accommodation
Compartment wall
Diagram 9.2 Cavity walls excluded from provisions for cavity barriers
NOTE:
Roof or floor cavity The ceiling should meet the following conditions.
a. Provide a minimum fire resistance of EI 30.
b. Be imperforate, except for an opening described in paragraph 9.17.
Ceiling surface/product exposed to c. Extend throughout the building or compartment.
cavity – class C-s3, d2 or better d. Not be easily demountable.
Arrangement A Arrangement B
Acceptable without cavity barriers Cavity barriers necessary
Cavity barrier
Insulation
The insulation should make contact with both skins of sheeting. See also Diagram 8.2a regarding the need for fire-stopping
where such roofs pass over the top of a compartment wall.
Diagram 9.4 Provisions for cavity barriers in double-skinned insulated roof sheeting
Extensive cavities
Maximum dimensions of cavities
9.9 Cavity barriers should be used to divide any cavity (including roof spaces). Table 9.1 sets out
maximum dimensions for undivided cavities.
9.10 Table 9.1 does not apply to any of the following cavities.
a. A cavity in a wall that is fire resisting only because it is loadbearing.
b. A cavity in a wall that meets the conditions of Diagram 9.2.
c. A floor or roof cavity above a fire resisting ceiling (Diagram 9.3) that extends throughout the
building or compartment to a maximum of 30m.
d. In a building not put to residential or institutional use, a cavity that does not contain materials
achieving class B-s3, d2 or worse and is formed either:
i. behind the external skin of an external cladding system with a masonry or concrete inner
leaf a minimum of 75mm thick
ii. by overcladding an existing masonry (or concrete) external wall or an existing concrete roof.
e. A cavity that meets the conditions of paragraph 9.8.
f. A cavity below a floor next to the ground or next to oversite concrete, if either:
Introduction
10.1 The performance of a fire-separating element should not be impaired. Every joint, imperfect fit and
opening for services should be sealed. Fire-stopping delays the spread of fire and, generally, the
spread of smoke as well.
Alternative C: Sleeving
10.5 A pipe with a maximum nominal internal diameter of 160mm may be used with a sleeve made out
of a high melting point metal, as shown in Diagram 10.1, if the pipe is made of one of the following.
a. Lead.
b. Aluminium.
c. Aluminium alloy.
d. Fibre-cement.
e. uPVC (pipes should also comply with either BS 4514 or BS 5255).
A high melting point metal means any metal (such as cast iron, copper or steel) which, if exposed
to a temperature of 800°C, will not soften or fracture to the extent that flame or hot gas will pass
through the wall of the pipe.
Structure
Protected lobby
Ductwork
serving area
Fd Fire doorset
Ductwork
serving area
Fd
Diagram 10.2 Ductwork passing through protected escape routes – method 2 or method 3
Protected stairway
Fd
Protected lobby
Fd
Smoke detection system in accordance with
SD
BS 5839-1 to activate ES damper
SD SD
Ductwork Ductwork Fd Fire doorset
serving area serving
area
Compartment
wall or floor
Flue wall
Flue walls should have a fire resistance of at least In each case flue walls should have a fire resistance of at least
one half of that required for the compartment wall one half of that required for the compartment wall and be of
or floor and be of class A1 construction. class A1 construction.
Fire-stopping
10.24 In addition to any other provisions in this section, both of the following conditions should be met.
a. Joints between fire-separating elements should be fire-stopped.
b. Openings through a fire resisting element for pipes, ducts, conduits or cable should be all of
the following.
i. As few as possible.
ii. As small as practicable.
iii. Fire-stopped (allowing thermal movement in the case of a pipe or duct).
NOTE: The fire-stopping around fire dampers, fire resisting ducts, fire and smoke dampers and
smoke control ducts should be in accordance with the manufacturer or supplier’s installation
instructions.
10.25 Materials used for fire-stopping should be reinforced with (or supported by) materials rated class
A2-s3, d2 or better to prevent displacement in both of the following cases.
a. Where the unsupported span is greater than 100mm.
b. Where non-rigid materials are used (unless subjected to appropriate fire resistance testing to
show their suitability).
10.26 Proprietary, tested fire-stopping and sealing systems are available and may be used. Different
materials suit different situations and not all are suitable in every situation.
11.1 Car parks call for different measures to restrict fire spread within buildings for the following reasons.
a. The fire load is well defined.
b. The probability of fire spreading from one storey to another in a well ventilated car park is low.
Guidance is therefore given for three ventilation scenarios.
These sections deal with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010. Section 12 also refers to regulation 7(2) of the Building Regulations 2010. Guidance
on regulation 7(1) can be found in Approved Document 7.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
External fire spread
B4. (1) The external walls of the building shall adequately
resist the spread of fire over the walls and from
one building to another, having regard to the
height, use and position of the building.
(2) The roof of the building shall adequately resist
the spread of fire over the roof and from one
building to another, having regard to the use and
position of the building.
Regulation
Regulation 7 – Materials and workmanship
(1) Building work shall be carried out—
(a) with adequate and proper materials which—
(i) are appropriate for the circumstances in which
they are used,
(ii) are adequately mixed or prepared, and
(iii) are applied, used or fixed so as adequately
to perform the functions for which they are
designed; and
(b) in a workmanlike manner.
(2) Subject to paragraph (3), building work shall be
carried out so that materials which become part of an
external wall, or specified attachment, of a relevant
building are of European Classification A2-s1, d0 or
Class A1, classified in accordance with BS EN 13501-
1:2007+A1:2009 entitled “Fire classification of
construction products and building elements.
Classification using test data from reaction to fire
tests” (ISBN 978 0 580 59861 6) published by the
British Standards Institution on 30th March 2007 and
amended in November 2009.
Intention
Resisting fire spread over external walls
The external envelope of a building should not contribute to undue fire spread from one part of a
building to another part. This intention can be met by constructing external walls so that both of
the following are satisfied.
a. The risk of ignition by an external source to the outside surface of the building and spread of
fire over the outside surface is restricted.
b. The materials used to construct external walls, and attachments to them, and how they are
assembled do not contribute to the rate of fire spread up the outside of the building.
The extent to which this is necessary depends on the height and use of the building.
Introduction
12.1 The external wall of a building should not provide a medium for fire spread if that is likely to
be a risk to health and safety. Combustible materials and cavities in external walls and attachments
to them can present such a risk, particularly in tall buildings. The guidance in this section is
designed to reduce the risk of vertical fire spread as well as the risk of ignition from flames coming
from adjacent buildings.
Fire resistance
12.2 This section does not deal with fire resistance for external walls. An external wall may need fire
resistance to meet the requirements of Section 5 (General provisions), Section 7 (Loadbearing
elements of structures) or Section 13 (Resisting fire spread from one building to another).
External surfaces
12.5 The external surfaces (i.e. outermost external material) of external walls should comply with the
provisions in Table 12.1. The provisions in Table 12.1 apply to each wall individually in relation to its
proximity to the relevant boundary.
Additional considerations
12.15 The provisions of regulation 7 apply in addition to requirement B4. Therefore, for buildings described in
regulation 7(4), the potential impact of any products incorporated into or onto the external walls and
specified attachments should be carefully considered with regard to their number, size, orientation
and position.
Introduction
13.1 The following assumptions enable a reasonable standard of resistance to the spread of fire to
be specified.
a. The size of a fire depends on the compartmentation within the building. A fire may involve
a complete compartment, but will not spread to other compartments.
b. The intensity of fire is related to the building use, but can be moderated by a sprinkler system.
c. Fires in ‘residential’ and ‘assembly and recreation’ buildings (purposes groups 1, 2 and 5) represent
a greater risk to life.
d. A building on the far side of the relevant boundary meets both of the following conditions.
i. Has a similar elevation to the one in question.
ii. Is at the same distance from the common boundary.
e. The radiated heat passing through any part of the fire resisting external wall may be discounted.
13.2 Where regulation 7(2) applies, that regulation prevails over the provisions within this section.
13.3 If a reduced separation distance between buildings, or increased amount of unprotected area, is
required, smaller compartments should be considered.
Boundaries
13.4 The fire resistance of a wall depends on its distance from the relevant boundary (see Diagram
13.1). Separation distances are measured to boundaries to ensure that the location and design of
buildings on adjoining sites have no influence on the building under consideration.
13.5 The boundary that a wall faces is the relevant boundary (Diagram 13.2). It may be one of the
following.
a. The site boundary.
b. The centre line of a space where further development is unlikely, such as a road, railway, canal or
river.
c. An assumed notional boundary between two buildings on the same site (Diagram 13.3) where
either of the following conditions is met.
i. One or both of the buildings are in the ‘residential’ or ‘assembly and recreation’ purpose
groups (purpose group 1, 2 or 5).
ii. The buildings will be operated/managed by different organisations.
Wall on or very close to the Wall not on, or not very close Wall sufficiently distant from
relevant boundary: very limited to, but not sufficiently far from relevant boundary to be a
amounts of unprotected area relevant boundary that it can be a 100% unprotected area
wholly unprotected area
Relevant boundary
Amount of unprotected
area dependent on distance
from relevant boundary
NOTES:
This boundary is at less than
80 degrees to side C and is therefore This diagram sets out the rules
relevant to side C that apply in respect of a
boundary for it to be
considered as a relevant
boundary.
< 80°
For a boundary to be relevant
it should comply with one of
the following:
C
This boundary
This boundary coincides is parallel to a. Coincide with the side of
with and is therefore A Building B1 and therefore the building (A).
relevant to side A relevant to b. Be parallel to the side of the
side B1 building (B1 or B2).
B2 c. Be at an angle of maximum
80 degrees to the side
The boundary is of the building (C).
parallel to side B2
Site
boundary
Compliance with the provisions for Compliance with the provisions for
space separation in respect of building A space separation in respect of building B
NOTES:
The notional boundary should be set in the area between the two buildings using the following rules:
1. The notional boundary is assumed to exist in the space between the buildings and is positioned so that one of the buildings would
comply with the provisions for space separation having regard to the amount of its unprotected area. In practice, if one of the
buildings is existing, the position of the boundary will be set by the space separation factors for that building.
2. The siting of the new building, or the second building if both are new, can then be checked to see that it also complies, using the
notional boundary as the relevant boundary for the second building.
External walls on, and within 1000mm of, the relevant boundary
13.7 Unprotected areas should meet the conditions in Diagram 13.5 and the rest of the wall should be
fire resisting from both sides.
External surface materials facing the boundary should be class B-s3, d2 or better.
Diagram 13.4 Status of materials achieving class B-s3, d2 or worse as unprotected area
Compartment Compartment
floor wall
Dimensional restrictions
Represents an unprotected area of not
more than 1m2 which may consist of a 4000mm minimum distance
two or more smaller areas within an
area of 1000mm31000mm b 1500mm minimum distance
Diagram 13.5 Small unprotected areas that may be disregarded in assessing the separation
distance from the boundary
Canopies
13.12 Where both of the following apply, separation distances may be determined from the wall rather
than from the edge of the canopy (Diagram 13.6).
a. The canopy is attached to the side of a building.
b. The edges of the canopy are a minimum of 2m from the relevant boundary.
Canopies that fall within class 6 or class 7 of Schedule 2 to the regulations (Exempt Buildings and
Work) are exempt from the Building Regulations.
13.13 Space separation may be disregarded if a canopy is all of the following.
a. Free-standing.
b. Above a limited risk or controlled hazard, for example over petrol pumps.
c. A minimum of 1000mm from the relevant boundary.
NOTE: Projections from the building line, such as a canopy or a loading platform, can be ignored when
assessing separation distance. This does not apply where the canopy is enclosed by side walls.
Roofs
13.14 Roofs with a pitch of more than 70 degrees to the horizontal should be assessed in accordance
with this section. Vertical parts of a pitched roof, such as dormer windows, should be included,
only if the slope of the roof exceeds 70 degrees.
It is a matter of judgement whether a continuous run of dormer windows that occupies most of
a steeply pitched roof should be treated as a wall rather than a roof.
Portal frames
13.15 Portal frames are often used in single storey industrial and commercial buildings where there may
be no need for fire resistance of the structure (requirement B3). However, where a portal framed
building is near a relevant boundary, the external wall near the boundary may need fire resistance
to restrict the spread of fire between buildings. It is generally accepted that a portal frame acts
as a single structural element because of the moment-resisting connections used, especially at
the column/rafter joints. Thus, in cases where the external wall of the building cannot be wholly
unprotected, the rafter members of the frame, as well as the column members, may need to be fire
protected. The design method for this is set out in SCI Publication P313.
NOTE: The recommendations in the SCI publication for designing the foundation to resist
overturning do not need to be followed if the building is fitted with a sprinkler system in
accordance with Appendix E.
NOTE: Normally, portal frames of reinforced concrete can support external walls requiring a similar
degree of fire resistance without specific provision at the base to resist overturning.
Method 1
13.17 This method applies to small buildings intended to be used for ‘residential (other)’ purposes.
13.18 The building should not exceed three storeys in height (excluding basements) or 24m in length.
Each side of the building should meet the limits stated in Diagram 13.7. Any small unprotected areas
falling within the limits shown in Diagram 13.5 can be ignored.
SeeSee
para 13.1913.19
para
24m max.
Minimum distance (a) Maximum total area of
between side of building unprotected areas (m2)
and relevant boundary (m)
1 5.6
2 12
3 18
a
4 24
5 30
6 No limit
Relevant boundary
Method 2
13.19 This method may be used for buildings or compartments intended for any use and for which
method 1 is not appropriate.
13.20 Except for an open-sided car park in purpose group 7(b) (see paragraph 11.2), the building should
not exceed 10m in height. Each side of the building should meet the limits in Table 13.1. Areas falling
within the limits in Diagram 13.5 can be ignored.
Sprinkler systems
13.21 If a building is fitted throughout with a sprinkler system in accordance with Appendix E, either of
the following is permitted.
a. The boundary distance can be halved, to a minimum distance of 1m.
b. The amount of unprotected area can be doubled.
Atrium buildings
13.22 If a building contains one or more atria, the recommendations in clause B8 of BS 9999 should be
followed.
Introduction
14.1 ‘Roof covering’ describes one or more layers of material, but not the roof structure as a whole.
14.2 Provisions for the fire properties of roofs are given in other parts of this document.
a. Requirement B1 – for roofs that are part of a means of escape.
b. Requirement B2 – for the internal surfaces of rooflights as part of internal linings.
c. Requirement B3 – for roofs that are used as a floor and for roofs passing over a compartment wall.
d. Section 13 – the circumstances in which a roof is subject to the provisions for space separation.
Separation distances
14.3 Separation distance is the minimum distance from the roof, or part of the roof, to the relevant
boundary (paragraph 13.5). Table 14.1 sets out separation distances by the type of roof covering and
the size and use of the building.
In addition, roof covering products (and/or materials) defined in Commission Decision 2000/553/
EC of 6 September 2000, implementing Council Directive 89/106/EEC, can be considered to fulfil
all of the requirements for the performance characteristic ‘external fire performance’ without the
need for testing, provided that any national provisions on the design and execution of works are
fulfilled, and can be used without restriction.
14.4 The performance of rooflights is specified in a similar way to the performance of roof coverings.
Plastic rooflights may also be used.
Plastic rooflights
14.5 Table 14.2 and Diagram 14.1 set the limitations for using plastic rooflights whose lower surface has a
minimum rating of class D-s3, d2.
14.6 Table 14.3 sets the limitations for using thermoplastic materials with a TP(a) rigid or TP(b)
(see also Diagram 14.1) classification. The method of classifying thermoplastic materials is given in
Appendix B.
14.7 Other than for the purposes of Diagram 6.2, polycarbonate or uPVC rooflights achieving a minimum
rating of class C-s3, d2 can be regarded as having a BROOF(t4) classification.
Rooflight*
max. area 5m2
Diagram 14.1 Limitations on spacing and size of plastic rooflights that have a class D-s3, d2 or
TP(b) lower surface
Table 14.3 TP(a) and TP(b) thermoplastic rooflights: limitations on use and boundary distance
Minimum Space that rooflight can serve Minimum distance from any point on
classification on relevant boundary to rooflight with an
lower surface(1) external surface classification(1) of:
TP(a) TP(b)
1. TP(a) rigid Any space except a protected stairway 6m (2)
Not applicable
2. TP(b) a. Balcony, verandah, carport, covered way or Not applicable 6m
loading bay, which has at least one longer side
wholly or permanently open
b. Detached swimming pool
c. Conservatory, garage or outbuilding, with a
maximum floor area of 40m2
d. Circulation space(3) (except a protected stairway) Not applicable 6m(4)
e. Room(3)
NOTES:
None of the above designations are suitable for protected stairways.
Polycarbonate and uPVC rooflights that achieve a class C-s3, d2 rating by test may be regarded as having a BROOF(t4) designation.
Where Diagram 8.2a or 8.2b applies, rooflights should be at least 1500mm from the compartment wall.
If double-skinned or laminate products have upper and lower surfaces of different materials, the greater distance
applies.
1. See also the guidance to requirement B2 in Section 6.
2. No limit in the case of any space described in 2(a), (b) and (c).
3. Single-skinned rooflight only, in the case of non-thermoplastic material.
4. The rooflight should also meet the provisions of Diagram 14.1.
These sections deal with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Access and facilities for the fire service
B5. (1) The building shall be designed and constructed
so as to provide reasonable facilities to assist fire
fighters in the protection of life.
(2) Reasonable provision shall be made within the site
of the building to enable fire appliances to gain
access to the building.
Intention
Provisions covering access and facilities for the fire service are to safeguard the health and safety of
people in and around the building. Their extent depends on the size and use of the building. Most
firefighting is carried out within the building. In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B5 is met
by achieving all of the following.
a. External access enabling fire appliances to be used near the building.
b. Access into and within the building for firefighting personnel to both:
i. search for and rescue people
ii. fight fire.
c. Provision for internal fire facilities for firefighters to complete their tasks.
d. Ventilation of heat and smoke from a fire in a basement.
If an alternative approach is taken to providing the means of escape, outside the scope of this
approved document, additional provisions for firefighting access may be required. Where deviating
from the general guidance, it is advisable to seek advice from the fire and rescue service as early as
possible (even if there is no statutory duty to consult).
Table 15.1 Fire and rescue service vehicle access to buildings not fitted with fire mains
Total floor area(1) of Height of floor of top storey Provide vehicle Type of appliance
building (m²) above ground (m)(2) access to:
Up to 2000 Up to 11 See paragraph 15.1 Pump
Over 11 15% of perimeter High reach
2000–8000 Up to 11 15% of perimeter Pump
Over 11 50% of perimeter High reach
8000–16,000 Up to 11 50% of perimeter Pump
Over 11 50% of perimeter High reach
16,000–24,000 Up to 11 75% of perimeter Pump
Over 11 75% of perimeter High reach
Over 24,000 Up to 11 100% of perimeter Pump
Over 11 100% of perimeter High reach
NOTES:
1. The sum of the area of all storeys in the building (excluding basements).
2. For storage buildings (purpose group 7(a)), measure height to mean roof level (see Appendix D).
A
C
B
D
L J
F
N K
I
M
G
Plan of building AFGL where AL and FG are walls in common If the dimensions of the building are such that Table 15.1 requires
with other buildings. vehicle access, the shaded area illustrates one possible example
The footprint of the building is the maximum aggregate plan of 15% of the perimeter. Note: There should be a door into the
perimeter found by the vertical projection of any overhanging building in this length (see paragraph 15.3).
storey onto a ground storey (i.e. ABCDEFGHMNKL). If the building does not have walls in common with other
The perimeter of the building for the purposes of Table 15.1 is buildings, the lengths AL and FG would be included in the
the sum of the lengths of the two external walls, taking account perimeter.
of the footprint i.e. (A to B to C to D to E to F) + (G to H to M to
N to K to L).
Table 15.2 Typical fire and rescue service vehicle access route specification
Appliance type Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
width of road width of turning circle turning circle clearance carrying
between gateways (m) between between height (m) capacity
kerbs (m) kerbs (m) walls (m) (tonnes)
Pump 3.7 3.1 16.8 19.2 3.7 12.5
High reach 3.7 3.1 26.0 29.0 4.0 17.0
NOTES:
1. Fire appliances are not standardised. The building control body may, in consultation with the local fire and rescue
service, use other dimensions.
2. The roadbase can be designed to 12.5 tonne capacity. Structures such as bridges should have the full 17-tonne
capacity. The weight of high reach appliances is distributed over a number of axles, so infrequent use of a route
designed to accommodate 12.5 tonnes should not cause damage.
C D
A B
Obstruction
Hardstanding or access road
Type of appliance
Turntable Hydraulic
ladder platform
dimension (m) dimension (m)
A. Maximum distance of near edge of hardstanding from building 4.9 2.0
B. Minimum width of hardstanding 5.0 5.5
C. Minimum distance of further edge of hardstanding from building 10.0 7.5
D. Minimum width of unobstructed space (for swing of appliance platform) N/A 2.2
NOTES:
1. Hardstanding for high reach appliances should be as level as 2. Fire appliances are not standardised. Some fire services have
possible and should have a maximum gradient of 1 in 12. appliances with a greater weight or different size.
In consultation with the fire and rescue service, the building
control body should adopt the relevant dimensions and ground
loading capacity.
Diagram 15.2 Relationship between building and hardstanding/access roads for high reach fire
appliances
Building Exit
20m max.
Introduction
16.1 Fire mains are installed for the fire and rescue service to connect hoses for water. They may be
either of the following.
a. The ‘dry’ type, which are both of the following.
i. Normally kept empty.
ii. Supplied through a hose from a fire and rescue service pumping appliance.
b. The ‘wet’ type, which are both of the following.
i. Kept full of water.
ii. Supplied by pumps from tanks in the building.
There should be a facility to replenish a wet system from a pumping appliance in an emergency.
Introduction
17.1 Facilities for fire and rescue, such as firefighting lifts, firefighting stairs and firefighting lobbies, are
combined in protected firefighting shafts (Diagram 17.1). Section 8 gives guidance on the design and
construction of protected shafts.
Any building
Fire main outlet
Firefighting Firefighting
lobby stairs
Firefighting
lift in
lift shaft
Minimum fire resistance REI 60 from both sides with E 30 Sa fire doors
NOTES:
1. Outlets from a fire main should be located in the firefighting 3. This diagram is only to illustrate the basic components and is
lobby. not meant to represent the only acceptable layout. The
firefighting shaft should be constructed generally in
2. A firefighting lift is required if the building has a floor more accordance with Section 6 of BS 9999.
than 18m above, or more than 10m below, fire service vehicle
access level. 4. For the minimum fire resistance of lift doors see Table C1.
Fire
service > 7.5m
vehicle
access
level
> 10m
Two or more
basement storeys
each exceeding
900m²
NOTES:
F F F
60
m
Without sprinklers
c.
Floor plan within 60m hose laying distance of fire main outlet
45m
Floor plan within 45m hose laying distance of fire main outlet
F Hose reach
F Firefighting shaft
d. e.
F H F F
45m
NOTES:
1. Hose laying distance should be measured from the fire main outlet along the route suitable for laying hose.
If this route is not known, the distance should be taken at two-thirds of the direct distance.
External External
wall wall
Basement Basement
This section deals with the following regulation of the Building Regulations 2010.
Intention
The aim of this regulation is to ensure that the person responsible for the building has sufficient
information relating to fire safety to enable them to manage the building effectively. The aim of
regulation 38 will be achieved when the person responsible for the building has all the information
to enable them to do all of the following.
a. Understand and implement the fire safety strategy of the building.
b. Maintain any fire safety system provided in the building.
c. Carry out an effective fire risk assessment of the building.
19.1 For building work involving the erection or extension of a relevant building (i.e. a building to which
the Regulatory Reform (Fire Safety) Order 2005 applies or will apply), or the relevant change of
use of a building, fire safety information should be given to the responsible person at one of the
following times.
a. When the project is complete.
b. When the building or extension is first occupied.
19.2 This section is a guide to the information that should be provided. Guidance is in terms of essential
information and additional information for complex buildings; however, the level of detail required
should be considered on a case-by-case basis.
Essential information
19.3 Basic information on the location of fire protection measures may be sufficient. An as-built plan of
the building should be provided showing all of the following.
a. Escape routes – this should include exit capacity (i.e. the maximum allowable number of people
for each storey and for the building).
b. Location of fire-separating elements (including cavity barriers in walk-in spaces).
c. Fire doorsets, fire doorsets fitted with a self-closing device and other doors equipped with
relevant hardware.
d. Locations of fire and/or smoke detector heads, alarm call points, detection/alarm control
boxes, alarm sounders, fire safety signage, emergency lighting, fire extinguishers, dry or wet fire
mains and other firefighting equipment, and hydrants outside the building.
e. Any sprinkler systems, including isolating valves and control equipment.
f. Any smoke control systems, or ventilation systems with a smoke control function, including
mode of operation and control systems.
g. Any high risk areas (e.g. heating machinery).
19.4 Details should be provided of all of the following.
a. Specifications of any fire safety equipment provided, including routine maintenance schedules.
b. Any assumptions regarding the management of the building in the design of the fire safety
arrangements.
c. Any provision enabling the evacuation of disabled people, which can be used when designing
suitable personal emergency evacuation plans.
NOTE: Except for the items marked * (which Basement storey A storey with a floor that, at some
are from the Building Regulations 2010), these point, is more than 1200mm below the highest level
definitions apply only to Approved Document B. of ground beside the outside walls. (However, see
NOTE: The terms defined below are key terms Appendix B, paragraph B26c, for situations where
used in this document only. Refer to BS 4422 for the storey is considered to be a basement only
further guidance on the definitions of common because of a sloping site.)
terms used in the fire safety industry which are Boundary The boundary of the land that belongs to
not listed below. a building, or, where the land abuts a road, railway,
Access room A room that the only escape route canal or river, the centre line of that road, railway,
from an inner room passes through. canal or river.
Alternative escape routes Escape routes that are *Building Any permanent or temporary building
sufficiently separated by direction and space or by but not any other kind of structure or erection. A
fire resisting construction to ensure that one is still reference to a building includes a reference to part
available if the other is affected by fire. of a building.
NOTE: A second stair, balcony or flat roof which Building control body A term that includes both
enables a person to reach a place free from danger local authority building control and approved
from fire is considered an alternative escape route inspectors.
for the purposes of a dwellinghouse. Cavity A space enclosed by elements of a building
Alternative exit One of two or more exits, each of (including a suspended ceiling) or contained within
which is separate from the other. an element, but that is not a room, cupboard,
circulation space, protected shaft, or space within a
Appliance ventilation duct A duct to deliver flue, chute, duct, pipe or conduit.
combustion air to a gas appliance.
Cavity barrier A construction within a cavity, other
Atrium (plural atria) A continuous space that passes than a smoke curtain, to perform either of the
through one or more structural floors within a following functions.
building, not necessarily vertically.
• Close a cavity to stop smoke or flame entering.
NOTE: Enclosed lift wells, enclosed escalator wells,
building services ducts and stairs are not classified • Restrict the movement of smoke or flame
as atria. within a cavity.
Automatic release mechanism A device that Ceiling Part of a building that encloses a room,
normally holds a door open, but closes it protected shaft or circulation space and is exposed
automatically if any one of the following occurs. overhead.
• Smoke is detected by an automatic device of a NOTE: The soffit of a rooflight, but not the frame,
suitable nature and quality in a suitable location. is included as part of the surface of the ceiling. An
upstand below a rooflight is considered as a wall.
• A hand-operated switch, fitted in a suitable
position, is operated. Circulation space A space (including a protected
stairway) mainly used as a means of access
• The electricity supply to the device, apparatus between a room and an exit from the building or
or switch fails. compartment.
• The fire alarm system, if any, is operated.
NOTE: A dwelling is a unit where one or more *External wall The external wall of a building
people live (whether or not as a sole or main includes all of the following.
residence) in either of the following situations. • Anything located within any space forming
• A single person or people living together as a part of the wall.
family. • Any decoration or other finish applied to any
• A maximum of six people living together as external (but not internal) surface forming part
a single household, including where care is of the wall.
provided for residents. • Any windows and doors in the wall.
*Dwellinghouse Does not include a flat or a
building containing a flat.
Pipe Includes pipe fittings and accessories. The Rooflight A dome light, lantern light, skylight,
definition of ‘pipe’ excludes a flue pipe and a ridge light, glazed barrel vault or other element to
pipe used for ventilating purposes, other than admit daylight through a roof.
a ventilating pipe for an above-ground drainage Room An enclosed space within a building that is
system. not used solely as a circulation space. The term
Place of special fire hazard A room such as any of includes not only conventional rooms, but also
the following. cupboards that are not fittings and large spaces
such as warehouses and auditoria. The term does
• Oil-filled transformer room. not include cavities such as ducts, ceiling cavities
• Switch gear room. and roof spaces.
• Boiler room. School A place of education for children between
2 and 19 years old. The term includes nursery
• Storage space for fuel or other highly schools, primary schools and secondary schools as
flammable substance(s). defined in the Education Act 1996.
• Room that houses a fixed internal combustion Self-closing device A device that closes a door,
engine. when open at any angle, against a door frame.
a. Open fronted.
b. Separated from the remainder of
the building by a compartment
wall(s) and floor(s) having not less
than the period of fire resistance
specified in Table B4 in Appendix B.
Introduction
B1 Much of the guidance in this document is given in terms of performance classifications in relation
to British or European Standards. In such cases, it will be necessary to demonstrate that a system
or product can meet the relevant performance classification. This will be achieved if the system or
product complies with one of the following.
a. They should be in accordance with a specification or design that has been shown by a specific
test to be capable of meeting that performance classification.
b. They should have been designed by using relevant design standards in order to meet that
performance classification.
c. They should have been assessed by applying relevant test evidence, in lieu of carrying out a
specific test, as being capable of meeting that performance classification.
NOTE: Some products are subject to Classification Without Further Testing (CWFT). For the
purposes of this approved document, such products can be considered to have been shown to be
capable of meeting a performance specification as per paragraph B1a.
B2 Any test evidence used to demonstrate the fire performance classification of a product or system
should be carefully checked to ensure that it is applicable to the intended use. Small differences
in detail, such as fixing method, joints, dimensions, the introduction of insulation materials and air
gaps (ventilated or not), can significantly affect the performance.
B3 Assessments should not be regarded as a way to avoid a test where one is necessary. Assessments
should only be carried out where sufficient relevant test evidence is available. Relevant test
evidence is unlikely to be provided by test standards which have different classification criteria.
B4 Where it is proposed to assess the classification of a product or system in lieu of carrying out a
specific test (as in paragraph B1b), this should be done in accordance with the relevant standard for
extended application for the test in question and should include details of the test evidence that
has been used to support the assessment.
For performance classifications where there is no specific standard for extended application,
assessment reports should be produced in accordance with the principles of BS EN 15725 and
should include details of the test evidence that has been used to support the assessment. Further
information on best practice is provided in the Passive Fire Protection Federation’s Guide to
Undertaking Assessments in Lieu of Fire Tests.
NOTE: Regulation 7(2) limits components used in or on the external walls of certain buildings to
materials achieving class A2-s1, d0 or class A1 (see Section 12). Assessments cannot be used to
demonstrate compliance with this requirement.
B5 Tests and assessments should be carried out by organisations with the necessary expertise. For
example, organisations listed as ‘notified bodies’ in accordance with the European Construction
Reaction to fire
B6 Reaction to fire relates to the degree to which a product will contribute, by its own
decomposition, to a fire under specified conditions. Products, other than floorings, are classified
as A1, A2, B, C, D, E or F (with class A1 being the highest performance and F being the lowest) in
accordance with BS EN 13501-1. Class F is assigned when a product fails to attain class E. Untested
products cannot be classified in accordance with BS EN 13501-1.
Materials covered by the Classification Without Further Testing (CWFT) process can be found by
accessing the European Commission’s website https://eur-lex.europa.eu/.
B7 The classes of reaction to fire performance of A2, B, C, D and E are accompanied by additional
classifications related to the production of smoke (s1, s2, s3), with s1 indicating the lowest
production, and/or flaming droplets/particles (d0, d1, d2), with d0 indicating the lowest
production.
NOTE: When a classification includes s3, d2 this means that there is no limit set for smoke
production and/or flaming droplets/particles.
B8 To reduce the testing burden on manufacturers, BS EN 13238 defines a number of standard
substrates that produce test results representative of different end use applications. The
classification for reaction to fire achieved during testing is only valid when the product is used
within this field of application, i.e. when the product is fixed to a substrate of that class in its
end use. The standard substrate selected for testing should take account of the intended end use
applications (field of application) of the product and represent end use substrates that have a
density of a minimum of 75% of the standard substrate’s nominal density.
B9 Standard substrates include gypsum plasterboard (BS EN 520) with a density of 700+/-100kg/m3,
calcium silicate board (BS EN 14306) 870+/-50kg/m3 and fibre-cement board 1800+/-200kg/m3.
NOTE: Standard calcium silicate board is not representative of gypsum plasterboard end use (due
to the paper layer), but would be representative of most gypsum plasters (with densities of more
than 650kg/m3).
NOTE: Classifications based on tests using a plasterboard substrate would also be acceptable for
products bonded to a gypsum plaster end use substrate.
NOTE: The national classifications do not automatically equate with the transposed classifications
in the ‘BS EN 13501-1 classification’ column, therefore products cannot typically assume a European
class unless they have been tested accordingly.
NOTE: A classification of s3, d2 indicates that no limit is set for production of smoke and/or
flaming droplets/particles. If a performance for production of smoke and/or flaming droplets/
particles is specified, then only the European classes can be used. For example, a national class may
not be used as an alternative to a classification which includes s1, d0.
Thermoplastic materials
B11 Thermoplastic material is any synthetic polymeric material that has a softening point below 200°C
if tested to BS EN ISO 306 Method A120. Products formed from these materials cannot always be
classified in the normal way. In those circumstances the following approach can be followed.
B12 Thermoplastic materials used for window glazing, rooflights and lighting diffusers within suspended
ceilings do not need to meet the criteria within paragraph B19 onwards, if the guidance to
requirements B2 and B4 is followed.
Roofs
B15 Performance of the resistance of roofs to external fire exposure is measured in terms of
penetration through the roof construction and the spread of flame over its surface.
B16 Roof constructions are classified within the European system as BROOF(t4), CROOF(t4), DROOF(t4),
EROOF(t4) or FROOF(t4) in accordance with BS EN 13501-5. BROOF(t4) indicates the highest performance
and FROOF(t4) the lowest.
B17 BS EN 13501-5 refers to four separate roof tests. The suffix (t4) used in paragraph B16 indicates that
Test 4 is to be used for the purposes of this approved document.
NOTE: The national classifications do not automatically equate with the transposed classifications
in the European column, therefore products cannot typically assume a European class unless they
have been tested accordingly.
Fire resistance
B19 Common to all of the provisions of Part B of the Building Regulations is the property of fire
resistance. Fire resistance is a measure of one or more of the following.
a. Resistance to collapse (loadbearing capacity), which applies to loadbearing elements only,
denoted R in the European classification of the resistance to fire performance.
b. Resistance to fire penetration (integrity), denoted E in the European classification of the
resistance to fire performance.
c. Resistance to the transfer of excessive heat (insulation), denoted I in the European
classification of the resistance to fire performance.
B20 The standards of fire resistance necessary for a particular building are based on assumptions about
the severity of fires and the consequences should an element fail. Fire severity is estimated in very
broad terms from the use of the building (its purpose group), on the assumption that the building
contents (which constitute the fire load) are similar for buildings with the same use.
B21 Because the use of buildings may change, a precise estimate of fire severity based on the fire load
due to a particular use may be misleading. Therefore if a fire engineering approach of this kind is
adopted, the likelihood that the fire load may change in the future needs to be considered.
B22 Performance in terms of the fire resistance to be achieved by elements of structure, doors and
other forms of construction is classified in accordance with one of the following.
a. BS EN 13501-2.
b. BS EN 13501-3.
c. BS EN 13501-4.
Table B3 Specific provisions of the test for fire resistance of elements of structure, etc.
Part of building Minimum Alternative minimum provisions when tested to Type of
provisions when the relevant part of BS 476(2) (minutes) exposure
tested to the Loadbearing Integrity Insulation
relevant European capacity(3)
standard
(minutes)(1)
1. Structural frame, R see Table B4 See Table B4 Not applicable Not applicable Exposed faces
beam or column.
2. Loadbearing wall R see Table B4 See Table B4 Not applicable Not applicable Each side
(which is not also separately
a wall described in
any of the following
items).
3. Floors(4)
a. between a shop and REI 60 or 60 min or 60 min or 60 min or From
flat above see Table B4 see Table B4 see Table B4 see Table B4 underside(5)
(whichever is (whichever is (whichever is (whichever is
greater) greater) greater) greater)
b. in upper storey R 30 and REI 15 30 min 15 min 15 min From
of two storey underside(5)
dwellinghouse (but
not over garage or
basement)
c. any other floor REI see Table B4 See Table B4 See Table B4 See Table B4 From
– including underside(5)
compartment floors.
– with sprinkler system(3) 60 min 60 min 30 min† 30 min† 30 min† 60 min 120 min‡
4. Shop and commercial:
– without sprinkler 90 min 60 min 60 min 60 min 60 min 90 min Not
system permitted(6)
– with sprinkler system(3) 60 min 60 min 30 min† 60 min 60 min 60 min 120 min‡
5. Assembly and
recreation:
– without sprinkler 90 min 60 min 60 min 60 min 60 min 90 min Not
system permitted(6)
– with sprinkler system(3) 60 min 60 min 30 min† 60 min 60 min 60 min 120 min‡
6. Industrial:
– without sprinkler 120 min 90 min 60 min 90 min 90 min 120 min Not
system permitted(6)
– with sprinkler system(3) 90 min 60 min 30 min† 60 min 60 min 90 min 120 min‡
7. Storage and other non-
residential:
a. any building or part not
described elsewhere:
– without sprinkler 120 min 90 min 60 min 90 min 90 min 120 min Not
system permitted(6)
– with sprinkler system(3) 90 min 60 min 30 min† 60 min 60 min 90 min 120 min‡
C1 All fire doorsets should have the performance shown in Table C1, based on one of the following.
a. Fire resistance in terms of integrity, for a period of minutes, when tested to BS 476-22, e.g. FD 30.
A suffix (S) is added for doorsets where restricted smoke leakage at ambient temperatures is needed.
b. As determined with reference to Commission Decision 2000/367/EC regarding the
classification of the resistance to fire performance of construction products, construction
works and parts thereof. All fire doorsets should be classified in accordance with BS EN 13501-2,
tested to the relevant European method from the following.
i. BS EN 1634-1.
ii. BS EN 1634-2.
iii. BS EN 1634-3.
c. As determined with reference to European Parliament and Council Directive 95/16/EC (which
applies to lifts that permanently serve buildings and constructions and specified safety
components) on the approximation of laws of Member States relating to lifts (‘Lifts Directive’)
implementing the Lifts Regulations 1997 (SI 1997/831) and calling upon the harmonised standard
BS EN 81-58.
C2 The performance requirement is in terms of integrity (E) for a period of minutes. An additional
classification of Sa is used for all doors where restricted smoke leakage at ambient temperatures is
needed.
C3 The requirement is for test exposure from each side of the doorset separately. The exception is lift
doors, which are tested from the landing side only.
C4 Any test evidence used to verify the fire resistance rating of a doorset or shutter should be
checked to ensure both of the following.
a. It adequately demonstrates compliance.
b. It is applicable to the complete installed assembly. Small differences in detail may
significantly affect the rating.
Until relevant harmonised product standards are published, for the purposes of meeting the
Building Regulations, products tested in accordance with BS EN 1634-1 (with or without pre-fire
test mechanical conditioning) that achieve the minimum performance in Table C1 will be deemed
to satisfy the provisions.
C5 All fire doorsets, including to flat entrances and between a dwellinghouse and an integral garage,
should be fitted with a self-closing device, except for all of the following.
a. Fire doorsets to cupboards.
b. Fire doorsets to service ducts normally locked shut.
c. Fire doorsets within flats and dwellinghouses.
C6 If a self-closing device would be considered to interfere with the normal approved use of the
building, self-closing fire doors may be held open by one of the following.
Occupant number
D1 The number of occupants of a room, storey, building or part of a building is either of the following.
a. The maximum number of people it is designed to hold.
b. In buildings other than dwellings, the number of people calculated by dividing the area of
a room or storey(s) (m2) by a floor space factor (m2 per person) such as given in Table D1 for
guidance.
D2 Counters and display units should be included when measuring area. All of the following should be
excluded.
a. Stair enclosures.
b. Lifts.
c. Sanitary accommodation.
d. Any other fixed part of the building structure.
Width
D4 Width is measured according to the following.
a. For a door (or doorway), the clear width when the door is open (Diagram D1).
b. For an escape route, either of the following.
i. When the route is defined by walls: the width at 1500mm above finished floor level.
ii. Elsewhere: the minimum width of passage available between any fixed obstructions.
c. For a stair, the clear width between the walls or balustrades. On escape routes and stairs,
handrails and strings intruding into the width by a maximum of 100mm on each side may be
ignored. Rails used for guiding a stair-lift may be ignored, but it should be possible to park the
lift’s chair or carriage in a position that does not obstruct the stair or landing.
Diagram D3 Area
Highest point
of roof slope
Equal Mean roof
level
Lowest point
of roof slope Height of
building
Highest level
of ground
adjacent to Mean ground
outside walls level
Second
floor To count the number of storeys in a building,
or in a separated part of a building, count only at
the position which gives the greatest number and
First exclude any basement storeys.
floor
Ground
floor
Basement
Plant Roof
a. b.
a1 a2 a3 a4 a5
90°
Sprinkler systems
E1 Sprinkler systems installed in buildings can reduce the risk to life and significantly reduce the
degree of damage caused by fire within a building.
E2 Further recommendations for the provision of sprinklers are provided in the following sections:
Volume 1 – Dwellings
Functional Paragraph Title
requirement
B1 2.6 Dwellinghouses with two or more storeys more than 4.5m above ground level
B1 2.23 Loft conversions
B1 3.21 Internal planning of multi-storey flats
B3 Table B4 Minimum periods of fire resistance
B3 7.4 Sprinklers
B4 11.15 Unprotected areas and fire resistance – portal frames
B4 11.21 Methods for calculating acceptable unprotected area – sprinkler systems
B5 15.7 Provision of firefighting shafts
BS 5839-1 Code of practice for system design, BS 8414-1 Test method for non-loadbearing
installation, commissioning and maintenance of external cladding systems applied to the
systems in non-domestic premises [2017] masonry face of a building [2015 + A1 2017]
BS 5839-2 Specification for manual call points BS 8414-2 Test method for non-loadbearing
[1983] external cladding systems fixed to and
supported by a structural steel frame [2015 + A1
BS 5839-3 Specification for automatic release 2017]
mechanisms for certain fire protection
equipment [1988] BS 8519 Selection and installation of fire-resistant
power and control cable systems for life safety and
BS 5839-6 Code of practice for the design, fire-fighting applications. Code of practice [2010]
installation, commissioning and maintenance
of fire detection and fire alarm systems in BS 9251 Fire sprinkler systems for domestic and
domestic premises [2019] residential occupancies. Code of practice [2014]
BS 5839-8 Code of practice for the design, BS 9252 Components for residential sprinkler
installation, commissioning and maintenance of systems. Specification and test methods for
voice alarm systems [2013] residential sprinklers [2011]
BS 5839-9 Code of practice for the design, BS 9990 Non automatic fire-fighting systems in
installation, commissioning and maintenance of buildings. Code of practice [2015]
emergency voice communication systems [2011] BS 9991 Fire safety in the design, management and
BS 5867-2 Fabrics for curtains and drapes. use of residential buildings. Code of practice [2015]
Flammability requirements. Specification [2008] BS 9999 Fire safety in the design, management and
BS 5906 Waste management in buildings. Code of use of buildings. Code of practice [2017]
practice [2005]
Door and Hardware Federation (DHF) and Guild Steel Construction Institute (SCI)
of Architectural Ironmongers (GAI) (https://steel-sci.com)
(www.firecode.org.uk) SCI Publication P288 Fire Safe Design: A New
Hardware for Fire and Escape Doors [2012] Approach to Multi-storey Steel-framed Buildings,
Second Edition [2006]
Door and Shutter Manufacturers’ Association
(DSMA) SCI Publication P313 Single Storey Steel Framed
(www.dhfonline.org.uk) Buildings in Fire Boundary Conditions [2002]
Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Metal Doorsets Timber Research and Development Associations
[2010] (TRADA)
(www.trada.co.uk)
Fire Protection Association (FPA)
(www.thefpa.co.uk) Timber Fire Resisting Doorsets: Maintaining
Performance under the New European Test Standard
RISCAuthority Design Guide for the Fire Protection [2002]
of Buildings [2005]
Football Licensing Authority
(www.flaweb.org.uk/home.php)
Concourses [2006]
Glass and Glazing Federation (GGF)
(www.ggf.org.uk)
A Guide to Best Practice in the Specification and
Use of Fire-resistant Glazed Systems [2011]
RIBA Books
Online: www.architecture.com/ribabooks
Telephone: +44 (0)20 7496 8383
Email: sales@books.architecture.com
ISBN 978-1-914124-03-7
9 781914 124037
Building Regulations 2010
Published by NBS, part of RIBA Enterprises Ltd, and available to purchase from:
RIBA Bookshops Mail Order
The Old Post Office, St Nicholas Street,
Newcastle Upon Tyne, NE1 1RH
Telephone orders/General enquiries: +44 (0)191 244 5557
Fax orders: +44 (0)191 244 5553
Email orders: sales@ribabookshops.com
Or order online at:
www.ribabookshops.com The Building Regulations 2010
C
Site preparation and resistance to
contaminants and moisture
APPROVED DOCUMENT C
RIBA Bookshops
RIBA Bookshop, 66 Portland Place, London W1B 1AD. Tel +44 (0)191 244 5557
The Building Centre Bookshop, 26 Store Street, London, WC1E 7BT. Tel +44 (0)20 7692 4040
APPROVED DOCUMENT
C1 Site preparation and resistance to contaminants
C2 Resistance to moisture
n
Surrey TW9 4DU. Email: licensing@opsi.gov.uk. If you require this publication in
dm d 2 tin io
an alternative format please email alternativeformats@communities.gsi.gov.uk.
en an ora it
en 01 g
ts 3
am 10 rp ed
04
Cert no. TT-COC-002168
o
20
20 c n
For use in England*
i
ONLINE VERSION
MAIN CHANGES MADE BY THE MAIN CHANGES IN THE APPROVED DOCUMENTS
2013 AMENDMENTS 2004 EDITION The following documents have been published
to give practical guidance about how to meet the
The main changes, which apply only to England*, This edition replaced the 1992 (with 2000 Building Regulations. You can find the date of the
are to: amendments) edition. The main changes were: edition approved by the Secretary of State at
• Guidance on radon protective measures. • Site investigation recommended as the method www.planningportal.gov.uk.
for determining how much unsuitable material Approved Document A
• References to British Standards design
should be removed. Structure
standards.
• Requirement C1(2) applied to material change Approved Document B: Volume 1
• Contaminated land guidance, including
of use as set out in Regulations 5 and 6. Fire safety – Dwellinghouses
removal of Annex A.
• Remedial measures for dealing with land Approved Document B: Volume 2
• Materials and workmanship.
affected by contaminants expanded to include Fire safety – Buildings other than dwellinghouses
There have been no changes to Part A of Schedule biological, chemical and physical treatment
1 to the Building Regulations. processes. Approved Document C
Site preparation and resistance to contaminants
• The area of land around the building subject to
MAIN CHANGES MADE BY THE measures to deal with contaminants.
and moisture
2010 AMENDMENTS • Guidance on protection from radon expanded
Approved Document D
Toxic substances
The 2010 amendments reflect the Building to include buildings other than dwellings.
Regulations 2010 and Building (Approved Approved Document E
• Guidance included on sub-soil drainage Resistance to the passage of sound
Inspectors etc) Regulations 2010. The changes and the risk of transportation of water-born
mainly reflect regulation number changes as contaminants. Approved Document F
a result of re-ordering. There have been no Ventilation
amendments to the substantive requirements in • New guidance on condensation risks to floors,
Part C of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations. walls and roofs. Approved Document G
Sanitation, hot water safety and water efficiency
• Guidance provided on the use of moisture
resistance boards for flooring. Approved Document H
Drainage and waste disposal
• Updated guidance on assessing the suitability
of cavity walls for filling. Approved Document J
Combustion appliances and fuel storage systems
• Former requirement F2; Condensation in roofs,
transferred to Part C. Approved Document K
Protection from falling, collision and impact
Approved Document L1A
Conservation of fuel and power in new dwellings
Approved Document L1B
Conservation of fuel and power in existing
dwellings
Approved Document L2A
Conservation of fuel and power in new buildings
other than dwellings
Approved Document L2B
Conservation of fuel and power in existing
buildings other than dwellings
Approved Document M
Access to and use of buildings
Approved Document P
Electrical Safety – Dwellings
Approved Document 7
Materials and workmanship
* This approved document gives guidance for compliance with the Building Regulations for building work carried out in England. It also applies to building work
carried out on excepted energy buildings in Wales as defined in the Welsh Ministers (Transfer of Functions) (No. 2) Order 2009.
DIAGRAMS
1. Distribution of shrinkable clays and
principal sulphate/sulphide bearing
strata in England and Wales 13
2. Example of a conceptual model
for a site showing source–
pathway–receptor 15
3. Subsoil drain cut during excavation 23
4. Ground supported floor – construction 25
5. Suspended timber floor – construction 26
6. Suspended floor – preventing water
collection 26
7. Typical floors exposed from below 28
8. Damp-proof courses 30
9. Protecting inner leaf 30
10. Protection of wall head from
precipitation 31
11. Insulated external walls: examples 33
12. UK zones for exposure to driving rain 34
13. Windows reveals for use in areas of
severe or very severe exposure to
driving rain 37
14. Accessible threshold for use in
exposed areas 38
3
BS 7913:1998 Guide to the principles of the conservation of historic
buildings. Provides guidance on the principles that should be applied
when proposing work on historic buildings.
4
SPAB Information Sheet 4 The need for old buildings to ‘breathe’, 1986.
75
BRE Report BR 211 Radon: Guidance on protective measures for new
buildings (including supplementary advice for extensions, conversions
and refurbishment), 2007.
13
Part IIA of the Environmental Protection Act 1990 defines substance as
‘…any natural or artificial substance, whether in solid or liquid form or in
the form of gas or vapour.’
20
BRE Digest 411 Site investigation for low-rise building: direct
1.3 Where the site is potentially affected by investigations, 1995.
contaminants, a combined geotechnical and 21
BS 8103-1:2011 Structural design of low-rise buildings – Part 1: Code
geo-environmental investigation should be of practice for stability, site investigation, precast concrete floors and
ground floor slabs for housing.
considered. Guidance on assessing and 22
BRE Digest 298 Low-rise building foundations: the influence of trees
remediating sites affected by contaminants is in clay soils, 1999.
given in Section 2: Resistance to contaminants. 23
BRE Digest 240 Low-rise buildings on shrinkable clay soils: Part 1, 1993.
24
BRE Digest 241 Low-rise buildings on shrinkable clay soils: Part 2, 1993.
25
Subsidence damage to domestic buildings: lessons learned and
questions remaining, FBE, 2000.
26
NHBC Standards Chapter 4.2 Building near trees, 2003.
36
BS 5930:1999+A2:2010. Code of practice for site investigations.
27
BRE Digest 427 Low-rise buildings on fill.
28
BRE Report BR 424 Building on fill: Geotechnical aspects, 2001.
29
Department of the Environment Industry Profiles, 1996.
31
Environment Agency R & D Technical Report P291 Information on
land quality in England: Sources of information (including background
contaminants).
32
Environment Agency R & D Technical Report P292 Information on
land quality in Wales: Sources of information (including background
contaminants).
33
BRE Special Digest SD1 Concrete in aggressive ground, 2003.
of exposure. 37
BS 10175:2011 Code of practice for investigation of potentially
contaminated sites.
d. Risk evaluation – deciding whether the 38
National Groundwater & Contaminated Land Centre report NC/99/38/2
risks are acceptable or unacceptable. Guide to good practice for the development of conceptual models and
the selection and application of mathematical models of contaminant
Review all site data to decide whether transport processes in the subsurface.
estimated risks are unacceptable, taking 41
Human health toxicological assessment of contaminants in soil
into account the nature and scale of any (Science report – final SC050021/SR2), Environment Agency.
uncertainties associated with the risk http://www.environment-gency.gov.uk/static/documents/Research/
TOX_guidance_report_-_final.pdf
estimation process. 42
Updated technical background to the CLEA model
2.9 Guidance on the investigation of sites (Science Report: SC050021/SR3), Environment Agency.
http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/static/documents/Research/
potentially affected by contaminants is provided in: CLEA_report_-_final.pdf
46
HSE Report HSG 66 Protection of workers and the general public during
the development of contaminated land, 1991.
47
CIRIA Report 132 A guide to safe working practices for contaminated
land, 1993.
2.18 Cover systems involve the placement of a. Aggressive substances. These include
one or more layers of materials over the site to inorganic and organic acids, alkalis, organic
achieve one or more of the following objectives: solvents and inorganic chemicals such as
sulphates and chlorides which may affect the
a. break the pollutant linkage between receptors long-term durability of construction materials
and contaminants; (such as concrete, metals and plastics).
b. sustain vegetation; b. Combustible fill. This includes domestic
c. improve geotechnical properties; and waste, colliery spoil, coal, plastics, petrol-
soaked ground, etc. which, if ignited, may
d. reduce exposure to an acceptable level. lead to subterranean fires and consequent
2.19 Some of the building structures, e.g. damage to the structural stability of buildings,
foundations, sub-structure and ground floor, and the integrity or performance of services.
may, dependent on the circumstances and c. Expansive slags. The two main types are
construction, contribute to measures to provide blast furnace and steel making slag which
effective protection of health from contaminants. may expand some time after deposition –
2.20 Imported fill and soil for cover systems usually when water is introduced onto the site
should be assessed at source to ensure that it is – causing damage to buildings and services.
suitable for use48. Design and dimensioning of
cover systems, particularly soil based ones
typically used for gardens, should take account
of their long-term performance where intermixing
of the soil cover with the contaminants in the
ground can take place. Maintenance and
monitoring may be necessary. Gradual
intermixing due to natural effects and activities
such as burrowing animals, gardening, etc. 48
BS 3882:1994 Specification for topsoil.
needs to be considered. Excavations by 49
CIRIA Special Publication SP124 Barriers, liners and cover systems for
householders for garden features, etc. can containment and control of land contamination, 1996.
79
CIRIA Publication C506 Low-cost options for prevention of flooding from
sewers, 1998.
89
BS 8500-1:2002 Concrete. Complementary British Standard to BS EN
206-1 Method of specifying and guidance for the specifier.
Alternative approach
4.16 The requirement can also be met (see
paragraph 4.14 above) by following the relevant
recommendations of Clause 11 of BS CP
102:197394.
Suspended concrete
ground floors (moisture
from the ground)
4.17 Any suspended floor of in situ or precast
concrete, including beam and block floors, next
to the ground will meet the requirement if it will
adequately prevent the passage of moisture to
the upper surface and if the reinforcement is
protected against moisture.
Technical solution
4.18 One solution for a suspended concrete
floor could be:
a. in situ concrete at least 100mm thick (but 8
Improving the flood performance of new buildings – Flood resilient
thicker if the structural design requires) construction, Communities and Local Government, Defra and the
containing at least 300kg of cement for Environment Agency, 2007.
each m3 of concrete; or 90
BS 5628-3:2001 Code of practice for use of masonry. Materials and
components, design and workmanship.
b. precast concrete construction with or without 91
BS 7331:1990 Specification for direct surfaced wood chipboard based
infilling slabs; and on thermosetting resins.
92
BS EN 312-5:1997 Particleboards. Specifications. Requirements for
c. reinforcing steel protected by concrete cover load-bearing boards for use in humid conditions.
of at least 40mm if the concrete is in situ and 93
BRE Digest 429 Timbers: their natural durability and resistance to
at least the thickness required for a moderate preservative treatment, 1998.
exposure if the concrete is precast. 94
BS CP 102:1973 Protection of buildings against water from the ground.
Floors (resistance to
surface condensation
and mould growth)
4.22 A floor will meet the requirement if:
a. a ground floor is designed and constructed
so that the thermal transmittance (U-value)
does not exceed 0.7W/m2K at any point; and
b. in the case of all floors, the junctions between
elements are designed to Accredited
Construction Details99, or follow the guidance
of BRE IP17/01100.
96
BS 5250:2002 Code of practice for the control of condensation
in buildings.
97
BS EN ISO 13788:2002 Hygrothermal performance of building
components and building elements. Internal surface temperature
to avoid critical surface humidity and interstitial condensation.
Calculation methods.
98
BRE Report BR 262 Thermal insulation: avoiding risks, 2002.
99
Accredited Construction Details which can be downloaded from
www.planningportal.gov.uk/buildingregulations/approveddocuments/
partl/bcassociateddocuments9/acd.
100
BRE Information Paper IP17/01 Assessing the effects of thermal
bridging at junctions and around openings, 2001.
101
BS 8215:1991 Code of practice for design and installation of
damp-proof courses in masonry construction.
102
BS 8102:1990 Code of practice for protection of structures against
water from the ground.
Cavity insulation
5.15 A full or partial fill insulating material may
be placed in the cavity between the outer leaf
and an inner leaf of masonry subject to the
following conditions:
a. The suitability of a wall for installing insulation
into the cavity should be determined either by
reference to the map in Diagram 12 and the
associated Table 4 or following the calculation
or assessment procedure in current British or 107
BS 5628-3:2001 Code of practice for use of masonry. Materials and
CEN standards. When partial fill materials are components, design and workmanship.
to be used, the residual cavity should not be 108
BS 5628-3:2001 Code of practice for use of masonry. Materials and
components, design and workmanship.
less than 50mm nominal; and
109
BS 5617:1985 Specification for urea-formaldehyde (UF) foam systems
b. A rigid (board or batt) thermal insulating material suitable for thermal insulation of cavity walls with masonry or concrete
built into the wall should be the subject of inner and outer leaves.
75 4 3 4 3 3 1 1
100 4 4 4 3 3 1 2
125 4 4 4 3 3 1 2
150 4 4 4 4 4 1 2
Injected fill 50 4 2 3 2 2 1 1
not UF foam
75 4 3 4 3 3 1 1
100 4 3 4 3 3 1 1
125 4 4 4 3 3 1 2
150 4 4 4 4 4 1 2
Injected fill 50 4 2 3 2 1 1 1
UF foam
75 4 2 3 2 2 1 1
100 4 2 3 2 2 1 1
Partial fill
Residual 50 4 4 4 4 3 1 1
50mm cavity
Residual 75 4 4 4 4 4 1 1
75mm cavity
Residual 100 4 4 4 4 4 2 1
100mm cavity
Internal insulation
Clear cavity 50 4 3 4 3 3 1 1
50mm
5.16 If the map given in Diagram 12 is used, (The national exposure zone value can be more
determine the national exposure and, where accurately calculated from the larger scale maps
appropriate, apply the following modifiers: and correction factors given in BS 8104:1992112.)
i. where local conditions accentuate wind
effects, such as open hillsides or valleys
where the wind is funnelled onto the wall,
add one to this exposure zone value;
ii. where walls do not face into the prevailing
wind, subtract one from this exposure
zone value.
112
BS 8104:1992 Code of practice for assessing exposure of walls to
wind-driven rain.
a. the external landing (Diagram 14) is laid to a b. the junctions between elements and details
fall between 1 in 40 and 1 in 60 in a single of openings, such as doors and windows,
direction away from the doorway; are designed to Accredited Construction
b. the sill leading up to the door threshold has a Details99, or follow the guidance of BRE
maximum slope of 15°. IP17/01132.
Further advice for the development of accessible
thresholds is given in BRE GBG 47126 and the
TSO document127.
to surface condensation BRE GBG 47 Level external thresholds: reducing moisture penetration
126
Technical solution
6.6 Roofing systems may be: 133
Approved Document 7: Materials and workmanship, DCLG, 2013
edition.
a. impervious including metal, plastic and 134
BS 8000-6:1990 Workmanship on building sites. Code of practice for
bituminous products; or slating and tiling of roofs and claddings.
Roofs (resistance to
damage from interstitial
condensation)
6.10 A roof will meet the requirement if it is
designed and constructed in accordance with
Clause 8.4 of BS 5250:2002141 and BS EN ISO
13788:2002142. Further guidance is given in the
BRE Report BR 262143.
6.11 The requirement will be met by the
ventilation of cold deck roofs, i.e. those roofs
where the moisture from the building can permeate
the insulation. For the purposes of health and
safety it may not always be necessary to provide
ventilation to small roofs such as those over
porches and bay windows. Although a part of
a roof which has a pitch of 70° or more is to be
insulated as though it were a wall, the provisions
in this document apply to roofs of any pitch.
6.12 To avoid excessive moisture transfer to
roof voids gaps and penetrations for pipes and
electrical wiring should be filled and sealed; this
is particularly important in areas of high humidity,
e.g. bathrooms and kitchens. An effective
draught seal should be provided to loft hatches
to reduce inflow of warm air and moisture.
6.13 Because of the high internal temperatures
and humidities, there is a particular risk of
interstitial condensation in the roofs of swimming
pools and other buildings in which high levels of
moisture are generated; specialist advice should
be sought when these are being designed.
Roofs (resistance to
surface condensation
and mould growth)
6.14 A roof will meet the requirement if:
a. it is designed and constructed so that the
thermal transmittance (U-value) does not 99
Accredited Construction Details which can be downloaded from
exceed 0.35W/m2K at any point; and www.planningportal.gov.uk/buildingregulations/approveddocuments/
partl/bcassociateddocuments9/acd.
b. the junctions between elements and the 139
MCRMA Technical Paper 6 Profiled metal roofing design guide,
details of openings, such as windows, revised edition, 1996.
are designed to Accredited Construction 140
MCRMA Technical Paper 9 Composite roof and wall cladding panel
Details99, or follow the guidance of BRE design guide, 1995.
D
Toxic substances
APPROVED DOCUMENT
D1 Cavity insulation
n
ts 3 2,
dm d 2 2 io
en 01 00
en an ting it
am 10 ra ed
20 rp 2
co 9
o
19
Cavity insulation
D1. If insulating material is inserted into a cavity in a cavity
wall, reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent the
subsequent permeation of any toxic fumes from that material
into any part of the building occupied by people.
E
Resistance to the passage of sound
APPROVED DOCUMENT
E1 Protection against sound from other parts of the building and
adjoining buildings
E2 Protection against sound within a dwelling-house etc
E3 Reverberation in the common internal parts of buildings
containing flats or rooms for residential purposes
E4 Acoustic conditions in schools
Regulation 41 The Building Regulations 2010
Regulation 20(1) and (5) The Building (Approved Inspections etc)
Regulations 2010
on
ts 01 ,
en d 2 004
iti
5
dm an 2
ed
en 13 ting
03
am , 20 ra
o
10 rp
20
20 nco
Section 5: Internal walls and floors A2 Formula for calculation of wall leaf mass
for new buildings 64 per unit area 73
Introduction 64 A3 Simplified equations 73
Doors 64 A4 Mass per unit area of surface finishes 74
Layout 64 A5 Mass per unit area of floors 74
Junction requirements for internal walls 64
Annex B: Procedures for sound
Junction requirements for internal floors 64 insulation testing 75
Internal wall type A: Timber or metal B1 Introduction 75
frames with plasterboard linings on each
B2 Field measurement of sound insulation
side of frame 64
of separating walls and floors for the purposes
Internal wall type B: Timber or metal of Regulation 40 and Regulation 20(1) & (5) 75
frames with plasterboard linings on each
B3 Laboratory measurements 76
side of frame and absorbent material 65
B4 Information to be included in test reports 77
Internal wall type C: Concrete block wall,
plaster or plasterboard finish on both sides 65
Annex C: Glossary 78
Internal wall type D: Aircrete block wall
plaster or plasterboard finish on both sides 65 Annex D: References 80
Internal floor type A: Concrete planks 66 D1 Standards 80
Internal floor type B: Concrete beams with D2 Guidance 80
infilling blocks, bonded screed and ceiling 66
D3 Legislation 81
Internal floor type C: Timber or metal joist,
with wood based board and plasterboard Annex E: Design details approved
ceiling, and absorbent material 66 by Robust Details Ltd 82
2.16 Wall type 2.2 29 3.9 Floor types 1.1C and 1.2B – wall type 2 47
2.17 Wall type 2.3 29 3.10 Floor type 1.1C – wall types 3.1 and 3.2 48
2.18 Wall type 2.4 30 3.11 Floating floors (a) and (b) 49
2.19 Wall types 2.1 and 2.2 – external 3.12 Floor type 2.1C(a) – floor type 2.1 with
cavity wall with masonry inner leaf 30 ceiling treatment C and floating floor (a) 50
2.20 Wall types 2.3 and 2.4 – external cavity 3.13 Floor type 2.1C(b) – floor type 2.1 with
wall with masonry inner leaf – stagger 31 ceiling treatment C and floating floor (b) 50
2.21 Wall type 2 – tied junction – external 3.14 Floor type 2.2B(a) – floor type 2.2 with
cavity wall with internal masonry wall 31 ceiling treatment B and floating floor (a) 50
2.22 Wall type 2 – external cavity wall 3.15 Floor type 2.2B(b) – floor type 2.2 with
with timber frame inner leaf 31 ceiling treatment B and floating floor (b) 50
2.23 Wall type 2 – internal timber floor 32 3.16 Floor type 2 – external cavity wall
with masonry internal leaf 51
2.24 Wall type 2 – internal concrete floor
and concrete ground floor 32 3.17 Floor type 2 – floor penetrations 52
2.25 Wall type 2 – ceiling and roof junction 32 3.18 Floor types 2.2B(a) and 2.2B(b) –
wall type 1 52
2.26 External cavity wall at eaves level 33
3.19 Floor type 2.1C – wall type 3.1 and 3.2 52
2.27 Wall type 3.1 with independent
composite panels 34 3.20 Floor type 3.1A 53
2.28 Wall type 3.1 with independent 3.21 Floor type 3 – floor penetrations 55
plasterboard panels 34
3.22 Floor type 3 – wall type 1 55
2.29 Wall type 3.2 with independent
3.23 Floor type 3 – wall type 2 56
composite panels 35
4.1 Treatments for material change of use 58
2.30 Wall type 3.3 with independent
composite panels 35 4.2 Wall treatment 1 59
2.31 Wall type 3 – external cavity wall 4.3 Floor treatment 1 60
with masonry inner leaf 36
4.4 Floor treatment 1 – high window
2.32 Wall type 3 – external cavity wall head detail 60
with internal timber wall 36
4.5 Floor treatment 1 – wall treatment 1 61
2.33 Wall type 3 – internal timber floor 37
4.6 Floor treatment 2 61
2.34 Wall types 3.1 and 3.2 – internal
4.7 Floor treatment 2 – wall treatment 1 62
concrete floor 37
4.8 Stair treatment 62
2.35 Wall types 3.1 and 3.2 – ceiling and
roof junction 38 4.9 Floor penetrations 63
2.36 External cavity wall at eaves level 38 5.1 Internal wall type A 65
2.37 Wall type 4.1 40 5.2 Internal wall type B 65
2.38 Wall type 4 – external cavity wall 5.3 Internal wall type C 65
with timber frame inner leaf 40
5.4 Internal wall type D 66
3.1 Types of separating floor 42
5.5 Internal floor type A 66
3.2 Ceiling treatments A, B and C 44
5.6 Internal floor type B 66
3.3 Floor type 1.1C – floor type 1.1
5.7 Internal floor type C 66
with ceiling treatment C 45
6.1 Ceiling void and roof space
3.4 Floor type 1.2B – floor type 1.2
(only applicable to rooms for
with ceiling treatment B 45
residential purposes) 68
3.5 Floor type 1.2B – external cavity wall
A.1 Block and mortar dimensions 73
with masonry inner leaf 46
A.2 Beam and block floor dimensions 74
3.6 Floor type 1 – floor penetrations 46
3.7 Floor type 1.1C – wall type 1 47
3.8 Floor type 1.2B – wall type 1 47
TABLES
0.1a Dwelling-houses and flats –
performance standards for
separating walls, separating
floors, and stairs that have a
separating function 12
0.1b Rooms for residential purposes –
performance standards for
separating walls, separating
floors, and stairs that have a
separating function 12
0.2 Laboratory values for new
internal walls and floors within
dwelling-houses, flats and rooms
for residential purposes, whether
purpose built or formed by
material change of use 13
2.1 Separating wall junctions
reference table 21
3.1 Separating floor junctions
reference table 43
7.1 Absorption coefficient data for
common materials in buildings 70
7.2 Example calculation for an
entrance hall (Method B) 71
A.1 Blocks laid flat 73
A.2 Blocks laid on edge 74
*On this page, references to the 2000 Regulations have not been updated to reflect changes in the 2010 Regulations.
Approved Documents are intended to provide Building Regulations are made for specific
guidance for some of the more common building purposes, primarily the health and safety, welfare
situations. However, there may well be alternative and convenience of people and for energy
ways of achieving compliance with the requirements. conservation. Standards and other technical
Thus there is no obligation to adopt any particular specifications may provide relevant guidance to
solution contained in an Approved Document if the extent that they relate to these considerations.
you prefer to meet the relevant requirement in However, they may also address other aspects of
some other way. performance or matters which, although they
relate to health and safety etc., are not covered by
Other requirements the Building Regulations.
The guidance contained in an Approved Document When an Approved Document makes reference
relates only to the particular requirements of the to a named standard, the relevant version of the
Regulations which the document addresses. The standard to which it refers is the one listed at the
building work will also have to comply with the end of the publication. However, if this version
requirements of any other relevant paragraphs has been revised or updated by the issuing
in Schedule 1 to the Regulations. standards body, the new version may be used as
a source of guidance provided it continues to
There are Approved Documents which give address the relevant requirements of the
guidance on each of the parts of Schedule 1 Regulations.
and on Regulation 7.
THE WORKPLACE (HEALTH, SAFETY
AND WELFARE) REGULATIONS 1992
LIMITATION ON REQUIREMENTS
The Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare)
In accordance with Regulation 8, the requirements in Regulations 1992 contain some requirements
Parts A to D, F to K and N (except for paragraphs which affect building design. The main requirements
H2 and J7) of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations are now covered by the Building Regulations, but
do not require anything to be done except for the for further information see – Workplace health,
purpose of securing reasonable standards of health safety and welfare. L24 Workplace (Health, Safety
and safety for persons in or about buildings (and and Welfare) Regulations 1992. Approved Code
any others who may be affected by buildings or of Practice and Guidance, 1998. ISBN 0 71760
matters connected with buildings). This is one of 413 6.
the categories of purpose for which building
regulations may be made. The Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare)
Regulations 1992 apply to the common parts of
Paragraphs H2 and J7 are excluded from flats and similar buildings if people such as cleaners
Regulation 8 because they deal directly with and caretakers are employed to work in these
prevention of the contamination of water. Parts E common parts. Where the requirements of the
and M (which deal, respectively, with resistance to Building Regulations that are covered by this
the passage of sound, and access and facilities for Part do not apply to dwellings, the provisions
disabled people) are excluded from Regulation 8 may still be required in the situations described
because they address the welfare and convenience above in order to satisfy the Workplace Regulations.
of building users. Part L is excluded from Regulation 8
because it addresses the conservation of fuel and
power. All these matters are amongst the purposes,
other than health and safety, that may be
addressed by Building Regulations.
(a)
A company incorporated under the Companies Acts with the
registration number 04980223.
Walls 45 -
Floors and stairs 45 62
Walls 43 -
Floors and stairs 43 64
Walls 43 -
Floors and stairs 45 62
Walls 43 -
Floors and stairs 43 64
Table 0.2 Laboratory values for new internal walls and floors within dwelling-houses,
flats and rooms for residential purposes, whether purpose built or formed
by material change of use
Airborne sound insulation
Rw dB
(Minimum values)
Walls 40
Floors 40
0.3 The sound insulation testing should be on the same premises would normally be considered
carried out in accordance with the procedure to meet the requirements, (b) a building constructed
described in Annex B of this Approved Document, from sub-assemblies obtained from other premises
which is the procedure formally approved by the or from stock manufactured before 1 July 2003
Secretary of State for the purpose of paragraph would normally be considered to meet the
(2)(a) of Regulation 41 and paragraph (2)(a) of requirements if it satisfies the relevant requirements
Regulation 20(1) and (5). The results of the testing of Part E that were applicable in 1992 or, for school
must be recorded in the manner described in buildings, the relevant provisions relating to
paragraph 1.41 of Section 1 of this Approved acoustics set out in the 1997 edition of Building
Document, which is the manner approved by the Bulletin 87 (ISBN 011271013 1).
Secretary of State for the purposes of paragraph
0.7 In the case of some historic buildings
(3)(a) of Regulation 41 and paragraph (3)(a) of
undergoing a material change of use, it may not
Regulation 20(1) and (5). The test results must be
be practical to improve the sound insulation to
given to the building control body in accordance
the standards set out in Tables 1a and 1b. The
with the time limits set down in Regulation 41 (for
need to conserve the special characteristics of
cases where building control is being done by the
such historic buildings needs to be recognised1,
local authority) or Regulation 20(1) and (5) (in
and in such work, the aim should be to improve
cases where it is being done by an Approved
sound insulation to the extent that it is practically
Inspector).
possible, always provided that the work does not
0.4 The person carrying out the building work prejudice the character of the historic building, or
should arrange for sound insulation testing to be increase the risk of long-term deterioration to the
carried out by a test body with appropriate third building fabric or fittings. In arriving at an appropriate
party accreditation. Test bodies conducting testing balance between historic building conservation and
should preferably have UKAS accreditation (or improving sound insulation it would be appropriate
a European equivalent) for field measurements. to take into account the advice of the local planning
The DCLG also regards members of the ANC authority’s conservation officer. In such cases it
Registration Scheme as suitably qualified to carry will be reasonable to improve the sound insulation
out pre-completion testing. as much as is practical, and to affix a notice
showing the sound insulation value(s) obtained
0.5 Sections 2, 3, 4 and 6 of this Approved
by testing in accordance with Regulation 41
Document give examples of constructions which,
or 20(1) and (5), in a conspicuous place inside
if built correctly, should achieve the sound insulation
the building.
values for dwelling-houses and flats set out in
Table 1a, and the values for rooms for residential 0.8 The performance standards set out in Tables
purposes set out in Table 1b. The guidance in these 1a and 1b are appropriate for walls, floors and stairs
sections is not exhaustive and other designs, that separate spaces used for normal domestic
materials or products may be used to achieve purposes. A higher standard of sound insulation
the required performance. may be required between spaces used for normal
domestic purposes and communal or non-domestic
0.6 Buildings constructed from sub-assemblies
purposes. In these situations the appropriate level
that are delivered newly made or selected from
of sound insulation will depend on the noise
stock are no different from any other new building
generated in the communal or non-domestic space.
and must comply with all requirements in Schedule 1
Specialist advice may be needed to establish if
of the Building Regulations 2010. In some
a higher standard of sound insulation is required
applications, such as buildings that are
and, if so, to determine the appropriate level.
constructed to be temporary dwelling-houses,
flats, rooms for residential purposes, or school
buildings, the provision of reasonable resistance
to the passage of sound may vary depending
upon the circumstances in the particular case.
BS 7913 The principles of the conservation of historic buildings, 1998
For example, (a) a building created by dismantling,
1
Diagram 0.1 Requirement E1
Key: G = guidance available; N = no guidance available (seek specialist advice); X = do not build
Note:
Where any building element functions as a separating element (e.g. a ground floor that is also a separating floor for a basement flat)
then the separating element requirements should take precedence.
Do not
a. Do not try and convert a cavity separating
wall to a type 1 (solid masonry) separating
wall by inserting mortar or concrete into
the cavity between the two leaves.
b. Do not change to a solid wall
construction in the roof space as a
rigid connection between the leaves
will reduce wall performance.
c. Do not build cavity walls off a continuous
solid concrete slab floor.
d. Do not use deep sockets and chases in
the separating wall, do not place them
back to back.
• minimum mass per unit area including finish a. the outer leaf of the wall may be of any
150kg/m²; construction; and
• minimum cavity width of 75mm; b. the cavity should be stopped with a flexible
closer (for wall types 2.1 and 2.2 see Diagram
• plasterboard, each sheet of minimum mass 2.19, for wall types 2.3 and 2.4 see Diagram
per unit area 10kg/m², on both room faces; or 2.20) unless the cavity is fully filled with mineral
• 13mm plaster on both room faces. wool or expanded polystyrene beads (seek
manufacturer’s advice for other suitable materials).
2.74 The separating wall should be joined to
Example of wall type 2.4 the inner leaf of the external cavity wall by one
of the following methods:
The required mass per unit area would be
achieved by using a. Bonded. The separating wall should be bonded
to the external wall in such a way that the
• 100mm aircrete block leaves separating wall contributes at least 50% of
• block density 650kg/m³ the bond at the junction.
Do not
Do not fix, tie or connect the free standing
panels or the frame to the masonry core.
Diagram 2.35 Wall types 3.1 and 3.2 – Diagram 2.36 External cavity wall at
ceiling and roof junction eaves level
Junctions with ceiling and roof space Wall type 3.3 (cavity masonry core)
2.133 The masonry core should be continuous 2.139 Where the roof or loft space is not a habitable
to the underside of the roof. room and there is a ceiling with a minimum mass
per unit area 10kg/m² and with sealed joints, the
2.134 The junction between the separating wall and independent panels may be omitted in the roof
the roof should be filled with a flexible closer which space but the cavity masonry core should be
is also suitable as a fire stop. See Diagram 2.35. maintained to the underside of the roof.
2.135 The junction between the ceiling and Junctions with separating floors
independent panels should be sealed with tape
or caulked with sealant. 2.140 There are important details in Section 3
concerning junctions between wall type 3 and
2.136 Where there is an external cavity wall, separating floors.
the cavity should be closed at eaves level with
a suitable flexible material (e.g. mineral wool).
See Diagram 2.36.
Note: A rigid connection between the inner and
external wall leaves should be avoided. If a rigid
material is used, then it should only be rigidly
bonded to one leaf.
Wall types 3.1 and 3.2 (solid masonry core)
2.137 Where the roof or loft space is not a habitable
room and there is a ceiling with a minimum mass
per unit area 10kg/m² and with sealed joints, the
independent panels may be omitted in the roof
space and the mass per unit area of the separating
wall above the ceiling may be a minimum of
150kg/m². See Diagram 2.35.
2.138 If lightweight aggregate blocks of density
less than 1200kg/m³ are used above ceiling level,
then one side should be sealed with cement paint
or plaster skim.
Do
a. Do ensure that where fire stops are needed
in the cavity between frames they are either
flexible or fixed to only one frame.
b. Do stagger the position of sockets on
opposite sides of the separating wall, and
use a similar thickness of cladding behind
the socket box.
c. Do ensure that each layer of plasterboard
is independently fixed to the stud frame.
d. Do control flanking transmission from walls
and floors connected to the separating wall
as described in the guidance on junctions.
Do not
a. Where it is necessary to connect the two
leaves together for structural reasons,
do not use ties of greater cross section
than 40mm x 3mm fixed to the studwork
at or just below ceiling level and do not
set them at closer than 1.2m centres.
b. Do not locate sockets back to back. A
minimum edge to edge stagger of 150mm
is recommended. Do not chase plasterboard.
Floor penetrations G G G
Note:
Where any building element functions as a separating element (e.g. a ground floor that is also a separating floor for a basement flat)
then the separating element requirements should take precedence.
Do not
Do not create a rigid or direct connection
between the independent ceiling and the
floor base.
Diagram 3.10 Floor type 1.1C – wall Floor type 2: concrete base with
types 3.1 and 3.2 ceiling and floating floor
3.56 The resistance to airborne and impact
sound depends on the mass per unit area of the
concrete base, as well as the mass per unit area
and isolation of the floating layer and the ceiling.
The floating floor reduces impact sound at source.
Constructions
3.57 The construction consists of a concrete
floor base with a floating floor and a ceiling. The
floating floor consists of a floating layer and a
resilient layer.
3.58 Two floor type 2 constructions (types 2.1C
and 2.2B) are described in this guidance, which
should be combined with the appropriate ceiling
and any one of the three floating floor options (a),
(b) or (c).
3.59 Details of how junctions should be made
to limit flanking transmission are also described
in this guidance.
Limitations
3.60 Where resistance to airborne sound only is
required the full construction should still be used.
3.61 Points to watch
Floor type 1.2B
3.50 A separating floor type 1.2B base (excluding Do
any screed) should not be continuous through a
separating wall type 3. a. Do fill all joints between parts of the floor
to avoid air paths.
3.51 Where separating wall type 3.2 is used with
floor type 1.2B and the planks are parallel to the b. Do give special attention to workmanship
separating wall the first joint should be a minimum and detailing at the perimeter and wherever
of 300mm from the centreline of the masonry core. a pipe or duct penetrates the floor in order
to reduce flanking transmission and to
Junctions with separating wall type 3.3 avoid air paths.
(cavity masonry core) c. Do build a separating concrete floor base
3.52 The mass per unit area of any leaf that is into the walls around its entire perimeter
supporting or adjoining the floor should be at least where the walls are masonry.
120kg/m² excluding finish. d. Do fill with mortar any gap that may form
3.53 The floor base (excluding any screed) should between the head of a masonry wall and
be carried through to the cavity face of the leaf of the underside of the concrete floor.
the core. The cavity should not be bridged. e. Do control flanking transmission from
Floor type 1.2B walls connected to the separating floor
as described in the guidance on junctions.
3.54 Where floor type 1.2B is used and the planks
are parallel to the separating wall the first joint
should be a minimum of 300mm from the inner face
of the adjacent cavity leaf of the masonry core.
Do not
Junctions with separating wall type 4 – timber Do not allow the floor base to bridge
frames with absorbent material a cavity in a cavity masonry wall.
3.55 No guidance available (seek specialist advice).
3.64 Floating floor (a) Timber raft floating layer Note: For details on the performance and
with resilient layer installation of proprietary floating floors, seek
advice from the manufacturer.
Floating floor (a) should meet the following
specification:
• timber raft of board material (with bonded
edges, e.g. tongued and grooved) of minimum
For flats where there are separating walls the Diagram 3.19 Floor type 2.1C – wall
following may also apply: types 3.1 and 3.2
Junctions with a separating wall type 1 –
solid masonry
Floor type 2.1C
3.83 A separating floor type 2.1C base (excluding
any screed) should pass through a separating
wall type 1.
Floor type 2.2B
3.84 A separating floor type 2.2B base (excluding
any screed) should not be continuous through a
separating wall type 1. See Diagram 3.18.
Do
a. Do ensure that the independent panel and
its supporting frame are not in contact with
the existing wall.
b. Do seal the perimeter of the independent
panel with tape or sealant.
Do not
Do not tightly compress the absorbent
material as this may bridge the cavity.
Do
a. Do remember to apply appropriate remedial
work to the existing construction.
b. Do seal the perimeter of the independent
ceiling with tape or sealant.
Do
a. Do remember to apply appropriate remedial
work to the existing construction.
b. Do use the correct density of resilient layer
and ensure it can carry the anticipated load.
c. Do allow for movement of materials
e.g. expansion of chipboard after laying
(to maintain isolation).
d. Do carry the resilient layer up at all room
edges to isolate the floating layer from the
wall surface.
e. Do leave a small gap (approx. 5mm)
between skirting and floating layer and fill
with a flexible sealant.
f. Do lay resilient materials in sheets with
joints tightly butted and taped.
g. Do seal the perimeter of any new ceiling
Floor treatment 2: platform floor with tape or sealant.
with absorbent material
4.31 The resistance to airborne and impact
sound depends on the total mass of the floor, Do not
the effectiveness of the resilient layer and the
absorbent material. Do not bridge between the floating layer
and the base or surrounding walls (e.g. with
4.32 Platform floor with absorbent material services or fixings that penetrate the
(see Diagram 4.6) resilient layer).
Where this treatment is used to improve an existing
timber floor, a layer of mineral wool (minimum
thickness 100mm, minimum density 10kg/m³)
should be laid between the joists in the floor cavity. Diagram 4.6 Floor treatment 2
The floating layer should be:
• a minimum of two layers of board material;
• minimum total mass per unit area 25kg/m²;
• each layer of minimum thickness 8mm;
• fixed together (e.g. spot bonded or glued/
screwed) with joints staggered.
The floating layer should be laid loose on a resilient
layer. The resilient layer specification is:
• mineral wool, minimum thickness 25mm,
density 60 to 100kg/m³;
• the mineral wool may be paper faced on
the underside.
Do
a. Do seal the joint between casings and
ceiling with tape or sealant.
b. Do leave a nominal gap (approx. 5mm)
between the casing and any floating layer
and fill with sealant.
Construction
4.46 Pipes and ducts that penetrate a floor
separating habitable rooms in different flats should
be enclosed for their full height in each flat.
4.47 The enclosure should be constructed
of material having a mass per unit area of at
least 15kg/m².
4.48 Either line the enclosure, or wrap the duct
or pipe within the enclosure, with 25mm unfaced
mineral wool.
4.49 The enclosure may go down to the floor
base if floor treatment 2 is used but ensure isolation
from the floating layer.
4.50 Penetrations through a separating floor by
ducts and pipes should have fire protection to
satisfy Building Regulation Part B – Fire safety.
Fire stopping should be flexible and also prevent
rigid contact between the pipe and floor.
Note: There are requirements for ventilation of
ducts at each floor where they contain gas pipes.
Gas pipes may be contained in a separate
ventilated duct or they can remain unducted.
Where a gas service is installed, it shall comply
with relevant codes and standards to ensure
safe and satisfactory operation. See The Gas
Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998,
SI 1998/2451.
5.5 Internal wall type C or D: Concrete or 5.14 Fill all gaps around internal walls to avoid
aircrete block air paths between rooms.
Step 2 Obtain values of absorption coefficients for the carpet, painted concrete block walls and the timber doors. In this case,
the values are taken from Table 7.1.
Step 3 Calculate the absorption area (m2) related to each absorptive surface (i.e. for the floor, walls and doors) in octave frequency
bands (Absorption area = surface area x absorption coefficient).
Step 4 Calculate the sum of the absorption areas (m2) obtained in Step 3.
Step 5 Calculate the total absorption area (AT) required for the entrance hall. The volume is 30m3 and therefore 0.2 x 30.0 = 6.0m2 of
absorption area is required.
AT (m2) 6.00
Step 6 Calculate additional absorption area (A) to be provided by ceiling (m2). If any values of minimum absorption area are
negative, e.g. see 2000Hz and 4000Hz, then there is sufficient absorption from the other surfaces to meet the requirement
without any additional absorption in this octave band (Additional absorption = AT – total absorption area (from Step 5)).
Step 7 Calculate required absorption coefficient (a) to be provided by ceiling (Required absorption coefficient a = Additional
absorption area / area of ceiling).
Required absorption coefficient, a 0.28 0.25 0.14 Any value Any value
(3.41 ÷ 12.0)
Step 8 Identify a ceiling product from manufacturer’s laboratory measurement data that provides absorption coefficients that
exceed the values calculated in Step 7.
A3 Simplified equations
A3.1 Two examples are given (see Table A.1 and
A.2) using the equation in A2.1. For each of these
examples a simplified equation is obtained for that
type of construction.
• d = 0.010m
• T = 0.215m
• L = 0.450m
• H = 0.110m
Note: This formula provides the mass per unit
area of the block/brick construction without • V = 0m3
surface finish.
• rm = 1800kg/m3
Note: See Diagram A.1 for block and
mortar dimensions. • No surface finish
A2.2 When calculating the mass per unit area Mass per unit area = 20.2MB + 43.0kg/m2
for bricks and blocks use the density at the Substituting for MB in this formula gives the following values:
appropriate moisture content from Table 3.2,
CIBSE Guide A (1999). Block mass, MB (kg) Mass per unit area (kg/m2)
A2.3 For cavity walls the mass per unit area 6 164
of each leaf is calculated and added together. 8 205
A2.4 Where surface finishes are used the mass 10 245
per unit area of the finish is added to the mass per
unit area of the wall 12 285
14 326
16 366
18 407
• d = 0.010m
• T = 0.100m
• L = 0.450m
• H = 0.225m
• V = 0m3
• rm = 1800kg/m3
• No surface finish
Note: See Diagram A.2 for beam and block
Single leaf wall:
Mass per unit area = 9.9MB + 11.8kg/m2 floor dimensions.
Cavity wall:
Mass per unit area = 19.8MB + 23.6kg/m2
Substituting for MB in this formula gives the following values: Diagram A.2 Beam and block floor
dimensions
Block mass, MB (kg) Mass per unit area (kg/m2)
Single leaf Cavity
6 71 142
8 91 182
10 111 222
12 131 261
14 150 301
16 170 340
18 190 380
B4 Information to be included in
test reports
Field test reports
B4.1 Paragraph 1.41 of this Approved Document
sets out the manner of recording the results of
testing done for the purposes of Regulation 41 or
Regulation 20(1) and (5), approved by the
Secretary of State under those Regulations.
Although not required, it may be useful to have a
description of the building including:
1. sketches showing the layout and dimensions
of rooms tested;
2. description of separating walls, external walls,
separating floors, and internal walls and floors
including details of materials used for their
construction and finishes;
3. mass per unit area in kg/m² of separating
walls, external walls, separating floors, and
internal walls and floors;
4. dimensions of any step and/or stagger
between rooms tested;
5. dimensions and position of any windows
or doors in external walls.
F
Ventilation
APPROVED DOCUMENT
Volume 1: Dwellings
Requirement F1: Means of ventilation
Regulations: 39, 42 and 44
This section deals with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (linings)
B2. (1) To inhibit the spread of fire within the building,
the internal linings shall—
(a) adequately resist the spread of flame over
their surfaces; and ➊
(b) have, if ignited, either a rate of heat release
or a rate of fire growth, which is reasonable in
the circumstances.
(2) In this paragraph “internal linings” means the
materials or products used in lining any partition,
wall, ceiling or other internal structure.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B2 is met by achieving a restricted spread of flame
over internal linings. The building fabric should make a limited contribution to fire growth,
including a low rate of heat release.
It is particularly important in circulation spaces, where linings may offer the main means by which
fire spreads and where rapid spread is most likely to prevent occupants from escaping.
Requirement B2 does not include guidance on the following.
➋
a. Generation of smoke and fumes.
b. The upper surfaces of floors and stairs.
c. Furniture and fittings.
Key
For further information about the use of technical guidance, see Chapter 7 in Volume 1 and Chapter F
in Volume 2 of the Manual to the Building Regulations.
Introduction i
What is an approved document? i
How is construction regulated in England? i
How do you comply with the Building Regulations? i
What do the Building Regulations cover? ii
When must a building control body be notified? ii
How to use this approved document iii
Where to get further help iv
Section 0: Introduction 1
Summary 1
Application 1
Selected key interactions with other parts of the Building Regulations 3
Summary
0.1 This approved document is Approved Document F, Volume 1: Dwellings. It gives guidance on how
to comply with Part F of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations. For guidance relating to non-
domestic buildings, use Approved Document F, Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings.
0.2 This approved document contains the following sections:
Application
0.3 The guidance in Approved Document F, Volume 1 applies only to dwellings.
For blocks of flats with shared communal rooms, Approved Document F, Volume 2: Buildings other
than dwellings should be consulted.
NOTE: Dwellings are self-contained units. Rooms for residential purposes and buildings that contain
only rooms for residential purposes are not dwellings and are covered by Approved Document F,
Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings.
Exemptions
0.4 Certain types of building are exempt from the Part F requirements of the Building Regulations.
These are outlined in paragraphs A7 to A13 of the Manual to the Building Regulations.
Emergency repairs
0.9 For emergency repairs, if it is not possible to notify the building control body in advance, the
building control body should be notified as soon as possible. If the installer is registered with a
competent person scheme, see Chapter 5 in Volume 1 and Chapter C in Volume 2 of the Manual to
the Building Regulations.
Minor works
0.10 Minor works must comply with the relevant requirements of the Building Regulations, but
the building control body does not need to be notified.
For mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning systems, minor works include any of the following.
a. Replacing parts.
b. Adding an output or control device if testing and adjusting the system would not affect its
energy efficiency or would not be possible.
c. Providing a self-contained mechanical ventilation or air-conditioning appliance when all the
following apply.
i. Any electrical work is exempt from a requirement to give advance notice to a building
control body.
ii. Testing and adjusting the system would not affect its energy efficiency or would not be
possible.
iii. The appliance is not installed in a room that contains an open-flued combustion appliance.
Live/work units
0.11 A unit that contains both living accommodation and space for commercial purposes (e.g. for a
workshop or office) should be treated as a dwelling if the commercial part can be reverted to
domestic use.
Mixed-use developments
0.13 When constructing a dwelling as part of a larger building that contains other types of
accommodation, sometimes called a mixed-use development, refer to the two volumes of
Approved Document F as follows.
a. For guidance on each individual dwelling, use this approved document: Approved Document F,
Volume 1: Dwellings.
b. For guidance on the non-dwelling parts of the building, such as shared communal rooms and
commercial or retail space, use Approved Document F, Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings.
This section deals with the requirements of Part F1(1) of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Means of ventilation Requirement F1 does not apply to a building or
space within a building:
F1. (1) There shall be adequate means of ventilation
provided for people in the building. a. into which people do not normally go;
b. which is used solely for storage; or
c. which is a garage used solely in connection with
a single dwelling.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement F1(1) is met if the dwelling has a means of ventilation that
achieves all of the following.
a. Extracts water vapour and indoor air pollutants from areas where they are produced in
significant quantities (e.g. kitchens, utility rooms and bathrooms) before they spread through the
building, following the guidance on extract ventilation in paragraphs 1.17 to 1.22.
b. Supplies a minimum level of outdoor air for occupants’ health, following the guidance for whole
dwelling ventilation in paragraphs 1.23 to 1.25.
c. Rapidly dilutes indoor air pollutants, and disperses water vapour when necessary in habitable
rooms, following the guidance for purge ventilation in paragraphs 1.26 to 1.31.
d. Minimises the entry of external air pollutants, following the guidance in Section 2.
e. Achieves all of the following, as far as is reasonably practicable.
i. Produces low levels of noise, following the guidance in paragraphs 1.5 to 1.7.
ii. Offers easy access for maintenance, following the guidance in paragraph 1.8.
iii. Provides protection from cold draughts.
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement F1(1) is met for work on an existing dwelling by following
the guidance in Section 3.
General
1.1 The aim of requirement F1(1) is to protect the health of occupants of the building by providing
adequate ventilation. Without adequate ventilation, mould and internal air pollution might become
hazardous to health.
NOTE: The guidance in this approved document is not designed to deal with the products of
tobacco smoking or vaping.
1.2 The building should provide the ventilation rates given in this section.
1.3 Other ventilation solutions may be used, if it can be shown to the building control body that they
satisfy requirement F1(1).
1.4 The ventilation rates set out in this approved document have been designed to meet the indoor
pollutant levels in Appendix B where the outside air is of reasonable quality. In areas where the
outside air is not of reasonable quality, Section 2 provides guidance on limiting the entry of
external air pollutants.
Noise
1.5 Mechanical ventilation systems, including both continuous and intermittent mechanical ventilation,
should be designed and installed to minimise noise. This includes doing all of the following.
a. Correctly sizing and jointing ducts.
b. Ensuring that equipment is appropriately and securely fixed, such as using resilient mountings
where noise carried by the structure of the building could be a problem.
c. Selecting appropriate equipment, including following paragraph 1.6.
1.6 For mechanical ventilation systems, fan units should be appropriately sized so that fans operating
in normal background ventilation mode are not overly noisy. This might require fans to be sized so
that they do not operate near maximum capacity when in normal background ventilation mode.
1.7 Account should be taken of outside noise when considering whether openable windows are
appropriate for purge ventilation.
NOTE: Although there is no requirement to undertake noise testing, achieving the levels in the
following guidance would ensure good acoustic conditions. The average A-weighted sound pressure
level for a ventilator operating under normal conditions and not at boost rates should not exceed
both of the following.
a. 30dB LAeq,T* for noise-sensitive rooms (e.g. bedrooms and living rooms) when a continuous
mechanical ventilation system is running on its minimum low rate.
b. 45dB LAeq,T* in less noise-sensitive rooms (e.g. kitchens and bathrooms) when a continuous
operation system is running at the minimum high rate or an intermittent operation system is
running.
Performance-based guidance
1.12 Performance criteria for acceptable levels of moisture and pollutants are given in Appendix B.
Ventilation rates designed to meet the performance criteria are given in Tables 1.1 to 1.3.
1.13 Ventilator sizes for the whole dwelling are also provided in Table 1.7 to help designers comply with
Part F of the Building Regulations in common situations.
1.14 Some ventilation system designs can, in certain circumstances, result in lower ventilation rates
than those stated in Table 1.1 and Table 1.2 (e.g. systems with automatic controls). Where lower
ventilation rates are proposed, expert advice should be obtained to demonstrate that the solution
meets the performance standards in Appendix B.
Extract ventilation
1.17 Extract ventilation to the outside should be provided in all of the following spaces.
a. Kitchens.
b. Utility rooms.
c. Bathrooms.
d. Sanitary accommodation.
1.18 Extract ventilation can be intermittent or continuous.
1.19 Minimum extract ventilation rates in litres per second (l/s) for intermittent operation extract
systems are given in Table 1.1. Minimum extract ventilation rates for continuous operation extract
systems are given in Table 1.2.
1.20 Extract ventilation terminals and fans, not including cooker extract hoods, should be installed to
comply with both of the following conditions.
a. As high as is practicable in the room.
b. A maximum of 400mm below the ceiling.
1.21 Where a cooker hood is used to extract to the outside, the height of the extract hood above the
hob surface should be either as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions or, if no specification is
available, between 650mm and 750mm.
Table 1.1 Minimum extract ventilation rates for intermittent extract systems
Room Intermittent extract rate (l/s)
Kitchen (cooker hood extracting to the outside) (1)
30
Kitchen (no cooker hood or cooker hood does not extract to the outside)(2) 60
Utility room 30
Bathroom 15
Sanitary accommodation (3)
6
NOTES:
1. See Diagram 1.1.
2. See Diagram 1.2.
3. As an alternative for sanitary accommodation, the purge ventilation guidance may be used.
NOTE:
1. The cooker hood should span at least the full width of the cooker.
Diagram 1.1 Minimum kitchen extract ventilation rate in cases where a cooker hood extracts
to the outside(1)
60 litres Outside
per second
NOTE:
1. The diagram includes a recirculating cooker hood for illustration. A recirculating cooker hood on its own does not provide a means of
ventilation that complies with Part F of the Building Regulations.
Diagram 1.2 Minimum ventilation rate for kitchen extract where a cooker hood does not
extract to the outside(1)
Table 1.2 Minimum extract ventilation rates for continuous extract systems(1)
Room High rate (l/s) Continuous rate
Kitchen 13 The sum of all extract ventilation
in the dwelling on its continuous
rate should be at least the whole
Utility room 8 dwelling ventilation rate given in
Table 1.3
Bathroom 8
Sanitary accommodation 6
NOTE:
1. If the continuous rate of ventilation provided in a room is equal to or higher than the minimum high rate specified
in the table, no extra ventilation is needed.
Table 1.3 Minimum whole dwelling ventilation rates determined by the number of bedrooms
Number of bedrooms(1)(2) Minimum ventilation rate by number of bedrooms (l/s)
1 19
2 25
3 31
4 37
5 43
NOTES:
1. If the dwelling only has one habitable room, a minimum ventilation rate of 13l/s should be used.
2. For each additional bedroom, add 6l/s to the values in Table 1.3.
1.25 Internal doors should allow air to flow through the dwelling by providing a minimum free area
equivalent to a 10mm undercut in a 760mm wide door. Doors should be undercut to achieve one of
the following.
a. If the floor finish is fitted: 10mm above the floor finish.
b. If the floor finish is not fitted: 20mm above the floor surface.
1.31 Hinged or pivot windows with an opening angle of less than 15 degrees are not suitable for purge
ventilation.
Performance testing
1.32 The air flow resistance of all components should be considered when specifying ventilation
systems. The complete assembly, as installed, should be designed to meet the performance
standards of this approved document. The performance of the separate components should be
measured according to the relevant parts of BS EN 13141 and other relevant standards. The relevant
test standards for common equipment types are given in Table 1.5.
Control of ventilation
1.33 Ventilation should be controllable. Controls may be either manual (i.e. operated by the occupant)
or automatic.
1.34 Background ventilators should be at least 1700mm above floor level, to reduce cold draughts, but
still be easy for the occupant to reach.
NOTE: Background ventilators are intended to normally be left open.
1.35 Continuously running fans should be set up to operate without occupant intervention but may
have manual or automatic controls for selecting the high rate of operation. Any manual high rate
controls should be provided locally to the spaces being served, e.g. bathrooms and kitchens.
Automatic controls might include sensors for humidity, occupancy/usage and pollutant release.
1.36 Controls based on humidity sensors may be installed in moisture-generating rooms (e.g. kitchen or
bathroom) but should not be used for sanitary accommodation, where odour is the main pollutant.
1.37 Other types of automatic controls might be suitable. Where present, automatic controls should
operate according to the need for ventilation in the space. Background ventilators with automatic
controls should also have manual override.
NOTE: Where a combustion appliance is installed, any automatic controls must also ensure that
the ventilation provided meets the requirements of Part J of the Building Regulations.
Diagram 1.3 Two habitable rooms treated as one room for ventilation purposes
NOTE: For situations outside the scope of Table 1.6, expert advice should be sought for the design,
sizing and position of ventilators to provide effective ventilation.
NOTE: As defined in Appendix A, less airtight dwellings are dwellings which have one of the
following.
a. A design air permeability higher than 5m3/(h·m2) at 50Pa.
b. An as-built air permeability higher than 3m3/(h·m2) at 50Pa.
1.46 Where a dwelling has natural ventilation and a measured air permeability that differs from the design
air permeability, so that it is defined as a highly airtight dwelling, one of the following applies.
a. Expert advice should be sought.
b. A continuous mechanical extract ventilation system should be installed by following the
guidance in paragraphs 1.60 to 1.66.
NOTE: Continuous mechanical extract ventilation systems are available as decentralised options.
An intermittent extract fan may be replaced with a decentralised continuous mechanical extract
ventilation system fan.
Table 1.7 Minimum equivalent area of background ventilators for natural ventilation(1)
Room Minimum equivalent area of Minimum equivalent area of
background ventilators for dwellings background ventilators for single-
with multiple floors storey dwellings
Habitable rooms(2)(3) 8000mm2 10,000mm2
Kitchen(2)(3) 8000mm2 10,000mm2
Utility room No minimum No minimum
Bathroom(4) 4000mm2 4000mm2
Sanitary accommodation No minimum No minimum
NOTES:
1. The use of this table is not appropriate in any of the following situations and expert advice should be sought.
• If the dwelling has only one exposed façade.
• If the dwelling has at least 70% of its openings on the same façade.
• If a kitchen has no windows or external façade through which a ventilator can be installed.
2. Where a kitchen and living room accommodation are not separate rooms (i.e. open plan), no fewer than three
ventilators of the same equivalent area as for other habitable rooms should be provided within the open-plan
space.
3. The total number of ventilators installed in a dwelling’s habitable rooms and kitchens should be no fewer than
five, except in one-bedroom properties, where there should be no fewer than four.
4. If a bathroom has no window or external façade through which a ventilator can be installed, the minimum equiva-
lent area specified should be added to the ventilator sizes specified in other rooms.
2.1 Ventilation systems should be designed to minimise the intake of external air pollutants following
paragraphs 2.2 to 2.9 if either of the following applies.
a. The pollutant values in the location of the dwelling exceed any of the limits in Table 2.1. This
may have been determined through an air quality assessment. Where modelling or monitoring
data is required, expert advice should be sought.
b. The dwelling is located near to any of the following sources of significant local pollution.
i. Road traffic, including traffic junctions and underground car parks.
ii. Combustion plant (such as heating appliances) running on conventional fuels, most
commonly natural gas.
iii. Other combustion processes (for example, waste incineration, thermal oxidation abatement
systems).
iv. Discharges from industrial processes.
v. Fugitive (i.e. not effectively controlled) discharges from industrial processes and other
sources.
vi. Exhaust discharges from building ventilation systems.
vii. Construction and demolition sites, which are a source of particles and vaporous discharges.
viii. Other significant sources of local air pollution which may be detrimental to health.
Table 2.1 Limit values from Schedule 2 to the Air Quality Standards Regulations 2010
Pollutant Exposure limit Exposure time
Carbon monoxide 10mg/m3 8-hour average
Sulphur dioxide 350μg/m3 1-hour average
125μg/m3 1-day average
Nitrogen dioxide 200μg/m3 1-hour average
40μg/m 3
1-year average
Benzene 5μg/m3 1-year average
Lead 0.5μg/m3 1-year average
PM2.5 25μg/m3 1-year average
PM10 50μg/m3 1-day average
40μg/m3 1-year average
NOTE: This section only gives guidance for typical situations. Expert advice may also be able to
provide additional guidance on the suitability of other technologies to minimise the intake of
external air pollutants, including filtration.
General
3.1 When building work in an existing dwelling includes work on ventilation, for example:
a. adding a habitable room
b. adding a wet room
c. replacing part of the ventilation system, including extract fans
the work should meet the relevant standards in this approved document.
3.2 When other building work is carried out that will affect the ventilation of the existing dwelling, for
example:
a. replacing a window or door
b. doing energy efficiency work
the ventilation of the dwelling should either:
a. meet the standards in the relevant approved document
b. not be less satisfactory than before the work was carried out.
NOTE: Ventilation through infiltration should be considered to be part of the ventilation provision
of a dwelling. Reducing infiltration might reduce the indoor air quality of the dwelling below the
standards given in Appendix B.
3.3 For common types of work, the requirements of paragraphs 3.1 and 3.2 may be demonstrated by
following the guidance detailed below.
a. For installing energy efficiency measures excluding window replacement, paragraphs 3.6 to 3.13.
b. For installing energy efficiency measures including window replacement, paragraphs 3.6 to 3.13
and 3.14 to 3.16.
c. For replacing windows only, paragraphs 3.14 to 3.16.
d. For the addition of a habitable room, paragraphs 3.17 to 3.20.
e. For the addition of a conservatory, paragraphs 3.21 to 3.24.
f. For the addition of a wet room, paragraphs 3.25 to 3.29.
g. For refurbishing a kitchen or bathroom, paragraphs 3.30 to 3.32.
h. For work done to improve the ventilation of the dwelling that was not triggered by the building
work in (a) to (g), Section 1 should be followed.
3.4 Other ventilation solutions than those detailed here may be used, as long as it can be
demonstrated to a building control body that they comply with the requirements of paragraphs 3.1
and 3.2.
Simplified method
NOTE: The simplified method set out in paragraphs 3.8 to 3.13 is designed to apply to an existing
dwelling that is assumed to have adequate means of ventilation through a combination of purpose-
provided ventilation and infiltration. If the property differs significantly from this assumption, the
requirements of paragraph 3.6 must still be met. This should be demonstrated through seeking expert
advice or using another suitable method.
3.8 When carrying out energy efficiency measures on an existing dwelling, Table 3.1 should be used
to calculate the number of major and minor energy efficiency measures involved. This calculation
should include all of the following.
a. Energy efficiency measures fitted since the original dwelling was constructed, to consider
accumulation of measures.
b. Energy efficiency measures planned.
NOTE: Where specific energy efficiency measures are not included in Table 3.1, the most similar
category should be chosen instead.
3.9 Diagram 3.1 should then be used to determine the category that the works result in.
f. Replacing less than or equal to 30% of the total existing windows or door units Minor
g. Replacing more than 30% of the total existing windows or door units Major
Draught-proofing (other than openings)(2)
h. Replacing a loft hatch with a sealed/insulated unit Minor
i. Sealing around structural or service penetrations through walls, floors or ceiling/roof Minor
j. Sealing and/or insulating a suspended ground floor Major
k. Removing chimney or providing another means of sealing over chimney, internally or Major
externally
NOTES:
1. If the energy efficiency works involve only replacing windows, then the guidance in paragraphs 3.14 to 3.16 may be
followed as an alternative means of demonstrating compliance.
2. Draught-proofing measures might not, on their own, constitute building work. This work may be controllable
under the Building Regulations if carried out as part of other building work.
Diagram 3.1 Chart for categorising impact on ventilation when carrying out works in existing
dwellings
3.10 If the method in Diagram 3.1 results in the work being categorised as Category A, it is likely that the
energy efficiency measures have not reduced the ventilation provision of the dwelling below the
requirements of F1(1) so no further ventilation provision is necessary.
Replacing windows
Existing windows with background ventilators
3.14 If the existing windows have background ventilators, the replacement windows should include
background ventilators. The new background ventilators should comply with both of the following
conditions.
a. Not be smaller than the background ventilators in the original window.
b. Be controllable either automatically or by the occupant.
If the size of the background ventilators in the existing window is not known, the ventilator sizes in
paragraph 3.15 may be applied.
This section deals with the requirements of Part F1(2) of Schedule 1 and regulations 39, 42 and 44 of
the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
F1. (2) Fixed systems for mechanical ventilation and Requirement F1 does not apply to a building or
any associated controls must be commissioned space within a building:
by testing and adjusting as necessary to secure
a. into which people do not normally go;
that the objective referred to in sub-paragraph
(1) is met. b. which is used solely for storage; or
c. which is a garage used solely in connection with
a single dwelling.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Inspection standards
4.4 Ventilation systems should be inspected and tested in accordance with paragraphs 4.5 to 4.12.
Except for the items marked * (which are from the Continuous mechanical extract ventilation
Building Regulations 2010), these definitions apply Mechanically driven ventilation that continuously
only to Approved Document F, Volume 1: Dwellings. extracts indoor air and discharges it to the outside.
Air permeability The measure of airtightness of Continuous operation Uninterrupted running of a
the building fabric. It is defined as the air leakage mechanical ventilation device, such as continuous
rate per hour per m2 of envelope area at the test mechanical extract ventilation or mechanical
reference pressure differential of 50Pa or 4Pa. ventilation with heat recovery. The air flow rate
Airtightness The resistance of the building provided by mechanical ventilation need not be
envelope to infiltration when ventilators are closed. constant but may be varied, under either manual or
The greater the airtightness at a given pressure automatic control, in response to the demand for
difference across the envelope, the lower the the removal of pollutants or water vapour.
infiltration. Dwelling A self-contained unit designed to
Automatic controls A system whereby a ventilation accommodate a single household.
device is adjusted by a mechanical or electronic Equivalent area A measure of the aerodynamic
controller that responds to a relevant stimulus. That performance of a ventilator. It is the area of a sharp-
stimulus usually relates to the humidity of the air in edged circular orifice through which air would pass
a room, pollutant levels, occupancy of the space or at the same volume flow rate, under an identical
pressure difference across the device. applied pressure difference, as through the opening
Background ventilator A small ventilation opening under consideration. The equivalent area of a
designed to provide controllable whole dwelling background ventilator is determined at 1Pa pressure
ventilation. difference in accordance with Table 1.7.
Basement (in relation to a dwelling) A dwelling or a Expert advice Advice from a suitably qualified
usable part of a dwelling (i.e. a habitable room) that competent person. Examples from the ventilation
is partly or entirely below ground level. Note that industry of a person competent to give expert
a cellar is distinct from a basement, in that a cellar advice include a chartered or professional engineer,
is used only for storage, heating plant or purposes a building services specialist, a specialist ventilation
other than habitation. manufacturer or members of professional trade
bodies.
Bathroom A room that contains a bath or
shower and which can also include sanitary Extract ventilation The removal of air directly
accommodation. from an internal space or spaces to the outside.
Extract ventilation may be by natural means or by
Building control body A local authority or an mechanical means (e.g. by an extract fan or a central
approved inspector. system).
Free area The geometric open area of a ventilator.
Habitable room A room used for dwelling
purposes but which is not solely a kitchen,
utility room, bathroom, cellar or sanitary
accommodation.
Introduction
B1 This appendix sets out the levels of moisture and other pollutants that the provisions in this
approved document are designed to control. The provisions are designed to control all of the
following.
a. Moisture levels, as described in paragraph B2.
b. Indoor air pollutants, as described in paragraph B4.
c. Bio-effluents, as described in paragraph B6.
NOTE: The guidance in this approved document may not be adequate to address pollutants from
flueless combustion space heaters. This approved document does not address the airborne spread
of infection and does not directly address contamination from outdoor sources.
NOTE: A strategy for achieving good indoor air quality includes reducing the release of water
vapour and air pollutants. This approved document does not provide guidance on such strategies.
B5 As an alternative to using TVOC, the individual VOCs may be applied where their use is supported
by robust independent evidence. Public Health England’s Indoor Air Quality Guidelines for Selected
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) in the UK should be used. Testing against these metrics is likely
to be more complex than testing against TVOC.
B6 Control of bio-effluents (body odours) for people who have been exposed to the environment
for a period of time will be achieved by an air supply rate of 4 litres per second per person
(BS EN 16798-1).
B11 For new dwellings, for the purposes of this approved document, the moisture criteria in Table B2 is
likely to be met if, during the colder months of the year, the moving average relative humidity in a
room is always less than the value given in Table B3, evaluated over each moving average period.
C1 This installation and commissioning checklist is divided into three parts, as follows.
a. Part 1 contains the particulars of the system, installation address and installer’s details.
b. Part 2a functions as an installation checklist.
c. Part 2b is a visual inspection, or pre-commissioning, checklist.
d. Part 3 is for recording air flow measurements from fans.
Demonstrating compliance
C3 All three parts of the installation and commissioning checklist should be completed.
The relevant sections of Parts 2 and 3 should be signed by a person who is both competent to install
the system and responsible for installing and commissioning the system.
C4 The three-part form should be completed for each installation address. A copy should be
submitted to the building control body as evidence that the system has been correctly installed,
inspected and commissioned.
D1 The checklist in Table D1 may be used when installing energy efficiency measures in an existing
dwelling, following paragraphs 3.6 to 3.13.
D2 The checklist provides an aid to determining the ventilation provision in an existing dwelling. It may
be used before energy efficiency measures are implemented to help establish compliance with the
minimum standards of requirement F1(1) as described in paragraph 3.6. The relevant section of this
checklist should be selected depending on the ventilation strategy selected. If the answer to any
question is ‘No’, further ventilation provisions may need to be installed, as described in paragraphs
3.11 and 3.12.
NOTE: Although it may go beyond the standards of paragraph 3.6, following the checklist in
Table D1 is considered to be an adequate means of demonstrating compliance with the minimum
standards of requirement F1(1) as described in paragraph 3.6.
F
Ventilation
APPROVED DOCUMENT
This section deals with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (linings)
B2. (1) To inhibit the spread of fire within the building,
the internal linings shall—
(a) adequately resist the spread of flame over
their surfaces; and ➊
(b) have, if ignited, either a rate of heat release
or a rate of fire growth, which is reasonable in
the circumstances.
(2) In this paragraph “internal linings” means the
materials or products used in lining any partition,
wall, ceiling or other internal structure.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B2 is met by achieving a restricted spread of flame
over internal linings. The building fabric should make a limited contribution to fire growth,
including a low rate of heat release.
It is particularly important in circulation spaces, where linings may offer the main means by which
fire spreads and where rapid spread is most likely to prevent occupants from escaping.
Requirement B2 does not include guidance on the following.
➋
a. Generation of smoke and fumes.
b. The upper surfaces of floors and stairs.
c. Furniture and fittings.
Key
For further information about the use of technical guidance, see Chapter 7 in Volume 1 and Chapter F
in Volume 2 of the Manual to the Building Regulations.
Introduction i
What is an approved document? i
How is construction regulated in England? i
How do you comply with the Building Regulations? i
What do the Building Regulations cover? ii
When must a building control body be notified? ii
How to use this approved document iii
Where to get further help iv
Section 0: Introduction 1
Summary 1
Application 1
Selected key interactions with other parts of the Building Regulations 3
Summary
0.1 This approved document is Approved Document F, Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings.
It gives guidance on how to comply with Part F of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations. For
guidance relating to dwellings, use Approved Document F, Volume 1: Dwellings.
0.2 This approved document contains the following sections:
Application
0.3 The guidance in Approved Document F, Volume 2 applies only to buildings other than dwellings.
For blocks of flats with shared communal rooms, this approved document should be consulted for
those rooms.
NOTE: Rooms for residential purposes and buildings that contain only rooms for residential
purposes are not dwellings and are covered by the guidance in this approved document.
Exemptions
0.4 Certain types of building are exempt from the Part F requirements of the Building Regulations.
These are outlined in paragraphs A7 to A13 of the Manual to the Building Regulations.
Emergency repairs
0.9 For emergency repairs, if it is not possible to notify the building control body in advance, the
building control body should be notified as soon as possible. If the installer is registered with a
competent person scheme, see Chapter 5 in Volume 1 and Chapter C in Volume 2 of the Manual to
the Building Regulations.
Minor works
0.10 Minor works must comply with the relevant requirements of the Building Regulations, but the
building control body does not need to be notified.
For mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning systems, minor works include any of the following.
a. Replacing parts.
b. Adding an output or control device if testing and adjusting the system would not affect its
energy efficiency or would not be possible.
c. Providing a self-contained mechanical ventilation or air-conditioning appliance when all the
following apply.
i. Any electrical work is exempt from a requirement to give advance notice to a building
control body.
ii. Testing and adjusting the system would not affect its energy efficiency or would not be possible.
iii. The appliance is not installed in a room that contains an open-flued combustion appliance.
Mixed-use developments
0.13 When constructing a dwelling as part of a larger building that contains other types of
accommodation, sometimes called a mixed-use development, refer to the two volumes of
Approved Document F as follows.
a. For guidance on each individual dwelling, use Approved Document F, Volume 1: Dwellings.
b. For guidance on the non-dwelling parts of the building, such as shared communal rooms and
commercial or retail space, use this approved document: Approved Document F, Volume 2:
Buildings other than dwellings.
This section deals with the requirements of Part F1(1) of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Means of ventilation Requirement F1 does not apply to a building or
space within a building:
F1. (1) There shall be adequate means of ventilation
provided for people in the building. a. into which people do not normally go;
b. which is used solely for storage; or
c. which is a garage used solely in connection with
a single dwelling.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement F1(1) is met in a new building other than a dwelling if it
has a means of ventilation that achieves all of the following.
a. Extracts water vapour and indoor air pollutants from areas where they are produced in
significant quantities before they spread through the building, following the guidance on extract
ventilation in Section 1 for the relevant building type.
b. Supplies a minimum level of outdoor air for occupants’ health, following the guidance for whole
building ventilation in Section 1 for the relevant building type.
c. Rapidly dilutes indoor air pollutants and disperses water vapour when necessary in occupiable
rooms and sanitary accommodation, following the guidance for purge ventilation in Section 1 for
the relevant building type.
d. Monitors air quality in specific types of occupiable rooms, following the guidance in paragraphs
1.21 to 1.23.
e. Minimises the entry of external pollutants, following the guidance in Section 2.
f. Achieves all of the following, as far as is reasonably practicable.
i. Produces low levels of noise, following the guidance in paragraphs 1.5 and 1.6.
ii. Offers easy access for maintenance, following the guidance in paragraph 1.7.
iii. Provides protection from rain.
iv. Provides protection from cold draughts.
v. Does not significantly risk occupants’ health.
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement F1(1) is met for work on an existing building other than a
dwelling by following the guidance in Section 3.
General
1.1 The aim of requirement F1(1) is to protect the health of occupants of the building by providing
adequate ventilation. Without adequate ventilation, mould and internal air pollution may become
hazardous to health and the risk of transmission of airborne infection is increased.
NOTE: The guidance in this approved document is not designed to deal with the products of
tobacco smoking or vaping.
1.2 This approved document sets out guidance for ventilation provision in the following types and uses
of buildings and occupiable rooms.
a. Specific types of occupiable rooms – follow paragraphs 1.21 to 1.23.
b. Offices – follow paragraphs 1.24 to 1.37.
c. Car parks – follow paragraphs 1.38 to 1.40.
d. Building types other than offices or car parks – follow paragraph 1.41.
1.3 Other ventilation solutions may be used, if it can be shown to the building control body that they
satisfy requirement F1(1).
1.4 The guidance set out in this approved document has been designed to meet the indoor pollutant
levels in Appendix B where the outside air is of reasonable quality. In areas where the outside
air is not of reasonable quality, Section 2 provides guidance on limiting the entry of external air
pollutants.
Noise
1.5 Mechanical ventilation systems, including both continuous and intermittent mechanical ventilation,
should be designed and installed to minimise noise. This includes doing all of the following.
a. Correctly sizing and joining ducts.
b. Ensuring that equipment is appropriately and securely fixed, such as using resilient mountings
where noise carried by the structure of the building could be a problem.
c. Selecting appropriate equipment, including following paragraph 1.6.
1.6 For mechanical ventilation systems, fan units should be appropriately sized so that fans operating
in normal background ventilation mode are not overly noisy, taking into consideration the use and
likely background level of noise from other sources. This might require fans to be sized so that they
do not operate near maximum capacity when in normal background ventilation mode.
Performance-based guidance
1.12 Performance criteria for acceptable levels of moisture and pollutants are given in Appendix B.
Ventilation rates designed to meet the performance criteria are given in this guidance or in the
documents referred to.
1.13 Some ventilation system designs can, in certain circumstances, result in lower ventilation rates
than those stated in this guidance or in the documents referred to (e.g. systems with automatic
controls). Where lower ventilation rates are proposed, expert advice should be obtained to
demonstrate that the solution meets the performance standards in Appendix B.
Prison cells PSI 17/2012 Certified Prisoner Accommodation (Ministry of Justice, 2012)
Sanitary Same as for offices in paragraph 1.26: sanitary accommodation should have an intermittent air
accommodation extract rate of both of the following.
a. 15 litres per second per shower or bath.
b. 6 litres per second per WC pan or urinal.
Extract ventilators in sanitary accommodation should be capable of continuous operation if
required.
Schools and Education (School Premises) Regulations 1999
education Building Bulletin 101 Guidelines on Ventilation, Thermal Comfort and Indoor Air Quality in Schools
(ESFA, 2018)
Building Bulletin 101 can also be used as a guide to the ventilation required in other educational
buildings, such as further education establishments, where the accommodation is similar to that
in schools, e.g. sixth form accommodation. However, the standards may not be appropriate for
particular areas where more hazardous activities take place than are normally found in schools,
e.g. some practical and vocational activities that require containment or fume extraction.
Building Bulletin 101 can also be used for children’s centres and other early years settings, including
day nurseries, playgroups, etc.
Shops and CIBSE Guide B2 Ventilation and Ductwork (2016)
general retail
premises
Sports centres CIBSE Guide B2 Ventilation and Ductwork (2016)
and swimming Sport England Sports Halls Design and Layouts: Updated and Combined Guidance (2012)
pools
Supermarkets CIBSE Guide B2 Ventilation and Ductwork (2016)
and food stores
Transportation CIBSE Guide B2 Ventilation and Ductwork (2016)
buildings and
facilities
NOTE:
1. Common spaces are as defined in Appendix A.
2.1 Ventilation systems should be designed to minimise the intake of external air pollutants following
paragraphs 2.2 to 2.6 if either of the following applies.
a. The pollutant values in the location of the building exceed any of the limits in Table 2.1. This may
have been determined through an air quality assessment. Where modelling or monitoring data is
required, expert advice should be sought.
b. The building is located near to any of the following sources of significant local pollution.
i. Road traffic, including traffic junctions and underground car parks.
ii. Combustion plant (such as heating appliances) running on conventional fuels, most
commonly natural gas.
iii. Other combustion processes (for example, waste incineration, thermal oxidation abatement
systems).
iv. Discharges from industrial processes.
v. Fugitive (i.e. not effectively controlled) discharges from industrial processes and other
sources.
vi. Exhaust discharges from building ventilation systems.
vii. Construction and demolition sites, which are a source of particles and vaporous discharges.
viii. Other significant sources of local air pollution which may be detrimental to health.
NOTE: This section only gives guidance for typical situations. Expert advice may also be able to
provide additional guidance on the suitability of other technologies to minimise the intake of
external air pollutants, including filtration.
NOTE: The Building Research Establishment’s Ventilation for Healthy Buildings: Reducing the Impact
of Urban Air Pollution provides guidance on minimising the ingress of external pollutants into non-
domestic urban buildings.
General
3.1 When building work in an existing building includes work on ventilation, for example:
a. building an extension
b. adding a wet room
c. replacing part of the ventilation system
the work should meet the relevant standards in this approved document.
3.2 When other building work is carried out that will affect the ventilation of the existing building,
for example:
a. replacing windows or doors
b. doing energy efficiency work
the ventilation of the building should either:
a. meet the standards in the relevant approved document
b. not be less satisfactory than before the work was carried out.
NOTE: Ventilation through infiltration should be considered to be part of the ventilation provision
of a building. Reducing infiltration might reduce the indoor air quality of the building below the
standards given in Appendix B.
3.3 When a building undergoes a material change of use, Part F of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations applies to the building or part of the building that has changed use. Guidance in
Section 1 should be followed.
NOTE: Ventilation equipment is considered to be a ‘controlled service or fitting’ and providing or
extending this equipment in or in connection with a building is considered to be building work.
NOTE: Some building work does not need to be notified to the local authority. Details of such
work are set out in the Manual to the Building Regulations.
3.4 If work is carried out which increases the energy efficiency of a building, airtightness may be
increased. In these circumstances, any useful ventilation which was lost should be replaced in order
to maintain a healthy indoor environment. When carrying out work which is likely to increase the
airtightness of the building, it should be demonstrated to the building control body that the work
meets the requirements of Part F1(1), where it is an applicable requirement. Refer to paragraphs 3.1
and 3.2 for the relevant standards that should be met. For domestic-type installation of common
energy efficiency measures in existing buildings, Approved Document F, Volume 1: Dwellings
contains guidance on meeting the requirements of Part F of the Building Regulations.
This section deals with the requirements of Part F1(2) of Schedule 1 and regulations 39 and 44 of the
Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
F1. (2) Fixed systems for mechanical ventilation and any Requirement F1 does not apply to a building or
associated controls must be commissioned by space within a building:
testing and adjusting as necessary to secure that
a. into which people do not normally go;
the objective referred to in sub-paragraph (1) is
met. b. which is used solely for storage; or
c. which is a garage used solely in connection with
a single dwelling.
Regulations
Information about ventilation
39. (1) This regulation applies where paragraph F1(1) of Schedule 1 imposes a requirement in relation to building
work.
(2) The person carrying out the work shall not later than five days after the work has been completed
give sufficient information to the owner about the building’s ventilation system and its maintenance
requirements so that the ventilation system can be operated in such a manner as to provide adequate
means of ventilation.
Commissioning
44. (1) This regulation applies to building work in relation to which paragraph F1(2) of Schedule 1 imposes
a requirement, but does not apply to the provision or extension of any fixed system for mechanical
ventilation or any associated controls where testing and adjustment is not possible.
(2) This regulation also applies to building work in relation to which paragraph L1(b) of Schedule 1 imposes a
requirement, but does not apply to the provision or extension of any fixed building service where testing
and adjustment is not possible or would not affect the energy efficiency of that fixed building service.
(3) Where this regulation applies the person carrying out the work shall, for the purpose of ensuring
compliance with paragraph F1(2) or L1(b) of Schedule 1, give to the local authority a notice confirming that
the fixed building services have been commissioned in accordance with a procedure approved by the
Secretary of State.
(4) The notice shall be given to the local authority—
(a) not later than the date on which the notice required by regulation 16(4) is required to be given; or
(b) where that regulation does not apply, not more than 30 days after completion of the work.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Except for the items marked * (which are from the Continuous operation Uninterrupted running of a
Building Regulations 2010), these definitions apply mechanical ventilation device, such as mechanical
only to Approved Document F, Volume 2: Buildings extract ventilation or mechanical supply and
other than dwellings. extract ventilation. The air flow rate provided by
Air permeability The measure of airtightness of mechanical ventilation need not be constant but
the building fabric. It is defined as the air leakage may be varied, under either manual or automatic
rate per hour per m2 of envelope area at the test control, in response to the demand for removal of
reference pressure differential of 50Pa. pollutants or water vapour.
Bathroom A room that contains a bath or Extract ventilation The removal of air directly
shower and which can also include sanitary from an internal space or spaces to the outside.
accommodation. Extract ventilation may be by natural means or
by mechanical means (e.g. by an extract fan or a
Building control body A local authority or an central system).
approved inspector.
Free area The geometric open area of a ventilator.
Common space A space where large numbers of
people are expected to gather (e.g. a shopping mall Habitable room A room used for dwelling
or foyer of a cinema or theatre) or which is used purposes but which is not solely a kitchen, utility
mainly for circulation in buildings which do not room, bathroom, cellar or sanitary accommodation.
contain dwellings (e.g. a corridor or lift lobby in an Infiltration The uncontrolled exchange of air
office building). This does not include areas used between the inside and outside of a building,
solely or principally for circulation in buildings through gaps and cracks.
containing dwellings, including corridors or lift Intermittent operation When a mechanical
lobbies in blocks of flats. ventilator does not run all the time, usually running
only when there is a particular need to remove
pollutants or water vapour (e.g. during cooking
or bathing). Intermittent operation may be under
either manual control or automatic control.
Introduction
B1 This appendix sets out the levels of moisture and other pollutants that the provisions in this
approved document are designed to control. The provisions are designed to control all of the
following.
a. Bio-effluents, as described in paragraph B2a.
b. Moisture levels, as described in paragraph B2b.
c. Indoor air pollutants, as described in paragraph B2d.
NOTE: The guidance in this approved document may not be adequate to address pollutants
from flueless combustion space heaters. This approved document does not directly address
contamination from outdoor sources.
NOTE: A strategy for achieving good indoor air quality includes reducing the release of water
vapour and air pollutants. This approved document does not provide guidance on such strategies.
B3 As an alternative to using TVOC, the individual VOCs may be applied where their use is supported
by robust independent evidence. Public Health England’s Indoor Air Quality Guidelines for Selected
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) in the UK should be used. Testing against these metrics is likely
to be more complex than testing against TVOC.
Where the Health and Safety Executive gives guidance for specific situations, that guidance should be
followed in preference to the guidance given here.
Extract ventilation
B5 Office equipment can emit pollutants, including ozone and organic compounds. For example, a
study by Black and Wortham (1999) suggests the following emission rates for laser printers and dry
paper copiers assuming 30 minutes use in an hour.
a. 25mg/h for TVOC.
b. 3mg/h for ozone.
To meet the performance criteria for these pollutants requires an extract rate of 20 litres per second
per machine during use.
B6 For sanitary accommodation, the extract rates used for dwellings have been applied.
B7 For food and beverage preparation areas, the extract rates used for dwellings have been applied.
NOTE: The guidance in this appendix is based on the Scientific Advisory Group for Emergencies
(SAGE) EMG/SPI-B advisory group paper Application of CO2 monitoring as an approach to managing
ventilation to mitigate SARS-CoV-2 transmission.
People exhale carbon dioxide (CO2) when they breathe out. If there is a build-up of CO2 in an area it can
indicate that ventilation needs to be improved.
Checking levels of CO2 using a monitor can help to identify areas that are poorly ventilated.
Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atmospheres Code of Practice for Ground Floor, Multi Storey and
Regulations 2002, SI 2002/2776 Underground Car Parks. Second Edition [1995]
Education (School Premises) Regulations 1999, Building and Engineering Services Association
SI 1999/2 (BESA)
Factories Act 1961, c. 34 (thebesa.com)
Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974, c. 37 BESA DW 143 Guide to Good Practice – Ductwork
Air Leakage Testing [2013]
Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas)
Act 1990, c. 9 BESA DW 144 Specification for Sheet Metal
Ductwork [2016]
Welfare of Farmed Animals (England) Regulations
2007, SI 2007/2078 BESA DW 154 Specification of Plastics Ductwork
[2000]
Other documents BESA DW 172 Specification for Kitchen Ventilation
Systems [2018]
American Conference of Government Industrial
Hygienists (ACGIH) BESA TR 40 Guide to Good Practice for Local
Exhaust Ventilation [2020]
(acgih.org)
Building Research Establishment (BRE)
Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended
Practice for Design. Thirtieth Edition [2019] (www.bre.co.uk)
Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Ventilation for Healthy Buildings: Reducing the
Practice for Operation and Maintenance. Second Impact of Urban Air Pollution [2011]
Edition [2020]
Building Services Research and Information
Association (BSRIA)
(www.bsria.com)
BG 43 Flexible Ductwork: A Guide to Specification,
Procurement, Installation and Maintenance [2013]
Building Bulletin 101: Guidelines on Ventilation, Manual to the Building Regulations: A Code of
Thermal Comfort and Indoor Air Quality in Practice for Use in England [2020]
Schools [2018]. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/ Ministry of Justice
government/publications/building-bulletin-101-
ventilation-for-school-buildings (www.gov.uk/moj)
PSI 17/2012 Certified Prisoner Accommodation [2012]
RIBA Books
Online: www.architecture.com/ribabooks
Telephone: +44 (0)20 7496 8383
Email: sales@ribabookshops.com
9 781914 124778
The Building Regulations 2010
APPROVED DOCUMENT
G1
G2
G3
G4
Cold water supply
Water efficiency
Hot water supply and systems
G
Sanitary conveniences and washing facilities
G5 Bathrooms
G6 Food preparation areas
Water efficiency calculator for new dwellings
on
st
en
iti
md
ed
en
am
15
16
20
20
Appendix C: References 47
Relevant legislation 47
Standards 47
Other documents 48
Index 49
DIAGRAMS
1. Typical discharge pipe arrangement 24
2. Separation between hand
washbasin/WC and food
preparation area – single room 30
3. Separation between hand
washbasin/WC and food
preparation area – two rooms 30
TABLES
Limitation on requirements
In accordance with regulation 8 of the Building
Regulations, the requirements in Parts A to D,
F to K and P (except for paragraphs G2, H2 and
J7) of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations
do not require anything to be done except for
the purpose of securing reasonable standards
of health and safety for persons in or about
buildings (and any others who may be affected
by buildings or matters connected with buildings).
Paragraph G2 is excluded from regulation 8 as it
deals with the conservation of water. Paragraphs
H2 and J7 are excluded from regulation 8 because
they deal directly with prevention of the
contamination of water and of oil pollution. Parts
E and M (which deal, respectively, with resistance
to the passage of sound, and access to and use
of buildings) are excluded from regulation 8
because they address the welfare and convenience
of building users. Part L is excluded from regulation
8 because it addresses the conservation of fuel
and power. All these matters are amongst the
purposes, other than health and safety, that may
be addressed by Building Regulations.
Water efficiency
G2. Reasonable provision must be made by the installation of Requirement G2 applies only when a dwelling is—
fittings and fixed appliances that use water efficiently for the
(a) erected; or
prevention of undue consumption of water.
(b) formed by a material change of use of a building
Water efficiency of new dwellings
within the meaning of regulation 5(a) or (b).
36.—(1) The potential consumption of wholesome water by
persons occupying a new dwelling must not exceed
the requirement in paragraph (2).
(2) The requirement referred to in paragraph (1) is either—
(a) 125 litres per person per day; or
(b) in a case to which paragraph (3) applies, the optional
requirement of 110 litres per person per day,
as measured in either case in accordance with a methodology
approved by the Secretary of State.
(3) This paragraph applies where the planning permission
under which the building work is carried out—
(a) specifies the optional requirement in paragraph (2)(b); and
(b) makes it a condition that that requirement must be
complied with.
(4) In this Part, “new dwelling” does not include a dwelling
that is formed by a material change of use of a building
within the meaning of regulation 5(g).
Wholesome water consumption calculation
37.—(1) Where regulation 36 applies, the person carrying out
the work must give the local authority a notice which
specifies—
(a) which of the requirements in regulation 36(2)(a) or (b)
applies to the dwelling; and
(b) the potential consumption of wholesome water per
person per day in relation to the completed dwelling.
Building (Approved Inspectors) Regulations 2010
Application of Provisions of the Principal Regulations
20.—(1) Regulation 20 (provisions applicable to self-
certification schemes), 27 (CO2 emission rate calculations),
29 (energy performance certificates), 37 (wholesome water
consumption calculation), 41 (sound insulation testing), 42
(mechanical ventilation air flow rate testing), 43 (pressure
testing) and 44 (commissioning) of the Principal Regulations
apply in relation to building work which is the subject of
an initial notice as if references to the local authority were
references to the approved inspector.
(4) Regulation 37(2) of the Principal Regulations applies in
relation to building work which is the subject of an initial
notice as if after “work has been completed” there were
inserted, “or, if earlier the date on which in accordance with
regulation 17 of the Building (Approved Inspectors etc.)
Regulations 2010 the initial notice ceases to be in force”.
Shower 8 l/min
WARNING TO USER
a. Do not remove or adjust any component part of this unvented water heater; contact
the installer.
b. If this unvented water heater develops a fault, such as a flow of hot water from the
discharge pipe, switch the heater off and contact the installer.
WARNING TO INSTALLER
a. This installation is subject to the Building Regulations.
b. Use only appropriate components for installation or maintenance.
Installed by:
Name ..............................................................................................................................................
Address ..........................................................................................................................................
600mm maximum
3.59 Where a single common discharge pipe BS EN ISO 1043-1:2002 Plastics. Symbols
serves more than one system, it should be and abbreviated terms. Basic polymers and
at least one pipe size larger than the largest their special characteristics.
individual discharge pipe (D2) to be connected.
2. Where pipes cannot be connected to the
3.60 The discharge pipe should not be stack it may be possible to route a dedicated
connected to a soil discharge stack unless it can pipe alongside or in close proximity to the
be demonstrated that the soil discharge stack is discharge stack
capable of safely withstanding temperatures of
the water discharged, in which case, it should: Termination of discharge pipe
a. contain a mechanical seal, not incorporating 3.61 The discharge pipe (D2) from the tundish
a water trap, which allows water into the should terminate in a safe place where there is no
branch pipe without allowing foul air from the risk to persons in the vicinity of the discharge.
drain to be ventilated through the tundish; 3.62 Examples of acceptable discharge
b. be a separate branch pipe with no sanitary arrangements are:
appliances connected to it; a. to a trapped gully with the end of the pipe below
c. if plastic pipes are used as branch pipes a fixed grating and above the water seal;
carrying discharge from a safety device, they b. downward discharges at low level; i.e. up to
should be either polybutalene (PB) or cross- 100mm above external surfaces such as car
linked polyethylene (PE-X) complying with parks, hard standings, grassed areas etc.
national standards such as Class S of BS are acceptable providing that a wire cage or
7291-2:2006 or Class S of BS 7291-3:2006 similar guard is positioned to prevent contact,
respectively; and whilst maintaining visibility; and,
d. be continuously marked with a warning that c. discharges at high level: e.g. into a metal
no sanitary appliances should be connected hopper and metal downpipe with the end
to the pipe. of the discharge pipe clearly visible or
Notes: onto a roof capable of withstanding high
temperature discharges of water and 3 m
1. Plastic pipes should be joined and assembled from any plastic guttering system that would
with fittings appropriate to the circumstances collect such discharges.
in which they are used as set out in
3.67 In-line blending valves and composite 3.74 Where commissioning is carried out it
thermostatic mixing valves should be compatible must be done in accordance with a procedure
with the sources of hot and cold water that approved by the Secretary of State. For new and
serve them. existing dwellings the approved procedure for hot
water systems is set out in the Domestic Heating
3.68 The length of supply pipes between in-line Compliance Guide; for buildings other than
blending valves and outlets should be kept to dwellings in CIBSE Commissioning Code M.
a minimum in order to prevent the colonisation
of waterborne pathogens. If intermittent use 3.75 Commissioning must be carried out in
of the bath is anticipated, provision should be such a way as not to prejudice compliance with
made for high temperature flushing to allow any applicable health and safety requirements.
pasteurisation of the pipes and outlet fittings. 3.76 Commissioning is often carried out by
Such events should be managed to prevent the the person who installs the system. Sometimes
risk associated with inadvertent use. it may be carried out by a subcontractor or by a
Notes: specialist firm. It is important that whoever carries
it out follows the relevant approved procedure in
1. Further guidance on the use of in-line doing so.
blending valves can be found in BRE
Information paper IP14/03 Preventing hot
water scalding in bathrooms: using TMVs
Food preparation
area
Food preparation
area
Scale of provision and layout in b. the macerator and pump meets the
requirements of BS EN 12050-2:2001
dwellings Wastewater lifting plants for buildings and
sites. Principles of construction and testing.
5.6 Any dwelling (house or flat) must have at
Lifting plants for faecal-free wastewater.
least one bathroom with a fixed bath or shower,
and a washbasin.
5.7 Guidance on the provision of activity
space around sanitary appliances is given in
BS 6465-2:1996 Sanitary installations. Code
of practice for space requirements for sanitary
appliances.
Discharges to drains
Note: See Approved Document for Requirement
H1 Sanitary pipework and drainage for guidance
on provision for traps, branch discharge pipes,
discharge stacks and foul drains.
6.5 Any sink should discharge through a
grating, a trap and a branch discharge pipe to
an adequate system of drainage.
Taps (excluding kitchen/utility room taps) Flow rate (litres/minute) 1.58 1.58
Shower (where bath also present) Flow rate (litres/minute) 4.37 0.00
Consumption from multiple fittings e) Enter the flow rate/volume of the fitting with
the highest flow rate/volume into box (f) with
A8 Where terminal fittings with varying flow
the exception of WCs, where this step is not
rates and capacities are specified (e.g. hot and
relevant.
cold taps with different flow rates, two types of
shower etc.), the average consumption should be f) Calculate the proportionate flow rate/volume
calculated as set out in Tables A2.1 to A2.7: by multiplying the highest flow rate/volume
by a factor of 0.7 with the exception of WCs,
a) Enter the full flow rate or volume of each type
where this step is not relevant.
of fitting into column (a) of the relevant table.
A9 Where the average flow rate/volume is
b) For taps, where there are separate hot and
lower than the proportionate flow rate/volume,
cold water taps, the flow rate of each tap
the proportionate figure must be entered into
should be entered separately as two tap
Table A1. The proportionate figure limits the flow
types to calculate the average flow rate.
rate/volume that can be specified to a proportion
c) Calculate the total consumption per fitting equal to 70 per cent of the highest flow rate/
type. volume. This reduces the benefit of specifying
ultra low fittings to bring the average flow rate/
d) Calculate the average flow rate/volume of the
volume down, where such ultra low fittings may
fittings detailed.
not be acceptable to dwellings occupants.
Proportionate capacity to
overflow (litres) = [(f) = 0.7]
Type of Litres per Quantity Total per WC type Effective Quantity Total per
washing kg dry load (No.) fitting type flushing (No.) fitting type
machine = [(a) ⴛ (b)] volume* = [(a) ⴛ (b)]
(litres)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
(d) Total
(Sum of all quantities) (d) Total
(Sum of all quantities)
(e) Total
(Sum of all totals per (e) Total
fitting type) (Sum of all totals per
fitting type)
Average litres per kilogram of dry load = [(e)/(d)]
Average effective flushing volume
(f) Highest litres per kilogram of dry load (litres) = [(e)/(d)]
Proportionate litres per kilogram of * The effective flushing volume for dual flush WCs is:
dry load = [(f) = 0.7] (full flushing volume (litres) = 0.33) + (part flushing volume
(litres) = 0.67)
(c) Average number of regeneration cycles per day (No.) Average greywater demand = [(f)/(e)] = 2.1
from washing machines
(d) Number of occupants served by the system (No.)
Litres per Number Quantity Greywater Litres per Number Quantity Greywater
minute of supplying supply minute of fittings supplying supply
fittings greywater = [(a) ⴛ present greywater = [(a) ⴛ (c)]
present (c)]
Bath, shower and Percentage of used Greywater available for Greywater demand Greywater savings
wash hand basin water (a) to be use (litres/person/day) (litres/person/day) (litres/person/day)
usage (litres/person/ recycled
day) (%) = (a) ⴛ [(b)/100] (from Table A1 or Where (c) is greater
A4.2 and A4.3) than (d), (e) = (d),
otherwise
(e) = (c)
*where the amount collected (a) is greater than the demand (b),
the rainwater savings (c) are equal to the demand (b)
H
Drainage and waste disposal
APPROVED DOCUMENT
H1 Foul water drainage
H2 Wastewater treatment systems and cesspools
H3 Rainwater drainage
H4 Building over sewers
H5 Separate systems of drainage
H6 Solid waste storage on
iti
ed
15
20
Guidance 39 Guidance 48
Performance 39 Performance 48
Introduction to provisions 40 Introduction to provisions 48
Undue risk in the event of failure of the
Section 1: Gutters and rainwater pipes 40
drain or sewer 49
Design rainfall intensities 40
Maintaining access 49
Gutters 40
Protection of the drain or sewer during
Rainwater pipes 41 construction 49
Siphonic roof drainage systems 42 Protection from settlement 49
Eaves drop systems 42
Rainwater recovery systems 42
Materials for gutters, rainwater pipes
and joints 42
Alternative approach 42
Guidance
Performance Introduction to provisions
In the Secretary of State’s view the requirement 0.1 The capacity of the system should be large
of H1 will be met if a foul water drainage system: enough to carry the expected flow at any point.
a. conveys the flow of foul water to a foul water 0.2 The capacity depends on the size and
outfall (a foul or combined sewer, a cesspool, gradient of the pipes. Minimum sizes and gradient
septic tank or holding tank); limits are given in the text.
b. minimises the risk of blockage or leakage; 0.3 The pipe sizes quoted in this document are
nominal sizes used as a numerical designation in
c. prevents foul air from the drainage system
convenient round numbers approximately equal
from entering the building under working
to a manufacturer’s size. Equivalent pipe sizes
conditions;
for individual pipe standards will be found in the
d. is ventilated; standards listed in Tables 4, 7 and 14.
e. is accessible for clearing blockages; and
f. does not increase the vulnerability of the
building to flooding.
1.10 A branch pipe should not discharge into a c. All sanitary pipework receiving condensate
stack in a way which could cause crossflow into should be made from materials resistant to
any other branch pipe. (See Diagram 2.) a pH value of 6.5 and lower. The installation
should be in accordance with BS 6798.
1.11 A branch discharge pipe should not
discharge into a stack lower than 450mm above 1.15 Sizes of branch pipes – Pipes serving a
the invert of the tail of the bend at the foot of the single appliance should have at least the same
stack in single dwellings of up to 3 storeys (see diameter as the appliance trap (see Table 1).
Diagram 2). (For multi-storey buildings this should If a pipe serves more than one appliance, and is
be increased, see Appendix paragraphs A5 and A6.) unventilated, the diameter should be at least the
size shown in Table 2.
1.12 Branch pipes may discharge into a stub
stack. (See paragraph 1.30.) 1.16 Bends in branch pipes should be avoided
if possible. Where they cannot they should have
1.13 A branch pipe discharging to a gully
as large a radius as possible.
should terminate between the grating or sealing
plate and the top of the water seal. 1.17 Junctions on branch pipes of about the
same diameter should be made with a sweep
1.14 Condensate drainage from boilers may be
of 25mm radius or at 45°. Connection of branch
connected to sanitary pipework. The connection
pipes of 75mm diameter or more to a stack of
should be made using pipework of minimum
equal diameter should be made with a sweep
diameter 22mm through a 75mm condensate
of 50mm minimum radius or at 45°.
trap. If an additional trap is provided externally
to the boiler to provide the 75mm seal, an air gap 1.18 Branch pipes up to 40mm diameter joining
should be provided between the boiler and the trap. branch pipes 100mm diameter or greater should,
if practicable, connect to the upper part of the
a. The connection should preferably be made to
pipe wall of the larger branch.
an internal stack with a 75mm condensate trap.
1.19 Ventilation of branch pipes – separate
b. If the connection is made to a branch pipe,
ventilation will not be needed to prevent the
the connection should be made downstream
water seals in traps from being lost by pressures
of any sink waste connection.
which can develop in the system if the length
and slope of the branch discharge pipes do not
exceed those shown in Table 2 or Diagram 3.
Discharge stacks
1.26 All stacks should discharge to a drain. The
bend at the foot of the stack should have as large
a radius as possible and at least 200mm at the
centre line.
1.27 Offsets in the ‘wet’ portion of a discharge
stack should be avoided. If they are unavoidable
then in a building of not more than 3 storeys there
should be no branch connection within 750mm
of the offset. In a building over 3 storeys a
ventilation stack may be needed with connections
above and below the offset. In buildings over
Pipes
PVC-U BS EN 1329
ABS BS EN 1455
Styrene copolymer
1.32 Sizes of stack ventilation pipes – stack blends (PVC + SAN) BS EN 1565
ventilation pipes (the dry part above the highest
PVC-C BS EN 1566
branch) may be reduced in size in one and two
storey houses, but should be not less than 75mm. Traps BS EN 274, BS 3943
1.33 Ventilated discharge stacks may be Note: Some of these materials may not be suitable for carrying trade
terminated inside a building when fitted with effluent or condensate from boilers.
air admittance valves complying with BS EN
12380:2002. Where these valves are used they
should not adversely affect the amount of 1.36 Sanitary pipework connected to WCs
ventilation necessary for the below ground should not allow light to be visible through the
system which is normally provided by open pipe wall, as this is believed to encourage
stacks of the sanitary pipework. Air admittance damage by rodents.
valves should be located in areas which have
Air tightness
1.38 The pipes, fittings and joints should be
capable of withstanding an air test of positive
pressure of at least 38mm water gauge for at
least 3 minutes. Every trap should maintain a
water seal of at least 25mm. Smoke testing may
be used to identify defects where a water test
has failed. Smoke testing is not recommended
for PVC-U pipes.
Alternative approach
1.39 The requirement can also be met by
following the relevant recommendations of
BS EN 12056 Gravity drainage systems inside
buildings. Relevant clauses are in Part 1: General
and performance requirements, Clauses 3–6;
Part 2 Sanitary pipework, layout and calculation,
Clauses 3 to 6 and National Annexes NA to NG
(System III is traditionally in use in the UK); Part 5
Installation and testing, instructions for operation,
maintenance and use, Clauses 4–6, 8, 9 and 11.
BS EN 12109 Vacuum Drainage Systems
Inside Buildings.
Notes: PP BS EN 1852+
* Minimum of 1 WC Structure walled
† Minimum of 5 WCs plastic pipes BS EN 13476
Table 8 Limits of cover for class 120 clayware pipes in any width of trench
Nominal size Laid in fields Laid in light roads Laid in main roads
Notes:
1. All pipes assumed to be Class 120 to BS EN 295; other strengths and sizes of pipe are available, consult manufacturers.
2. Bedding assumed to be Class B with bedding factor of 1.9; guidance is available on use of higher bedding factors with clayware pipes.
3. Alternative designs using different pipe strengths and/or bedding types may offer more appropriate or economic options using the procedures
set out in BS EN 1295.
4. Minimum depth in roads set to 1.2m irrespective of pipe strength.
Table 9 Limits of cover for class M concrete pipes in any width of trench
Nominal size Laid in fields Laid in light roads Laid in main roads
Notes:
1. All pipes assumed to be Class M to BS 5911; other strengths and sizes of pipe are available, consult manufacturers.
2. Bedding assumed to be Class B with bedding factor of 1.9.
3. Alternative designs using different pipe strengths and/or bedding types may offer more appropriate or economic options using the procedures
set out in BS EN 1295.
4. Minimum depth in roads set to 1.2m irrespective of pipe strength.
Table 10 Limits of cover for thermoplastics (nominal ring stiffness SN4) pipes in any
width of trench
Nominal size Laid in fields Laid in light roads Laid in main roads
Notes:
1. For drains and sewers less than 1.5m deep and there is a risk of excavation adjacent to the drain and depth, special calculation is necessary, see
BS EN 1295.
2. All pipes assumed to be to in accordance with the relevant standard listed in Table 7 with nominal ring stiffness SN4; other strengths and sizes of
pipe are available, consult manufacturers.
3. Bedding assumed to be Class S2 with 80% compaction and average soil conditions.
4. Alternative designs using different pipe strengths and/or bedding types may offer more appropriate or economic options using the procedures
set out in BS EN 1295.
5. Minimum depth is set to 1.5m irrespective of pipe strength to cover loss of side support from parallel excavations.
Access fitting
small 150 diam. 0.6 or less,
150 x 100 except where 150 x 100 150 150 x 100 1 Same size as
large 225 x 100 situated in a 225 x 100 225 225 x 100 1 access fitting
chamber
Inspection chamber
shallow 0.6 or less 225 x 100 190 2 – 190 1
1.2 or less 450 x 450 450 Min. 430 x 430 430
deep > 1.2 450 x 450 450 Max. 300 x 300 3 Access restricted
to max. 350 3
Notes:
1. The clear opening may be reduced by 20mm in order to provide proper support for the cover and frame.
2. Drains up to 150mm.
3. A larger clear opening cover may be used in conjunction with a restricted access. The size is restricted for health and safety reasons to deter entry.
Manhole
< 1.5m deep to soffit ≤ 150 750 x 675 7 1000 7 750 x 675 2 na 3
225 1200 x 675 1200 1200 x 675 2
300 1200 x 750 1200
>300 1800 x The larger of 1800
(DN+450) or (DN+450)
>1.5m deep to soffit ≤ 225 1200 x 1000 1200 600 x 600 600
300 1200 x 1075 1200
375-450 1350 x 1225 1200
>450 1800 x The larger of 1800
(DN+775) or (DN+775)
Manhole shaft 4
> 3.0m deep to Steps 5 1050 x 800 1050 600 x 600 600
Notes:
1. Larger sizes may be required for manholes on bends or where there are junctions.
2. May be reduced to 600 by 600 where required by highway loading considerations, subject to a safe system of work being specified.
3. Not applicable due to working space needed.
4. Minimum height of chamber in shafted manhole 2m from benching to underside of reducing slab.
5. Min. clear space between ladder or steps and the opposite face of the shaft should be approximately 900mm.
6. Winch only – no steps or ladders, permanent or removable.
7. The minimum size of any manhole serving a sewer (i.e. any drain serving more than one property) should be 1200mm x 675mm rectangular
or 1200mm diameter.
2.50 Access should be provided to long runs. 2.53 Where half round channels are used in
The distances between access points depend inspection chambers and manholes the branches
on the types of access used but should not be up to and including 150mm diameter should
more than shown in Table 13 for drains up to and discharge into the channel in the direction of flow
including 300mm. at or above the level of the horizontal diameter.
A branch with a diameter >150mm should be
2.51 Access points to sewers (serving more
set with the soffit level with that of the main drain.
than one property) should be in places where
Where the angle of the branch is more than 45°
they are accessible and apparent for use in an
a three quarter section branch should be used.
emergency. Examples of suitable locations
Channels and branches should be benched up
include highways, public open space, unfenced
at least to the top of the outgoing pipe and at a
front gardens and shared or unfenced driveways.
slope of 1 in 12. The benching should be rounded
2.52 Construction of access points – these at the channel with a radius of at least 25mm.
should contain the foul water under working and
test conditions and resist the entry of groundwater
and rainwater. Any of the materials shown in
Table 14 may be used.
Rodding eye 22 22 22 45 45
Inspection chamber 22 45 22 45 45
shallow
Notes:
1. Stack or ground floor appliance
2. May be up to 200 for man-entry size drains and sewers
Alternative approach
2.63 The requirement can also be met by
following the relevant recommendations of BS
EN 752. The relevant clauses are in Part 3, Part 4
and Part 6. BS EN 752, together with BS EN 1610
and BS EN 1295, contains additional information
about design and construction. BS EN 12056
describes the discharge unit method of calculating
flows. Also by providing systems meeting the
requirements of BS EN 1091 Vacuum sewerage
systems outside buildings, or BS EN 1671
Pressure sewerage systems outside buildings.
1 2.5
5 3.5
10 4.1
15 4.6 Branch discharge pipes
20 5.1
25 5.4 (see paragraph 1.10)
30 5.8
A.5 A branch pipe should not discharge into
a stack less than 750mm above the invert of the
tail of the bend at the foot of the stack in a multi-
A.3 Flow rates for other commonly used storey building up to 5 storeys. Alternatively a
appliances not covered in Table A1 are shown in branch pipe serving any ground floor appliance may
Table A2. discharge direct to a drain or into its own stack.
A.6 If the building has more than 5 storeys
ground floor appliances, unless discharging to
Table A2 Flow rates from appliances a gully or drain, should discharge into their own
stack. If the building has more than 20 storeys
Appliance Flow rate ground floor appliances, unless discharging to
(litres/sec)
a gully or drain, and first floor appliances should
Spray tap basin 0.06 discharge into their own stack.
Washing machine 0.70 Ventilating stacks
Dishwashing machine 0.25 (see paragraph 1.21)
Urinal (per person) 0.15 A.7 A dry stack may provide ventilation for
branch ventilation pipes as an alternative to
carrying them to outside air or to a ventilated
discharge stack (ventilated system).
A.8 Ventilation stacks serving buildings with
not more than 10 storeys and containing only
dwellings should be at least 32mm diameter (for
all other buildings see paragraph 1.29).
A.9 The lower end of a stack may be connected
directly to a ventilated discharge stack below
the lowest branch discharge pipe connection
and above the bend at the foot of the stack or
to the crown of the lowest branch discharge pipe
connection providing it is ≥75mm diameter.
b. Sewers should be laid at an appropriate distance from buildings so as to avoid damage H1-2.17, H1-2.25 and Diagram 8. The
to the foundations distance from foundation to any drain
is set out in H1-2.25.
When building over a sewer the
recommended minimum distance
is 3m (H4-1.6)
c. The manholes and chambers, especially in private land, should be located so that they H1-2.51. Consult sewerage undertaker
are, and continue to be, easily accessible manually or, if necessary, with maintenance about access for plant
equipment such as pipe jetters or mini-excavators. This is of particular importance
where the depth would justify mechanical excavation to undertake repair work
Although design codes indicate that access points may be up to 200m apart, it is
unlikely that it would be possible to rod or safely pressure jet small-diameter pipes over
such a distance; 100m is more appropriate
d. The last access point on the house drain should be sized to allow man entry and should H1-2.51
be located in an accessible position. This access point should, as far as practicable, be
located adjacent to the curtilage and preferably form an interface with the connection to
the lateral where it runs outside the curtilage of the property to discharge into a sewer in
a highway, into public open space or into third-party land
As this final manhole is likely to be in position where vehicle or plant loading is
anticipated, its construction should accord with Sewers for Adoption
e. House ‘collector’ drains serving each property should normally discharge into the sewer H1-2.13 to 2.16
via a single junction or a manhole
f. Sewers should not be laid deeper than necessary, but in all cases the structural integrity H1-2.27 and BS EN 1295-1
of the pipe needs to be maintained. This can normally be done by providing a cover
to the top of the pipe barrel of 1.2m or 0.9m in highways or private land respectively. If
these depths are not practicable, special protection measures such as a concrete slab
should be provided
g. Sizing and design of manholes and chambers should depend on the depth and on H1-2.48
whether man entry is required. Manholes on or near highways or other roads need to
be of robust construction
h. Sewers should be laid in straight lines in both vertical and horizontal alignments H1-2.19
j. The first preference should be to provide separate foul and surface water sewerage Requirement H5, H1-2.35 and H3-3.5.
systems. Where ‘combined’ or ‘partially combined’ sewerage is unavoidable, the sizing See also BS EN 752 Parts 3 and 4,
and the design of that sewer should be enhanced in accordance with the current codes particularly note Annex ND in BS EN
and design methodologies to make additional provisions to deal with the runoff 752 Part 4
Guidance
Performance i. be prejudicial to health or a nuisance;
In the Secretary of State’s view the requirements ii. adversely affect water sources or resources;
of H2 will be met if: iii. pollute controlled waters;
a. wastewater treatment systems: iv. be in an area where there is a risk
i. have sufficient capacity to enable of flooding.
breakdown and settlement of solid matter d. septic tanks and wastewater treatment
in the wastewater from the buildings; systems and cesspools are constructed and
ii. are sited and constructed so as to prevent sited so as to:
overloading of the receiving water. i. have adequate ventilation;
b. cesspools have sufficient capacity to store ii. prevent leakage of the contents and
the foul water from the building until they ingress of subsoil water.
are emptied;
e. having regard to water table levels at any
c. wastewater treatment systems and cesspools time of the year and rising groundwater
are sited and constructed so as not to: levels, drainage fields are sited and
constructed so as to:
Notes:
1. To provide venting of the filter, the upstream ends of the distribution pipes may be extended vertically above mound level and capped with a cowl or grille.
2. Surface water runoff and uncontaminated seepage from the surrounding soil may be cut off by shallow interceptor drains and diverted away from
the mound. There must be no seepage of wastewater to such an interceptor drain.
3. Where the permeable soil is slow draining and overlaid on an impervious layer, the mound filter system should be constructed on a gently sloping site.
1.42 Trenches should be filled to a level the true bulrush (Schoenoplectus lacustris) as
50mm above the pipe and covered with a layer well as members of the sedge family (Carex) and
of geotextile to prevent the entry of silt. The the yellow flag (Iris pseudacorus).
remainder of the trench can be filled with soil;
1.47 Constructed wetlands should not be
the distribution pipes should be laid at a minimum
constructed in the shade of trees or buildings as
depth of 500mm below the surface.
this will result in poor or patchy growth. Although
Drainage trenches should be from 300mm to winter performance is generally similar with
900mm wide, with areas of undisturbed ground respect to removal of BOD and suspended
2m wide being maintained between parallel solids, it tends to be poorer than in summer for
trenches (see Diagram 1). removal of ammonia due to lower temperatures.
This should be taken into consideration during
1.43 An inspection chamber should be installed
the design stage.
between the septic tank and the drainage field.
1.48 There are two main designs of constructed
1.44 Drainage fields should be set out as a
wetland system, horizontal flow and vertical flow.
continuous loop fed from the inspection chamber
(see Diagram 1). To calculate the floor area of the 1.49 Horizontal flow systems are continuously
drainage field (At in m²), the following formula fed with wastewater from one end. The effluent
should be used: flows horizontally through the gravel bed over
the full width of the bed to the outlet end (see
At = p x Vp x 0.25
Diagram 3). Horizontal flow systems tend to be
where p is the number of persons served by oxygen limited and they therefore tend not to be
the tank, Vp is the percolation value (secs/mm) able to completely treat concentrated effluents,
obtained as described in paragraphs 1.34–1.38. particularly those with high levels of ammonia.
Horizontal flow systems require a level site. As
Constructed wetlands/reed beds they only use a single bed less maintenance is
required than with vertical flow systems.
1.45 Reed bed treatment systems or other
constructed wetland treatment systems can be 1.50 Vertical flow systems are intermittently
used to provide secondary or tertiary treatment fed with wastewater from the top flooding the
of effluent from septic tanks or packaged surface followed by a period of rest. For this
treatment works. The systems purify wastewater reason two or more beds are normally provided
as it moves through the gravel bed around the so that they can be used in rotation. The flow
rhizomes and roots, by removing organic matter is predominantly downward to an outlet at the
(BOD), oxidising ammonia, reducing nitrate and bottom (see Diagram 4) and is collected by a
removing a little phosphorus. The mechanisms drainage network at the base. They therefore
are complex and involve bacterial oxidation, require a fall of between 1m and 2m. Vertical
filtration, sedimentation and chemical precipitation. flow systems can achieve much better oxygen
transfer than horizontal flow systems and
1.46 Reed beds generally use the common therefore achieve more complete treatment,
reed (Phragmites australis); other types of plants particularly of ammonia. They generally require
used in constructed wetlands include the reed more maintenance than horizontal systems.
maces (Typha latifolia), the rush (Juncus effusus),
Alternative approach
1.72 The requirement can also be met by
following the relevant recommendations of
BS 6297:1983 Code of practice for design and
installation of small sewage treatment works and
cesspools. The relevant clauses are in Section 1,
Section 2, Section 3 (Clauses 6–11), Section 4
and Appendices.
Cesspools
A.20 Cesspools should be inspected fortnightly
for overflow and emptied as required.
A.21 Typically they require emptying on a
monthly basis by a licensed contractor.
A.22 Emptying frequencies may be estimated
by assuming a filling rate of 150 litres per person
per day. If the cesspool does not fill within the
estimated period, the tank should be checked
for leakage.
Rainwater drainage
H3. (1) Adequate provision shall be made for rainwater to be
carried from the roof of the building.
(2) Paved areas around the building shall be so constructed Requirement H3(2) applies only to paved areas:
as to be adequately drained.
(a) which provide access to the building pursuant
to requirement M1 (access and use of buildings other than
dwellings), or requirement M2 (access to extensions to
buildings other than dwellings), or requirement M4(1), (2) or
(3) (access to and use of dwellings);
(b) which provide access to or from a place of storage
pursuant to requirement H6(2) (solid waste storage); or
(c) in any passage giving access to the building,
where this is intended to be used in common by the occupiers
of one or more other buildings.
(3) Rainwater from a system provided pursuant to sub- Requirement H3(3) does not apply to the gathering of rainwater
paragraphs (1) or (2) shall discharge to one of the following, for re-use.
listed in order of priority:
(a) an adequate soakaway or some other adequate
infiltration system; or, where that is not reasonably practicable,
(b) a watercourse; or, where that is not reasonably
practicable,
(c) a sewer.
Guidance
Performance ii. minimises the risk of blockage or leakage,
In the Secretary of State’s view the requirements iii. is accessible for clearing blockages.
of H3 will be met if: c. rainwater soaking into the ground is distributed
a. rainwater from roofs and paved areas is sufficiently so that it does not damage the
carried away from the surface either by a foundations of the proposed building or
drainage system or by other means; any adjacent structure.
b. a rainwater drainage system:
i. carries the flow of rainwater from the roof
to an outfall (a soakaway, a watercourse,
a surface water or a combined sewer),
1.12 Further information on the design of a. all gutter joints should remain water tight
siphonic drainage systems can be found in under working conditions. Pipes inside a
Hydraulics Research Ltd Report SR 463 building should be capable of withstanding
Performance of Syphonic Drainage Systems the air tightness test described in paragraph
for Roof Gutters. 1.32 of Approved Document H1, and
b. pipework in siphonic roof drainage systems
Eaves drop systems should be able to resist to negative pressures
in accordance with the design, and
1.13 Eaves drop systems allow rainwater from
roofs to drop freely to the ground. Where these c. gutters and rainwater pipes should be firmly
are used, they should be designed taking into supported without restricting thermal
account the following: movement, and
a. the protection of the fabric of the building d. different metals should be separated by
from ingress of water, caused by water non-metallic material to prevent electrolytic
splashing on the external walls; corrosion.
b. the need to prevent water from entering
doorways and windows; Alternative approach
c. the need to protect persons using doorways, 1.17 The performance can also be met by
etc. from falling water; following the relevant recommendations of
BS EN 12056 Gravity drainage systems inside
d. the need to protect persons and the fabric of buildings. The relevant clauses are in Part 3 Roof
the building from rainwater as it hits the ground drainage layout and calculation, Clauses 3 to 7,
by splashing, for example by provision of annex A and National Annexes, and in Part 5
a gravel layer or angled concrete apron Installation, testing instructions for operation
deflecting the water away from the building; maintenance and use, Clauses 3, 4, 6 and 11.
e. the protection of foundations from These standards contain additional detailed
concentrated discharges such as those from information about design and construction.
valleys or valley gutters or from excessive
flows due to large roofs (i.e. where the area
of roof per unit length of eaves is high).
Diagram 2 Rainfall intensities for design of drainage from paved areas and
underground rainwater drainage (litres per second per square metre)
Design
3.10 Where there is evidence of a liability
to surcharging from sewers, or levels in the
building or on the site make gravity connection
impracticable, surface water lifting equipment
will be needed (see Approved Document H1
paragraphs 2.8 to 2.12).
Guidance
Performance c. the risk of damage to the building as a result
of failure of the drain, sewer or disposal main
In the Secretary of State’s view the requirements is not excessive having regard to:
of H4 will be met if:
i. the nature of the ground;
a. the building or extension or work involving
underpinning: ii. the condition, location or construction
of the drain, sewer or disposal main;
i. is constructed or carried out in a manner
which will not overload or otherwise iii. the nature, volume and pressure of the
cause damage to the drain, sewer or flow in the drain, sewer or disposal main;
disposal main either during or after the iv. the design and construction of the
construction; foundations of the building.
ii. will not obstruct reasonable access to
any manhole or inspection chamber on Introduction to provisions
the drain, sewer or disposal main; 0.1 These provisions apply to the construction,
b. in the event of the drain, sewer or disposal extension or underpinning of a building over or
main requiring replacement, there is a within 3m of the centreline of an existing drain,
satisfactory diversionary route or the building sewer or disposal main shown on the sewerage
or the extension will not unduly obstruct work undertaker’s sewer records whether that sewer
to replace the drain, sewer or disposal main, is a public sewer or not.
on its present alignment; 0.2 Copies of the sewer record maps are
held by the sewerage undertaker and by local
authorities. These are available for inspection
during office hours.
Guidance
Performance Introduction to provisions
In the Secretary of State’s view the requirements 0.1 These provisions are to help minimise
of H5 will be met if separate systems of drains the volume of rainwater entering the public foul
and sewers are provided for foul water and sewer system as this can overload the capacity
rainwater where: of the sewer and cause flooding.
a. the rainwater is not contaminated; and Provision where separate sewer systems
b. the drainage is to be connected either are provided
directly or indirectly to the public sewer 1.1 Where the buildings are to be drained
system and either: to the public sewer system, and the sewerage
i. the public sewer system in the area undertaker has provided a separate system
comprises separate systems for foul of sewers, separate drainage systems will be
water and surface water; or necessary in order to comply with the requirements
of Section 106 (Right to communicate with public
ii. a system of sewers which provides for the sewers) of the Water Industry Act 1991 (see
separate conveyance of surface water is appendix H1-C paragraph C.7).
under construction either by the sewerage
undertaker or by some other person (where
the sewer is the subject of an agreement to
make a declaration of vesting pursuant to
Section 104 of the Water Industry Act 1991).
Guidance
Performance Introduction to provisions
In the Secretary of State’s view the requirements 0.1 The efficacy of a refuse storage system is
of H6 will be met if the solid waste storage is: dependent on its capacity and the ease of removal
in relation to the collection service provided by
a. designed and sited so as not to be prejudicial
the waste collection authority.
to health or local amenity;
0.2 The waste collection authority has powers
b. of sufficient area having regard to the
under Section 46 (Receptacles for household
requirements of the waste collection authority
waste) and Section 47 (Receptacles for commercial
for the number and size of receptacles under
or industrial waste) to specify the type and
Sections 46 and 47 of the Environmental
number of receptacles to be used and the
Protection Act 1990;
location where the waste should be placed for
c. sited so as to be accessible for use by collection. Consultation should take place with
people in the building and of ready access for the waste collection authority to determine
removal to the collection point specified by their requirements.
the waste collection authority under Sections
0.3 H6 applies to the erection or extension of a
46 and 47 of the Environmental Protection
building and to all material changes of use described
Act 1990.
in Regulation 5.
H3
BRE
Digest 365 Soakaway design, 1991 (minor
revisions 2003). ISBN 1 86081 604 5
CIRIA
Publication C522 Sustainable urban drainage
systems – design manual for England and Wales,
2000. ISBN 0 86017 522 7
Report 156 Infiltration drainage – Manual of good
practice, 1996. ISBN 0 86017 457 3
Environment Agency
Pollution Prevention Guidelines PPG 3 Use and
design of oil separators in surface water drainage
systems, 2000. Available to download from
www.netregs.gov.uk
H R Wallingford
Report SR 463 Performance of syphonic drainage
systems for roof gutters.
J
Combustion appliances and
fuel storage systems
APPROVED DOCUMENT
J1 Air supply
J2 Discharge of products of combustion
J3 Warning of release of carbon monoxide
J4 Protection of building
J5 Provision of information
J6 Protection of liquid fuel storage systems
J7 Protection against pollution
on
ts nd
en 0 a
iti
dm 01
ed
en g 2
am tin
10
13 ora
20
20 rp
co
in
MAIN CHANGES IN THE MAIN CHANGES MADE BY THE
2010 EDITION FURTHER 2010 AMENDMENTS
Section 1 This 2010 edition incorporates changes to reflect
the renumbering of regulations in the Building
New guidance has been included for access for Regulations 2010 and Building (Approved inspectors
visual inspection of concealed flues. This should etc) Regulations 2010. There have been no
ensure that flues can be properly inspected both changes to the requirements in Part J of Schedule
when an appliance is first commissioned and 1 to the Building Regulations, but please note the
subsequently serviced. simpler definition of ‘room for residential purposes’.
Section 2
Guidance has been included in support of a new
MAIN CHANGES MADE BY THE
requirement J3 “Warning of release of carbon 2013 AMENDMENTS
monoxide” on the provision of carbon monoxide
alarms where solid fuel appliances are installed. These changes, which apply only to England*, update
the guidance on materials and workmanship.
The provisions for flue outlet clearances relative
to adjacent pitched roofs have been clarified in
Diagram 17.
The guidance on the provision of hearths and
wall clearances for solid fuel appliances have
been made more flexible to take account of the
availability of modern appliances.
Section 2, 3 & 4
The guidance for permanent ventilation openings
for open flued appliances in very airtight houses
(those with a design air permeability less than or
equal to 5.0 m3/(h.m2)) have been increased to
counteract the decrease in adventitious ventilation
relative to older houses. Appendix F gives advice
on assessing the air permeability of older houses
in relation to this guidance.
Section 4
This section now explicitly includes liquid biofuel
and blends on mineral oil and liquid biofuel
within the scope of combustion installations
designed to burn oil.
Section 5
The guidance on identifying where secondary
containment for oil tanks is necessary has been
expanded to include locations in inner protection
zone as shown on the Environment Agency’s
groundwater sources map.
Appendix G
This informative appendix provides and explanation
of the European designation system for certain flue
and chimney products.
Sleeve
22. A flue box is a factory made unit, usually made 27. A hearth is a base intended to safely isolate a
of metal, which is similar to a prefabricated combustion appliance from people, combustible
appliance chamber except that it is designed parts of the building fabric and soft furnishings.
to accommodate a gas burning appliance in The exposed surface of the hearth provides a
conjunction with a factory-made chimney. region around the appliance which can be kept
clear of anything at risk of fire. The body of
23. A flueless appliance is one which is designed
the hearth may be thin insulating board, a
to be used without connection to a flue. Its
substantial thickness of material such as
products of combustion mix with the
concrete or some intermediate provision
surrounding room air and are eventually
dependent upon the weight and downward
transported to the outside as stale air leaves
heat emission characteristics of the appliance(s)
the room (see Diagram 4(g)).
upon it (see Diagram 6).
24. A flue liner is the wall of the chimney that is in
28. The heat input rate is the maximum rate of
contact with the products of combustion (see
energy flow into an appliance. It is calculated
Diagram 2), such as a concrete flue liner, the
as the rate of fuel flow to the appliance
inner liner of a factory-made chimney system or
multiplied by either the fuel’s gross or net
a flexible liner fitted into an existing chimney.
calorific value.
25. A flue outlet is the point at which the products
Note: Traditionally, the UK has used Gross
of combustion are discharged from the flue to
values, most European standards use Net values.
the outside atmosphere, such as the top of a
Thus for gas appliances it is now the norm to
chimney pot or flue terminal.
express this rating as a net value (kW (net)).
26. A fluepipe is a pipe, either single walled (bare
29. Installation instructions are those instructions
or insulated) or double walled, which connects
produced by manufacturers to enable installers
a combustion appliance to a flue in a chimney.
to correctly install and test appliances and
For clarity, when used in this way, it may be
flues and to commission them into service.
called a connecting fluepipe. (Fluepipe is also
used to describe the tubular components 30. In a natural draught flue, the combustion
from which some factory made chimneys for products flow into the flue as a result of the
gas and oil appliances are made or from draught produced due to the difference
which plastic flue systems are made). between the temperature of the gases within
the flue and the temperature of the ambient a. a body which is approved by the Secretary of
air. Taller flues produce a greater draught at State for Trade and Industry as being
their base. Except for those balanced flue competent to carry out the required Attestation
appliances which are designed to discharge procedures for gas appliances and whose
directly through the wall adjacent to the name and identification number has been
appliance, a satisfactory natural draught notified by him/her to the Commission of the
requires an essentially vertical run of flue European Community and to other member
(see Diagram 4 (a) and (b)). States in accordance with the Gas Appliances
(Safety) Regulations (1995);
31. Non-combustible material. This is the
highest level of reaction to fire performance. b. a body which has been similarly approved for
Non-combustible materials include: the purposes of the Gas Appliances Directive
by another member State and whose name
a. any material which when tested to
and identification number has been notified to
BS 476-11:1982 (2007) does not flame
the Commission and to other member States
nor cause any rise in temperature on
pursuant to the Gas Appliances Directive.
either the centre (specimen) or furnace
thermocouples; and 33. An open-flued appliance is one which draws
its combustion air from the room or space
b. products classified as non-combustible
within which it is installed and which requires
in tests following the procedures in
a flue to discharge its products of combustion
BS 476-4:1970 (2007);
to the outside air (see Diagram 4 (a), (c) and (e)).
c. any material classified as class A1 in
34. A prefabricated appliance chamber is a set
accordance with BS EN 13501-1:2002 Fire
of factory-made precast concrete components
classification of construction products
designed to provide a fireplace recess to
and building elements. Classification
accommodate an appliance such as a stove,
using data from reaction to fire tests.
and incorporates a gather when used with an
Typical examples of such materials to be open fire. The chamber is normally positioned
found in buildings include totally inorganic against a wall and may be designed to
materials such as concrete, fired clay, support a chimney. The chamber and
ceramics, metals, plaster and masonry chimney are often enclosed to create a false
containing not more than 1 per cent by chimney breast (see also ‘flue box’).
weight or volume of organic material. (Use
35. The rated heat input (sometimes shortened
in buildings of combustible metals such as
to rated input) for a gas appliance is the
magnesium–aluminium alloys should be
maximum heat input rate at which it can be
assessed in each individual case.)
operated, as declared on the appliance data
More detailed information is given in plate. (See also heat input rate.)
Approved Document B (Fire Safety).
36. The rated heat output for an oil appliance is
32. A Notified Body, for the purposes of the Gas the maximum declared energy output rate
Appliances (Safety) Regulations (1995), means: (kW) as declared on the appliance data plate.
Equivalent Equivalent
or Free area 1 or Free area 2
Well-
Well-
xx
xx
Distance xx
distance (xxmm) as
designated to BS EN 1856-1
x
Inspection hatch Any intervening joints
Inspection hatch to be visible within
1.5m of an inspection
hatch
x
x
Accessible
flue connection
x
Inspection hatch
Boiler B Inspection hatch
Internal wall
x
Concealed
flue connection
Boiler A
All voids containing concealed flues should have at least one inspection hatch
measuring at least 300mm square.
No flue joint within the void should be more than 1.5m distant from the edge of
the nearest inspection hatch, i.e. dimension x in the diagram should be less than 1.5m.
Open appliance, such as an open fire with Permanently open air vent(s) with a total equivalent area of at least 50% of the cross
no throat, e.g. a fire under a canopy as in sectional area of the flue.
Diagram 23.
Open appliance, such as an open fire with a Permanently open air vent(s) with a total equivalent area of at least 50% of the throat
throat as in Diagrams 22 and 29. opening area. (2)
Notes:
1. Equivalent area is as measured according to the method in BS EN 13141-1:2004 or estimated according to paragraph 1.14. Divide the area given in
mm2 by 100 to find the corresponding area in cm2
2. For simple open fires as depicted in Diagram 29, the requirement can be met with room ventilation areas as follows:
Nominal fire size (fireplace opening size) 500mm 450mm 400mm 350mm
3. Example: an appliance with a flue draught stabiliser and a rated output of 7kW would require an equivalent area of: [5 x 300] + [2 x 850] = 3200mm2
4. It is unlikely that a dwelling constructed prior to 2008 will have an air permeability of less than 5.0m3/(h.m2) at 50 Pa unless extensive measures have
been taken to improve air-tightness. See Appendix F.
Fireplace with an opening of up to 500mm x 550mm 200mm diameter or rectangular/square flues having the same cross-
sectional area and a minimum dimension not less than 175mm
Fireplace with an opening in excess of 500mm x See paragraph 2.7. If rectangular/square flues are used the minimum
550mm or a fireplace exposed on two or more sides dimension should be not less than 200mm
Closed appliance of up to 20kW rated output which: 125mm diameter or rectangular/square flues having the same cross-
a) burns smokeless or low-volatiles fuel (2) sectional area and a minimum dimension not less than 100mm for straight
or flues or 125mm for flues with bends or offsets
b) is an appliance which meets the requirements of
the Clean Air Act when burning an appropriate
bituminous coal (3)
or
c) is an appliance which meets the requirements of
the Clean Air Act when burning wood (3)
Other closed appliance of up to 30kW rated output 150mm diameter or rectangular/square flues having the same cross-
burning any fuel sectional area and a minimum dimension not less than 125mm
Closed appliance of above 30kW and up to 50kW rated 175mm diameter or rectangular/square flues having the same cross-
output burning any fuel sectional area and a minimum dimension not less than 150mm
Notes:
1. Closed appliances include cookers, stoves, room heaters and boilers.
2. Fuels such as bituminous coal, untreated wood or compressed paper are not smokeless or low-volatiles fuels.
3. These appliances are known as ‘exempted fireplaces’.
2.7 For fireplaces with openings larger than used as the basis for deciding whether a chimney
500mm x 550mm or fireplaces exposed on two design will provide sufficient draught.
or more sides (such as a fireplace under a canopy
2.9 The height of a flue serving an open fire is
or open on both sides of a central chimney
measured vertically from the highest point at
breast) a way of showing compliance would be to
which air can enter the fireplace to the level at
provide a flue with a cross-sectional area equal
which the flue discharges into the outside air. The
to 15 per cent of the total face area of the
highest point of air entry into the fireplace could
fireplace opening(s) (see Appendix B). However,
be the top of the fireplace opening or, for a fire
specialist advice should be sought when
under a canopy, the bottom of the canopy. The
proposing to construct flues having an area of:
height of a flue serving a closed appliance is
a. more than 15 per cent of the total face area of measured vertically from the appliance outlet.
the fireplace openings; or
b. more than 120,000mm² (0.12m²). Outlets from flues
2.10 The outlet from a flue should be above
Height of flues the roof of the building in a position where the
products of combustion can discharge freely and
2.8 Flues should be high enough to ensure
will not present a fire hazard, whatever the wind
sufficient draught to clear the products of
conditions.
combustion. The height necessary for this will
depend upon the type of the appliance, the 2.11 Flue outlet positions which can meet the
height of the building, the type of flue and the requirements in common circumstances are
number of bends in it, and an assessment of shown in Diagram 17. The chimney heights and/
local wind patterns. However, a minimum flue or separations shown may need to be increased
height of 4.5m could be satisfactory if the in particular cases where wind exposure,
guidance in Paragraphs 2.10 to 2.12 is adopted. surrounding tall buildings, high trees or high
As an alternative approach, the calculation ground could have adverse effects on flue draught.
procedure within BS EN 13384-1:2005 can be
Adjacent building
Regulated building
Diagram 18 Flue outlet positions for solid fuel appliances – clearances to easily
ignited roof coverings
(Note: This diagram needs to be read in conjunction with Diagram 17)
2.12 A way of meeting the requirements where Spark arrestors are not generally recommended
flues discharge on or in close proximity to roofs as they can be difficult to maintain and may
with surfaces which are readily ignitable, such as increase the risk of flue blockage and flue fires.
where roofs are covered in thatch or shingles,
Further information and recommendations are
would be to increase the clearances to flue
contained in Hetas Information Paper 1/007
outlets to those shown in Diagram 18.
Chimneys in Thatched Properties.
Note: Thatched roofs can sometimes be vulnerable
to spontaneous combustion caused by heat Connecting fluepipes
transferred from flues building up in thick layers of
thatch in contact with the chimney. To reduce the 2.13 For connecting fluepipes a way of meeting
risk it is recommended that rigid twin-walled the requirements would be to follow the general
insulated metal flue liners be used within a guidance in Paragraphs 1.32 and 1.33.
ventilated (top and bottom) masonry chimney void
provided they are adequately supported and not in Location and shielding of
direct contact with the masonry. Non-metallic connecting fluepipes
chimneys and cast in-situ flue liners can also be
used provided the heat transfer to the thatch is 2.14 Connecting fluepipes should be used only
assessed in relation to the depth of thatch and risk to connect appliances to their chimneys. They
of spontaneous combustion. should not pass through any roof space, partition,
internal wall or floor, except to pass directly into
Combustion appliances and fuel storage systems Approved Document J
32
ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS FOR APPLIANCES BURNING SOLID
FUEL WITH A RATED OUTPUT UP TO 50kW J
Diagram 19 Protecting combustible material from uninsulated fluepipes for solid
fuel appliances
At least
1.5 D
D st
a
3 t le
A
At least
1.5 D
At least
1.5 D
At least
1.5 D
Diagram 24 Constructional hearth suitable for a solid fuel appliance (including open fires)
Diagram 25 Constructional hearth suitable for a solid fuel appliance (including open fires)
Base 50
Diagram 32 Free areas of permanently open air vents for gas appliance installations
(other than decorative fuel effect fires or flueless appliances)
5. In older dwellings with an air permeability which is more than 5.0m3/h/m2 the first 7kW(net) can be ignored.
Notes:
1. The permanent ventilation provisions listed in this table are additional to the openable elements or (for kitchens only)
extract ventilation in accordance with Approved Document F.
2. Divide the area given above in mm2 by 100 to find the corresponding area in cm2.
3. An internal space here means one which communicates with several other rooms or spaces. An example would be a
hallway or landing.
4. For LPG fired space heaters conforming to BS EN 449:2002+A1:2007, follow the guidance in BS 5440-2:2009.
5. No permanently open vent is needed if the room or space has a door direct to outside.
6. Example: for a space heater in a lounge measuring 4m x 4m x 2.4m (= 38.4m3), the appliance rated input should not
exceed 38.4 x 0.045 = 1.73kW (net).
7. Example: a hallway containing a space heater with a rated input of 7kW (net) should have a permanently open vent with
equivalent area of: 10,000 + 2750 x (7 – 5.4) = 14,400mm2.
8. No permanent opening required if the room has a door that opens directly to outside.
Size of natural draught flues for 3.19 For appliances that are CE marked as
compliant with the Gas Appliances (Safety)
open-flued appliances Regulations, flues should be sized in accordance
3.17 Where builders wish to provide (or with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
refurbish) flues for gas appliances but do not 3.20 Connecting fluepipes should be the same
intend to supply the appliances, a way of size in terms of diameter and/or equivalent
showing compliance would be to size flues in cross-sectional area as the appliance flue outlet.
accordance with Table 5. The chimney flue should have at least the same
3.18 If an existing flue is to be used it should be cross-sectional area as that of the appliance
checked in accordance with Paragraph 1.36. flue outlet.
Existing flue:
Circular 125mm diameter
Rectangular 12,000mm2 cross-sectional area with a
minimum dimension of 63mm
ILFE fire or DFE fire within a fireplace opening up to Circular or rectangular Minimum flue dimension of 175mm (1)
500mm x 550mm
DFE fire installed in a fireplace with an opening in Calculate in accordance with paragraph 2.7 in Section 2
excess of 500mm x 550mm
Note:
1. Some ILFE and DFE appliances require a circular flue of at least 125mm diameter.
Table to Diagram 34 Location of outlets from flues serving gas appliances
Minimum separation distances for terminals in mm
0–7kW 300
>7–14kW 600
>14–32kW 1500
>32kW 2000
Notes:
1. An opening here means an openable element, such as an openable window, or a fixed opening such as an air vent. However, in addition, the outlet
should not be nearer than 150mm (fanned draught) or 300mm (natural draught) to an opening into the building fabric formed for the purpose of
accommodating a built-in element, such as a window frame.
2. Boundary as defined in paragraph 0.4 (4). Smaller separations to the boundary may be acceptable for appliances that have been shown to operate
safely with such separations from surfaces adjacent to or opposite the flue outlet.
3. Should not be used.
4. This dimension may be reduced to 75mm for appliances of up to 5kW input (net).
N/A means not applicable.
3.24 Flue outlets should be protected where b. i) using factory-made components that
flues are at significant risk of blockage. Guidance achieve a performance at least equal to
on meeting this requirement is given below. that corresponding to the designation
given in Table 6 for the intended appliance
3.25 Flues serving natural draught open-flued
type when tested to an appropriate
appliances should be fitted with outlet terminals if
European chimney standard (BS EN); and
the flue diameter is no greater than 170mm.
Suitable terminals include those appropriately ii) installing these components in accordance
designated in accordance with BS EN 1856- with the guidance in Paragraphs 3.28 to
1:2003, and conforming to BS EN 13502:2002. 3.35 and Section 1, as relevant, and in
The risk of blockage of flues of more than accordance with the appliance manufacturer’s
170mm diameter should be assessed in the light and component manufacturer’s
of local conditions. In areas where nests of installation instructions.
squirrels or jackdaws are likely, the fitting of a
protective cage designed for solid fuel use and
having a mesh size no larger than 25mm (but
no smaller than 6mm) may be an acceptable Table 6 Minimum performance
provision if the total free area of its outlet designations for chimney and
openings is at least twice the cross-sectional fluepipe components for use
area of the flue.
with new gas appliances
3.26 A flue outlet should be protected with a
guard if persons could come into contact with it Appliance type Minimum
designation
or if it could be damaged. If a flue outlet is in a (see notes)
vulnerable position, such as where the flue
discharges within reach from the ground, or a Boiler: open-flued Natural draught T250 N2 D 1 O
balcony, veranda or a window, it should be Fanned draught T250 P2 D 1 O
Condensing T140 P2 W 1 O
designed to prevent the entry of any matter that
could obstruct the flow of flue gases. Boiler: room-sealed Natural draught T250 N2 D 1 O
Fanned draught T250 P2 D 1 O
Provision of flues Condensing T140 P2 W 1 O
or (if the intended appliance is new and of 2. These are default designations. Where the appliance manufacturer’s
installation instructions specify a higher designation, this should
known type): be complied with.
Diagram 37 Hearths for decorative fuel effect (DFE) and inset live fuel effect (ILFE)
fires: minimum plan dimensions of non-combustible surfaces
Notes:
5. In older dwellings with an air permeability which is more than 5.0m3/hr/m2 the first 5kW(net) can be ignored.
C Below a plastic/painted gutter, drainage pipe or eaves if combustible material 75 Should not be used
protected (4)
D Below a balcony or a plastic/painted gutter, drainage pipe or eaves without 600 Should not be used
protection to combustible material
F From an external or internal corner or from a surface or boundary alongside 300 Should not be used
the terminal
H From a surface or boundary facing the terminal 600 Should not be used
K Vertically from a terminal on the same wall 1500 Should not be used
L Horizontally from a terminal on the same wall 750 Should not be used
M Above the highest point of an intersection with the roof 600 (6) 1000 (5)
N From a vertical structure to the side of the terminal 750 (6) 2300
O Above a vertical structure which is less than 750mm (pressure jet burner) or 600 (6) 1000 (5)
2300mm (vaporising burner) horizontally from the side of the terminal
P From a ridge terminal to a vertical structure on the roof 1500 Should not be used
Notes:
1. Terminals should only be positioned on walls where appliances have been approved for such configurations when tested in accordance with
BS EN 303-1:1999 or OFTEC standards OFS A100 or OFS A101.
2. An opening means an openable element, such as an openable window, or a permanent opening such as a permanently open air vent.
3. Notwithstanding the dimensions above, a terminal should be at least 300mm from combustible material, e.g. a window frame.
4. A way of providing protection of combustible material would be to fit a heat shield at least 750mm wide.
5. Where a terminal is used with a vaporising burner, the terminal should be at least 2300mm horizontally from the roof.
6. Outlets for vertical balanced flues in locations M, N and O should be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Table 11 Fire protection for LPG storage tanks (see Diagram 43)
Minimum separation distances from buildings,
boundaries or fixed sources of ignition (metres)
1.1 3 1.5
Table 11
Column (B) Table 11
Column (C)
Table 11
Column (C)
Table 11
Column (B)
Table 11
Column (C)
4. Intended type of appliance. Open fire Radiant/convector Oil fire boiler 18kW
State type or make. If open fire give finished 480 W x 560 H (mm) fire 6kW input output (pressure jet)
fireplace opening dimensions.
5. Ventilation provisions for the appliance: 2 through wall Not fitted Vents to outside:
State type and area of permanently open air vents. ventilators each Top 9,900mm2
10,000mm2 (100cm2) Bottom 19,800mm2
a) State the type and make and whether new or existing. New. Brick with Existing masonry S.S. prefab to
clay liners BS 4543-2
b) Internal flue size (and equivalent height, where 200mm Ø 125mm Ø (H0=3.3m) 127mm Ø
calculated – natural draught gas appliances only).
c) If clay or concrete flue liners used confirm they are Sockets uppermost Not applicable Not applicable
correctly jointed with socket end uppermost and state Jointed by fire cement
joining materials used.
d) If an existing chimney has been refurbished with a new Not applicable Flexible metal liner Not applicable
liner, type or make of liner fitted. to BS 715
e) Details of flue outlet terminal and diagram reference.
Outlet detail: Smith Ltd Louvred pot 125mm Ø GC1 terminal Maker’s recommended
200mm Ø terminal
Compiles with: As Diagram 17, AD J As BS 5440-1:2008 As Diagram 41, AD J
g) Provision for cleaning and recommended frequency. Sweep annually via Annual service by Gas Sweep annually via base
fireplace opening Safe Register engineer of Tee and via appliance
7. Hearth, form of construction. New or existing? New. Tiles on concrete Existing hearth for solid New. Solid floor
floor. 125mm thick. fuel fire, with fender. Min 125mm concrete
As Diagram 25 AD J above DPM. As Diagram
42, ADJ
8. Inspection and testing after completion Inspected and tested by Tested by J Smith, Tested by J Smith,
Test carried out by: J Smith, Smith Building Co. GasSafe Reg no. 1234 The Oil Heating Co.
Test (Appendix E in AD J) and results
Flue inspection visual Not possible, bends Not possible, bends Checked to Section 10,
sweeping OK Not applicable BS7566:Part 3: 1992 – OK
coring ball OK Not applicable OK
smoke OK Not applicable OK
Appliance (where included) spillage Not included OK OK
I/We the undersigned confirm that the above details are correct. In my opinion, these works comply with the relevant requirements in Part J
of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations.
Print name and title …………………………………………………………………………………… Profession ………………………………………………….
Capacity …(e.g. “Proprietor of Smith’s Flues”, Authorising Engineer for Brown plc)…………….........................…......… Tel no. …...........………
Address ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..........................…. Postcode …........…………
Signed …………………………………………………………………………………………….. Date …………………………………………
Registered membership of … (e.g. GasSafe, OFTEC, HETAS, NACE, NACS) …………………………….………………………………………………
Outlet detail:
Complies with:
Diagram 45 Large or unusual fireplace openings. (Note: for use with this Appendix,
measure L, H and W in mm)
liquid Kerosene: sulphur-content Oil: sulphur-content 0.2 mass Oil: sulphur-content > 0.2 mass %
50 mg/m3 % kerosene: sulphur-content kerosene: sulphur-content
50 mg/m3 50 mg/m3
coal Coal
peat Peat
P T
Performance requirements 1.1 Technical specifications page 7
Plastic fluepipes 1.41 Thatched roofs 2.12
Prefabricated appliance chambers Throat Diagram 29
2.30, Table 4 Definition 0.4
Definition 0.4
Product certification schemes page 7
Publications (excluding BSI and V
European Standards) page 82 Ventilation
Above Ground Oil Storage Tanks Air permeability assessment
(CLG PPG2, 2004) 5.7 Appendix F
Bulk LPG Storage at Fixed Appliance compartments 1.5–1.7
Installations (UKLPG Code of Flueless appliances 1.19, 3.15–3.16,
Practice, 2009) 5.14 Diagram 8, Diagram 33
Good Building Guide (BRE GBG 25) Gas appliances 3.15–3.16, Diagram
1.20 33, Appendix C
Installation, decommissioning and Oil appliances Appendix D
removal of underground storage Room 1.4, 1.8–1.9, 1.18–1.19,
tanks (CLG PPG27, 2002) 5.7 1.20–1.23
Protective measures for housing See also Air supply; Air vents
on gas contaminated land Ventilator free areas Diagram 9
(BR 414, 2001) 1.17
Radon: guidance on protective
measures for new buildings W
(BR 211, 2007) 1.17
Workmanship page 7
Safety in the installation and use
Workplace (Health, Safety and
of gas systems and appliances
Welfare) Regulations 1992 page 8
(HSE) 3.3
R
Radiant convector gas fires 3.13–3.14,
Diagram 31
Radon gas extraction 1.20
Rated heat input
Definition 0.4
Rated heat output
Definition 0.4
Roof space installations 1.60
Room-sealed appliances Diagram 4
Air supply 1.8, Diagram 8
Definition 0.4
Gas appliances Diagram 32
K
Protection from falling,
collision and impact
APPROVED DOCUMENT
* This approved document gives guidance for compliance with the Building Regulations for building
work carried out in England. It also applies to building work carried out on excepted energy
buildings in Wales as defined in the Welsh Ministers (Transfer of Functions) (No. 2) Order 2009.
The approved documents
The following is a high level summary of the Building Regulations relevant to most types of building
work. Where there is any doubt you should consult the full text of the regulations, available at
www.legislation.gov.uk.
Building work
Regulation 3 of the Building Regulations defines ‘building work’. Building work includes:
a. the erection or extension of a building
b. the provision or extension of a controlled service or fitting
c. the material alteration of a building or a controlled service or fitting.
Regulation 4 states that building work should be carried out in such a way that, when work is
complete:
a. for new buildings or work on a building that complied with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations: the building complies with the applicable requirements of the Building
Regulations
b. for work on an existing building that did not comply with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations:
(i) the work itself must comply with the applicable requirements of the Building Regulations
(ii) the building must be no more unsatisfactory in relation to the requirements than before
the work was carried out.
Section 2: Ramps 18
Scope 18
Appearance of ramps 18
Steepness of ramps 18
Construction of ramps 19
Design of ramps 19
Width of ramps 20
Obstruction of ramps 20
Application
0.2 Regulation 3 defines building work such that the following applies.
a. Glazing which is installed in a location where there was none previously as part of the
erection, extension or material alteration of a building (other than an exempt building), and
the replacement of a whole unit (i.e. the frame and glazing) is building work and is subject to
requirement K4 and K5.2.
b. The replacement of glazing whilst retaining an existing frame (e.g. as a repair) is not building
work, but the supply of the glazing may be subject to consumer protection legislation.
0.3 Requirement K1 applies to means of access outside a building only when the access is part of the
building (i.e. attached). For example, requirement K1 does not apply to steps on land leading to a
building, but does apply to entrance steps which are part of the building.
0.4 Regarding access routes.
a. Where access and circulation routes form part of a means of escape for people in case of
fire, refer to Approved Document B: Fire safety, Volume 1 – Dwellinghouses, and Volume 2 –
Buildings other than dwellinghouses.
b. For external pedestrian access and circulation routes to buildings, from the boundary of the site
and car parking, reference should also be made to Approved Document M: Access to and use of
buildings.
This approved document deals with the following requirement from Part K of Schedule 1 to the
Building Regulations 2010.
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
K1. Stairs, ladders and ramps shall be so designed, Requirement K1 applies only to stairs, ladders and ramps
constructed and installed as to be safe for people which form part of the building.
moving between different levels in or about the
building.
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you can meet requirement K1 by ensuring that the steepness, rise
and going, handrails, headroom, length and width of any stairs, ladders and ramps between levels
are appropriate to afford reasonable safety to people gaining access to and moving about buildings.
The standard of provision needed to give an acceptable level of safety for access and use depends
on the circumstances.
a. The standard of provision may need to be higher in a public building than in a dwelling, because
people may not be familiar with the building and there may be more users.
b. A lower standard of provision may be acceptable where access is required only for
maintenance, because greater care can be expected from the people requiring to gain access.
Scope
1.1 The guidance provided in this document covers internal and external steps and stairs when they
are part of the building. Additional guidance is provided in Approved Document M when external
stepped access also forms part of the principal entrances and alternative accessible entrances, and
when they form part of the access route to the building from the boundary of the site and car
parking. See Approved Document M Section 1 (for buildings other than dwellings) and Section 6 (for
dwellings).
Nosing
Going dimensions
to be measured Pitch
from nosing to nosing
Going
Note: Two examples of tread profiles have been shown together for illustrative purposes only
Nosing
Treads should
overlap no
more than Max 25mm overlap
Rise
BUILDINGS 25mm
OTHER THAN
DWELLINGS Top surface of tread
(For tread
profiles see Going dimensions
Diagram 1.2) to be measured Going
from nosing to nosing Pitch
Note: Four examples of tread profiles have been shown together for illustrative purposes only
Rise* Going*
Minimum (mm) Maximum (mm) Minimum (mm) Maximum (mm)
Private stair1, 2 150 220 220 300
Utility stair 150 190 250 400
g. Where an exit is approached from a stepped gangway, place a landing the width of the exit and
a minimum of 1100mm deep immediately in front of the exit doors.
h. For stepped side gangways, provide a handrail in accordance with paragraphs 1.34 and 1.36.
i. In stepped tiers, maintain the same level between the seatway and the nearest step.
j. Gangways should not be less than 1100mm wide unless used by not more than 50 persons, in
which case gangways should be a minimum of 900mm.
Construction of steps
For all buildings
1.5 Have level treads on steps, ensuring that the rise and going of each step are consistent throughout
a flight of steps and are in accordance with Table 1.1.
For buildings other than dwellings
1.6 Use risers that are not open.
NOTE: The benefits of a riser that is not open are as follows.
a. It removes the possibility of the front of a foot or a walking aid being caught underneath a
tread during ascent, possibly causing a fall.
b. It avoids the feeling of insecurity people get when looking through open risers on a stair.
1.7 For steps, apply both of the following guidance.
a. Make step nosings apparent: use a material that will contrast visually, a minimum of 55mm wide,
on both the tread and the riser.
b. Avoid, if possible, step nosings that protrude over the tread below. If the nosing protrudes,
ensure that this is by no more than 25mm (see Diagram 1.2).
1.8 If the soffit beneath a stair is less than 2m above floor level, protect the area beneath a stair with
one of the following.
a. Guarding and low level cane detection.
b. A barrier giving the same degree of protection.
For dwellings
1.9 Steps may have open risers if they comply with both of the following guidance.
a. Overlap treads by a minimum of 16mm.
b. Construct the steps so that a 100mm diameter sphere cannot pass through the open risers.
For common access areas in buildings that contain flats
1.10 Provide a stair with steps that comply with all of the following guidance.
a. Make step nosings apparent: use a material that will contrast visually, 50mm to 65mm wide on
the tread and 30mm to 55mm on the riser.
b. Use a suitable tread nosing profile, as shown in Diagram 1.2.
c. Use risers which are not open.
60° min.
At least
2m Minimum
headroom
At least
2m
At least
Landing 2m
Pitch line
Flight
Landing
For buildings other than dwellings and for common access areas in buildings that contain flats
1.12 Provide all means of escape routes with a minimum clear headroom of 2m, except in doorways.
Flight
Stair
Landing
width
Angle at
least 30˚
For buildings other than dwellings and common access areas in buildings that contain flats
1.18 Comply with all of the following.
a. Do not have single steps.
b. For flights between landings the maximum number of risers should be:
(i) utility stairs – 16 risers
(ii) general access stairs – 12 risers, but exceptionally no more than 16 in small premises where
the plan area is restricted
(iii) stairs for access for maintenance, see paragraph 1.42.
400mm
minimum
Up
Up
Up
At least
At least 400mm
400mm
Landing Door
Door
Special stairs
Tapered treads
1.25 For the rise and going, comply with paragraphs 1.2 and 1.3. For the going of tapered treads, use the
measurements shown in Diagram 1.9.
1.26 For consecutive tapered treads, use the same going.
1.27 If a stair consists of straight and tapered treads, ensure that the going of the tapered treads is not
less than the going of the straight treads.
Width
Going (not less
than minimum
for stair category
see para 1.3)
Landing length
measured on
centre line
270mm 270mm
Minimum
going
With this type of 220mm
stair the going is
measured between
alternate nosings
Maximum
rise
220mm
Fixed ladders
In dwellings
1.31 Do not use retractable ladders as means of escape. Refer to Approved Document B: Volume 1 –
Dwellinghouses, and Volume 2 – Buildings other than dwellinghouses.
1.32 You may use a fixed ladder – with fixed handrails on both sides – only for access in a loft
conversion that contains one habitable room, and only when there is not enough space without
alteration to the existing space for a stair that satisfies the guidance for dwellings in paragraphs
1.2–1.24.
For industrial buildings
1.33 Design and construct stairs, ladders and walkways, as appropriate, in accordance with BS 5395-3 or
BS 4211.
300mm min.
1000mm
Diagram 1.11 Key dimensions for handrails for common stairs in blocks of flats
300mm min.
900mm to 1100mm
Diagram 1.12 Key dimensions for handrails for stairs in buildings other than dwellings
In dwellings
1.37 In exceptional circumstances where severely sloping plots are involved, a stepped change of level
within the entrance storey may be unavoidable. In those instances, if a flight comprises three or
more risers, provide a suitable continuous handrail in accordance with both of the following.
a. On each side of the flight.
b. On each side of any intermediate landings.
50mm to
75mm
15mm min.
radius
50mm min.
50mm max.
Non-circul
3
r
Guarding of stairs
For all buildings
1.38 Design the guarding to be the height shown in Diagram 3.1.
1.39 In a building that may be used by children under five years of age, construct the guarding to a flight
of stairs to do both of the following.
a. Prevent children being held fast by the guarding: ensure that a 100mm sphere cannot pass
through any openings in the guarding.
b. Prevent children from readily being able to climb the guarding.
Section 2: Ramps
Scope
2.1 The guidance provided in this document covers internal and external ramps when they are part
of the building. Additional guidance is provided in Approved Document M when external ramped
access also forms part of the principal entrances and alternative accessible entrances, and when they
form part of the access route to the building from the boundary of the site and car parking. See
Approved Document M Section 1 (for buildings other than dwellings) and Section 6 (for dwellings).
Appearance of ramps
For buildings other than dwellings
2.2 Ensure that ramps are readily apparent or clearly signposted.
Steepness of ramps
For all buildings
2.3 Ensure that the relationship between the gradient of a ramp and its going between landings is as
shown in Diagram 2.1.
NOTE: A floor level with a gradient of 1:20 or steeper should be designed as a ramp.
0 2 5 10
Going of ramp flight (m)
NOTE: For goings between 2m and 10m, it is acceptable to interpolate between the maximum gradients
i.e. 1:14 for 4m going or 1:19 for 9m going
Design of ramps
For all buildings
2.8 Design all ramps and landings in accordance with Diagram 2.2.
Clear headroom 2m
Width of ramps
For buildings other than dwellings
2.9 Regarding the width of a ramp.
a. For a ramp that provides access for people: ensure the ramp has a minimum width between
walls, upstands or kerbs of 1500mm.
b. For a ramp that forms a means of escape, refer also to Approved Document B: Volume 2 –
Buildings other than dwellinghouses, B1, Section 5.
Obstruction of ramps
For all buildings
2.10 Keep ramps clear of permanent obstructions.
Guarding of ramps
For all buildings
2.15 Provide guarding for ramps and their landings at their sides in the same way as stairs (see paragraphs
1.38–1.41).
This approved document deals with the following requirement from Part K of Schedule 1 to the
Building Regulations 2010.
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
K2.—(a)
K2. —(a) Any stairs, ramps, floors and balconies and any Requirement K2 (a) applies only to stairs and ramps
roof to which people have access, and which form part of the building.
(b) any light well, basement area or similar sunken
area connected to a building,
shall be provided with barriers where it is necessary to
protect people in or about the building from falling.
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you can meet requirement K2 if, in order to reduce the risk
to the safety of people in and around buildings, you use suitable guarding for the appropriate
circumstance. Unless otherwise set out elsewhere in this document for particular situations, you can
achieve this by the following:
a. in dwellings: provide pedestrian guarding that is capable of preventing people from being injured
by falling from a height of more than 600mm
b. in buildings other than dwellings: provide pedestrian guarding that is capable of preventing
people from falling more than the height of two risers (or 380mm, if not part of a stair).
The standard of provision for guarding needed to give an acceptable level of safety depends on the
circumstances. For example, in a public building the standard of provision may need to be higher
than in a dwelling, because people may be less familiar with the building and there may be more
users.
For areas where access is required only for maintenance, greater care can be expected from people
and therefore a lower standard of provision may be acceptable.
Design of guarding
For all buildings
3.2 Guarding should be provided in accordance with all of the following.
a. Ensure that guarding is, as a minimum, the height shown in Diagram 3.1.
b. You can use any wall, parapet, balustrade or similar obstruction as guarding.
c. Ensure that guarding can resist, as a minimum, the loads given in BS EN 1991-1-1 with its UK
National Annex and PD 6688-1-1.
d. Where glazing is used in the guarding, refer also to Section 5 in this approved document.
NOTE: Typical locations for guarding are shown in Diagram 3.2.
For further guidance on the design of barriers and infill panels, refer to BS 6180.
Single family dwellings Stairs, landings, ramps, edges of internal 900mm for all
floors elements h
External balconies, including Juliette 1100mm
balconies and edges of roof
Factories and warehouses (light traffic) Stairs, ramps 900mm
h
3.3 In a building that may be used by children under five years of age during normal use, guarding
should be constructed in accordance with both of the following.
a. To prevent children being held fast by the guarding: ensure that a 100mm sphere cannot pass
through any openings in the guarding.
b. To prevent children from readily being able to climb the guarding: avoid horizontal rails.
Stair
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you can meet requirement K3 if, in order to reduce the risk to the
safety of people from collision with vehicles in and about buildings, you:
a. provide vehicle barriers that are capable of resisting or deflecting the impact of vehicles
b. provide loading bays that have an adequate number of exits or refuges which enable people to
avoid being struck or crushed by vehicles.
The standard of provision for guarding needed to give an acceptable level of safety depends on the
circumstances. For example, in a public building the standard of provision may need to be higher
than in a dwelling, because people may be less familiar with the building and there may be more
users.
For areas where access is required only for maintenance, greater care can be expected from people
and therefore a lower standard of provision may be acceptable.
Vehicle barriers
For all buildings
4.1 If vehicles have access to a floor, roof or ramp which forms part of a building, provide barriers at
any edges which are level with or above the floor or ground or any other route for vehicles (see
Diagram 4.1).
Vehicle
barrier
Loading bays
For all buildings
4.3 Loading bays should be constructed with exit points in accordance with both of the following.
a. Provide loading bays with a minimum of one exit point from the lower level, as near the centre
of the rear wall as possible.
b. For wide loading bays (for three or more vehicles), provide a minimum of two stepped exit
points, one on each side, or provide a refuge where people can avoid the path of a vehicle in
addition to one stepped exit point (see Diagram 4.3).
Guarding for loading bays
For all buildings
4.4 Where there is a danger of people falling, loading bays should be provided with guarding as per
the guidance provided in this approved document. If guarding is not practical for the particular
circumstances, alternative safeguards should be provided and agreed with the building control
body.
Steps
Refuge
Plan
Perspective
(not to scale)
Vehicle position
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you can meet requirement K4 if you adopt, in critical locations, one
of the following approaches.
a. Measures to limit the risk of cutting and piercing injuries by the use of glazing that is reasonably
safe, such that, if breakage did occur, any particles would be relatively harmless.
b. Use of glazing sufficiently robust to ensure that the risk of breakage is low.
c. Steps are taken to limit the risk of contact with the glazing.
Impacts with glazing, particularly glazing in doors and door side panels, and at low level in walls
and partitions, can result in cutting and piercing injuries. For doors and door side panels, the risk is
greatest for glazing between floor and shoulder level when near to door handles and push plates,
especially when normal building movement causes doors to stick.
Hands, wrists and arms are particularly vulnerable. An initial impact at between waist and shoulder
levels can be followed by a fall through the glazing, resulting in additional injury to the face and
body.
In walls and partitions, away from doors, the risks relate predominantly to glazing at low level. At
that level, children are especially vulnerable.
1 2 3
9 10
4
5
1500mm 11
800mm 6 7 8 Floor level 800mm
300mm 300mm
Safe breakage
5.3 Safe breakage is defined in BS EN 12600 section 4 and BS 6206 clause 5.3. In an impact test, a
breakage is safe if it creates one of the following.
a. A small clear opening only, with detached particles no larger than the specified maximum size.
b. Disintegration, with small detached particles.
c. Broken glazing in separate pieces that are not sharp or pointed.
5.4 A glazing material would be suitable for a critical location if it complies with one of the following.
a. It satisfies the requirements of Class 3 of BS EN 12600 or Class C of BS 6206.
b. It is installed in a door or in a door side panel and has a pane width exceeding 900mm and it
satisfies the requirements of Class 2 of BS EN 12600 or Class B of BS 6206.
Robustness
5.5 Some glazing materials such as annealed glass gain strength through thickness; others such as
polycarbonates or glass blocks are inherently strong.
The maximum dimensions for annealed glass of different thicknesses for use in large areas forming
fronts to shops, showrooms, offices, factories and public buildings with four edges supported are
shown in Diagram 5.2 (see also paragraph 7.1).
3.0m
12mm
2.25m
10mm
1.10m
8mm
<75mm
glass
<75mm
800mm
from
floor
level <75mm
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
K5.1—Provision shall be made to prevent people moving Requirement K5.1 does not apply to dwellings.
in or about the building from colliding with open
windows, skylights or ventilators.
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you can meet requirement K5.1 if windows, skylights and ventilators
can be left open without danger of people colliding with them. You can achieve this by one of the
following methods.
a. Install windows, skylights and ventilators so that projecting parts cannot come into contact with
people moving in and around the building.
b. Install features which guide people moving in or around the building away from any open
window, skylight or ventilator.
In special cases, such as in spaces where access is required only for maintenance, greater care can
be expected from people and therefore a lower standard of provision may be acceptable.
If greater than
100mm
If less than 2m
1100mm
On access routes provide
cane detection
If greater
than If less
100mm than 2m
This approved document deals with the following requirement from Part K of Schedule 1 to the
Building Regulations 2010.
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
Manifestation of glazing
K5.2—Transparent glazing, with which people are Requirement K5.2 does not apply to dwellings.
likely to come into contact while moving in or about
the building, shall incorporate features which make it
apparent.
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you can meet requirement K5.2 by including, in critical locations,
permanent means of indicating the presence of large uninterrupted areas of transparent glazing.
Critical locations
7.1 Critical locations (see paragraph 5.1) include large uninterrupted areas of transparent glazing which
form, or are part of, the internal or external walls and doors of shops, showrooms, offices, factories,
public or other non-domestic buildings.
7.2 The risk of collision is greatest when two parts of the building, or the building and its immediate
surroundings, are at the same level but separated by transparent glazing and people may think they
can walk from one part to the other.
<400mm <400mm
1400mm to 1600mm
850mm to 1000mm
a. Glazing less b. Glazing with a rail c. A single pane d. Glazed doors with no frame,
than 400mm in between 850mm to glazed door with or narrow frames, but with a
width between 1000mm and 1400mm a substantial large handle or push plate
frames to 1600mm above frame on each single pane
the floor
1600mm
1400mm
1000mm
850mm
Diagram 7.2 Height of manifestation for glass doors and glazed screens
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you can meet requirement K5.3 by ensuring that people can safely
operate windows, skylights and ventilators that open.
600mm max.
to control
Control
900mm max.
Prevention of falls
8.2 Where a person may fall through a window above ground floor level, provide suitable opening
limiters, to restrain the window sufficiently to prevent such falls, or guarding (see Section 3).
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you can meet requirement K5.4 if, where a person may fall from a
window, you provide safe means of access for cleaning both sides of the glass.
850mm 850mm
radius radius
1300mm 1300mm
610mm
Not more
than 1300mm
Typical safe reaches for cleaning
windows:
(A) downwards reach through an
opening light;
(B) side reach through an opening
light;
(C) reach for cleaning an open
casement with reflex hinges.
an 6m
ore th
Not m
75˚
Suitable firm level surface
in a safe place
c. Provide access equipment such as suspended cradles or travelling ladders, with attachments for
safety harnesses (see Diagram 9.3).
d. Provide suitable anchorage points for safety harnesses (see Diagram 9.3) or abseiling hooks.
e. Provide walkways at least 400mm wide, either with guarding at least 1100mm high, or with
anchorages for sliding safety harnesses (see Diagram 9.3).
f. If the methods described in (a) to (e) are not possible, provide space for scaffold towers from
which glazed surfaces can be cleaned.
400mm minimum
9m catwalk width
ngth
um le
Maxim
75˚
Permanent stable surface away from traffic
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, you can meet requirement K6 if you take measures to prevent the
opening and closing of doors and gates presenting a safety hazard.
1500mm 1500mm
1150mm
Minimum
zones of
visibility
800mm
500mm 500mm
Guarding with
cane detection
at ground level
Plan
When greater
than 100mm
Between
900mm and
1100mm
Section
Ramp
A slope steeper than 1:20, on which a pedestrian
or wheelchair user can move from one level to
another (see Section 2).
Rise
The height between consecutive treads (see
paragraphs 1.2 and 1.3).
For ramps: the vertical distance between
each end of the ramp flight.
Spiral stair
A stair in a helix around a central column (see
paragraph 1.28).
Stair width
The clear width between the walls or balustrades.
Tapered tread
A step in which the going reduces from one side
to the other (see paragraphs 1.25–1.27).
Transverse gangway
A flat gangway parallel to the rows of seating/
wheelchair spaces.
Utility stair
A stair used for escape, access for maintenance, or
purposes other than as the usual route for moving
between levels on a day-to-day basis.
Vomitory exits
Storey exits provided within the body of a seating
layout.
BS EN 1991-1-1
Eurocode 1. Actions on structures. General actions.
Densities, self-weight, imposed loads for buildings
[2002]
National Annex to BS EN 1991-1-1
UK National Annex to Eurocode 1. Actions on
structures. General actions. Densities, self-weight,
imposed loads for buildings [2002]
BS 4211
Specification for permanently fixed ladders
[2005 + AMD A1, Corrigenda C1, C2]
BS 5395-2
Code of practice for the design of helical and
spiral stairs [1984 + AMD 6076, Corrigenda July
2008, C2, C3]
BS 5395-3
Code of practice for the design of industrial type
stairs, permanent ladders and walkways [1985 +
AMD 14247]
BS 6180
Barriers in and about buildings. Code of practice
[2011]
BS 6206
Specification for impact performance
requirements for flat safety glass and safety
plastics for use in buildings [1981 + AMDs 4580,
5189, 7589, 8156, 8693]
PD 6688-1-1
Recommendations for the design of structures to
BS EN 1991-1-1 [2011]
BS 8213-1
Windows doors and rooflights. Design for safety
in use and during cleaning of windows, including
door-height windows and roof windows. Code of
practice [2004]
BS EN 12600
Glass in building – Pendulum test – Impact test
method and classification for flat glass [2002 +
incorporating corrigendum April 2010]
Index
A F
Access routes 0.4, 1.1, 1.36, 2.1, 10.2; Diagrams 6.1 & Falling, protection from Page 22, 3.1–3.5; Diagrams
10.2 3.1–3.2
Alternating tread stairs Diagram 1.10; 1.29–1.30
Approved Document B 0.4, 1.14, 1.19, 1.31, 2.9; G
Diagram 3.1
Approved Document M 0.4, 1.1; Table 1.1; 2.1, 8.1 Gangways 1.4
Gates Page 47, 10.1
B General access stairs Table 1.1; 1.18
Glazing 0.2
Barriers Diagram 6.1 Cleaning 9.1
See also Vehicle barriers Critical locations 5.1; Diagram 5.1; 5.2, 5.4, 5.8,
British Standards Appendix B 7.1
BS 4211 1.33 Guarding 7.4
BS 5395-2 1.28 Manifestation Page 38, 7.1–7.4; Diagram 7.2
BS 5395-3 1.33, 1.42 Maximum dimensions Diagram 5.2; 5.5
BS 6180 3.2 Protection against impact with Page 30,
BS 6206 5.3, 5.4 5.1–5.8
BS 8213-1 9.1 Robustness 5.5
BS EN 1991-1-1 3.2, 4.2; Diagram 4.2 Safe breakage 5.3
BS EN 12600 5.3, 5.4 Screen protection 5.8
PD 6688-1-1 3.2, 4.2 Small panes 5.6–5.7
Building work 0.2, 0.7 Going 1.2–1.3; Table 1.1; Diagram 1.1
Guarding Page 22
C Design Diagram 3.1; 3.2–3.3
For doors 10.2
Cleaning, safe access for Page 43, 9.1 For glass doors and glazed screens 7.4
Collision, protection from For loading bays 4.4
Open windows Page 35, 6.1–6.2 For maintenance areas 3.4–3.5
Glazing Page 38, 7.1–7.4 For ramps 2.5, 2.7; Diagram 2.2; 2.12, 2.15
See also Impact, protection from Siting 3.1; Diagram 3.2
Critical locations (glazing) Page 30, 5.1; For stairs 1.8, 1.34, 1.36, 1.38–1.41
Diagram 5.1; 5.2, 5.4, 5.8, Page 38, 7.1, 7.3 For windows 8.2
Cupboards Diagram 1.7; 1.21
H
D
Handrails
Doors For ramps 2.11–2.12
On gangways 1.4 For stairs Diagrams 1.11–1.12; 1.34–1.37
On landings Diagram 1.8; 1.21, 1.23–1.24, 2.13 For stepped gangways 1.4
Protection from impact and trapping Headroom, for stairs 1.11; Diagram 1.3; 1.30
Page 47, 10.1–10.2; Diagrams 10.1–10.2 See also Means of escape routes, Loft
conversions
Helical stairs 1.28
I R
Impact, protection from Ramps 0.7, Page 3, 1.4, 2.1–2.15
Doors Page 47, 10.1–10.2; Diagrams 10.1–10.2 Appearance 2.2
Glazing Page 30, 5.1–5.8; Diagrams 5.1–5.4 Construction 2.4–2.7
See also Collision, protection from Design 2.8; Diagram 2.2
Guarding 2.15
L Handrails Diagrams 1.12–1.13; 2.11–2.12
Landings Diagrams 1.6–1.8; 2.13–2.14
Landings Steepness Diagram 2.1; 2.3
For ramps 2.13–2.14 Width 2.9
For stairs 1.19–1.24 Rise Table 1.1; Diagram 1.1; 1.2–1.3
Ladders 0.7, Page 3
Fixed 1.31–1.33, 1.42
For cleaning windows, etc. 9.1; Diagrams
S
9.2–9.3 Spiral stairs 1.28
For maintenance 3.4–3.5 Stairs 0.7, Page 3, 1.1–1.30, 1.34–1.42
Legislation 0.6–0.7 Alternating treads Diagram 1.10; 1.29–1.30
Construction (Design and Management) Construction Table 1.1; Diagram 1.2; 1.5–1.10
Regulations 2007 0.6, 1.42, 3.4 Flight width 1.14–1.16; Diagram 1.5
Health and Safety at Work, etc. Act 1974 0.7 Flight length 1.17–1.24; Diagram 1.6
Health and Safety (Safety Signs and Signals) Going Table 1.1; Diagram 1.1; 1.2–1.3
Regulations 1996 3.5 Guarding 1.38–1.41; Diagram 3.1
Work at Height Regulations 2005 0.7, 3.4 Handrails Diagrams 1.11–1.13; 1.34–1.37
Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare) Headroom 1.11; Diagram 1.3
Regulations 1992 0.7 Helical stairs 1.28
Loading bays 3.1, Page 26, 4.1–4.4; Diagram 4.3 Landings 1.17–1.24; Diagrams 1.6–1.8
Loft conversions Rise Table 1.1; Diagram 1.1; 1.2–1.3,
Alternating tread stairs 1.29; Diagram 1.10 Spiral stairs 1.28
Fixed ladders 1.32 Stepped gangways 1.4
Headroom 1.13; Diagram 1.4 Tapered treads Diagram 1.9; 1.25–1.27
See also Guarding, Handrails
M Skylights
Access for cleaning Page 43, 9.1; Diagrams
Maintenance areas 9.1–9.3
Access 1.42 Collision protection Page 35, 6.1–6.2;
Guarding 3.4–3.5; Diagram 3.1 Diagrams 6.1–6.2
Windows 6.2 Safe opening and closing Page 41, 8.1–8.2;
Manifestation of glazing Page 38, 7.1–7.4; Diagram 8.1
Diagram 7.2 Stepped tiers 1.4
Means of escape routes 0.4, 1.12, 1.14, 1.19, 1.31, 2.9 Steps Table 1.1; Diagram 1.1; 1.5–1.10
P T
Pitch Diagram 1.1 Tapered tread stairs Table 1.1, 1.25–1.27
Gangways 1.4
Private stairs Table 1.1
Private stairs Table 1.1; Diagram 1.1
U
Utility stairs Table 1.1; Diagram 1.2; 1.10, 1.18
V
Vehicle barriers Page 26, 4.1–4.2; Diagram 4.1
Ventilators
Collision protection Page 35, 6.1–6.2;
Diagrams 6.1–6.2
Safe opening and closing Page 41, 8.1–8.2;
Diagram 8.1
W
Windows
Collision protection Page 35, 6.1–6.2;
Diagrams 6.1–6.2
Limiters 8.2
Safe access for cleaning Page 43, 9.1; Diagrams
9.1–9.3
Safe opening and closing Page 41, 8.1; Diagram
8.1
See also Glazing
L
Conservation of
fuel and power
APPROVED DOCUMENT
Volume 1: Dwellings
Requirement L1: Conservation of fuel and power
Requirement L2: On-site generation of electricity
Regulations: 6, 22, 23, 24, 25, 25A, 25B, 26, 26A, 26C,
27, 27A, 27C, 28, 40, 40A, 43, 44 and 44ZA
This section deals with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (linings)
B2. (1) To inhibit the spread of fire within the building,
the internal linings shall—
(a) adequately resist the spread of flame over
their surfaces; and ➊
(b) have, if ignited, either a rate of heat release
or a rate of fire growth, which is reasonable in
the circumstances.
(2) In this paragraph “internal linings” means the
materials or products used in lining any partition,
wall, ceiling or other internal structure.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B2 is met by achieving a restricted spread of flame
over internal linings. The building fabric should make a limited contribution to fire growth,
including a low rate of heat release.
It is particularly important in circulation spaces, where linings may offer the main means by which
fire spreads and where rapid spread is most likely to prevent occupants from escaping.
Requirement B2 does not include guidance on the following.
➋
a. Generation of smoke and fumes.
b. The upper surfaces of floors and stairs.
c. Furniture and fittings.
Key
For further information about the use of technical guidance, see Chapter 7 in Volume 1 and Chapter F
in Volume 2 of the Manual to the Building Regulations.
Introduction i
What is an approved document? i
How is construction regulated in England? i
How do you comply with the Building Regulations? i
What do the Building Regulations cover? ii
When must a building control body be notified? ii
How to use this approved document iii
Where to get further help iv
Section 0: Introduction 1
Summary 1
Application 2
Selected key interactions with other parts of the Building Regulations 4
Regulations 24, 25, 25B, 26, 26A, 26C, 27, 27A and 27C: Energy performance
of dwellings calculations 6
Intention 8
Section 1: Calculating the target primary energy rate, target emission rate
and target fabric energy efficiency rate 10
Buildings that contain multiple dwellings 11
District heat networks 11
Notional dwelling specification 11
Requirements L1(b)(i), (ii) and L2: Fixed building services energy efficiency
and controls and on-site generation of electricity 33
Intention 34
Section 8: Commissioning 55
Notice of completion 55
System specific guidance for commissioning 56
Regulations 6 and 22: Material change of use and change to energy status 65
Intention 66
Summary
0.1 This approved document, Approved Document L, Volume 1: Dwellings, gives guidance on how
to comply with Part L of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations and the energy efficiency
requirements for dwellings. For guidance relating to non-domestic buildings, use Approved
Document L, Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings.
0.2 This approved document contains the following sections:
New dwellings
0.5 Guidance for new dwellings is given in Sections 1 to 9 of this approved document, Approved
Document L, Volume 1.
0.6 For a conservatory or porch installed as part of the construction of a new dwelling, the treatment
of the conservatory or porch depends on whether both of the following have been achieved.
a. There is adequate thermal separation between the dwelling and the conservatory or porch.
b. The dwelling’s heating system is not extended into the conservatory or porch.
If both (a) and (b) have been achieved, the conservatory or porch should be treated as if it were an
extension being added onto an existing dwelling. The guidance for new elements in existing dwellings
in Section 10 should be followed.
If either or both of (a) or (b) has not been achieved, the conservatory or porch should be treated as a
room in the new dwelling. The guidance for the whole new dwelling should be followed, including
for dwelling primary energy rate, dwelling emission rate and dwelling fabric energy efficiency rate
calculations.
Live/work units
0.16 A building that contains both living accommodation and space for commercial purposes (e.g. for
a workshop or office) should be treated as a dwelling if the commercial part can be reverted to
domestic use.
0.17 The commercial part of a building can be reverted to domestic use if all of the following apply.
a. There is direct access between the commercial space and the living accommodation.
b. The commercial space and the living accommodation are within the same thermal envelope.
c. The living accommodation comprises a substantial proportion of the total area of the unit. What
constitutes a ‘substantial proportion’ should be assessed on a case-by-case basis by the building
control body.
NOTE: A large non-domestic building that contains a small flat for a manager is not treated as
a dwelling. A dwelling that contains a room used as an office or utility space is still treated as a
dwelling.
Mixed-use developments
0.18 When constructing a dwelling as part of a larger building that contains other types of
accommodation, sometimes called a mixed-use development, refer to the two volumes of
Approved Document L as follows.
a. For guidance on each individual dwelling, use this approved document, Approved Document L,
Volume 1: Dwellings.
b. For guidance on the non-dwelling parts of the building, such as heated common areas and any
commercial or retail space, use Approved Document L, Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings.
This section deals with the requirements of regulations 24, 25, 25B, 26, 26A, 26C, 27, 27A and 27C of
the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulations
Methodology of calculation of the energy performance
24. (1) The Secretary of State shall approve—
(a) a methodology of calculation of the energy performance of buildings, including methods for calculating
asset ratings and operational ratings of buildings; and
(b) ways in which the energy performance of buildings, as calculated in accordance with the methodology,
shall be expressed.
(2) In this regulation—
“asset rating” means an energy performance indicator determined from the amount of energy estimated to
meet the different needs associated with a standardised use of the building; and
“operational rating” means an energy performance indicator determined from the amount of energy
consumed during the occupation of a building over a period of time and the energy demand associated
with a typical use of the building over that period.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
The Secretary of State considers that a dwelling has a very high performance rate for the purposes of
the definition of a nearly zero-energy building if both of the following are met.
a. The dwelling meets the target emission rate required under regulation 26.
b. Both:
i. An analysis is made of the technical, environmental and economic feasibility of using high-
efficiency alternative systems, which include decentralised energy supply systems based on
energy from renewable sources.
ii. This analysis is considered as required by regulation 25A.
Regulation 24
Regulation 24 requires the Secretary of State to approve a methodology of calculation of the
energy performance of a building. For a new dwelling, the approved methodology is the Standard
Assessment Procedure.
Calculation methodologies are set out in Section 1 and Section 2 of this approved document.
1.1 A new dwelling must be built to a minimum standard of total energy performance. This is evaluated
by comparing calculations of the performance of the ‘actual dwelling’ against calculations of the
performance of a theoretical dwelling called the ‘notional dwelling’. This must be carried out both
at the design stage and when work is complete.
The notional dwelling is the same size and shape as the actual dwelling and has standardised
properties for fabric and services. The full properties of the notional dwelling are set out in the
Government’s Standard Assessment Procedure (SAP) for energy rating of dwellings.
1.2 The energy performance of the notional dwelling is described using the following metrics.
a. The target primary energy rate, in kWhPE/m2 per year: this is influenced by the fabric and fuel.
b. The target emission rate, in kgCO2/m2 per year: this is influenced by the fabric and fuel.
c. The target fabric energy efficiency rate, in kWh/m2 per year: this is influenced by the fabric only.
1.3 The target primary energy rate, target emission rate and target fabric energy efficiency rate for
individual dwellings must be calculated using the Government’s Standard Assessment Procedure,
Appendix R. The standardised properties are summarised in Table 1.1.
NOTE: For an up-to-date list of approved software, follow the link to SAP 10 at:
https://www.gov.uk/guidance/standard-assessment-procedure.
[(target primary energy rate1 × floor area1) + (target primary energy rate2 × floor area2) +
(target primary energy rate3 × floor area3) + …]
(floor area1 + floor area2 + floor area3 + …)
1.5 The average target emission rate should be calculated using the formula above but replacing target
primary energy rate with target emission rate.
The average target fabric energy efficiency rate should be calculated using the formula above but
replacing target primary energy rate with target fabric energy efficiency rate.
1.6 Calculating an average target primary energy rate, target emission rate or target fabric energy
efficiency rate for separate buildings on the same site is not considered a reasonable method to
show compliance.
2.1 The same approved calculation tool must be used to calculate the target primary energy rate,
target emission rate and target fabric energy efficiency rate and the dwelling primary energy rate,
dwelling emission rate and dwelling fabric energy efficiency rate.
2.2 The dwelling primary energy rate, dwelling emission rate and dwelling energy efficiency rate must
be calculated at both of the following points using the same calculation tool.
a. Before work starts, using design values.
b. When work is complete, using figures for the building as constructed, and incorporating both of
the following.
i. Any changes that have been made during construction to the list of specifications.
ii. The measured air permeability.
2.3 At both of these points the dwelling primary energy rate, dwelling emission rate and dwelling
fabric energy efficiency rate must not exceed the target primary energy rate, target emission rate
and target fabric energy efficiency rate, respectively. The specification of the actual dwelling may
vary from that of the notional dwelling if the dwelling meets the target primary energy rate, target
emission rate, target fabric energy efficiency rate and the guidance in this approved document.
Party walls
2.14 When calculating the dwelling primary energy rate, dwelling emission rate and dwelling fabric
energy efficiency rate, a party wall U-value for the type of construction adopted should be applied
as set out in Table 2.1.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 25A of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Consideration of high-efficiency alternative systems for new buildings
25A. (1) B
efore construction of a new building starts, the person who is to carry out the work must analyse and
take into account the technical, environmental and economic feasibility of using high-efficiency alternative
systems (such as the following systems) in the construction, if available—
(a) decentralised energy supply systems based on energy from renewable sources;
(b) cogeneration;
(c) district or block heating or cooling, particularly where it is based entirely or partially on energy from
renewable sources; and
(d) heat pumps.
(2) The person carrying out the work must—
(a) not later than the beginning of the day before the day on which the work starts, give the local authority
a notice which states that the analysis referred to in paragraph (1)—
(i) has been undertaken;
(ii) is documented; and
(iii) the documentation is available to the authority for verification purposes; and
(b) ensure that a copy of the analysis is available for inspection at all reasonable times upon request by an
officer of the local authority.
(3) An authorised officer of the local authority may require production of the documentation in order to verify
that this regulation has been complied with.
(4) The analysis referred to in paragraph (1)—
(a) may be carried out for individual buildings or for groups of similar buildings or for common typologies
of buildings in the same area; and
(b) in so far as it relates to collective heating and cooling systems, may be carried out for all buildings
connected to the system in the same area.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State's view, regulation 25A is met in a new dwelling by analysing the feasibility of
installing high-efficiency alternative systems, following Section 3.
The Building Regulations do not require that high-efficiency alternative systems or other low or zero
carbon systems are installed.
3.1 Before building work starts on a new dwelling, the person undertaking the building work must
analyse the technical, environmental and economic feasibility of using high-efficiency alternative
systems in the dwelling design. This analysis should be considered when designing the dwelling.
3.2 The building control body should be notified that the analysis of high-efficiency alternative
systems has been undertaken, that it is documented and is available to be verified. The document
should state whether high-efficiency alternative systems have been included in the dwelling design.
The documented results of the analysis should be retained for the building control body to inspect
upon request.
3.3 The analysis may be made for individual dwellings, groups of similar dwellings, or for common
types of dwellings in the same area. Where a number of dwellings are connected to a district heat
network or community heating system, a single analysis may be made for all dwellings connected
to the network or system.
3.4 When a dwelling undergoes a major renovation, the technical, environmental and economic
feasibility of installing high-efficiency alternative systems should be considered.
This section deals with the requirements of Part L1(a) of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Schedule 1 – Part L Conservation of fuel and power
L1. Reasonable provision shall be made for the
conservation of fuel and power in buildings by—
(a) limiting heat gains and losses—
(i) through thermal elements and other parts
of the building fabric; and
(ii) from pipes, ducts and vessels used for
space heating, space cooling and hot water
services;
(b) providing fixed building services which—
(i) are energy efficient to a reasonable standard;
(ii) have effective controls; and
(iii) are commissioned by testing and adjusting
as necessary to ensure they use no more
fuel and power than is reasonable in the
circumstances.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement L1(a) is met in a new dwelling by achieving both of the
following.
a. Unwanted heat losses from the dwelling are limited by meeting the standards for all of the
following.
i. The building fabric, including walls, floors, roof, windows and openings – paragraphs 4.1 to
4.6 and paragraphs 4.14 to 4.19.
ii. Airtightness – paragraphs 4.20 to 4.22.
iii. The pipework and services – paragraphs 4.24 and 4.26 to 4.32.
b. Unwanted heat gains to the dwelling, throughout the year, through any of the routes listed in (a)
above, are limited as set out in Section 4.
U-values
4.1 U-values should be assessed using the methods and conventions set out in the Building Research
Establishment’s BR 443. U-values should be assessed for the whole fabric element (e.g. in the case
of a window, the combined performance of the glazing and the frame).
4.2 The U-value of a window should be assessed using one of the following methods.
a. Calculated using the actual size and configuration of the window.
b. Calculated for a standard window 1.23m (±25%) wide × 1.48m (–25%) high and the actual
configuration of the window.
c. Calculated for a standard window 1.23m (±25%) wide × 1.48m (–25%) high and one of the
following standard configurations.
i. For a casement window, a central vertical divider with one opening light and one fixed light.
ii. For a vertical sliding sash window, a central horizontal divider with two opening lights.
iii. For a roof window, no divider.
d. Measured using the hot-box method as set out in BS EN ISO 12567-1 for windows and
BS EN ISO 12567-2 for roof windows.
4.3 The U-value of a door should be assessed using one of the following methods.
a. Calculated using the actual size and configuration of the door.
b. Calculated using one of the following standard sizes.
i. 1.23m (±25%) wide × 2.18m (±25%) high, for doors ≤ 3.6m².
ii. 2.00m (±25%) wide × 2.18m (±25%) high, for doors > 3.6m².
NOTE: When a single U-value is calculated for a product range of doors, the configuration of the
door chosen for the calculation should be the worst performing in the product range.
c. Measured using the hot-box method as set out in BS EN ISO 12567-1.
4.4 Alternatively, for doors or windows, the default value from the Standard Assessment Procedure
Table 6e can be used.
4.5 To correctly assess whether an element meets the limiting U-value, the U-value must be calculated for
the element in the appropriate plane – either horizontal or vertical. For windows and roof windows,
U-values should be calculated based on a vertical position. For rooflights, U-values should be calculated
based on a horizontal position. If the data available for the element is in the incorrect plane, it should be
adjusted according to the guidance in the Building Research Establishment’s BR 443.
NOTE: This does not apply to Standard Assessment Procedure calculations, where the U-value of
each element is calculated based on the plane in which it is constructed or installed.
1.57m3/(h·m2) @ 4Pa
NOTES:
1. Area-weighted average values.
2. For dormer windows, ‘roof’ includes the roof parts of the windows and ‘wall’ includes the wall parts (cheeks).
3. The U-value of a swimming pool basin (walls and floor) calculated according to BS EN ISO 13370.
4. If performance requires thicker glass to be used, an equivalent window unit with standard thickness (6mm) glazing
should be shown to meet the required standard.
5. Including roof windows and curtain walling.
6. U-values for rooflights or rooflight-and-kerb assemblies should be based on the developed surface area of the
rooflight (Ud-values), which is often greater than the area of the roof opening. Further guidance on Ud-values is
given in the Building Research Establishment’s BR 443 and the National Association of Rooflight Manufacturers’
Technical Document NTD02.
7. The limiting value for rooflights also applies to kerbs that are supplied as part of a single rooflight-and-kerb
assembly sourced from the same supplier and for which the supplier can provide a combined Ud-value for the
assembly. An upstand built on site should not exceed a U-value of 0.35W/(m2·K).
NOTE: To meet the target fabric energy efficiency rate set out in Section 1, the energy efficiency
of some elements will need to be significantly better than the limiting standards in Table 4.1.
Table 4.4 Minimum thicknesses of pipework insulation for hot water services and space
heating applications using high performance insulation
Nominal internal pipe diameter (mm) Minimum insulation thickness(1) (mm) for
low temperature hot water systems
Less than or equal to 10 5
Less than or equal to 25 10
Less than or equal to 50 15
Less than or equal to 100 20
NOTE:
1. Thicknesses apply for insulation with a thermal conductivity of 0.025W/(m·K) or better. For other circumstances,
consult BS 5422.
Table 4.5 Maximum daily heat loss for a hot water cylinder(1)
Nominal volume (litres) Heat loss (kWh/24h) Nominal volume (litres) Heat loss (kWh/24h)
50 1.03 400 2.59
100 1.49 500 2.80
150 1.88 600 2.98
200 2.06 700 3.14
250 2.22 800 3.29
300 2.36 900 3.44
350 2.48 1000 3.57
NOTE:
1. For sizes of cylinder not listed, the heat loss from the cylinder should not exceed (16.66 + 8.33 � V0.4)/(1000 ÷ 24),
where V is the volume in litres.
4.30 Hot water storage vessels should comply with all of the following.
a. Copper hot water storage combination units should comply with BS 3198.
b. Vented cylinders should comply with the heat loss and heat exchanger requirements of BS 1566-1
or BS EN 12897 as appropriate.
c. Unvented hot water storage system products should comply with BS EN 12897.
4.31 Primary storage systems should meet the insulation requirements of the Hot Water Association’s
Performance Specification for Thermal Stores.
This section deals with the requirements of Part L1(b)(i), (ii) and L2 of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Schedule 1 – Part L Conservation of fuel and power
L1. Reasonable provision shall be made for the
conservation of fuel and power in buildings by—
(a) limiting heat gains and losses—
(i) through thermal elements and other parts of
the building fabric; and
(ii) from pipes, ducts and vessels used for
space heating, space cooling and hot water
services;
(b) providing fixed building services which—
(i) are energy efficient to a reasonable
standard;
(ii) have effective controls; and
(iii) are commissioned by testing and adjusting
as necessary to ensure they use no more
fuel and power than is reasonable in the
circumstances.
On-site generation of electricity
L2. Where a system for on-site electricity generation is
installed—
(a) reasonable provision must be made to ensure
that—
(i) the system and its electrical output are
appropriately sized for the site and available
infrastructure;
(ii) the system has effective controls; and
(b) it must be commissioned by testing and
adjusting as necessary to ensure that it produces
the maximum electricity that is reasonable in
the circumstances.
Worked example
Replacing an old oil-fired boiler with emissions of 0.298kgCO2/kWh and primary energy of
1.180kWhPE/kWh at 85% efficiency with an LPG boiler with emissions of 0.241kgCO2/kWh and primary
energy of 1.141kWhPE/kWh at 93% efficiency.
CO2 emissions
Oil-fired boiler: 0.298/0.85 = 0.35kgCO2/kWh
LPG boiler: 0.241/0.93 = 0.26kgCO2/kWh
Primary energy
Oil-fired boiler: 1.180/0.85= 1.39kWhPE/kWh
LPG boiler: 1.141/0.93 = 1.23kWhPE/kWh
Controls
System controls and zoning
5.14 For wet heating systems in new dwellings with a floor area of 150m2 or greater, a minimum of two
independently controlled heating circuits should be provided.
5.15 System controls should be wired so that when there is no demand for space heating or hot water
the heating appliance and pump are switched off.
5.16 Domestic hot water circuits that are supplied from a hot water store should have both of the following.
a. Time control that is independent of space heating circuits.
b. Electronic temperature control.
5.17 Primary hot water circuits for domestic hot water or heating should have fully pumped circulation
where this is compatible with the heat generator.
5.18 Wet heating systems should ensure a minimum flow of water to avoid short-cycling.
5.19 For space heating systems, temperature control should be installed for the heating appliance.
NOTE: This section sets out minimum Building Regulations standards for fixed building services and
other systems. Best practice is to achieve higher efficiencies than these minimum standards.
NOTE: The Ecodesign for Energy-Related Products Regulations 2010 set the efficiencies and
standards that must be met when introducing new energy-using products to the market. This
approved document sets standards that should be met when installing fixed building services or
on-site electricity generation. In cases where the Energy-Related Products Regulations and the
Building Regulations both apply, both standards should be met.
Table 6.1 Minimum efficiencies for gas-fired heating systems in new dwellings
System type Minimum efficiency
Wet heating (e.g. radiators or underfloor heating) 92% (as defined in ErP(1))
NOTE:
1. Energy-Related Products Directive. For Standard Assessment Procedure modelling, SEDBUK values should be used.
6.2 If a gas-fired combination boiler is installed in an existing dwelling, at least one of the following
energy efficiency measures, appropriate to the system, should be installed.
a. Flue gas heat recovery.
b. Weather compensation.
c. Load compensation.
d. Smart thermostat with automation and optimisation.
Table 6.3 Minimum efficiencies for oil-fired heating systems in existing dwellings
System type Minimum efficiency Notes
Wet heating – regular boiler 91% (as defined in ErP(1)) Or, in exceptional circumstances(2) in
existing dwellings, 84% SEDBUK 2009
Wet heating – combi-boiler 86% (as defined in SEDBUK 2009) Or, in exceptional circumstances(2) in
existing dwellings, 82%
Range cooker with integral central 80% Follow paragraph 6.9
heating boiler
Fixed independent space heating 60% (converted using Table E4 of the
Standard Assessment Procedure)
NOTES:
1. Energy Related Products Directive. For Standard Assessment Procedure modelling, SEDBUK values should be used.
2. Exceptional circumstances are defined in the ODPM’s Guide to the Condensing Boiler Installation Assessment
Procedure for Dwellings.
6.9 An oil-fired range cooker with an integral central heating boiler (within a single appliance body)
that is either part of a new system or is a replacement component in an existing dwelling should
have two independently controlled burners (one for the cooking function, and one for the boiler).
NOTE: This paragraph does not apply to appliances with fully independent boiler and cooker parts
within a shared case. In this case, the boiler should be treated as a conventional oil-fired boiler.
6.10 If a continuously burning oil-fired vaporising appliance is provided for secondary heating or hot
water, one of the following should be met, depending on the type of appliance.
a. For a manually operated appliance, no further control is required above the integral manual
controls that the appliance manufacturer provided.
b. For an electrically operated appliance, an integral remote or thermostatic control should be
provided.
NOTE: This guidance does not apply to appliances that have been converted from another fuel.
Controls
6.23 For wet heating systems, the maximum design flow rate into the dwelling’s heating system should
be limited by suitable control and balancing valves to maintain the overall balance in the network
and to avoid excessive pumping energy.
6.24 For new district heat networks or community heating systems, the domestic hot water system
should have variable volume controls to maintain low return temperatures in the primary
community heating circuit.
Metering
6.25 District heat networks and community heating systems should be designed to accommodate heat
meter(s) for each dwelling.
Mechanical ventilation
6.54 Ventilation systems should meet the ventilation needs of the dwelling, in accordance with
Approved Document F, Volume 1: Dwellings. Systems should be designed so that they can be
commissioned to suitable ventilation rates so that spaces are not significantly overventilated.
6.55 The specific fan power for mechanical ventilation systems should not exceed the following.
a. For intermittent extract ventilation systems: 0.5W/(l·s).
b. For continuous mechanical extract ventilation systems: 0.7W/(l·s).
c. For continuous supply ventilation systems: 0.5W/(l·s).
d. For continuous mechanical supply and extract ventilation systems: 1.5W/(l·s).
6.56 All ventilation systems which provide both supply and extract ventilation within the same unit
should be fitted with all of the following.
a. A heat recovery system with a minimum efficiency of 73%.
b. A summer bypass facility (giving the ability to bypass the heat exchanger or to control its heat
recovery performance).
c. A variable speed controller.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 43 of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Pressure testing
43. (1) This regulation applies to the erection of a building in relation to which paragraph L1(a)(i) of Schedule 1
imposes a requirement.
(2) Where this regulation applies, the person carrying out the work shall, for the purpose of ensuring compliance
with regulation 26 and regulation 26A and paragraph L1(a)(i) of Schedule 1—
(a) ensure that—
(i) pressure testing is carried out in such circumstances as are approved by the Secretary of State; and
(ii) the testing is carried out in accordance with a procedure approved by the Secretary of State; and
(b) subject to paragraph (5), give notice of the results of the testing to the local authority.
(3) The notice referred to in paragraph (2)(b) shall—
(a) record the results and the data upon which they are based in a manner approved by the Secretary of
State; and
(b) be given to the local authority not later than seven days after the final test is carried out.
(4) A local authority are authorised to accept, as evidence that the requirements of paragraph (2)(a)(ii) have
been satisfied, a certificate to that effect by a person who is registered by Elmhurst Energy Systems Limited
or the Air Tightness Testing and Measurement Association in respect of pressure testing for the air tightness
of buildings.
(5) Where such a certificate contains the information required by paragraph (3)(a), paragraph (2)(b) does not
apply.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of regulation 43 are met, when a dwelling is erected,
by carrying out pressure testing in accordance with paragraphs 7.2 to 7.4 and 7.6 to 7.8.
In the Secretary of State’s view, results from a pressure test must be used to show that work complies
with both of the following.
a. Regulations 26 and 26A of the Building Regulations, in accordance with paragraphs 7.5 to 7.7.
b. The requirements of Part L1(a)(i) of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations, in accordance with
paragraphs 7.1 and 7.5.
7.1 The minimum standard for air permeability of a new dwelling is given in Table 4.1 of Section 4.
7.2 The building control body should be provided with evidence that test equipment has been
calibrated using a UKAS-accredited facility or by the original manufacturer within either of the
following periods.
a. The previous 12 months.
b. A period in accordance with manufacturer’s guidance.
Calibration should be carried out in accordance with CIBSE’s TM23. It is recommended that test
equipment is recalibrated at least every 24 months.
7.3 Building control bodies may accept a pressure test certificate as evidence that the dwelling
complies with regulation 43 of the Building Regulations.
The building control body should be provided with evidence that the person who pressure-tested
the building meets both of the following.
a. Has received appropriate training.
b. Is registered to test the specific class of building.
7.4 An air pressure test should be carried out on every dwelling.
This section deals with the requirements of regulations 44 and 44ZA and Part L1(b)(iii) and L2(b) of
Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Commissioning
44. (1) This regulation applies to building work in relation to which paragraph F1(2) of Schedule 1 imposes
a requirement, but does not apply to the provision or extension of any fixed system for mechanical
ventilation or any associated controls where testing and adjustment is not possible.
(2) This regulation applies to building work in relation to which paragraph L1(b) of Schedule 1 imposes
a requirement, but does not apply to the provision or extension of any fixed building service where
testing and adjustment is not possible or would not affect the energy efficiency of that fixed building
service.
(3) Where this regulation applies the person carrying out the work shall, for the purpose of ensuring
compliance with paragraph F1(2) or L1(b) of Schedule 1, give to the local authority a notice confirming
that the fixed building services have been commissioned in accordance with a procedure approved by
the Secretary of State.
(4) The notice shall be given to the local authority—
(a) not later than the date on which the notice required by regulation 16(4) is required to be given; or
(b) where that regulation does not apply, not more than 30 days after completion of the work.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirements L1(b)(iii) and L2(b) and the requirements of regulations
44 and 44ZA are met by commissioning fixed building services and on-site electricity generation in
accordance with Section 8.
8.1 Fixed building services must be commissioned to ensure that they use no more fuel and power than
is reasonable in the circumstances. On-site electricity generation systems must be commissioned
to ensure that they produce as much electricity as is reasonable in the circumstances. The
commissioning process should involve testing and adjusting the fixed building services and on-site
electricity generation as necessary and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8.2 A commissioning plan should be produced, identifying both of the following.
a. Systems that need to be tested.
b. How these systems will be tested.
For new dwellings, the commissioning plan should be given to the building control body with
the design stage dwelling primary energy rate, dwelling emission rate and dwelling fabric energy
efficiency rate calculations.
8.3 A fixed building service or on-site electricity generation that, by design, cannot be adjusted, or for
which commissioning would not affect energy use, does not need to be commissioned.
The commissioning plan should identify the fixed building services and on-site electricity generation
that do not need to be commissioned, and why they do not need to be commissioned.
Notice of completion
8.4 A commissioning notice must be given to the relevant building control body confirming that
commissioning has been carried out for the installed fixed building services and on-site electricity
generation according to the procedures in this section. The notice should confirm all of the
following.
a. That the commissioning plan has been followed.
b. That all systems have been inspected in an appropriate sequence and to a reasonable standard.
c. That test results confirm that performance is reasonably in accordance with the design requirements.
8.5 The notice of completion of commissioning should be given as follows.
a. If a building notice or full plans have been given to a local authority building control body, the
notice should be given within five days of the commissioning work being completed.
b. If the building control body is an approved inspector, the notice should generally be given to the
approved inspector within five days of the work being completed.
c. In other cases – for example, if the work is carried out by a person registered with a competent
person scheme – the notice must be given to the building control body within 30 days of the
work being completed.
8.6 Where fixed building services and on-site electricity generation that require commissioning are
installed by a person registered with a competent person scheme, that person may give the notice
of completion of commissioning.
8.7 Until the building control body receives the notice of completion of commissioning, it may decide
not to give a completion/final certificate.
Underfloor heating
8.13 All installed equipment in underfloor heating systems should be commissioned in accordance with
BS EN 1264-4.
This section deals with the requirements of regulations 40 and 40A of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulations
Information about use of fuel and power
40. (1) This regulation applies where paragraph L1 of Schedule 1 imposes a requirement in relation to building
work.
(2) The person carrying out the work shall not later than five days after the work has been completed provide
to the owner sufficient information about the building, the fixed building services and their maintenance
requirements so that the building can be operated in such a manner as to use no more fuel and power
than is reasonable in the circumstances.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, when a new building is erected, the requirements of regulations 40
and 40A are met by providing the owner with information about all of the following.
a. Operating and maintenance instructions for fixed building services and on-site electricity
generation, in accordance with paragraphs 9.1 and 9.2.
b. Other important documentation, as given in paragraphs 9.3 to 9.5.
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of regulations 40 and 40A are met when work is
carried out on an existing dwelling by providing the owner with both of the following.
a. Operating and maintenance instructions for the work on fixed building services and on-site
electricity generation that has been carried out, in accordance with paragraphs 9.1 and 9.2.
b. Relevant information for work on existing systems, as detailed in paragraphs 9.6 to 9.9.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 23(2) and Part L1(a) of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Requirements for the renovation or replacement of thermal elements
23. (2) Where the whole or any part of an individual thermal element is proposed to be replaced and the
replacement—
(a) constitutes a major renovation; or
(b) (in the case of part replacement) amounts to the replacement of more than 50% of the thermal
element’s surface area;
the whole of the thermal element must be replaced so as to ensure that it complies with paragraph L1(a)(i)
of Schedule 1, in so far as that is technically, functionally and economically feasible.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Schedule 1 – Part L Conservation of fuel and power
L1. Reasonable provision shall be made for the
conservation of fuel and power in buildings by:
(a) limiting heat gains and losses—
(i) through thermal elements and other parts
of the building fabric; and
(ii) from pipes, ducts and vessels used for
space heating, space cooling and hot water
services;
(b) providing fixed building services which—
(i) are energy efficient to a reasonable standard;
(ii) have effective controls; and
(iii) are commissioned by testing and adjusting
as necessary to ensure they use no more
fuel and power than is reasonable in the
circumstances.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of regulation 23(2) and requirement L1(a) are met for
new or replacement elements in existing dwellings by following the standards in Section 10.
General
10.1 This section provides guidance for new elements in existing dwellings, including all the following
types of work.
a. Providing a new thermal element in an existing dwelling – follow paragraph 10.1.
b. Providing a replacement thermal element in an existing dwelling – follow paragraph 10.2.
c. Replacing windows, doors or rooflights (controlled fittings) in an existing dwelling – follow
paragraphs 10.3 to 10.6.
d. Extending an existing dwelling – follow paragraphs 10.7 to 10.11.
e. Adding a conservatory or porch to an existing dwelling – follow paragraphs 10.12 and 10.13.
NOTE: Guidance for renovating elements in existing dwellings is given in Section 11.
Extension of a dwelling
10.7 When a dwelling is extended, elements should satisfy all of the following.
a. New thermal elements should meet the standards in Table 4.2 and paragraph 4.7.
b. Replacement thermal elements should meet the standards in Table 4.2 and paragraph 4.8.
c. New windows, roof windows, rooflights and doors should meet the standards in Table 4.2.
d. The total area of windows, roof windows, rooflights and doors in extensions should not exceed
the sum of the following.
i. 25% of the floor area of the extension.
ii. The total area of any windows and doors which no longer exist or are no longer exposed
due to the extension.
e. Existing fabric elements that will become thermal elements should meet the limiting standards
in Table 4.3 by following the guidance in paragraphs 11.2 to 11.4.
10.8 When a dwelling is extended, any fixed building services or on-site electricity generation that are
provided or extended should comply with the guidance in Sections 5 and 6.
10.9 As an alternative approach to paragraph 10.7, the area-weighted U-value of all thermal elements in
the extension should be shown to not exceed the area-weighted U-value of an extension of the
same size and shape that complies with paragraph 10.7.
The area-weighted U-value is given by the following expression.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 23(1) and Part L1(a) of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Requirements for the renovation or replacement of thermal elements
23. (1) Where the renovation of an individual thermal element—
(a) constitutes a major renovation; or
(b) amounts to the renovation of more than 50% of the element’s surface area;
the renovation must be carried out so as to ensure that the whole of the element complies with paragraph
L1(a)(i) of Schedule 1, in so far as that is technically, functionally and economically feasible.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Schedule 1 – Part L Conservation of fuel and power
L1. Reasonable provision shall be made for the
conservation of fuel and power in buildings by:
(a) limiting heat gains and losses—
(i) through thermal elements and other parts
of the building fabric; and
(ii) from pipes, ducts and vessels used for
space heating, space cooling and hot water
services;
(b) providing fixed building services which—
(i) are energy efficient to a reasonable standard;
(ii) have effective controls; and
(iii) are commissioned by testing and adjusting
as necessary to ensure they use no more
fuel and power than is reasonable in the
circumstances.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of regulation 23(1) and requirement L1(a) are met for
work to elements in existing dwellings by renovating a thermal element to the standards in Section 11.
This section deals with the requirements of regulations 6 and 22 of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Requirements relating to material change of use
6. (1) Where there is a material change of use of the whole of a building, such work, if any, shall be carried out
as is necessary to ensure that the building complies with the applicable requirements of the following
paragraphs of Schedule 1—
(a) in all cases, B1 (means of warning and escape)
B2 (internal fire spread—linings)
B3 (internal fire spread—structure)
B4(2) (external fire spread—roofs)
B5 (access and facilities for the fire service
C2(c) (interstitial and surface condensation)
F1 (ventilation)
G1 (cold water supply)
G3(1) to (3) (hot water supply and systems)
G4 (sanitary conveniences and washing facilities)
G5 (bathrooms)
G6 (kitchens and food preparation areas)
H1 (foul water drainage)
H6 (solid waste storage)
J1 to J4 (combustion appliances)
L1 (conservation of fuel and power)
P1 (electrical safety);
(b) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(c), (d), (e) or (f), A1 to A3 (structure);
(c) in the case of a building exceeding fifteen metres in height, B4(1) (external fire spread—walls);
(d) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a), (b), (c), (d), (g), (h), (i) or, where the
material change provides new residential accommodation, (f), C1(2) (resistance to contaminants);
(e) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a), C2 (resistance to moisture);
(f) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a), (b), (c), (g), (h) or (i), E1 to E3
(resistance to the passage of sound);
(g) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(e), where the public building consists of
or contains a school, E4 (acoustic conditions in schools);
(h) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a) or (b), G2 (water efficiency) and G3(4)
(hot water supply and systems: hot water supply to fixed baths);
(i) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(c), (d), (e) or (j), M1 (access to and use of
buildings other than dwellings);
(j) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a), (b) or (g), Q1 (security).
Intention
Regulations 6 and 22 of the Building Regulations set requirements for buildings to comply with
Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations when a material change of use or a change to energy status
occurs.
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of regulations 6 and 22 are met by following the
guidance in Section 11.
General
11.1 This section provides guidance for work to existing elements in dwellings, including all of the
following types of work.
a. Renovating an existing thermal element in an existing dwelling – follow paragraphs 11.2 to 11.4.
b. Making a material change of use to a dwelling – follow paragraphs 11.5 to 11.8.
c. Making a change to a dwelling that constitutes a change to energy status – follow paragraphs
11.6 to 11.8.
NOTE: For new and replacement elements in existing dwellings, the guidance in Section 10 should
be followed.
For example, if plaster is being removed from the inner side of a wall, the area of the thermal element is the area of external wall
as viewed from inside the room.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 28 of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Consequential improvements to energy performance
28. (1) Paragraph (2) applies to an existing building with a total useful floor area over 1,000m2 where the proposed
building work consists of or includes—
(a) an extension;
(b) the initial provision of any fixed building services; or
(c) an increase to the installed capacity of any fixed building services.
(2) Subject to paragraph (3), where this paragraph applies, such work, if any, shall be carried out as is necessary
to ensure that the building complies with the requirements of Part L of Schedule 1.
(3) Nothing in paragraph (2) requires work to be carried out if it is not technically, functionally or economically
feasible.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, where regulation 28 applies, the requirements of this regulation are
met for existing buildings with a total useful floor area over 1000m2 by carrying out consequential
improvements that are technically, functionally and economically feasible, by following the guidance
in Section 12.
12.1 For an existing dwelling with a total useful floor area of over 1000m2, additional work may be
required to improve the overall energy efficiency of the dwelling if proposed work consists of or
includes any of the following.
a. An extension.
b. Providing any fixed building service in the dwelling for the first time.
c. Increasing the capacity of any fixed building service (which does not include doing so on
account of renewable technology).
Consequential improvements should be carried out to ensure that the dwelling complies with Part
L of the Building Regulations, to the extent that they are technically, functionally and economically
feasible.
12.2 Technical guidance on consequential improvements is given in Approved Document L, Volume 2:
Buildings other than dwellings.
NOTE: Except for the items marked * (which generation through automatic controls and by
are from the Building Regulations 2010), these facilitating the manual management of those building
definitions apply only to Approved Document L, systems.
Volume 1: Dwellings. Building control body A local authority building
Air barrier An air barrier controls air leakage into control department or an approved inspector.
and out of the building envelope. This is usually in *Building envelope (in relation to a building)
the form of a membrane. Defined in regulation 35 as the walls, floor, roof,
Air permeability The measure of airtightness of windows, doors, roof windows and rooflights.
the building fabric. It is defined as the air leakage Centre pane U-value The U-value determined
rate per hour per m2 of envelope area at the test in the central area of the glazing unit, making no
reference pressure differential of 50Pa or 4Pa. allowance for edge spacers or the window frame.
• The limiting air permeability is the worst *Change to energy status Defined in regulation
allowable air permeability. 2(1) as any change which results in a building
• The design air permeability is the target value becoming a building to which the energy efficiency
set at the design stage. requirements of these Regulations apply, where
• The assessed air permeability is the value used previously it was not.
in establishing the building emission rate and Circuit-watt Refers to the power consumed in
the building primary energy rate. The assessed lighting circuits by lamps and, where applicable,
air permeability is based on a measurement of their associated control gear (including transformers
the air permeability of the building concerned. and drivers) and power factor correction
Airtightness The resistance of the building envelope equipment.
to infiltration when ventilators are closed. The greater
Coefficient of performance (COP) A measure of the
the airtightness at a given pressure difference across
efficiency of a heat pump at specified source and
the envelope, the lower the infiltration. sink temperatures, measured using the procedures
Automation A control function which automatically in BS EN 14511-2.
adjusts time and temperature settings based on • Heating COP = heat output / power input.
occupancy detection and/or stored data from user • % COP (COP � 100) is the heat generator
adjustments over time. efficiency.
Benchmark Commissioning Checklist A checklist Commissioning When, after all or part of a fixed
that can be used to show that commissioning building service or on-site electricity generation
has been carried out satisfactorily. (Benchmark is system has been installed, replaced or altered, the
registered as a European Collective Mark by the system is taken from a state of static completion to
Heating and Hot Water Industry Council, and the working order. Testing and adjusting are carried out
content is copyright.) for fixed building services, as necessary, to ensure
Building automation and control system A system that the whole system uses no more fuel and power
comprising all products, software and engineering than is reasonable in the circumstances. Testing
services that can support energy efficient, economical and adjusting are carried out for on-site electricity
and safe operation of heating, ventilation and air generation systems, as necessary, to ensure that the
conditioning systems and on-site electricity whole system produces the maximum amount of
electricity that is reasonable in the circumstances.
• Regulation (that is, testing and adjusting Dwelling primary energy rate Expressed as kWhPE/
repetitively) to achieve the specified (m2·year) and determined using the Standard
performance. Assessment Procedure.
h. the building contains a room for residential Secondary circulation An assembly of water
purposes, where previously it did not; fittings in which water circulates in supply pipes or
distributing pipes of hot water storage systems.
i. the building, which contains at least one room
for residential purposes, contains a greater Secondary heating A space heating appliance
or lesser number of such rooms than it did or system which operates separately from the
previously; main heating system in the dwelling and does not
provide most of the heating in the dwelling – for
j. the building is used as a shop, where it example, a decorative fuel-effect fire in a room
previously was not; or which also contains radiators for a central heating
k. the building is a building described in regulation system.
7(4)(a), where previously it was not. SEDBUK (Seasonal Efficiency of Domestic Boilers
Primary circulation An assembly of water fittings in in the UK) The methodology for determining boiler
which water circulates between a heat source and efficiency defined in the Standard Assessment
a primary heat exchanger inside a hot water storage Procedure, Appendix D.
vessel, including any space heating system. Simple payback The amount of time it will take
Primary energy Energy, from renewable and non- to recover the initial investment through energy
renewable sources, that has not undergone any savings, calculated by dividing the marginal
conversion or transformation process. additional cost of implementing an energy
efficiency measure by the value of the annual
Renewable technology Technology that uses energy savings achieved by that measure, taking no
renewable resources, which are naturally account of VAT. The following guidance should be
replenished on a human timescale, to produce used.
electricity. Resources include wind, wave, marine,
hydro, biomass and solar. • The marginal additional cost is the additional
cost (materials and labour) of incorporating, for
Rooflight A glazed unit installed out of plane with example, additional insulation – not the whole
the surface of the roof on a kerb or upstand. Also cost of the work.
sometimes referred to as a skylight.
• The cost of implementing the measure should
Roof window A window installed in the same be based on prices current at the date when
orientation as, and in plane with, the surrounding roof. the application is made to the building control
*Room for residential purposes Defined in body and be confirmed in a report signed by a
regulation 2(1) as a room, or a suite of rooms, suitably qualified person.
which is not a dwelling-house or a flat and which • The annual energy savings should be estimated
is used by one or more persons to live and sleep using the Standard Assessment Procedure.
and includes a room in a hostel, an hotel, a
boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential
home, but does not include a room in a hospital,
or other similar establishment, used for patient
accommodation.
BREL report
B1 The Buildings Regulations England Part L (BREL) report and photographic evidence should be
provided to the building control body and to the building owner to show that building work
complies with energy efficiency requirements.
B2 SAP 10 will produce the BREL report for the building as a standard output option.
B3 Two versions of the BREL report should be produced, using the approved software.
a. The first, the design stage BREL report, before works begin, to include all of the following.
i. The target primary energy rate and dwelling primary energy rate.
ii. The target emission rate and dwelling emission rate.
iii. The target fabric energy efficiency rate and dwelling fabric energy efficiency rate.
iv. A supporting list of specifications.
b. The second, the as-built BREL report, to include all of the following.
i. The target primary energy rate and as-built dwelling primary energy rate.
ii. The target emission rate and as-built dwelling emission rate.
iii. The target fabric energy efficiency rate and as-built dwelling fabric energy efficiency rate.
iv. A supporting list of specifications and any changes to the list of specifications that was
provided at design stage.
The building control body can then use these reports to help check that what was designed has been
built. The software includes a facility to compare the design stage and as-built data input files and
automatically produce a schedule of changes.
B4 The as-built BREL report should be signed by the person carrying out the SAP assessment to
confirm that the as-built calculations are accurate and that the supporting documentary evidence
and photographs have been reviewed (see paragraphs B6 and B7).
B5 The as-built BREL report should be signed by the developer to confirm that the dwelling has been
constructed or completed according to the specifications in the report.
C1 This appendix provides guidance on the cost-effectiveness of insulation measures during various
types of work on a thermal element. Table C1 sets out target U-values that would be considered
to represent reasonable improvements in ordinary cases and examples of construction that may be
used to achieve the proposed performance.
C2 If it is not reasonable to meet the target U-values in Table C1, considering technical risk and
practicality of the work in relation to the dwelling and impacts on adjoining buildings, then the
U-value should be as close to the target value as practically possible.
C3 The final column in Table C1 provides guidance on specific issues that may need to be considered
to determine an appropriate course of action. In general, the proposed works should take account
of all of the following.
a. The requirements of any other relevant parts of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations.
b. The general guidance on technical risk relating to insulation improvements contained in the
Building Research Establishment’s BR 262.
c. For buildings falling within the categories set out in paragraphs 0.8 to 0.13, Historic England’s
Energy Efficiency and Historic Buildings: Application of Part L of the Building Regulations to
Historic and Traditionally Constructed Buildings.
C4 General guidance is available from relevant British Standards.
Table C1 Cost-effective U-value targets when undertaking renovation works to thermal elements
Proposed works Target Typical construction Comments (reasonableness, practicability
U-value and cost-effectiveness)
W/(m2·K)
Pitched roof constructions
Renewal of roof covering: No 0.16 Provide loft Assess condensation risk in roof space and
living accommodation in the insulation – 250mm make appropriate provision in accordance
roof void. Existing insulation (if mineral fibre or with the requirements of Part C relating to
any) at ceiling level, less than cellulose fibre as a the control of condensation (BS 5250 and
50mm, in poor condition, and/ quilt laid between BS EN ISO 13788). Additional provision
or likely to be significantly and across ceiling may be required to provide access to and
disturbed or removed as part joists or loose fill or insulation of services in the roof void
of the planned work equivalent
Renewal of roof covering: 0.16 Top up loft Assess condensation risk in roof space
Existing insulation in good insulation to at least and make appropriate provision in line with
condition and will not be 250mm mineral fibre the requirements of Part C relating to the
significantly disturbed by or cellulose fibre as control of condensation (BS 5250 and
proposed works. Existing quilt laid between BS EN ISO 13788). Additional provision may
insulation thickness between and across ceiling be required to provide insulation and access
50mm and 100mm joists or loose fill or to services in the roof void
equivalent. This may
Where the loft is already boarded and the
be boarded out
boarding will not be removed as part of the
work, the practicality of insulation works
needs to be considered
D1 This appendix provides a good practice specification for a dwelling built with a heat pump.
D2 By using this specification, the dwelling should pass the target primary energy rate and target
emission rate. However, this should be checked through energy calculations.
BS 1566-1 Copper indirect cylinders for domestic BS EN 449 Specification for dedicated liquefied
purposes. Open vented copper cylinders. petroleum gas appliances. Domestic flueless space
Requirements and test methods [2002 + A1: 2011] heaters (including diffusive catalytic combustion
BS 3198 Specification for copper hot water storage heaters) [2002 + A1: 2007]
combination units for domestic purposes [1981] BS EN 509 Decorative fuel-effect gas appliances
BS 5250 Management of moisture in buildings. [2000]
Code of practice [2021] BS EN 613 Independent gas-fired convection
BS 5422 Method for specifying thermal insulating heaters [2001]
materials for pipes, tanks, vessels, ductwork and BS EN 805 Water supply. Requirements for systems
equipment operating within the temperature range and components outside buildings [2000]
-40°C to +700°C [2009] BS EN 1264-4 Water based surface embedded
BS 5864 Installation and maintenance of gas- heating and cooling systems. Installation [2021]
fired ducted air heaters of rated heat input not BS EN 1266 Independent gas-fired convection
exceeding 70 kW net (2nd and 3rd family gases). heaters incorporating a fan to assist transportation
Specification [2019] of combustion air and/or flue gases [2002]
BS 6229 Flat roofs with continuously supported BS EN 12831-3 Energy performance of buildings.
flexible waterproof coverings. Code of practice Method for calculation of the design heat load.
[2018] Domestic hot water systems heat load and
BS 7593 Code of practice for the preparation, characterisation of needs [2017]
commissioning and maintenance of domestic BS EN 12897 Water supply. Specification for
central heating and cooling water systems [2019] indirectly heated unvented (closed) storage water
BS 7977 Specification for safety and rational use of heaters [2016 + A1: 2020]
energy of domestic gas appliances BS EN 12975-1 Thermal solar systems and
BS 7977-1 Radiant/convectors [2009 + A1: components. Solar collectors – General
2013] requirements [2006 + A1: 2010]
BS 7977-2 Combined appliances. Gas fire/back BS EN 13278 Open fronted gas-fired independent
boiler [2003] space heaters [2013]
BS 8213-4 Windows and doors. Code of practice BS EN 14511-2 Air conditioners, liquid chilling
for the survey and installation of windows and packages and heat pumps for space heating and
external doorsets [2016] cooling and process chillers, with electrically
BS EN 253 District heating pipes. Bonded single driven compressors. Test conditions [2018]
pipe systems for directly buried hot water BS EN 14825 Air conditioners, liquid chilling
networks. Factory made pipe assembly of steel packages and heat pumps, with electrically driven
service pipe, polyurethane thermal insulation and a compressors, for space heating and cooling. Testing
casing of polyethylene [2019] and rating at part load conditions and calculation
of seasonal performance [2018]
Legislation Documents
Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Areas Act Building Research Establishment (BRE)
1979, c. 46
(www.bre.co.uk)
Building (Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations
2010, SI 2010/2215 BR 262 Thermal Insulation: Avoiding Risks. Third
Edition [2002]
Building Regulations 2010, SI 2010/2214
BR 443 Conventions for U-value Calculations [2019]
Ecodesign Commission Regulation No. 2016/2281
BR 497 Conventions for Calculating Linear Thermal
Ecodesign for Energy-Related Products Regulations Transmittance and Temperature Factors. Second
2010, SI 2010/2617 Edition [2016]
Energy-Related Products Directive 2009/125/EC Information Paper 1/06 Assessing the Effects of
Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) Thermal Bridging at Junctions and around Openings
Act 1990, c. 9 in the External Elements of Buildings [2006]
FB 59 Design of Low-temperature Domestic
Heating Systems: A Guide for System Designers and
Installers [2013]
Chartered Institute of Plumbing and Heating
Engineering (CIPHE)
(www.ciphe.org)
Plumbing Engineering Services Design Guide [2002]
Chartered Institution of Building Services
Engineers (CIBSE)
(www.cibse.org)
Guide A Environmental Design [2015]
TM23 Testing Buildings for Air Leakage [2000]
Department for Business, Energy and Industrial
Strategy (BEIS)
(www.gov.uk/beis)
The Government’s Standard Assessment Procedure
for Energy Rating of Dwellings, SAP 10. Available at
www.bregroup.com/sap/sap10/
L
Conservation of
fuel and power
APPROVED DOCUMENT
This section deals with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (linings)
B2. (1) To inhibit the spread of fire within the building,
the internal linings shall—
(a) adequately resist the spread of flame over
their surfaces; and ➊
(b) have, if ignited, either a rate of heat release
or a rate of fire growth, which is reasonable in
the circumstances.
(2) In this paragraph “internal linings” means the
materials or products used in lining any partition,
wall, ceiling or other internal structure.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B2 is met by achieving a restricted spread of flame
over internal linings. The building fabric should make a limited contribution to fire growth,
including a low rate of heat release.
It is particularly important in circulation spaces, where linings may offer the main means by which
fire spreads and where rapid spread is most likely to prevent occupants from escaping.
Requirement B2 does not include guidance on the following.
➋
a. Generation of smoke and fumes.
b. The upper surfaces of floors and stairs.
c. Furniture and fittings.
Key
For further information about the use of technical guidance, see Chapter 7 in Volume 1 and Chapter F
in Volume 2 of the Manual to the Building Regulations.
Introduction i
What is an approved document? i
How is construction regulated in England? i
How do you comply with the Building Regulations? i
What do the Building Regulations cover? ii
When must a building control body be notified? ii
How to use this approved document iii
Where to get further help iv
Section 0: Introduction 1
Summary 1
Application 2
Selected key interactions with other parts of the Building Regulations 5
Regulations 24, 25, 25B, 26, 26C, 27 and 27C: Energy performance of building
calculations 6
Intention 8
Section 1: Calculating the target primary energy rate and target emission rate 9
Section 2: Calculating the building primary energy rate and building
emission rate 10
Building control notification 10
Heating in the building primary energy rate and the building emission rate calculations 11
Management and control features in the building primary energy rate and the building
emission rate calculations 12
Achieving the target primary energy rate and target emission rate 13
Special considerations when calculating building primary energy rate and building emission rate 13
Buildings with low energy demand 17
Requirements L1(b)(i), (ii) and L2: Fixed building services energy efficiency
and controls and on-site generation of electricity 33
Intention 34
Section 8: Commissioning 61
Notice of completion 62
Air leakage testing of ductwork 62
Regulations 6 and 22: Material change of use and change to energy status 75
Intention 76
Summary
0.1 This approved document is Approved Document L, Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings. It
gives guidance on how to comply with Part L of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations and the
energy efficiency requirements for buildings other than dwellings. For guidance relating to domestic
buildings, use Approved Document L, Volume 1: Dwellings.
New buildings
0.6 Guidance for new buildings is given in Sections 1 to 9 of this approved document, Approved
Document L, Volume 2.
0.7 For a conservatory or porch installed as part of the construction of a new building, the treatment
of the conservatory or porch depends on whether both of the following have been achieved.
a. There is adequate thermal separation between the building and the conservatory or porch.
b. The building’s heating system is not extended into the conservatory or porch.
If both (a) and (b) have been achieved, the conservatory or porch should be treated as if it were an
extension being added onto an existing building. The guidance for new elements in existing buildings
in Section 10 should be followed.
If either or both of (a) or (b) has not been achieved, the conservatory or porch should be treated as a
room in the new building. The guidance for the whole new building should be followed, including for
building primary energy rate and building emission rate calculations.
0.8 For the first fit-out works in buildings, such as shell-and-core office buildings, guidance for new
buildings covering first fit-out should be followed. For any subsequent fit-out works the guidance
for existing buildings should be followed.
0.9 For constructing a building from modular subassemblies, or for relocating a modular or
portable building, the guidance for new buildings should be followed, taking note of the special
considerations for these building types outlined in Section 2. If the work extends an existing
building, consequential improvements may also be required. Guidance is given in Section 12.
Exemptions
0.11 The following classes of buildings or parts of buildings other than dwellings are exempt from the
energy efficiency requirements.
a. Places of worship – buildings or parts of a building that are used primarily or solely for formal
public worship, plus adjoining spaces the function of which is directly linked to that use (e.g. a
vestry in a church).
NOTE: Parts of the building that are designed to be used separately, such as offices, catering
facilities, day centres, meeting halls and accommodation, are not exempt from the energy
efficiency requirements.
b. Temporary buildings with a total planned time of use of two years or less.
c. Buildings with low energy demand which are industrial sites, workshops or non-residential
agricultural buildings.
NOTE: Low energy demand only relates to the energy used by fixed heating or cooling systems, not to
energy required for or created by process needs. This includes buildings or parts of buildings where the
space is not generally heated or cooled other than by process heat or buildings or parts of buildings
that only require heating or cooling for short periods each year, such as during critical periods in the
production cycle (e.g. plant germination, egg hatching) or during very severe weather conditions.
NOTE: Portable or modular buildings with a planned service life of longer than two years, whether
on one or more sites, are not exempt. See paragraphs 2.11 to 2.19.
d. New and existing stand-alone buildings other than dwellings, with a total useful floor area of
less than 50m2.
e. Carports, covered yards, covered ways and some conservatories and porches (see paragraphs 0.18
to 0.19).
Live/work units
0.20 A building that contains both living accommodation and space for commercial purposes (e.g. for
a workshop or office) should be treated as a dwelling if the commercial part can be reverted to
domestic use. Guidance for dwellings can be found in Approved Document L, Volume 1: Dwellings.
0.21 The commercial part of a building can be reverted to domestic use if all of the following apply.
a. There is direct access between the commercial space and the living accommodation.
Mixed-use developments
0.22 When constructing a building that contains dwellings and other types of accommodation, sometimes
called a mixed-use development, refer to the two volumes of Approved Document L as follows.
a. For guidance on each individual dwelling, use Approved Document L, Volume 1: Dwellings.
b. For guidance on the non-dwelling parts of the building, such as heated common areas and any
commercial or retail space, use this approved document.
This section deals with the requirements of regulations 24, 25, 25B, 26, 26C, 27 and 27C of the Building
Regulations 2010.
Regulations
Methodology of calculation of the energy performance
24. (1) The Secretary of State shall approve—
(a) a methodology of calculation of the energy performance of buildings, including methods for calculating
asset ratings and operational ratings of buildings; and
(b) ways in which the energy performance of buildings, as calculated in accordance with the methodology,
shall be expressed.
(2) In this regulation—
“asset rating” means an energy performance indicator determined from the amount of energy estimated to
meet the different needs associated with a standardised use of the building; and
“operational rating” means an energy performance indicator determined from the amount of energy
consumed during the occupation of a building over a period of time and the energy demand associated
with a typical use of the building over that period.
Intention
Regulation 24
Regulation 24 requires the Secretary of State to approve a methodology of calculation of the energy
performance of a building. Approved tools for implementing this methodology for new non-domestic
buildings are the Simplified Building Energy Model or other software tools approved under the
Notice of Approval.
Calculation methodologies are set out in Section 1 and Section 2 of this approved document.
Regulation 25
Regulation 25 requires the Secretary of State to approve minimum energy performance requirements.
These requirements are in the form of a target primary energy rate and a target emission rate.
The targets are set out in Section 1 of this approved document.
Regulation 25B
The Secretary of State considers that a building has a very high performance rate for the purposes of
the definition of a nearly zero-energy building if both of the following are met.
a. The building meets the target emission rate required under regulation 26.
b. Both:
i. An analysis is made of the technical, environmental and economic feasibility of using high
efficiency alternative systems, which include decentralised energy supply systems based on
energy from renewable sources.
ii. This analysis is considered as required by regulation 25A.
1.1 A new building must be built to a minimum standard of total energy performance. This is evaluated
by comparing calculations of the performance of the ‘actual building’ against calculations of the
performance of a theoretical building, called the ‘notional building’. This must be carried out both
at the design stage and when work is complete.
The notional building is the same size and shape as the actual building and has standardised
properties for fabric and services. The full properties of the notional building are set out in the
National Calculation Methodology Modelling Guide, which is available from https://www.uk-ncm.
org.uk/.
1.2 The energy performance of the notional building is described using the following metrics.
a. The target primary energy rate, in kWhPE/m2 per year.
b. The target emission rate, in kgCO2/m2 per year.
1.3 The target primary energy rate and target emission rate must be calculated using one of the
calculation tools in the approved methodology, used in line with the version policy as stated in the
methodology. As part of the submission to the building control body, the applicant should show
that the software tool used is appropriate to the application. The calculation tool can be either of
the following.
a. The Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM), for buildings with design features that are capable
of being adequately modelled by the Simplified Building Energy Model.
b. Other software tools approved under the Notice of Approval.
NOTE: An up-to-date list of approved software can be found on the Department for Levelling Up,
Housing and Communities webpages.
NOTE: Information on the approved methodology, the version policy for these tools and how to
choose an appropriate modelling tool can be found in the National Calculation Methodology
Modelling Guide.
2.1 The same approved calculation tool must be used to calculate the target primary energy rate, the
target emission rate, the building primary energy rate and the building emission rate.
2.2 The building primary energy rate and the building emission rate must be calculated at both of the
following points using the same calculation tool.
a. Before work starts, using design values.
b. When work is complete, using figures for the building as constructed, and incorporating both of
the following.
i. Any changes that have been made during construction to the list of specifications.
ii. The measured air permeability.
2.3 At both of these points the building primary energy rate and building emission rate must not
exceed the target primary energy rate and the target emission rate, respectively. The specification
of the actual building may vary from that of the notional building if the building meets the target
primary energy rate, target emission rate and the guidance in this approved document.
Table 2.2 Target primary energy rate and target emission rate multiplying factors for
modular and portable buildings with a service life of more than two years at a
single location
Date of manufacture of 70% of modules Target primary energy rate Target emission rate
making up the external envelope multiplying factor multiplying factor
After the coming into force date 1.00 1.00
6 April 2014 – coming into force date 1.30 1.30
1 Oct 2010 – 5 April 2014 1.40 1.40
6 April 2006 – 30 Sept 2010 1.67 1.67
Pre 6 April 2006 1.67 1.67
Table 2.3 Target emission rate multiplying factor for modular and portable buildings with
a planned service life of more than two years but intended time of use at a single
location of less than two years
Date of manufacture of 70% of modules Target primary energy rate Target emission rate
making up the external envelope multiplying factor multiplying factor
After the coming into force date 1.00 1.00
6 April 2014 – coming into force date 1.30 1.30
1 Oct 2010 – 5 April 2014 1.40 1.40
6 April 2006 – 30 Sept 2010 1.67 1.67
Pre 6 April 2006 2.03 2.03
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 25A of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Consideration of high-efficiency alternative systems for new buildings
25A. (1) B
efore construction of a new building starts, the person who is to carry out the work must analyse and
take into account the technical, environmental and economic feasibility of using high-efficiency alternative
systems (such as the following systems) in the construction, if available—
(a) decentralised energy supply systems based on energy from renewable sources;
(b) cogeneration;
(c) district or block heating or cooling, particularly where it is based entirely or partially on energy from
renewable sources; and
(d) heat pumps.
(2) The person carrying out the work must—
(a) not later than the beginning of the day before the day on which the work starts, give the local authority
a notice which states that the analysis referred to in paragraph (1)—
(i) has been undertaken;
(ii) is documented; and
(iii) the documentation is available to the authority for verification purposes; and
(b) ensure that a copy of the analysis is available for inspection at all reasonable times upon request by an
officer of the local authority.
(3) An authorised officer of the local authority may require production of the documentation in order to verify
that this regulation has been complied with.
(4) The analysis referred to in paragraph (1)—
(a) may be carried out for individual buildings or for groups of similar buildings or for common typologies
of buildings in the same area; and
(b) in so far as it relates to collective heating and cooling systems, may be carried out for all buildings
connected to the system in the same area.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, regulation 25A is met in a new building by analysing the feasibility of
installing high-efficiency alternative systems, following Section 3.
The Building Regulations do not require that high-efficiency alternative systems or other low or zero
carbon systems are installed.
3.1 Before building work starts on a new non-domestic building, the person undertaking the building
work must analyse the technical, environmental and economic feasibility of using high-efficiency
alternative systems in the building design. This analysis should be considered when designing the
building.
3.2 The building control body should be notified that the analysis of high-efficiency alternative
systems has been undertaken, that it is documented and is available to be verified. The document
should state whether high-efficiency alternative systems have been included in the building design.
The documented results of the analysis should be retained for the building control body to inspect
upon request.
3.3 The analysis may be carried out for individual buildings, groups of similar buildings, or for common
types of buildings in the same area. Where a number of buildings are connected to a district heat
network or community heating system, a single analysis may be made for all buildings connected to
the network or system.
3.4 When a building undergoes a major renovation, the technical, environmental and economic
feasibility of installing high-efficiency alternative systems should be considered.
This section deals with the requirements of Part L1(a) of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Schedule 1 – Part L Conservation of fuel and power
L1. Reasonable provision shall be made for the
conservation of fuel and power in buildings by—
(a) limiting heat gains and losses—
(i) through thermal elements and other parts
of the building fabric; and
(ii) from pipes, ducts and vessels used for
space heating, space cooling and hot water
services;
(b) providing fixed building services which—
(i) are energy efficient to a reasonable standard;
(ii) have effective controls; and
(iii) are commissioned by testing and adjusting
as necessary to ensure they use no more
fuel and power than is reasonable in the
circumstances.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement L1(a) is met in a new building by achieving both of the
following.
a. Unwanted heat losses from the building are limited by meeting the standards for all of the
following.
i. The building fabric, including walls, floors, roof, windows and openings – paragraphs 4.1 to
4.6 and paragraphs 4.9 to 4.14.
ii. Airtightness – the required air permeability from Table 4.1.
iii. The pipework and services – paragraphs 4.19 to 4.25.
b. Unwanted heat gains to the building, throughout the year, through any of the routes listed
in (a) above, are limited as set out in Section 4 and specifically for new buildings – paragraphs
4.16 to 4.18.
U-values
4.1 U-values should be assessed using the methods and conventions set out in the Building Research
Establishment’s BR 443. U-values should be assessed for the whole thermal element (e.g. in the case
of a window, the combined performance of the glazing and the frame).
4.2 The U-value of a window should be assessed using one of the following methods.
a. Calculated using the actual size and configuration of the window.
b. For windows in buildings similar to dwellings, calculated for a standard window 1.23m (±25%)
wide × 1.48m (–25%) high and the actual configuration of the window.
c. For windows in buildings similar to dwellings, calculated for a standard window 1.23m (±25%)
wide × 1.48m (–25%) high and one of the following standard configurations. Standard
configurations should not be used for commercial windows.
i. For a casement window, a central vertical divider with one opening light and one fixed light.
ii. For a vertical sliding sash window, a central horizontal divider with two opening lights.
iii. For a roof window, no divider.
d. Measured using the hot-box method as set out in BS EN ISO 12567-1 for windows and
BS EN ISO 12567-2 for roof windows.
NOTE: For domestic-type window construction, to be used in buildings similar to dwellings (see
Table 4.1), the default value from the Standard Assessment Procedure (Table 6e) may be used if
there are no test data or calculated performance values.
4.3 The U-value of a door should be assessed using one of the following methods.
a. Calculated using the actual size and configuration of the door.
b. Calculated using one of the following standard sizes.
i. 1.23m (±25%) wide × 2.18m (±25%) high, for doors ≤ 3.6 m².
ii. 2.00m (±25%) wide × 2.18m (±25%) high, for doors > 3.6 m².
NOTE: When a single U-value is calculated for a product range of doors, the configuration of the
door chosen for the calculation should be the worst performing in the product range.
c. Measured using the hot-box method as set out in BS EN ISO 12567-1.
4.4 To correctly assess whether an element meets the limiting U-value, the U-value must be calculated
for the element in the appropriate plane – either horizontal or vertical. For windows and roof
windows, U-values should be calculated based on a vertical position. For rooflights, U-values should be
calculated based on a horizontal position. If the data available for the element is in the incorrect plane,
it should be adjusted according to the guidance in the Building Research Establishment’s BR 443.
NOTE: These orientations should only be used when calculating U-values to check that they meet
the limiting standards outlined in paragraphs 4.5 to 4.8 below. They should not be used in the
energy calculations in Sections 1 and 2, where the U-value of each element is calculated based on
the plane in which it is constructed or installed.
Continuity of insulation
4.9 In new and existing buildings both of the following should apply.
a. The insulation should be reasonably continuous across newly built elements.
b. Thermal bridging, including at the party wall, should be reasonably limited.
NOTE: Any solution to edge sealing or thermal bridging in new buildings should take particular
account of Part E of the Building Regulations.
4.10 To avoid air movement within thermal elements in new and existing buildings, either of the
following measures should be implemented.
a. The insulation layer should abut the air barrier at all points across newly built elements.
b. The space between the air barrier and the insulation layer should be filled with solid material.
Type of space (as Average zone Glazing location Glazing area for Framing Glazing
defined in the height for reference reference space factor for g-value for
National Calculation space reference reference
Methodology) space space
Side-lit Any East-facing Full-width to a 10% 0.48
façade height of 1000mm
Top-lit ≤6m Roof 10% of roof area(1) 25% 0.48
>6m Roof 10% of roof area(1) 15% 0.42
NOTE:
1. ‘Roof area’ determined from the inside of the space looking out.
Table 4.5 Minimum thickness of pipework insulation for domestic hot water services in
non-domestic buildings
Nominal internal pipe Minimum insulation thickness (mm) for domestic
diameter (mm) hot water services(1)(2)(3)
Thermal conductivity (λ) = Thermal conductivity (λ) =
0.025W/m·K 0.04W/m·K
Less than or equal to 10 15 35
Less than or equal to 20 20 35
Less than or equal to 40 25 40
Less than or equal to 80 25 45
Less than or equal to 100 30 45
NOTES:
1. Insulation thicknesses designed to achieve permissible heat losses from BS 5422 for hot water services at 60°C.
2. Thicknesses for low-emissivity faced insulation.
3. For other circumstances refer to BS 5422.
Insulating ductwork
4.25 Ductwork that carries warm or cold air should be insulated throughout its whole length to achieve
heat transfer no greater than that given in Table 4.6. Table 4.6 also gives indicative insulation
thicknesses, which offers one way of demonstrating that the heat transfer value has not been
exceeded.
Condensation should also be controlled by following the Thermal Insulation Manufacturers and
Suppliers Association’s HVAC Guidance for Achieving Compliance with Part L of the Building
Regulations.
Table 4.6 Maximum heat losses and gains for ducts delivering air for heating and/or
cooling
Heating duct(1a) Cooling or dual-purpose duct(1b)
Heat transfer (W/m2) 16.34 –6.45
Indicative insulation thickness (mm)(2) 21 36
NOTES:
1. Insulation thicknesses should be calculated according to BS EN ISO 12241 using the following standardised
assumptions.
a. Horizontal duct at 35°C, with 600mm vertical sidewall in still air at 15°C.
b. Horizontal duct at 13°C, with 600mm vertical sidewall in still air at 25°C.
2. Thicknesses apply for low-emissivity faced insulation with a thermal conductivity of 0.025W/(m·K) or better.
Otherwise consult BS 5422.
This section deals with the requirements of Part L1(b)(i), (ii) and L2 of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Schedule 1 – Part L Conservation of fuel and power
L1. Reasonable provision shall be made for the
conservation of fuel and power in buildings by—
(a) limiting heat gains and losses—
(i) through thermal elements and other parts of
the building fabric; and
(ii) from pipes, ducts and vessels used for
space heating, space cooling and hot water
services;
(b) providing fixed building services which—
(i) are energy efficient to a reasonable
standard;
(ii) have effective controls; and
(iii) are commissioned by testing and adjusting
as necessary to ensure they use no more
fuel and power than is reasonable in the
circumstances.
On-site generation of electricity
L2. Where a system for on-site electricity generation is
installed—
(a) reasonable provision must be made to ensure
that—
(i) the system and its electrical output are
appropriately sized for the site and available
infrastructure;
(ii) the system has effective controls; and
(b) it must be commissioned by testing and
adjusting as necessary to ensure that it produces
the maximum electricity that is reasonable in
the circumstances.
Worked example
Replacing an old oil-fired boiler with emissions of 0.298kgCO2/kWh and primary energy of
1.180kWhPE/kWh at 85% efficiency with an LPG boiler with emissions of 0.241kgCO2/kWh and primary
energy of 1.141kWhPE/kWh at 93% efficiency.
CO2 emissions
Oil-fired boiler: 0.298/0.85 = 0.35kgCO2/kWh
LPG boiler: 0.241/0.93 = 0.26kgCO2/kWh
Primary energy
Oil-fired boiler: 1.180/0.85= 1.39kWhPE/kWh
LPG boiler: 1.141/0.93 = 1.23kWhPE/kWh
The new LPG boiler has both lower CO2 emissions and primary energy than the oil-fired boiler being
replaced, and therefore complies. It is also at least as efficient as the minimum efficiency as set out in
Section 6 of this guidance.
Energy submeters
5.17 Energy submetering systems should be installed in new buildings, or when fixed building services
are provided or extended in an existing building, and should meet all of the following requirements.
a. The various end-use categories, such as heating, lighting and cooling, should be submetered in
such a way that at least 90% of the annual energy consumption of each fuel can be assigned to
an end-use. Detailed guidance on how to achieve this is given in CIBSE’s TM39.
b. Metering should enable the comparison of forecast energy use and in-performance energy and
facilitate energy reporting. This can be demonstrated by basing the submetering strategy on a
design-stage energy forecast for the building, using one of the methodologies in paragraph 9.4.
c. Metering should allow the energy use of different tenants within the building to be separately
monitored.
d. The outputs of any renewable systems should be separately monitored.
e. In buildings with a total useful floor area greater than 1000m2, automatic meter reading and data
collection facilities should be installed.
NOTE: This section sets out minimum Building Regulations standards for fixed building services and
other systems. Best practice is to achieve higher efficiencies than these minimum standards.
NOTE: The Ecodesign for Energy-Related Products Regulations 2010 set the efficiencies and
standards that must be met when introducing new energy-using products to the market. This
approved document sets standards that should be met when installing fixed building services or
on-site electricity generation. In cases where the Energy-Related Products Regulations and the
Building Regulations both apply, both standards should be met.
6.1 This section sets out minimum standards for specific types of building services. The minimum
efficiencies set out are based on documented manufacturers’ test data. Note that test results will
always be based on the equipment’s operation under particular conditions. Equipment should be
designed, specified and installed with the aim of maximising its efficiency as-installed.
Boilers
NOTE: This subsection applies to wet central heating systems that use commercial boilers fired by
natural gas, liquid petroleum gas, oil or biomass. Steam boilers are not covered. Electric boilers are
dealt with in a separate subsection.
6.2 In addition to meeting the general requirements for heating systems in Section 5 and following
paragraphs 6.7 and 6.8, a boiler should meet either of the following.
a. For new buildings, the seasonal efficiencies in Table 6.1.
b. For boiler plant installed in existing buildings, the seasonal efficiencies, or the overall seasonal
efficiency for multiple-boiler systems using non-identical boilers, in Table 6.2.
Table 6.1 Minimum heat generator seasonal efficiency for boiler systems in new
buildings(1)
Fuel type System Boiler seasonal efficiency (gross calorific value)
Natural gas Single-boiler ≤2MW output 93%
Single-boiler >2MW output 88%
Multiple-boiler 88% for any individual boiler
93% for overall multi-boiler system
NOTE:
1. Seasonal efficiencies should be calculated in line with paragraphs 6.3 to 6.6.
Σ(ηBSE × R)
ηOBSE = equation 6.4
ΣR
Where:
ηOBSE is the gross overall boiler seasonal efficiency – an average, weighted by boiler output, of the
individual seasonal boiler efficiencies
ηBSE is the gross boiler seasonal efficiency of each individual boiler calculated using equation 6.1
R is the rated output in kW of each individual boiler (at 80/60°C flow/return temperature).
Biomass boilers
6.9 The efficiency of biomass boilers at their nominal load and tested to BS EN 12809 should be no lower
than the following.
a. For independent gravity-fed boilers of ‹20.5kW output: 65%.
b. For independent automatic pellet/woodchip boilers: 75%.
Table 6.3 Minimum heat generator seasonal efficiency for gas and oil-fired warm air
heaters
Warm air heater type Heat generator seasonal efficiency Product standard
(net calorific value/thermal efficiency)
Gas-fired forced convection to 91% BS EN 621 for unfanned appliances
assist transportation of combustion BS EN 1020 for fanned appliances
air and/or combustion products
Direct gas-fired forced convection(1) n/a BS EN 525
Oil-fired forced convection 91% BS EN 13842
NOTE:
1. For direct gas-fired forced convection air heaters, 100% of the net heat input is delivered to the space. Specific
ventilation requirements as defined in BS EN 525 should be met.
buildings BS EN 26 as appropriate
Indirect- Natural gas 91% (boiler efficiency) Use equations (as appropriate) in paragraphs 6.3 to 6.6.
fired: new If primary return temperature ≤55°C, use equation
and existing LPG 91% (boiler efficiency)
6.1 (0.81η30% + 0.19η100%) to calculate boiler seasonal
buildings Oil 91% (boiler efficiency) efficiency.
If primary return temperature >55°C, use boiler full
load efficiency (1.0η100%) at 80/60°C flow/return
temperatures.
If boiler seasonal efficiency values are obtained as
net values, the factors in SAP 10 Table E4 should be
used to convert them to gross values.
Electrically- 100% assumed
heated: new
and existing
buildings
NOTE:
1. In exceptional circumstances, where a condensing boiler cannot feasibly be fitted in an existing building (for
example, where there is insufficient space for a replacement flue system), a boiler with the following minimum
seasonal efficiency may be used:
a. 80% for natural gas
b. 79% for LPG.
6.25 Where efficiency data is not readily available, efficiencies should be calculated using
manufacturers’ recovery rates and equations 6.5 and 6.6.
gross thermal efficiency = heater output / gross input equation 6.5
Table 6.6 Minimum seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER)(1) for comfort cooling
Type Cooling unit SEER
Packaged air conditioners Single-duct type 3.0
Other types 3.0
Split and multi-split air conditioners >12kW 5.0
Split and multi-split air conditioners ≤12kW 5.0
Variable refrigerant flow/volume (VRF/VRV) systems(2) 5.0
Water-to-water chillers <400kW 5.0
Water-to-water chillers 400–1500kW 6.0
Water-to-water chillers ≥1500kW 6.5
Vapour compression cycle chillers, air-cooled <400kW 4.0
Vapour compression cycle chillers, air-cooled ≥400kW 4.5
Absorption cycle chillers(3) EER 0.7
Gas-engine-driven variable refrigerant flow 1.6
NOTES:
1. Seasonal space cooling energy efficiency as defined by the Ecodesign Commission Regulation No. 206/2012
Annex II, at average rating conditions where applicable.
2. For VRV/VRF systems, SEER is for the full system including indoor units.
3. For absorption chillers an EER (energy efficiency ratio) has been used instead. This should be determined
according to BS EN 14511-2.
Controls
6.35 Comfort cooling/air-conditioning systems should have all of the following controls.
a. The systems should be subdivided into separate control zones for areas of the building for which
any of the following are significantly different.
i. Solar exposure.
ii. Pattern of use.
iii. Type of use.
6.37 For cooling units for which there is no part load data, the SEER is the full load EER.
For applications where the load profile is not known but there is some data on chiller part load EER,
the following apply.
a. For chillers where the full and half load (50%) EERs are known: the SEER is the average of the full
load and half load EERs.
b. For chillers with four points of part load EER: the SEER is calculated using equation 6.7 with each
EER weighted equally.
c. If the chiller used does not have data for four steps of load: the weights are apportioned
appropriately.
Heat pumps
6.44 Air-to-air heat pumps with an output of 12kW or less should have either of the following.
a. A seasonal coefficient of performance (SCOP) rating for the median temperature range in
BS EN 14825 of at least D.
b. A coefficient of performance (COP) that is not less than the value in Table 6.8.
6.45 In addition to the general guidance for zoning and controls in Section 5, any outdoor fans, including
those in cooling towers or dry coolers, should be controlled.
6.46 For heat pump installations in which there are other heat sources available to the same building,
each of these heat sources should be appropriately incorporated into a singular control system.
Mechanical ventilation
6.47 The specification of ventilation systems should be based on the ventilation needs of the building,
in accordance with Approved Document F, Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings.
6.48 Air handling systems should be capable of achieving a specific fan power (SFP) at 25% of design
flow rate no greater than the SFP achieved at 100% design flow rate.
6.49 Fans used for general air distribution that are rated at more than 1100W should be fitted with
variable speed drives.
6.50 Ventilation ductwork should be made and assembled so as to be reasonably airtight. Ductwork
should comply with the specifications in either of the following.
a. BESA’s DW/144.
b. BS EN 1507, BS EN 12237 and BS EN 13403.
6.51 Air handling units should be made and assembled so as to be reasonably airtight. Air handling units
should comply with Class L2 air leakage given in BS EN 1886.
6.52 The specific fan power of air distribution systems at the design air flow rate should be no greater
than in Table 6.9, as adjusted by the appropriate factors within this table.
Specific fan power should be calculated in accordance with BS EN 16798-3 at the full design load. For
fan coil units, use BS 8850.
Heat recovery
6.58 Ventilation systems that provide supply and extract ventilation should be fitted with a heat
recovery system where technically feasible.
Lighting
6.59 Any fixed lighting should achieve levels of illumination appropriate to the activity in the space.
Spaces should not be over-illuminated. Lighting should be designed based on CIBSE’s SLL Lighting
Handbook or an equivalent design guide.
NOTE: For smaller spaces where total lighting power is likely to be low (toilets, store rooms etc.)
there is no expectation that lighting calculations should be produced.
Lighting controls
6.62 Lighting controls in new and existing buildings should follow the guidance in the Building Research
Establishment’s Digest 498.
6.63 Unoccupied spaces should have automatic controls to turn the general lighting off when the space
is not in use (e.g. through presence detection). Occupied spaces should have automatic controls
where suitable for the use of the space.
6.64 General lighting in occupied spaces should have daylight controls (e.g. photo-switching and
dimming) for parts of the space which are likely to receive high levels of natural light.
6.65 Display lighting should be controlled on dedicated circuits that can be switched separately from
those for lighting provided for general illuminance.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 43 of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Pressure testing
43. (1) This regulation applies to the erection of a building in relation to which paragraph L1(a)(i) of Schedule 1
imposes a requirement.
(2) Where this regulation applies, the person carrying out the work shall, for the purpose of ensuring compliance
with regulation 26 and regulation 26A and paragraph L1(a)(i) of Schedule 1—
(a) ensure that—
(i) pressure testing is carried out in such circumstances as are approved by the Secretary of State; and
(ii) the testing is carried out in accordance with a procedure approved by the Secretary of State; and
(b) subject to paragraph (5), give notice of the results of the testing to the local authority.
(3) The notice referred to in paragraph (2)(b) shall—
(a) record the results and the data upon which they are based in a manner approved by the Secretary of
State; and
(b) be given to the local authority not later than seven days after the final test is carried out.
(4) A local authority are authorised to accept, as evidence that the requirements of paragraph (2)(a)(ii) have been
satisfied, a certificate to that effect by a person who is registered by Elmhurst Energy Systems Limited or
the Air Tightness Testing and Measurement Association in respect of pressure testing for the air tightness of
buildings.
(5) Where such a certificate contains the information required by paragraph (3)(a), paragraph (2)(b) does not
apply.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of regulation 43 are met, when a building is erected,
by carrying out pressure testing in accordance with paragraphs 7.2 to 7.5 and 7.9.
In the Secretary of State’s view, results from a pressure test must be used to show that work complies
with both of the following.
a. Regulation 26 and 26A of the Building Regulations, in accordance with paragraphs 7.6 to 7.8.
b. The requirements of Part L1(a)(i) of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations, in accordance with
paragraphs 7.1 and 7.6.
7.1 The minimum standard for air permeability of a new building is given in Table 4.1 of Section 4.
7.2 The building control body should be provided with evidence that test equipment has been
calibrated using a UKAS-accredited facility or by the original manufacturer within either of the
following periods.
a. The previous 12 months.
b. A period in accordance with manufacturer’s guidance.
Calibration should be carried out in accordance with CIBSE’s TM23. It is recommended that test
equipment is recalibrated at least every 24 months.
7.3 Building control bodies may accept a pressure test certificate as evidence that the building
complies with regulation 43 of the Building Regulations.
The building control body should be provided with evidence that the person who pressure-tested
the building meets both of the following.
a. Has received appropriate training.
b. Is registered to test the specific class of building.
7.4 Buildings that are not dwellings, including extensions that are being treated as new buildings to
comply with Part L, must be pressure tested except those types listed in paragraph 7.5.
7.5 The following buildings do not need to undergo pressure testing.
a. Buildings with less than 500m2 total useful floor area. In this case the developer may avoid a
pressure test, provided that the air permeability used to calculate the building primary energy
rate and building emission rate is taken as 15m3/(h·m2) at 50Pa.
b. A factory-made modular building that meets the following criteria:
i. the floor area is less than 500m2
ii. the building has a planned service life of more than two years, where the intended time of
use in a single location is less than two years
iii. no site assembly work is needed other than linking standard modules using standard link
details.
If the building as installed conforms to a standard configuration of modules and link details
for which the installer has pressure test data, this test data may be used to estimate the air
permeability. Test data must be from a minimum of five in-situ measurements of the same
module types and link details as used in the actual building. Air permeability should be in m3/
(h·m2) at 50Pa. When calculating the building primary energy rate and building emission rate for
a factory-made modular building as described above, the value that should be used for design air
permeability is the average air permeability test result at 50Pa plus 1.0m3/(h·m2).
This section deals with the requirements of regulations 44 and 44ZA and Part L1(b)(iii) and L2(b) of
Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Commissioning
44. (1) This regulation applies to building work in relation to which paragraph F1(2) of Schedule 1 imposes
a requirement, but does not apply to the provision or extension of any fixed system for mechanical
ventilation or any associated controls where testing and adjustment is not possible.
(2) This regulation applies to building work in relation to which paragraph L1(b) of Schedule 1 imposes
a requirement, but does not apply to the provision or extension of any fixed building service where
testing and adjustment is not possible or would not affect the energy efficiency of that fixed building
service.
(3) Where this regulation applies the person carrying out the work shall, for the purpose of ensuring
compliance with paragraph F1(2) or L1(b) of Schedule 1, give to the local authority a notice confirming
that the fixed building services have been commissioned in accordance with a procedure approved by
the Secretary of State.
(4) The notice shall be given to the local authority—
(a) not later than the date on which the notice required by regulation 16(4) is required to be given; or
(b) where that regulation does not apply, not more than 30 days after completion of the work.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirements L1(b)(iii) and L2(b) and the requirements of regulations
44 and 44ZA are met by commissioning fixed building services and on-site electricity generation in
accordance with Section 8.
8.1 Fixed building services must be commissioned to ensure that they use no more fuel and power than
is reasonable in the circumstances. On-site electricity generation systems must be commissioned
to ensure that they produce as much electricity as is reasonable in the circumstances. The
commissioning process should involve testing and adjusting the fixed building services and on-site
electricity generation as necessary and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8.2 Fixed building services should be commissioned with the aim of optimising their in-use
performance, with reference to Section 5 and Section 6 of this approved document, which provide
further guidance on minimum efficiencies, controls and other relevant standards.
8.3 For large or complex projects, a commissioning manager should be appointed. In all other cases,
the appointment of a commissioning manager should be considered on a case-by-case basis. The
competence of the commissioning manager should meet the list of knowledge and skills set out in
CIBSE’s Commissioning Code M.
8.4 When installing a fixed building service, or on-site electricity generation that is subject to the
energy efficiency requirements, a commissioning plan should be prepared that identifies all of the
following.
a. The systems to test.
b. The tests to complete.
c. Schedule of commissioning.
d. Roles and responsibilities.
e. Documentation requirements.
The building control body should be given all of the following.
a. The commissioning plan.
b. The design-stage target primary energy rate and building primary energy rate calculation.
c. The design-stage target emission rate and building emission rate calculation.
The building control body can then check that commissioning is being done as the work proceeds.
8.5 If the only controls for a fixed building service or on-site electricity generation are ‘on’ and ‘off’
switches, this particular service does not need to be commissioned.
8.6 Any commissioning should be carried out in accordance with all of the following procedures.
a. CIBSE’s Commissioning Code M.
b. Any of the following.
i. The specific CIBSE Commissioning Codes relevant to each service being commissioned.
ii. The specific BSRIA Commissioning Guides relevant to each service being commissioned.
iii. A combination of (i) and (ii).
c. The procedures for air leakage testing of ductwork given in paragraphs 8.10 to 8.13.
Ductwork pressure class Design static pressure (Pa) Maximum air Air leakage limit (l/(s·m2)
velocity (m/s) of duct surface area)(1)
Maximum positive Maximum negative
Low pressure (class A) 500 500 10 0.027 ∆p0.65
Medium pressure (class B) 1000 750 20 0.009 ∆p0.65
High pressure (class C) 2000 750 40 0.003 ∆p0.65
High pressure (class D) 2000 750 40 0.001 ∆p0.65
NOTE:
1. ∆p is the differential pressure in pascals.
This section deals with the requirements of regulations 40 and 40A of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulations
Information about use of fuel and power
40. (1) This regulation applies where paragraph L1 of Schedule 1 imposes a requirement in relation to building
work.
(2) The person carrying out the work shall not later than five days after the work has been completed provide
to the owner sufficient information about the building, the fixed building services and their maintenance
requirements so that the building can be operated in such a manner as to use no more fuel and power
than is reasonable in the circumstances.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, when a new building is erected, the requirements of regulations 40
and 40A are met by providing the owner with information about all of the following.
a. Operating and maintenance instructions for fixed building services and on-site electricity
generation, in accordance with paragraphs 9.1 to 9.3.
b. Other important documentation, as given in paragraphs 9.4 to 9.6.
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of regulations 40 and 40A are met when work is
carried out on an existing building by providing the owner with both of the following.
a. Operating and maintenance instructions for the work on fixed building services and on-site
electricity generation that has been carried out in accordance with paragraphs 9.1 and 9.3.
b. Relevant information for work on existing systems, as detailed in paragraphs 9.7 to 9.12.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 23(2) and Part L1(a) of Schedule 1 to the
Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Requirements for the renovation or replacement of thermal elements
23. (2) Where the whole or any part of an individual thermal element is proposed to be replaced and the
replacement—
(a) constitutes a major renovation; or
(b) (in the case of part replacement) amounts to the replacement of more than 50% of the thermal
element’s surface area;
the whole of the thermal element must be replaced so as to ensure that it complies with paragraph L1(a)(i)
of Schedule 1, in so far as that is technically, functionally and economically feasible.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Schedule 1 – Part L Conservation of fuel and power
L1. Reasonable provision shall be made for the
conservation of fuel and power in buildings by:
(a) limiting heat gains and losses—
(i) through thermal elements and other parts
of the building fabric; and
(ii) from pipes, ducts and vessels used for
space heating, space cooling and hot water
services;
(b) providing fixed building services which—
(i) are energy efficient to a reasonable standard;
(ii) have effective controls; and
(iii) are commissioned by testing and adjusting
as necessary to ensure they use no more
fuel and power than is reasonable in the
circumstances.
General
10.1 This section provides guidance for new elements in existing buildings, including all the following
types of work.
a. Providing a new thermal element in an existing building – follow paragraph 10.2.
b. Providing a replacement thermal element in an existing building – follow paragraph 10.2.
c. Replacing windows, doors or rooflights (controlled fittings) in an existing building – follow
paragraphs 10.3 to 10.5.
d. Extending an existing building – follow paragraphs 10.6 to 10.11.
e. Adding a conservatory or porch to an existing building – follow paragraphs 10.12 and 10.13.
NOTE: Guidance for renovating or retaining elements in existing buildings is given in Section 11.
NOTE: Vehicle access doors, display windows and similar glazing and smoke vents can be as large
an area of wall or roof as required for the purpose.
10.10 As an alternative approach to paragraph 10.9, the area-weighted U-value of all thermal elements in
the extension should be shown to not exceed the area-weighted U-value of an extension of the
same size and shape that complies with paragraph 10.9. This includes the opening area standards in
Table 10.1.
The area-weighted U-value is given by the following expression.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 23(1) and Part L1(a) of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Requirements for the renovation or replacement of thermal elements
23. (1) Where the renovation of an individual thermal element—
(a) constitutes a major renovation; or
(b) amounts to the renovation of more than 50% of the element’s surface area;
the renovation must be carried out so as to ensure that the whole of the element complies with paragraph
L1(a)(i) of Schedule 1, in so far as that is technically, functionally and economically feasible.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Schedule 1 – Part L Conservation of fuel and power
L1. Reasonable provision shall be made for the
conservation of fuel and power in buildings by:
(a) limiting heat gains and losses—
(i) through thermal elements and other parts
of the building fabric; and
(ii) from pipes, ducts and vessels used for
space heating, space cooling and hot water
services;
(b) providing fixed building services which—
(i) are energy efficient to a reasonable standard;
(ii) have effective controls; and
(iii) are commissioned by testing and adjusting
as necessary to ensure they use no more
fuel and power than is reasonable in the
circumstances.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of regulation 23(1) and requirement L1(a) are met for
work to elements in existing buildings by renovating a thermal element to the standards in Section 11.
This section deals with the requirements of regulations 6 and 22 of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Requirements relating to material change of use
6. (1) Where there is a material change of use of the whole of a building, such work, if any, shall be carried out
as is necessary to ensure that the building complies with the applicable requirements of the following
paragraphs of Schedule 1—
(a) in all cases, B1 (means of warning and escape)
B2 (internal fire spread—linings)
B3 (internal fire spread—structure)
B4(2) (external fire spread—roofs)
B5 (access and facilities for the fire service
C2(c) (interstitial and surface condensation)
F1 (ventilation)
G1 (cold water supply)
G3(1) to (3) (hot water supply and systems)
G4 (sanitary conveniences and washing facilities)
G5 (bathrooms)
G6 (kitchens and food preparation areas)
H1 (foul water drainage)
H6 (solid waste storage)
J1 to J4 (combustion appliances)
L1 (conservation of fuel and power)
P1 (electrical safety);
(b) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(c), (d), (e) or (f), A1 to A3 (structure);
(c) in the case of a building exceeding fifteen metres in height, B4(1) (external fire spread—walls);
(d) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a), (b), (c), (d), (g), (h), (i) or, where the
material change provides new residential accommodation, (f), C1(2) (resistance to contaminants);
(e) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a), C2 (resistance to moisture);
(f) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a), (b), (c), (g), (h) or (i), E1 to E3
(resistance to the passage of sound);
(g) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(e), where the public building consists of
or contains a school, E4 (acoustic conditions in schools);
(h) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a) or (b), G2 (water efficiency) and G3(4)
(hot water supply and systems: hot water supply to fixed baths);
(i) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(c), (d), (e) or (j), M1 (access to and use of
buildings other than dwellings);
(j) in the case of a material change of use described in regulation 5(a), (b) or (g), Q1 (security).
Intention
Regulations 6 and 22 of the Building Regulations set requirements for buildings to comply
with Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations when a material change of use or a change to energy
status occurs.
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of regulations 6 and 22 are met by following the
guidance in Section 11.
General
11.1 This section provides guidance for work to fabric elements in existing buildings, including all of the
following types of work.
a. Renovating an existing thermal element in an existing building – follow paragraphs 11.2 to 11.4.
b. Making a material change of use to a building – follow paragraphs 11.5 to 11.8.
c. Making a change to a building that constitutes a change to energy status – follow paragraphs 11.6
to 11.8.
NOTE: For new and replacement elements in existing buildings, the guidance in Section 10 should
be followed.
For example, if plaster is being removed from the inner side of a wall, the area of the thermal element is the area of external wall
as viewed from inside the room.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 28 of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Consequential improvements to energy performance
28. (1) Paragraph (2) applies to an existing building with a total useful floor area over 1,000m2 where the proposed
building work consists of or includes—
(a) an extension;
(b) the initial provision of any fixed building services; or
(c) an increase to the installed capacity of any fixed building services.
(2) Subject to paragraph (3), where this paragraph applies, such work, if any, shall be carried out as is necessary
to ensure that the building complies with the requirements of Part L of Schedule 1.
(3) Nothing in paragraph (2) requires work to be carried out if it is not technically, functionally or economically
feasible.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 20 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, where regulation 28 applies, the requirements of this regulation are
met for existing buildings with a total useful floor area over 1000m2 by carrying out consequential
improvements that are technically, functionally and economically feasible, by following the guidance
in Section 12.
12.1 For an existing building with a total useful floor area of over 1000m2, additional work may be
required to improve the overall energy efficiency of the building if proposed work consists of or
includes any of the following.
a. An extension.
b. Providing any fixed building service in the building for the first time.
c. Increasing the capacity of any fixed building service (which does not include doing so on
account of renewable technology).
Consequential improvements should be carried out to ensure that the entire building complies
with Part L of the Building Regulations to the extent that they are technically, functionally and
economically feasible.
NOTE: If the building already complies with the current requirements of Part L of the Building
Regulations, consequential improvements are not required.
12.2 Where work other than the items listed in paragraph 12.1 is planned as part of the principal works, if
they improve the energy performance of the building, these are consequential improvements. Work
carried out to compensate for the poorer standard of an extension using the alternative approach
to demonstrating compliance described in paragraph 10.11 does not count as a consequential
improvement.
NOTE: Except for the items marked * (which Building primary energy rate Expressed as kWhPE/
are from the Building Regulations 2010), these (m2.year) and determined using the approved
definitions apply only to Approved Document L, methodology.
Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings. Centralised electrically heated A domestic hot
Air permeability The measure of airtightness of water system in which the water is supplied to
the building fabric. It is defined as the air leakage the draw-off points from a device in which water
rate per hour per m2 of envelope area at the test is heated by an electric element or elements
reference pressure differential of 50Pa. immersed in the stored water. The water heater
• The limiting air permeability is the worst is situated centrally with a distribution system
allowable air permeability. to supply water to the draw-off points and has a
capacity greater than 300 litres.
• The design air permeability is the target value
set at the design stage. Centre pane U-value The U-value determined
in the central area of the glazing unit, making no
• The assessed air permeability is the value used allowance for edge spacers or the window frame.
in establishing the building emission rate and
the building primary energy rate. The assessed *Change to energy status Defined in regulation
air permeability is based on a measurement of 2(1) as any change which results in a building
the air permeability of the building concerned. becoming a building to which the energy efficiency
requirements of these Regulations apply, where
Airtightness The resistance of the building previously it was not.
envelope to infiltration when ventilators are
closed. The greater the airtightness at a given CHPQA quality index An indicator of the energy
pressure difference across the envelope, the lower efficiency and environmental performance of a
the infiltration. Building automation and control CHP scheme, certified by the Combined Heat and
system. Power Quality Assurance scheme.
Building automation and control system A system Circuit-watt Refers to the power consumed in
comprising all products, software and engineering lighting circuits by lamps and, where applicable,
services that can support energy efficient, their associated control gear (including
economical and safe operation of heating, transformers and drivers) and power factor
ventilation and air conditioning systems through correction equipment.
automatic controls and by facilitating the manual Coefficient of performance (COP) A measure
management of those building systems. of the efficiency of a heat pump at specified
Building control body A local authority building source and sink temperatures, measured using the
control department or an approved inspector. procedures in BS EN 14511-2.
Building emission rate The building’s CO2 emission • Heating COP = heat output / power input
rate expressed as kgCO2/(m2.year). • % COP (COP � 100) is the heat generator
*Building envelope (in relation to a building) efficiency.
Defined in regulation 35 as the walls, floor, roof,
windows, doors, roof windows and rooflights.
B1 The Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) method is an alternative approach for complying with
the standards for lighting given in Section 6 of this approved document.
B2 The LENI should not exceed the lighting energy limit specified in Table B1 for a given illuminance
and number of hours run.
Step 1: Determine the lighting energy limit from Table B1.
If display lighting is used, the lighting energy limit may be increased by the value given for normal
display lighting for the area of the room where display lighting is used.
Step 2: Calculate the parasitic energy use (Ep). If the parasitic energy use is unknown, an allowance
of 0.3W/m2 should be made for any control system. If no lighting control system is used, then Ep = 0.
Step 3: Determine the total power of lighting (Pl).
Step 4: Determine the occupancy factor (Fo). If no automatic control is used, then Fo = 1. If controls
turn off the lights within 20 minutes of the room being empty, then Fo = 0.8.
Step 5: Determine the factor for daylight (Fd). If no daylight-linked dimming system is used, then Fd
= 1. If the electric lighting dims in response to daylight being available, then in areas with adequate
daylight Fd = 0.8. This may be taken as all areas within 6m of a window wall or in areas where 10%
or more of the roof is translucent or made up of rooflights.
Step 6: Determine the constant illuminance factor (Fc). Systems that control the lighting in this
way have Fc = 0.9, and those that do not have Fc = 1.
Step 7: Calculate the daytime energy use (Ed).
The daytime energy use is:
Ep+ Ed+ En
LENI (%) =
A
Table B1 Recommended maximum LENI (kWh per square metre per year) in new and
existing buildings
BRUKL report
C1 The Building Regulations UK Part L (BRUKL) report should be provided to the building control
body and to the building owner to show that building work complies with the energy efficiency
requirements.
C2 The Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM) will produce the BRUKL report for the building as a
standard output option.
C3 Two versions of the BRUKL report should be produced, using the approved software.
a. The first, the design stage BRUKL report, before works begin, to include all of the following.
i. The target primary energy rate and building primary energy rate.
ii. The target emission rate and building emission rate.
iii. A supporting list of specifications.
b. The second, the as-built BRUKL report, to include all of the following.
i. The target primary energy rate and as-built building primary energy rate.
ii. The target emission rate and as-built building emission rate.
iii. A supporting list of specifications and any changes to the list of specifications that was
provided at design stage.
The building control body can then use these reports to help check that what was designed has been
built. The software includes a facility to compare the design stage and as-built data input files and
automatically produces a schedule of changes.
C4 The as-built BRUKL report should be signed by the energy assessor to confirm that the as-built
calculations are accurate.
C5 The as-built BRUKL report must be signed by the client (usually the developer or housebuilder) to
confirm that the building has been constructed or completed according to the specifications in the
report.
D1 For an existing building with a total useful floor area of over 1000m2, additional work may be
required to improve the overall energy efficiency of the building if proposed work consists of or
includes any of the following.
a. An extension.
b. Providing any fixed building service in the building for the first time.
c. Increasing the capacity of any fixed building service (which does not include doing so on
account of renewable technology).
D2 Additional works to improve energy efficiency as required in these circumstances are known as
consequential improvements and are described in detail in Section 12.
E1 When a heating system is being replaced in an existing building, paragraph 5.4 should be followed.
The seasonal efficiency of the appliance being replaced, if unknown, should be established by
following the hierarchy set out below. This is based upon the Non Domestic EPC Conventions for
England & Wales Issue 7.1.
1. Use Energy Technology List (ETL) product list part load values at 30% and 100% load.
2. Use current Product Characteristics Database (PCDB) values where available.
3. Use either manufacturer’s information or ‘boiler plate’ information or information from a
manufacturer’s technical helpdesk. Where a gross efficiency value is established for a non-
condensing boiler then a deduction of 0.05 (i.e. 5%) should be made to convert it to an
appropriate seasonal efficiency.
4. Use SAP 10 tables (up to 70kW output).
5. Use suitable SBEM defaults.
BS 5422 Method for specifying thermal insulating BS EN 12809 Residential independent boilers fired
materials for pipes, tanks, vessels, ductwork and by solid fuel. Nominal heat output up to 50 kW.
equipment operating within the temperature range Requirements and test methods [2001 + A1: 2004]
-40°C to +700°C [2009] BS EN 12831 Energy performance of buildings
BS 8850 Fan coil unit performance. Determination BS EN 12831-1 Method for calculation of
of specific fan power. Test method [2020] the design heat load. Space heating load,
BS EN 26 Gas-fired instantaneous water heaters for Module M3-3 [2017]
the production of domestic hot water [2015] BS EN 12831-3 Method for calculation of
BS EN 89 Gas-fired storage water heaters for the the design heat load – Domestic hot water
production of domestic hot water [2015] systems heat load and characterisation of
BS EN 308 Heat exchangers. Test procedures for needs, Module M8-2, M8-3. [2017]
establishing the performance of air to air and flue BS EN 13403 Ventilation for buildings. Non metallic
gases heat recovery devices [1997] ducts. Ductwork made from insulation ductboards
BS EN 410 Glass in building. Determination of [2003]
luminous and solar characteristics of glazing [2011] BS EN 13842 Oil fired forced convection air heaters.
BS EN 525 Non-domestic direct gas-fired forced Stationary and transportable for space heating
convection air heaters for space heating not [2004]
exceeding a net heat input of 300 kW [2009] BS EN 14351-1 Windows and doors. Product standard,
BS EN 621 Non-domestic gas-fired forced performance characteristics. Windows and external
convection air heaters for space heating not pedestrian doorsets without resistance to fire and/
exceeding a net heat input of 300 kW, without a fan or smoke leakage characteristics [2006 + AMD 1:
to assist transportation of combustion air and/or 2010]
combustion products [2009] BS EN 14511-2 Air conditioners, liquid chilling
BS EN 1020 Non-domestic forced convection gas- packages and heat pumps for space heating and
fired air heaters for space heating not exceeding cooling and process chillers, with electrically
a net heat input of 300 kW incorporating a fan driven compressors. Test conditions [2018]
to assist transportation of combustion air or BS EN 14825 Air conditioners, liquid chilling
combustion products [2009] packages and heat pumps, with electrically driven
BS EN 1507 Ventilation for buildings. Sheet metal air compressors, for space heating and cooling. Testing
ducts with rectangular section. Requirements for and rating at part load conditions and calculation of
strength and leakage [2006] seasonal performance [2018]
BS EN 1886 Ventilation for buildings. Air handling BS EN 15232 Energy performance of buildings.
units. Mechanical performance [2007] Impact of Building Automation, Controls and
Building Management [2017]
BS EN 12237 Ventilation for buildings. Ductwork.
Strength and leakage of circular sheet metal ducts BS EN 15450 Heating systems in buildings. Design of
[2003] heat pump heating systems [2007]
Legislation Documents
Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Areas Act Building and Engineering Services Association
1979, c. 46 (BESA)
Building (Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations (www.thebesa.com)
2010, SI 2010/2215
DW/143 A Practical Guide to Ductwork Leakage
Building Regulations 2010, SI 2010/2214 Testing [2013]
Ecodesign Commission Regulation No. 206/2012 DW/144 Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork
Ecodesign Commission Regulation No. 2016/2281 [2016]
Ecodesign for Energy-Related Products Regulations Building Research Establishment (BRE)
2010, SI 2010/2617
(www.bre.co.uk)
Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas)
BR 443 Conventions for U-value Calculations [2019]
Act 1990, c. 9
BR 497 Conventions for Calculating Linear Thermal
Transmittance and Temperature Factors. Second
Edition [2016]
Digest 498 Selecting Lighting Controls [2014]
Information Paper 1/06 Assessing the Effects of
Thermal Bridging at Junctions and Around Openings
in the External Elements of Buildings [2006]
National Calculation Methodology (NCM)
Modelling Guide (for buildings other than dwellings
in England) [2013] Available at www.ncm.bre.co.uk
National Calculation Methodology activity
database. Available at www.uk-ncm.org.uk
Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM)
User manual and software. Available at
www.ncm.bre.co.uk
• BG 2/2010 Commissioning Water Systems [2010] Current Energy Prices. Available at www.gov.uk/
government/organisations/department-of-energy-
• BG 29/2021 Pre-Commission Cleaning of climate-change/about/statistics#energy-price-
Pipework Systems. Sixth Edition [2021] statistics
• BG 49/2015 Commissioning Air Systems [2015] Energy Technology List. Availale at www.gov.uk/
Chartered Institution of Building Services guidance/energy-technology-list
Engineers (CIBSE) Department for Levelling-Up, Housing and
(www.cibse.org) Communities
CIBSE Commissioning Codes as follows: (www.gov.uk/dluhc)
• Commissioning Code A Air Distribution Systems Approved software for the production of non-
[2006] domestic Energy Performance Certificates (www.
gov.uk/government/publications/department-for-
• Commissioning Code B Boilers [2002] communities-and-local-government-approved-
• Commissioning Code C Automatic Controls software-for-the-production-of-non-domestic-
[2001] energy-performance-certificates-epc)
• Commissioning Code L Lighting [2018] National Calculation Methodology Modelling
• Commissioning Code M Management [2003] Guide (for buildings other than dwellings in
England) [2021]. Available at: https://www.uk-ncm.
• Commissioning Code R Refrigeration [2002] org.uk/
• Commissioning Code W Water Distribution Glass and Glazing Federation (GGF)
Systems [2010]
(ggf.org.uk)
Guide A Environmental Design [2015]
Glazing Manual Data Sheet 2.3, Guide to the
Guide B1 Heating [2016]
Calculation of Energy Ratings for Windows, Roof
Society of Light and Lighting (SLL) Lighting Windows and Doors [2016]
Handbook [2018]
Historic England
TM23 Testing Buildings for Air Leakage [2022]
(historicengland.org.uk)
TM31 Building Log Book Toolkit [2006]
Energy Efficiency in Historic Buildings: Application
TM39 Building Energy Metering [2009] of Part L of the Building Regulations to Historic and
TM54 Evaluating Operational Energy Use at the Traditionally Constructed Buildings [2017]
Design Stage [2022]
Ministry of Housing, Communities and Local
Government (MHCLG)
Manual to the Building Regulations: A Code of
Practice for Use in England [2020]
M
Access to and use of
buildings
APPROVED DOCUMENT
Volume 1: Dwellings
M4(1) Category 1: Visitable dwellings
M4(2) Category 2: Accessible and adaptable dwellings
M4(3) Category 3: Wheelchair user dwellings
* This approved document gives guidance for compliance with the Building Regulations for building
work carried out in England. It also applies to building work carried out on excepted energy
buildings in Wales as defined in the Welsh Ministers (Transfer of Functions) (No.2) Order 2009.
The
Listapproved documents
of approved documents
The following documents have been published to give guidance on how to meet the Building
Regulations. You can find the date of the edition approved by the Secretary of State at
www.gov.uk.
What is an approved document?
The Secretary
Approved of StateAhas approved a series of documents
Document Approved thatDocument
give practical
M guidance about how
to meet the requirements of the Building Regulations
Structure 2010 for
Access England.
to and use ofApproved
buildings documents give
guidance on each of the technical parts of the regulations and on regulation
Volume 1: Dwellings 7 (see the back of
Approved Document
this document). B
Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings
Fire safety
Approved
Volume documents set out what, in ordinary circumstances,
1: Dwellinghouses Approved may be accepted
Document P as reasonable
provision for compliance with the relevant
Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellinghouses requirements of the Building Regulations
Electrical safety – Dwellings to which
they refer. If you follow the guidance in an approved document, there will be a presumption
Approved
of complianceDocument
with theC requirements covered by theApproved
guidance.Document Q
However, compliance is not
Site preparation and resistance to Security – Dwellings
guaranteed; for example, ‘normal’ guidance may not apply if the particular case is unusual in
contaminants
some way. and moisture Approved Document 7
Approved Document D
Note that there may be other ways to comply with Materials and workmanship
the requirements – there is no obligation to
Toxic substances
adopt any particular solution contained in an approved document. If you prefer to meet a relevant
requirement
Approved in some other
Document E way than described in an approved document, you should discuss this
with the relevant
Resistance building of
to the passage control
soundbody.
In additionDocument
Approved to guidance,
F some approved documents include provisions that must be followed
exactly, as
Ventilation required by regulations or where methods of test or calculation have been prescribed
by the Secretary of State.
Approved Document G
Each approved
Sanitation, document
hot water safetyrelates only to the particular requirements of the Building Regulations
and water
that the
efficiencydocument addresses. However, building work must also comply with any other applicable
requirements of the Building Regulations.
Approved Document H
How to use this approved document
Drainage and waste disposal
Approved Document J
This document uses the following conventions.
Combustion appliances and fuel storage
a. Text against a green background is an extract from the Building Regulations 2010 or the Building
systems
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (both as amended). These extracts set out the legal
Approved Document
requirements of theK regulations.
Protection from falling, collision and impact
b. Key terms, printed in green, are defined in Appendix A.
Approved Document L1A
c. When thisof
Conservation approved
fuel anddocument refers to a named standard or other document, the relevant
power in new
version is listed in Appendix B (standards) or Appendix C (other documents). However, if the
dwellings
issuing body has revised or updated the listed version of the standard or document, you may
Approved
use theDocument
new version L1Bas guidance if it continues to address the relevant requirements of the
Conservation
Building Regulations. power in existing
of fuel and
dwellings
NOTE: Standards and technical approvals may also address aspects of performance or matters
Approved
that are notDocument
covered by L2Athe Building Regulations, or they may recommend higher standards than
Conservation of fuel and power in new
required by the Building Regulations.
buildings other than dwellings
Approved Document L2B
Conservation of fuel and power in existing
buildings other than dwellings
The following is a high level summary of the Building Regulations relevant to most types of
building work. Where there is any doubt you should consult the full text of the regulations,
available at www.legislation.gov.uk.
Building work
Regulation 3 of the Building Regulations defines ‘building work’. Building work includes:
a. the erection or extension of a building
b. the provision or extension of a controlled service or fitting
c. the material alteration of a building or a controlled service or fitting.
Regulation 4 states that building work should be carried out in such a way that, when work is
complete:
a. For new buildings or work on a building that complied with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations: the building complies with the applicable requirements of the Building
Regulations.
b. For work on an existing building that did not comply with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations:
(i) the work itself must comply with the applicable requirements of the Building Regulations
(ii) the building must be no more unsatisfactory in relation to the requirements than before the
work was carried out.
Section 3B: Private entrances and spaces within, and connected to, the dwelling 30
Application 30
Private entrances 30
Circulation areas, internal doorways and storage 32
Habitable rooms 36
Sanitary facilities 40
Services and controls 49
Private outdoor space 50
Summary
0.1 This approved document gives guidance about how to comply with requirements M4(1), M4(2) and
M4(3) of the Building Regulations. It contains the following sections:
Section 1: Category 1 – Visitable dwellings
Section 2: Category 2 – Accessible and adaptable dwellings
Section 3: Category 3 – Wheelchair user dwellings
Application
0.2 The recommendations of this volume of this approved document apply to newly erected dwellings,
and dwellings undergoing material alteration, only. They do not apply to the extension of a dwelling.
Optional requirements
0.3 Requirements M4(2) and M4(3) are ‘optional requirements’ as defined in the Building Regulations. An
optional requirement only applies where a condition that one or more dwellings should meet the
relevant optional requirement is imposed on new development as part of the process of granting
planning permission. Where no condition is imposed, dwellings only need to meet requirements
M4(1). Compliance should be assessed against only one of requirements M4(1), M4(2) or M4(3) for
any given dwelling.
0.4 Where any part of an approach route, including vertical circulation in the common parts of a block
of flats, is shared between dwellings of different categories, Section A of the optional requirement
for the highest numbered category of dwelling served will apply to that part of the approach route.
0.5 Where a local planning authority sets a planning condition for Category 3 (wheelchair user)
housing it can specify which dwellings should be wheelchair accessible by including in the planning
permission a condition stating that optional requirement M4(3)(2)(b) applies. Where no such
condition is applied, optional requirement M4(3)(2)(a) will apply by default requiring that dwellings
should be wheelchair adaptable.
0.6 The person carrying out building work must inform the building control body where any optional
requirements apply.
Material alterations
0.11 Where a dwelling is subject to a material alteration, the building should be no less compliant with
requirement M4(1) than it was prior to the building work taking place.
Historic buildings
0.12 Historic buildings include listed buildings, buildings in conservation areas, buildings of architectural
merit referred to as a material consideration in a Local Plan, buildings of architectural and historic
merit within national parks, areas of outstanding natural beauty, world heritage sites and vernacular
buildings of traditional form and construction.
0.13 Requirements for accessibility should be balanced against preserving historic buildings or
environments. In achieving an appropriate balance it would be appropriate to take into account the
advice of the local authority’s conservation and access officers, English Heritage and the views of
local access groups.
This section of the approved document deals with the following requirement from Part M of
Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Category 1 – visitable dwelling
Access and use
M4(1). Reasonable provision should be made for Requirement M4(1) does not apply to:
people to—
(a) an extension to a dwelling; or
(a) gain access to; and
(b) any part of a building that is used solely to
(b) use, the dwelling and its facilities enable the building or any service or fitting in the
building to be inspected, repaired or maintained.
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement M4(1) will be met when a new dwelling makes
reasonable provision for most people, including wheelchair users, to approach and enter the
dwelling and to access habitable rooms and sanitary facilities on the entrance storey. Reasonable
provision is made if the dwelling complies with all of the following.
a. Within the curtilage of the dwelling or the building containing the dwelling, it is possible to
approach and gain access to the dwelling.
b. It is possible to gain access to the dwelling, or the building containing the dwelling, from the
most likely point of alighting from a car.
c. A disabled person who is able to walk is able to visit any dwelling in a building containing one
or more dwellings.
d. Visitors can access and use the habitable rooms and a WC within the entrance storey of the
dwelling (or the principal storey where the entrance storey does not contain a habitable room).
e. Where the habitable rooms and the WC are located on the entrance storey, access between
them is step free.
f. Wall-mounted switches and socket outlets in habitable rooms are reasonably accessible to
people who have reduced reach.
Approach routes
General
1.3 The approach route should be safe and convenient for everyone, including older and disabled
people and some wheelchair users. It should adopt the shallowest gradient that can reasonably be
achieved and be step-free where possible.
1.4 The approach route should be level, gently sloping, or, where necessary, ramped. On steeply
sloping plots, a stepped approach can be used.
1.5 Normally these provisions will apply to the principal private entrance but where this is not possible,
access to a suitable alternative entrance would be reasonable.
1.6 To enable most people to approach the dwelling, approach routes should comply with all of the
following.
a. The approach route is level, gently sloping, ramped or, where unavoidable, stepped.
b. All external parts of the approach route have a suitable ground surface.
c. The approach route is a minimum of 900mm wide with a maximum cross fall of 1 in 40.
d. Where a driveway forms all, or part of, the approach route, an additional allowance of at least
900mm wide should be provided so that a wheelchair user can pass a parked car.
External ramps forming part of an approach route
1.7 A ramped approach should comply with all of the following.
a. Individual flights are:
• for gradients up to 1:15 – not more than 10m long
• for gradients up to 1:12 – not more than 5m long
b. Every flight has a minimum clear width of 900mm.
Communal entrances
1.9 The principal communal entrance door of the building containing the dwelling should comply with
all of the following.
a. The door has a minimum clear opening width of 775mm, when measured in accordance with
Diagram 1.1.
Key:
a inside face of door (when open)
c d
b inside edge of door frame or stop
c leading edge
d following edge
Notes:
1. Handles, other door furniture
and weatherboards may be
ignored when measuring clear
opening width.
a
Diagram 1.1 Measurement of clear opening width of external and internal doors
Private entrances
1.14 The principal private entrance to the dwelling (or the alternative entrance where the approach
route is not to the principal private entrance) should comply with all of the following.
a. The door has a minimum clear opening width of 775mm, when measured in accordance with
Diagram 1.1.
b. Any threshold is an accessible threshold.
c. Where a step into the dwelling is unavoidable, the rise is a maximum 150mm and is aligned with
the outside face of the door threshold.
775mm 800mm
750mm
900mm
900mm
750mm
1050mm
2m max.
2m max.
Key:
750mm
Diagram 1.2 Minimum door width, hall widths and localised obstructions
NOTE: A standard 826mm door leaf up to 44mm thick will be deemed to satisfy a requirement for
a clear opening width of 775mm.
Private stairs and changes of level within the entrance storey
1.16 To provide easy access between rooms on the entrance storey, a stepped change of level within
the entrance storey should be avoided where possible. If internal steps or stairs on the entrance
level are unavoidable, they should comply with the provisions of Part K.
Sanitary facilities
WC facilities
1.17 To enable easy access to a WC, a dwelling should comply with all of the following.
a. A room (which may be a WC/cloakroom or a bathroom) containing a WC is provided on
the entrance storey or, where there are no habitable rooms on the entrance storey, on the
principal storey or the entrance storey.
b. There is clear space to access the WC in accordance with Diagram 1.3.
c. Any basin is positioned to avoid impeding access.
d. The door to the room opens outwards and has a clear opening width in accordance with
Table 1.1.
Notes:
Opening to front of WC
2. * denotes minimum
but 500mm preferred.
3. Basins should not project
into access zones in such a
250mm
Example 1.3A – Clear access for oblique transfer Example 1.3A – Clear access for frontal transfer
750mm
1600mm
1500mm
250mm
1050mm
TV sockets
door bells,
switches
sockets
1200mm
450mm
This section of the approved document deals with the following optional requirement from Part M
of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Optional requirement Limits on application
Part M access to and use of buildings
Category 2 – accessible and adaptable dwellings
M4(2) optional requirement Optional requirement M4(2)—
(1) Reasonable provision must be made for people to— (a) may apply only in relation to a dwelling that is
erected;
(a) gain access to; and
(b) will apply in substitution for requirement M4(1);
(b) use, the dwelling and its facilities.
(c) does not apply where optional requirement
(2) The provision made must be sufficient to—
M4(3) applies;
(a) meet the needs of occupants with differing needs,
(d) does not apply to any part of a building that is
including some older or disabled people; and
used solely to enable the building or any service
(b) to allow adaptation of the dwelling to meet the or fitting in the building to be inspected, repaired
changing needs of occupants over time. or maintained.
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, optional requirement M4(2) will be met where a new dwelling
makes reasonable provision for most people to access the dwelling and incorporates features
that make it potentially suitable for a wide range of occupants, including older people, those
with reduced mobility and some wheelchair users. Reasonable provision is made if the dwelling
complies with all of the following.
a. Within the curtilage of the dwelling, or of the building containing the dwelling, it is possible
to approach and gain step-free access to the dwelling and to any associated parking space and
communal facilities intended for the occupants to use.
b. There is step-free access to the WC and other accommodation within the entrance storey, and
to any associated private outdoor space directly connected to the entrance storey.
c. A wide range of people, including older and disabled people and some wheelchair users, are
able to use the accommodation and its sanitary facilities.
d. Features are provided to enable common adaptations to be carried out in future to increase
the accessibility and functionality of the dwelling.
e. Wall-mounted switches, socket outlets and other controls are reasonably accessible to people
who have reduced reach.
Approach routes
General
2.6 The approach route should be safe and convenient, adopt the shallowest gradient that can reasonably
be achieved and be step-free, irrespective of the storey on which the dwelling is located.
2.7 Where it is not reasonable to achieve a step-free approach route to the principal private entrance,
a step-free approach route should be provided to a suitable alternative private entrance instead.
The provisions for approach routes (other than those relating specifically to step-free access)
should still apply to both the route to the principal private entrance and the route to the
alternative private entrance.
2.8 Where a communal ramped approach route is provided and has an overall rise of 300mm or more,
an additional stepped route meeting the requirements of paragraph 2.11 should also be provided.
333
1:15
1:14 286
231
1:13
83 166
1:12
does not comply
steeper
1:11
satisfactory
1:10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Maximum length of ramp flight (m)
Communal entrances
Principal communal entrance
2.14 The principal communal entrance should comply with all of the following.
a. There is a level landing a minimum of 1500mm wide and 1500mm long directly outside the
entrance and clear of the swing of any door.
b. The landing is covered to a minimum width of 1200mm and depth of 900mm.
c. Lighting is provided which uses fully diffused luminaires activated automatically by a dusk to
dawn timer or by detecting motion.
d. The entrance door (or gate) has a minimum clear opening width of 850mm, when measured in
accordance with Diagram 2.2.
e. Where there are double doors (or gates), the main (or leading) leaf provides the required
minimum clear opening width.
f. A minimum 300mm nib is provided to the leading edge of the door (or gate) and the extra
width created by this nib is maintained for a minimum distance of 1200mm beyond it.
g. The reveal on the leading side of the door (usually the inside) has a maximum depth of 200mm.
h. The threshold is an accessible threshold.
i. Where there is a lobby or porch, the doors are a minimum of 1500mm apart and there is a
minimum of 1500mm between door swings.
j. The ground surface (or entrance flooring) does not impede wheelchair movement.
k. Door entry controls, where provided, are mounted 900-1000mm above finished ground level,
and at least 300mm away from any projecting corner.
Key:
a inside face of door (when open)
c d b inside edge of door frame or stop
c leading edge
d following edge
e nib to leading edge (300mm min)
f reveal depth (200mm max to door
face when closed)
e
Notes:
1. Handles, other door furniture and
weatherboards may be ignored when
a measuring clear opening width.
f 2. Skirting boards may be ignored when
measuring door nibs (from finished wall
b face to inside edge of door frame).
Diagram 2.2 Measurement of clear opening width and other features of external and internal doors
Application
2.18 The provisions of Section 2B apply only where a planning condition requires compliance with
optional requirement M4(2) for accessible and adaptable dwellings (see paragraphs 0.3 to 0.6).
2.19 The provisions of Section 2B apply to private entrances, other external doors and key elements
within the dwelling.
Private entrances
Principal private entrance and alternative entrance
2.20 The principal private entrance, or the alternative private entrance where step-free access cannot be
achieved to the principal private entrance, should comply with all of the following.
a. There is a level external landing with a minimum width and depth of 1200mm.
b. The landing is covered for a minimum width of 900mm and a minimum depth of 600mm.
c. Lighting is provided which uses fully diffused luminaires activated automatically by a dusk to
dawn timer or by detecting motion.
d. The door has a minimum clear opening width of 850mm when measured in accordance with
Diagram 2.2.
e. Where there are double doors, the main (or leading) leaf provides the required minimum clear
opening width.
f. A minimum 300m nib is provided to the leading edge of the door and the extra width created
by this nib is maintained for a minimum distance of 1200mm beyond it.
g. The depth of the reveal on the leading side of the door (usually the inside) is a maximum of
200mm
h. The threshold is an accessible threshold.
i. Where there is a lobby or porch, the doors are a minimum of 1500mm apart and there is at
least 1500mm between door swings.
Other external doors
2.21 All other external doors – including doors to and from a private garden, balcony, terrace, garage,
carport, conservatory or storage area that is integral with, or connected to, the dwelling – should
comply with provisions d. to i. of paragraph 2.20.
775mm 800mm
900mm
900mm
750mm
300mm 800mm
1050mm
1500mm
1500mm
300mm
300mm
2m max.
1500mm
Key:
750mm
Diagram 2.3 Minimum door and hall widths and restrictions on localised obstructions
Table 2.1 Minimum widths of corridors and passageways for a range of doorway widths
Doorway clear opening width (mm) Corridor clear passageway width
750 or wider 900 (when approached head on)
750 1200 (when approach is not head-on)
775 1050 (when approach is not head-on)
800 900 (when approach is not head-on)
Habitable rooms
Living, kitchen and eating areas
2.24 To provide usable living spaces and easy, step-free access between a living area, a WC and the
principal private entrance, key accommodation should comply with all of the following.
a. Within the entrance storey there is a living area (which may be a living room, dining room or a
combined kitchen and dining room).
b. A minimum 1200mm clear space is provided in front of and between all kitchen units and
appliances.
c. Glazing to the principal window of the principal living area starts a maximum of 850mm above
floor level or at the minimum height necessary to comply with the requirements of Part K for
guarding to windows.
Bedrooms
2.25 To enable a wide range of people to access and use them, bedrooms should comply with all of
the following.
a. Every bedroom can provide a clear access route a minimum 750mm wide from the doorway
to the window.
b. At least one double bedroom (the principal bedroom) can provide a clear access zone a
minimum 750mm wide to both sides and the foot of the bed.
c. Every other double bedroom can provide a clear access zone a minimum 750mm wide to one
side and the foot of the bed.
d. All single and twin bedrooms can provide a clear access zone a minimum 750mm wide to one
side of each bed.
e. It can be demonstrated (for example by providing dimensioned bedroom layouts, similar to the
example in Diagram 2.4) that the provisions above can be achieved.
NOTE: For the purpose of demonstrating compliance with these provisions, beds should be of the
size set out in the furniture schedule in Appendix D.
600mm
a a Notes:
1. Clear access required to
window and no localised
obstructions intruding on
750mm 750mm
access zone.
2. Bedside furniture permitted
in zone ‘a’.
3. Bed size in accordance
with the furniture schedule
in Appendix D.
750mm
Sanitary facilities
General provisions
2.26 All walls, ducts and boxings to the WC/cloakroom, bathroom and shower room should be
strong enough to support grab rails, seats and other adaptations that could impose a load of up to
1.5kN/m2. Additional sanitary facilities beyond those required to comply with this guidance need
not have strengthened walls.
NOTE: The loading for strengthened walls is considered suitable for many types of adaptations but
additional localised strengthening may be required if adaptations are fitted that impose high point
loads.
WC facilities on the entrance storey
2.27 To provide step-free access to a WC that is suitable and convenient for some wheelchair users
and, where reasonable, to make provision for showering, dwellings should comply with all of the
following.
a. Every dwelling has a room within the entrance storey that provides a WC and basin (which may
be within a WC/cloakroom or a bathroom).
b. In a two or three storey dwelling with one or two bedrooms, the WC (together with its
associated clear access zone) meets the provisions of Diagram 1.3 and the basin does not
impede access to the WC.
c. In a two or three storey dwelling with three or more bedrooms, the room with the WC and
basin also provides an installed level access shower or a potential level access shower, and the
shower, WC and basin (together with their associated clear access zones) meet the provisions
of Diagram 2.5. Examples of compliant WC layouts are shown in Diagram 2.6.
d. The door opens outwards.
750mm
c
200mm Max
b 700mm
Key:
a. WC access zone
b, c, d. Alternative
permitted locations for
1100mm
bathroom) or a hand
a rinse basin (in a WC)
200mm e. Maximum
1100mm
Max encroachment 200mm
for a hand rinse
f. Maximum
encroachment 300mm
for a wash hand basin
e f
400-500mm
700mm
500mm
R750
mm
1100mm
1000mm
1000mm
Diagram 2.5 Sanitary fittings, associated clear access zones and permitted encroachment of basins
1000mm
2. Doors should
1000mm
open outwards.
350mm
1800mm
1800mm
2.28 Where the dwelling provides both an accessible bathroom with a WC and a WC/cloakroom within
the same storey, the WC/cloakroom may comply with the provisions of Diagram 1.3.
Bathrooms
2.29 To provide convenient access to a suitable bathroom, the dwelling should comply with all of the following.
a. Every dwelling has a bathroom that contains a WC, a basin and a bath, that is located on the
same floor as the double bedroom, described as the principal bedroom in paragraph 2.25b.
b. The WC, basin and bath (together with their associated clear access zones) meet the provisions
of Diagram 2.5. Examples of bathroom layouts are shown in Diagram 2.7.
c. Provision for a potential level access shower is made within the bathroom if not provided
elsewhere within the dwelling.
300mm
1900mm
2000mm
1700mm
Example 2.7A Example 2.7B
Notes:
1. Dimensions for illustration purposes only.
2. Stack and drainage positions to be shown clear of access zones where located
within WC / Cloakroom.
3. Alternative door positions shown dotted.
This section of the approved document deals with the following optional requirement from Part M
of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Optional requirement Limits on application
Category 3 – wheelchair user dwellings
M4(3) optional requirement Optional requirement M4(3)—
(1) Reasonable provision must be made for people to— (a) may apply only in relation to a dwelling that is
erected;
(a) gain access to, and
(b) will apply in substitution for requirement M4(1);
(b) use, the dwelling and its facilities.
(c) does not apply where optional requirement M4(2)
(2) The provision made must be sufficient to—
applies;
(a) allow simple adaptation of the dwelling to meet
(d) does not apply to any part of a building that is
the needs of occupants who use wheelchairs; or
used solely to enable the building or any service or
(b) meet the needs of occupants who use wheelchairs. fitting in the building to be inspected, repaired or
maintained.
Optional requirement M4(3) (2)(b) applies only
where the planning permission under which the
building work is carried out specifies that it shall
be complied with.
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, optional requirement M4(3) will be met where a new dwelling
makes reasonable provision, either at completion or at a point following completion, for a
wheelchair user to live in the dwelling and use any associated private outdoor space, parking and
communal facilities that may be provided for the use of the occupants. Reasonable provision is
made if the dwelling complies with all of the following.
a. Within the curtilage of the dwelling or of the building containing the dwelling, a wheelchair user
can approach and gain step-free access to every private entrance to the dwelling and to every
associated private outdoor space, parking space and communal facility for occupants’ use.
b. Access to the WC and other accommodation within the entrance storey is step-free and the
dwelling is designed to have the potential for step-free access to all other parts.
c. There is sufficient internal space to make accommodation within the dwelling suitable for a
wheelchair user.
d. The dwelling is wheelchair adaptable such that key parts of the accommodation, including
sanitary facilities and kitchens, could be easily altered to meet the needs of a wheelchair user
or, where required by a local planning authority, the dwelling is wheelchair accessible.
e. Wall-mounted switches, controls and socket outlets are accessible to people who have
reduced reach.
Approach routes
General provisions
3.7 The approach route should be safe and convenient for everyone, be at the shallowest gradient that
can reasonably be achieved, and be step-free, irrespective of the storey on which the dwelling is
located. Approach routes to dedicated storage for mobility scooters (where provided) should also
be step-free.
3.8 A step-free approach route should be provided to all private entrances. Where a communal ramped
approach route is provided and has an overall rise of 300mm or more, an additional stepped route
meeting the requirements of paragraph 3.11 should also be provided.
444
1:18
412
1:17
375
1:16
1:14
1:13
1:12
does not comply
1:11
steeper
satisfactory
1:10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Maximum length of ramp flight (m)
Communal entrances
Principal communal entrance
3.14 To enable a wheelchair user to enter the principal communal entrance, it should comply with all of
the following.
a. There is a level landing with a minimum width and depth of 1500mm outside the entrance.
b. The landing is covered to a minimum width and depth of 1200mm.
c. Lighting is provided which uses fully diffused luminaires activated automatically by a dusk to
dawn timer or by detecting motion.
d. A clear turning circle 1500mm in diameter is provided inside the entrance area, behind the
entrance door when closed.
e. The entrance door (or gate) has a minimum clear opening width of 850mm when measured in
accordance with Diagram 3.2.
f. Where double doors (or gates) are provided, the main leaf provides the required minimum clear
opening width.
g. A minimum 300mm nib is provided to the leading edge of the door (or gate) and the extra
width created by this nib is maintained for a minimum of 1800mm beyond it.
c d Key:
a inside face of door (when open)
b inside edge of door frame or stop
c leading edge
d following edge
e nib to leading edge (300mm min)
f nib to following edge (200mm min)
a g reveal depth (200mm max to door
e face when closed)
Notes:
1. Handles, other door furniture and
g weatherboards may be ignored when
measuring clear opening width.
b 2. Skirting boards may be ignored when
measuring door nibs (from finished wall
face to inside edge of door frame).
f
distance a-b = clear opening width
*all dimensions are minimum except where noted
Diagram 3.2 Measurement of clear opening width and other features of external and internal doors
Application
3.18 The provisions of Section 3B apply only where a planning condition requires compliance with
optional requirement M4(3) for a wheelchair user dwelling (see paragraphs 0.3 to 0.6).
3.19 The provisions of Section 3B apply to private entrances, other external doors and key elements
within the dwelling. They also cover any associated private outdoor space, garden, balcony or
private roof terrace.
3.20 In order to demonstrate that the dwelling is capable of meeting the functional and spatial
provisions for a wheelchair adaptable or wheelchair accessible dwelling, furnished plan layouts
that show the access zones and other provisions of Section 3B and the furniture of the furniture
schedule included as Appendix D of this approved document should be provided to a scale of at
least 1:100.
3.21 All the provisions of Section 3B apply to wheelchair adaptable and wheelchair accessible dwellings,
except where noted otherwise.
Private entrances
Principal private entrance
3.22 The principal private entrance to the individual dwelling should comply with all of the following
(see Diagram 3.3).
a. There is a level external landing with a minimum width and depth of 1500mm and clear of any
door swing.
b. The landing area is covered for a minimum width and depth of 1200mm.
c. Lighting is provided which uses fully diffused luminaires activated automatically by a dusk to
dawn timer or by detecting motion.
d. There is a minimum 1500mm clear turning circle inside the entrance area, in front of the door
when closed.
e. A minimum 300mm nib is provided to the leading edge of the door and the extra width
created by this nib is maintained for a minimum of 1800mm beyond it. A minimum 150mm nib
is provided to the hinge side of the door (to allow for the fitting of a cage to the inside face of
the letter box).
f. The door has a minimum clear opening width of 850mm, when measured in accordance with
Diagram 3.2.
g. Where there are double doors, the main (or leading) leaf provides the required minimum clear
opening width. A minimum 200mm nib is provided to the following edge of the door and the
extra width created by the nib is maintained for a minimum of 1500mm beyond it.
1500mm
clear width
1800mm
l m
j k
300mm
e
200mm 850mm
g
i clear opening width
Key:
a garden gate (850mm clear opening width)
b 300mm nib
c private approach route (1200mm clear
h width)
1500mm
1200mm
a
300mm 850mm
b clear opening width
1050mm
1050mm
850mm
300mm a 800mm
300mm
200mm
Obstruction
2m max. 1200mm
Key:
1500mm
850mm
Diagram 3.4 Minimum door and hall widths and restrictions on localised obstructions
800mm
300mm
800mm
m
Circulation area m
00
15
Circulation area
Circulation area
1100mm 1200mm
1700mm
Power socket
*all dimensions are minimum except where noted
NOTE: For the purposes of Table 3.1, include areas with reduced headroom as follows:
• headroom between 900mm and 1500mm: at 50% of its area
• lower than 900mm: do not count.
The full area under a stair that forms part of the storage provision should be counted as 1m2.
Through-floor lifting device provision
3.27 To ensure that provision can be made for a wheelchair user to access to all parts of a dwelling on
more than one floor level, the dwelling should comply with either the requirements of paragraph
3.28 for a wheelchair adaptable dwelling or 3.29 for a wheelchair accessible dwelling.
3.28 Where the dwelling is defined as wheelchair adaptable, it should be easy to install a lift. The space
for the liftway can, however, be used for another purpose (such as storage or part of a habitable
room) providing it is demonstrated that the dwelling complies with all of the following.
a. Any floors, walls and doors that have been installed to allow the potential liftway to be used
as storage or for other purposes could be easily removed without structural alteration.
Notes:
1. All doors to be power operated.
1650mm
1100mm
Habitable rooms
Living areas
3.31 To provide usable living spaces that have a convenient, step-free relationship between the living
space, WC and principal private entrance, living areas should comply with all of the following.
a. The principal living area is within the entrance storey.
b. The minimum combined internal floor area of living, dining and kitchen space meets the
provisions of Table 3.2.
c. Glazing to the principal window of this living area starts a maximum of 850mm above floor
level or at the minimum height reasonable in achieving compliance with the provisions of
Part K for guarding to windows.
Table 3.2 Minimum combined floor area for living, dining, and kitchen space
Number of bedspaces 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Minimum floor area m 2
25 27 29 31 33 35 37
h c h g Notes:
1. Shaded units represent additional requirements for a
wheelchair accessible layout over an equivalent wheelchair
adaptable layout.
600mm 800mm 400mm 2. Unit length should be measured through mid-line of the
worktop, not the front or rear edge.
1800mm total
b
2200mm
h d e f
Allow for shallow, insulated sink bowl with swivel, mixer tap and flexible plumbing and provide a min. 400mm length of
worktop to at least one side of the oven and fridge/freezer.
*all dimensions are minimum except where noted
Bedrooms
3.35 One bedroom should be close to an accessible bathroom suitable for a wheelchair user.
All other bedrooms should be accessible to a wheelchair user. Bedrooms should comply with all
of the following.
a. Every bedroom can provide a minimum clear access route, 750mm wide, from the doorway to
the window.
b. Every bedroom can provide a minimum 1200mm by 1200mm manoeuvring space inside the
doorway, clear of the bed and the door (when the door is in the closed position).
c. The ceiling structure to every bedroom is strong enough to allow for the fitting of an overhead
hoist capable of carrying a load of 200kg.
Notes:
1. Furniture may encroach into the
1000mm access zones by up to 600mm, at
1000mm the bedhead end only.
2. A chair may encroach into any
part of the access zone.
3. Clear access required to window;
1200 x 1200mm
and radiator clear of all access
1200 x 1200mm zones
4. Bedroom layout and shape is
illustrative only
1000mm
1200 x 1200mm
Diagram 3.9 Clear access zones and manoeuvering spaces to principal bedroom
750mm
c
200mm Max
Key:
200mm
a. WC access zone
b b, c, d. Alternative
permitted locations for
a wash hand basin (in a 700mm
1100mm
bathroom) or a hand
750mm
1100mm
f. Maximum
encroachment 300mm
for a wash hand basin
e f
450-500mm
1500mm diameter clear turning circle
- may overlap fully with shower
700mm
500mm
R750
mm
1100mm
Diagram 3.10 Sanitary fittings associated clear access zones and permitted encroachment of basins –
wheelchair adaptable
350mm
1200mm
750mm
c
200mm Max
Key: 800mm
a. WC access zone
b b, c. Alternative
permitted locations for
a wash hand basin (in a
750mm
bathroom) or a hand
2200mm
1650mm
200mm Hatched area shows
800mm Max 1000mm long x 1000mm
800mm between high x 100mm wide zone
c/l of WC and kept for fitting of grab
edge of shower rails.
in bathrooms
450-500mm
800mm 1500mm diameter clear
turning circle – may overlap
max 500mm with shower
R750
500mm
50 a.
0m
m
m
ax
1700mm
Notes:
1. Sizes of fittings are minima based on the furniture schedule in Appendix D. Other sizes may affect the overall size of a
bathroom or WC/cloakroom.
2. Access zones may overlap except where noted.
3. Clear access zone minimum 400mm-600mm high required under all basins other than essential traps and drainage
connections providing these do not impede approach by a wheelchair user.
4. Any radiator or towel rail should be clear of all access zones.
Diagram 3.11 Sanitary fittings, associated clear access zones and permitted encroachment of basins –
wheelchair accessible
1000mm
2200mm
2200mm
750
Example 3.12A – Example 3.12B –
Wheelchair Wheelchair
adaptable WC accessible WC
cloakroom cloakroom
Notes:
1. Dimensions for illustration purposes only.
2. Doors must be capable of opening outwards – in wheelchair adaptable
bathrooms the door may open inwards providing that the door can be easily
rehung to open outwards (e.g. door stops are planted and easily moved).
3. Stack and drainage positions to be shown clear of access zones where located within WC / Cloakroom.
200mm max
700mm 200mm max
Diagram 2.5)
b,c Alternative permitted
locations for a wash
hand basin (within
900mm
a bathroom) or a
750mm
200mm max hand rinse basin
(within a WC)
900mm
200mm max
areas where a basin
may encroach into
the WC clear access
zone.
Diagram 3.13 Sanitary fittings, associated access zones and permitted encroachment of basis for
second WC/cloakroom where on same floor level as first WC
1200mm 1300mm
450mm 450mm Notes:
1. Dimensions for
illustration purposes only.
2. Doors should open
outwards.
3. Where future shower
1600mm
1700mm
provision is provided in
entrance level WC's, this
need not be provided
in adaptable bathrooms
on other storeys.
3. Stack and drainage
Example 3.14A positions to be clear of
Example 3.14B
access zones shown
where located within
bathroom.
Diagram 3.14 Examples of compliant second WC/cloakrooms where on the same floor level as
the first WC
2450mm
750mm min.
or shower
2200mm
2450mm
1200mm 800mm 450mm
Example 3.16B
– wheelchair
accessible 1000 x 1000 x 100mm zone kept
bathroom with clear to enable fitting of rails.
choice of bath
or shower
2450mm
2450mm
1200mm 800mm 450mm
Example 3.16C
– wheelchair
accessible 1000 x 1000 x 100mm zone kept
1200mm
suitable where
bath provided in
wheelchair
accessible
bathroom
elsewhere
750mm
clear to enable fitting of rails.
2900mm
Example 3.17B – wheelchair
700mm 1000mm 1200mm
accessible bathroom with bath
and 1200 x 1200mm shower
150mm
only.
1700mm
450mm
Diagram 3.17 Examples of wheelchair accessible bathrooms with both bath and shower
Internal or external path or corridor usually Clear distance measured between walls or
leading to the principal private entrance of a other fixed obstructions (except permitted
dwelling from a defined starting point (typically localised obstructions) or across a path. Skirtings
the pavement immediately outside of the totalling up to 50mm total thickness and shallow
curtilage or plot boundary). projecting ducts or casings above 1800mm may be
discounted when measuring clear width.
Bedspace
Communal or common (area, facilities or entrances)
A suitable sleeping area for one person. (A single
bedroom provides one bedspace and a double Shared area accessed by, or intended for the use
or twin bedroom provides two bedspaces where of, more than one dwelling.
these rooms also meet any other requirements for Dwelling*
the relevant category of dwelling).
A house or flat. Student accommodation is treated
Clear access route as hotel/motel accommodation.
Clear, unobstructed ‘pathway’ to access a window Entrance storey
or other feature. Localised obstructions are not
permitted unless specifically stated. The floor level (of the dwelling) on which the
principal private entrance is located.
Clear access zone
Flat*
Clear, unobstructed space for access or
manoeuvring. Localised obstructions are not Separate and self-contained premises constructed
permitted unless specifically stated. or adapted for residential purposes and forming
part of a building from which it is divided
horizontally.
BS EN 81-70
Safety rules for the construction and installation
of lifts. Particular applications for passenger and
goods passenger lifts. Accessibility to lifts for
persons including persons with disability [2003]
BS 5900
Powered home-lifts with partially enclosed
carriers and no liftway enclosures. Specification
[2012]
Legislation
Building Regulations 2010 (SI 2010/2214)(as
amended)
Equality Act 2010 (2010 c.15)
Equality Act 2010 (Disability) Regulations (SI
2010/2128)
The Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare)
Regulations (SI 1992/3004)(as amended).
Other documents
Accessible thresholds in new housing – Guidance
for house builders and developers, The Stationery
Office Ltd. ISBN 0 11 702333 3. 1999.
Number bedspaces /
number furniture items required
Space Furniture to be shown Furniture size (mm) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Living space Arm chair (or number 850x850 2 3 1 2 3 4 1
sofa seats in addition to
minimum sofa provision)
2 seat settee (optional) 850x1300
3 seat settee 850x1850 1 1 1 1
TV 220x650 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
coffee table 500x1050 or 750
diameter
occasional table 450x450
storage units 500 x length shown 1000 1000 1500 2000 2000 2000
(1 only required)
Dining space dining chair 2 3 4 5 6 7 +
dining table 800 x length shown 800 1000 1200 1350 1500 1650
(1 only required)
Bedrooms
Double Bedroom Principal bedroom double 2000x1500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
bed; or
Other double bedroom 1900x1350 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
double bed; or
single bed (2 number in twin) 1900x900 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
bedside table 400x400 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
desk and chair 500x1050 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
chest of drawers 450x750 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
double Wardrobe 600x1200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Twin bedroom single bed (2 number in twin) 1900x900 2 2 2 2 2
bedside table 400x400 2 2 2 2 2
chest of drawers 450x750 1 1 1 1 1
table and chair 500x1050 1 1 1 1 1
double wardrobe 600x1200 1 1 1 1 1
Single Bedroom single bed 1900x900 1 1 1 1 1 1
bedside table 400x400 1 1 1 1 1 1
chest of drawers 450x750 1 1 1 1 1 1
table and chair 500x1050 1 1 1 1 1 1
double wardrobe 600x1200 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bathrooms WC + cistern 500x700
Bath 700x1700
Wash hand basin 600x450
Hand rinse basin 350x200
Manoeuvring zone
Bedrooms Manoeuvring square 1200x1200
as per requirements
Living rooms Turning circle; or 1500x1500
Turning ellipse 1400x1700
K R
kitchens ramps
wheelchair accessible dwellings 3.32, 3.34; on approach route 1.7, 2.10, 3.10
Table 3.4; Diagram 3.8 maximum length for gradient Diagrams 2.1, 3.1
wheelchair adaptable dwellings 3.32, 3.33;
Table 3.3 S
L sanitary facilities
Category 1 1.17
legislation 0.7–0.9 Category 2 2.26–28
Building Regulations 2010 0.14, 0.15 Category 3 3.36–3.43; Table 3.5
Equality Act 2010 0.9 see also bathrooms; WC facilities
Equality Act 2010 (Disability) Regulations 0.9 sanitary fittings Diagram 2.5
The Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare) wheelchair accessible dwellings Diagrams 3.11,
Regulations 0.7–0.8 3.16, 3.17
lifts wheelchair adaptable dwellings Diagrams 3.10,
wheelchair accessible dwellings 3.29; 3.14
Diagram 3.7 services 1.18, 2.30, 3.44; Diagram 1.5
wheelchair adaptable dwellings 3.28 showers 2.27, 3.36–3.39, 3.41; Table 3.5; Diagram 2.5,
see also communal lifts see also bathrooms, sanitary fittings
living area 2.24, 3.31; Table 3.2 stairs
communal 1.10, 1.12
private 2.23, 3.30
V
visitable dwellings 1.1–1.18
W
WC access zones Diagrams 1.3, 3.13, 3.14
wheelchair accessible dwellings Diagram 3.11
wheelchair adaptable dwellings Diagram 3.10
WC facilities
Category 1 1.17; Diagram 1.4
Category 2 2.27; Diagram 2.6
Category 3 3.36–3.40; Diagrams 3.11–3.14
wheelchair user dwellings 3.1–3.45
wheelchair accessible dwellings
bathrooms 3.43; Diagrams 3.11, 3.16, 3.17
kitchens 3.34; Table 3.4; Diagram 3.3
lifting devices 3.29; Diagram 3.7
optional requirement 0.5
WC facilities 3.36, 3.39; Diagrams 3.11, 3.12
wheelchair adaptable dwellings
bathrooms 3.42; Diagrams 3.10, 3.15
kitchens 3.33; Table 3.3
lifting devices 3.28
storage space 3.25
WC facilities 3.36, 3.38; Diagrams 3.10, 3.12
Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare)
Regulations 0.7–0.8
worktops Tables 3.3, 3.4
M
Access to and use of buildings
APPROVED DOCUMENT
On-site car parking and setting down 17 Handrails to internal steps, stairs
and ramps 37
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
1
M CONTENTS
PAGE PAGE
6. Examples of acceptable step
Section 4: Facilities in buildings profiles and key dimensions for
other than dwellings 38 external stairs 22
Objectives 38 7. Handrail design 23
Audience and spectator facilities 38 Note: Diagram 8 has been moved to
Refreshment facilities 40 Approved Document K, Section 10,
all other numbering remains
Sleeping accommodation 42 the same
Switches, outlets and controls 43 9. Effective clear width of doors 25
Aids to communication 45 10. Key dimensions for lobbies with
single leaf doors 28
Section 5: Sanitary accommodation
in buildings other than dwellings 47 11. Key dimensions associated with
passenger lifts 34
Objectives 47
Note: Diagram 12 has been moved to
Sanitary accommodation generally 47 Approved Document K, Section 1, all
Provision of toilet accommodation 48 other numbering remains the same
Wheelchair-accessibile unisex toilets 49 13. An example of wheelchair spaces
Toilets in separate-sex washrooms 52 in a lecture theatre 39
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
2
CONTENTS M
PAGE
25. An example of a bathroom
incorporating a corner WC 58
26. Grab rails and fittings associated
with a bath 59
Note: Diagrams 27 to 29 deleted – refer to
Approved Document M: Volume 1
Note: Diagram 30 has been moved to
Approved Document K, Section 1, all
other numbering remains the same
Note: Diagrams 31 and 32 deleted – refer
to Approved Document M: Volume 1
TABLES
1. Limits for ramp gradients 19
2. Minimum effective clear widths
of doors 25
3. Provision of wheelchair space
in audience seating 39
Note: Table 4 deleted – refer to Approved
Document M: Volume 1
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
3
M
Use of guidance
THE APPROVED DOCUMENTS Paragraphs H2 and J7 are excluded from
Regulation 8 because they deal directly with
This document is one of a series that has
prevention of the contamination of water.
been approved and issued by the Secretary
Parts E and M (which deal, respectively,
of State for the purpose of providing
with resistance to the passage of sound,
practical guidance with respect to the
and access to and use of buildings) are
requirements of Schedule 1 to and
excluded from Regulation 8 because they
Regulation 7 of the Building Regulations
address the welfare and convenience of
2010 for England and Wales (SI 2010/2214).
building users. Part L is excluded from
At the back of this document is a list Regulation 8 because it addresses the
of all the documents that have been conservation of fuel and power. All these
approved and issued by the Secretary matters are amongst the purposes, other
of State for this purpose. than health and safety, that may be
Approved Documents are intended to addressed by Building Regulations.
provide guidance for some of the more
common building situations. However, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
there may well be alternative ways of Any building work which is subject to the
achieving compliance with the requirements. requirements imposed by Schedule 1 to
Thus there is no obligation to adopt the Building Regulations shall be carried
any particular solution contained in an out in accordance with regulation 7.
Approved Document if you prefer to Guidance on meeting these requirements
meet the relevant requirement in some on materials and workmanship is contained
other way. in Approved Document 7.
Other requirements Building Regulations are made for specific
purposes, primarily the health and safety,
The guidance contained in an Approved
welfare and convenience of people and for
Document relates only to the particular
energy conservation. Standards and other
requirements of the Regulations which the
technical specifications may provide
document addresses. The building work will
relevant guidance to the extent that they
also have to comply with the requirements
relate to these considerations. However,
of any other relevant paragraphs in
they may also address other aspects of
Schedule 1 to the Regulations.
performance or matters which, although
There are Approved Documents which give they relate to health and safety etc., are not
guidance on each of the Parts of Schedule 1 covered by the Building Regulations.
and on Regulation 7.
When an Approved Document makes
reference to a named standard, the
LIMITATION ON REQUIREMENTS
relevant version of the standard to which it
In accordance with regulation 8, the refers is the one listed at the end of the
requirements in Parts A to D, F to K (except publication. However, if this version has
for paragraphs H2 and J7) of Schedule 1 to been revised or updated by the issuing
the Building Regulations do not require standards body, the new version may be
anything to be done except for the purpose used as a source of guidance provided it
of securing reasonable standards of health continues to address the relevant
and safety for persons in or about buildings requirements of the Regulations.
(and any others who may be affected by
buildings or matters connected with
buildings). This is one of the categories of
purpose for which building regulations may
be made.
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
5
M USE OF GUIDANCE
MIXED USE DEVELOPMENT THE EQUALITY ACT 2010 AND
In mixed use developments part of a THE EQUALITY ACT 2010
building may be used as a dwelling while (DISABILITY) REGULATIONS 2010
another part has a non-domestic use. The Equality Act 2010 (the EA) brings
In such cases, if the requirements of the together existing equalities legislation,
Regulations for dwellings and non-domestic including the Disability Discrimination Act
use differ, the requirements for non- 1995, with the aims of strengthening and
domestic use should apply in any shared also harmonising existing provisions into a
parts of the building. single streamlined framework of equalities
legislation to deliver better outcomes for
THE WORKPLACE (HEALTH, the protected groups listed.
SAFETY AND WELFARE)
The EA (http://www.legislation.gov.uk/
REGULATIONS 1992 ukpga/2010/15/contents) imposes a duty
The Workplace (Health, Safety and to make reasonable adjustments to a
Welfare) Regulations 1992 as amended physical feature in order to comply with the
by The Health and Safety (Miscellaneous requirements set out in section 20 of the
Amendments) Regulations 2002 EA. The duty is set out in Schedule 2 (in
(SI 2002/2174) contain some requirements relation to public functions and service
which affect building design. The main providers); Schedule 8 (in relation to
requirements are now covered by the employers) and Schedule 15 (in relation to
Building Regulations, but for further associations) of the EA.
information see: ‘Workplace health, safety Although the guidance in this Approved
and welfare. Workplace (Health, Safety and Document, if followed, tends to
Welfare) Regulations 1992, Approved Code demonstrate compliance with Part M of the
of Practice’ L24. Published by HSE Books Building Regulations, this does not
1992 (ISBN 0 7176 0413 6). necessarily equate to compliance with the
The Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare) obligations and duties set out in the EA.
Regulations 1992 apply to the common This is because service providers and
parts of flats and similar buildings if people employers are required by the EA to make
such as cleaners and caretakers are reasonable adjustment to any physical
employed to work in these common parts. feature which might put a disabled person
Where the requirements of the Building at a substantial disadvantage compared to
Regulations that are covered by this Part a non-disabled person. In some instances
do not apply to dwellings, the provisions this will include designing features or
may still be required in the situations making reasonable adjustments to features
described above in order to satisfy the which are outside the scope of Approved
Workplace Regulations. Document M. It remains for the persons
undertaking building works to consider if
further provision, beyond that described in
Approved Document M, is appropriate.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
6
USE OF GUIDANCE M
10 Year Exemption for service Applicants should be aware that this is not
providers, local authorities and a blanket exemption from duties under the
EA, and relates only to the duty to make
associations reasonable adjustments to physical
An exemption setting out when an features built in strict accordance with the
adjustment is not reasonable in relation to guidance provided in the relevant approved
design standards is provided in regulation document. As with all other types of
9 (Reasonableness and design standards) building work, service providers will still
of and the Schedule to the Equality Act need to consider the needs of disabled
2010 (Disability) Regulations 2010 (the people which are outside the scope of
Regulations). Approved Document M. It is for applicants,
Regulation 9 prescribes circumstances in not building control bodies, to consider
which it is not reasonable for a provider of how these obligations are to be met.
services, a public authority carrying out its
functions, or an association to remove or RELATIONSHIP WITH GUIDANCE
alter a physical feature which has been IN APPROVED DOCUMENT K
provided to assist access to the building or (PROTECTION FROM FALLING
its facilities and which accords with the COLLISION AND IMPACT)
relevant design standard. The Schedule to
the Regulations provides that a physical Where applicable, parts of this Approved
feature satisfies the relevant design Document state that the requirements of
standard if it complied with the objectives, Part M will be satisfied by compliance with
design considerations and provisions set the applicable parts of the guidance within
out in the edition of Approved Document M Approved Document K (Protection from
that applied at the time the building works falling, collision and impact). Compliance
were carried out. with these applicable requirements set out
in Approved Document K in these
This provision will not apply where more circumstances will be regarded as
than 10 years have elapsed since: compliance with a relevant design standard
– the day on which construction or for the purposes of regulation 9 and the
installation of the feature was Schedule to the Regulations.
completed; or
– in the case of a physical feature
provided as part of a larger building
project, the day on which the works in
relation to that project were completed.
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
7
M ACCESS TO AND USE OF BUILDINGS
The Requirements
This Approved Document deals with
requirements M1, M2 and M3 of Part M of
Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
8
ACCESS TO AND USE OF BUILDINGS M
Notes Attention is drawn to the following extracts
Means of escape in case of fire: the from The Building Regulations 2010.
scope of Part M and AD M is limited to Interpretation (Regulation 2)
matters of access to, into and use of a
building. It does not extend to means Regulation 2 contains the following
of escape in the event of fire, for which definition:
reference should be made to Approved ‘independent access’ means in relation to
Document B – ‘Fire Safety’. a part of a building (including any extension
Stairs and ramps: Approved Document K to that building) a route of access to that
(Protection from falling, collision and impact) part which does not require the user to
contains guidance on internal and external pass through any other part of the building.
steps, stairs and ramps when they are part The meanings of the expressions
of the building. Additional guidance is ‘institution’, ‘public building’ and ‘shop’
provided in this Approved Document when used in Regulation 5 are explained in
external stepped and ramped access also Regulation 2.
form part of the principal entrances and
alternative accessible entrances, and when Meaning of material change of use
they form part of the access route to the (regulation 5)
building from the boundary of the site and For the purposes of paragraph 8 (1)(e) of
car parking. Schedule 1 to the Act and for the purposes
Manifestation on glazed doors and of these Regulations, there is a material
glazed screens: Approved Document K change of use where there is a change in
(Protection from falling, collision and the purposes for which or the circumstances
impact) contains guidance on in which a building is used, so that after
manifestation. the change:
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
9
M ACCESS TO AND USE OF BUILDINGS
j. the building is used as a shop, where f. in the case of a material change of use
previously it was not. described in Regulation 5(a), (b), (c), (g),
Requirements relating to material (h) or (i), E1 to E3 (resistance to the
change of use (Regulation 6) passage of sound);
g. in the case of a material change of
1. Where there is a material change of use described in Regulation 5(e),
use of the whole of a building, such work, if where the public building consists
any, shall be carried out as is necessary to of or contains a school, E4 (acoustic
ensure that the building complies with the conditions in schools);
applicable requirements of the following
paragraphs of Schedule 1: h. in the case of a material change of use
described in Regulation 5(c), (d), (e) or
a. in all cases, (j), M1 (access and use).
B1 (means of warning and escape) 2. Where there is a material change of
B2 (internal fire spread – linings) use of part only of a building, such work, if
B3 (internal fire spread – structure) any, shall be carried out as is necessary to
B4(2) (external fire spread – roofs) ensure that:
B5 (access and facilities for the a. that part complies in all cases with any
fire service) applicable requirements referred to in
C2(c) (interstitial and surface paragraph (1)(a);
condensation) b. in a case to which sub-paragraphs (b),
F1 (means of ventilation) (d), (e) or (f) of paragraph (1) apply, that
part complies with the requirements
G3(1) to (3) (hot water supply and referred to in the relevant sub-paragraph;
systems)
c. in a case to which sub-paragraph (c)
G4 (sanitary conveniences and of paragraph (1) applies, the whole
washing facilities) building complies with the requirement
G5 (bathrooms) referred to in that sub-paragraph; and
G6 (kitchen and food preparation areas) d. in a case to which sub-paragraph (i) of
H1 (foul water drainage) paragraph (1) applies:
H6 (solid waste storage) i. that part and any sanitary
J1 to J4 (combustion appliances) conveniences provided in or in
connection with that part comply
L1 (conservation of fuel and power
with the requirements referred to in
– dwellings)
that sub-paragraph; and
P1 (electrical safety);
ii. the building complies with
b. in the case of a material change of use requirement M1(a) of Schedule 1 to
described in Regulations 5(c), (d), (e) or the extent that reasonable provision
(f), A1 to A3 (structure); is made to provide either suitable
c. in the case of a building exceeding independent access to that part or
15m in height, B4(1) (external fire suitable access through
spread – walls); the building to that part.
d. in the case of material change of use
described in regulation 5(a), (b), (c), (d),
(g), (h), (i) or, where the material change
provides new residential accommodation,
(f), C1(2) (resistance to contaminants);
e. in the case of material change of
use described in Regulation 5(a),
C4 (resistance to weather and ground
moisture);
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
10
M
Section 0: General guidance
PERFORMANCE so as to provide suitable access through
the building to the extension. The concept
In the Secretary of State’s view
of access encompasses access from the
Requirements M1, M2 and M3 will be met
boundary of the site and from on-site car
by making reasonable provision to ensure
parking where provided.
that buildings are accessible and usable.
0.6 If the owners of a building prefer
People, regardless of disability, age or
not to provide independent access to a
gender, should be able to:
planned extension, it is open to them either
• gain access to buildings and to gain to demonstrate that the existing building
access within buildings and use their and the approach to it already comply with
facilities, both as visitors and as people Requirement M1(a), so that the Limit on
who live or work in them. Application of Requirement M2 applies,
or to modify the existing building and/or
Where the requirements apply
the approach to it so that the Limit on
Application of Part M Application applies. Such modification
work would be a material alteration.
0.1 Requirements M1, M2 and M3
The extensions and the alterations of the
apply if:
existing building could be planned and
a. a non-domestic building is newly carried out as a single project.
erected;
0.7 In judging whether access provision
b. an existing non-domestic building is relying on the existing building is sufficient
extended, or undergoes a material for the Limit on Application of Requirement
alteration; or M2 to apply, and in judging whether it
c. an existing building or part of an existing is reasonably practicable for suitable
building undergoes a material change independent access to be provided, practical
of use to a hotel or boarding house, constraints and cost considerations will be
institution, public building or shop. relevant – see also ‘Access Strategies’
paragraphs 0.20 and 0.25 below.
The terms ‘institution’, ‘public building’ and
‘shop’ are explained in regulation 2. 0.8 Under Requirement M3, if sanitary
conveniences are provided in any building
It should be noted that, regardless of that is to be extended, reasonable
compliance with Building Regulations, provision must be made within the
there will be obligations under the Equality extension for sanitary conveniences.
Act 2010 for service providers and However, under the Limit on Application of
employers to consider barriers created by Requirement M3, this requirement does not
physical features in buildings. apply if there is reasonable provision for
0.2-0.4 Text deleted. people using the extension to gain access
to and to use sanitary conveniences in the
Extensions of non-domestic buildings existing building. As in the case of access
0.5 An extension to a non-domestic to an extension, it is open to building
building should be treated in the same owners preferring not to make provisions
manner as a new building, as regards its for sanitary conveniences in a planned
own compliance with Part M. Under extension either to demonstrate that
Requirement M2 there must be suitable reasonable provision already exists in, or
independent access to the extension to modify, the existing building so that the
where reasonably practicable. Under the Limit on Application of Requirement M3
Limits on Application, Requirement M2 applies. In this case, too, the extension and
does not apply where the building that is the modifications to the existing building
extended complies with Requirement M1(a)
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
11
M GENERAL GUIDANCE
could be planned and carried out as a building or a shop, such work if any shall be
single project. carried out as is necessary to ensure that:
Material alterations of non-domestic • there is reasonable provision for people
buildings to gain access to that part from the site
boundary and from on-site car parking
0.9 Under regulation 4, where an where provided, either by means of an
alteration of a non-domestic building is independent access or by means of a
a material alteration, the work itself must route to and through the building;
comply, where relevant, with Requirement
M1. This means that alterations to features • that part itself complies with M1 (access
relevant to the compliance of a building and use); and
with Part M, such as entrances or • any sanitary conveniences provided in,
arrangements for people to get from or in connection with, that part comply
one level to another within the building, with Requirement M1: if users of that part
must result in features that comply with have the use of sanitary conveniences
Requirement M1. Where new features elsewhere in the building, there must
relevant to the compliance of a building be reasonable provision for people to
with Part M are provided, these must also gain access to and use that sanitary
comply with Requirement M1. Reasonable accommodation, upgraded if need be.
provision must be made for people to gain
Developers will need to agree how they
access to and to use new or altered
have assessed what is reasonable
sanitary conveniences. The building as a
provision with the relevant building control
whole, including access to it from the site
body as set out in paragraphs 0.20 to 0.25.
boundary and from on-site car parking
where provided, must be no less compliant 0.12 Where a material change of use
with Requirement M1 following a material results in a building being used in part as a
alteration of a building. In the context of hotel or boarding house, institution, public
a material alteration of a building, it is building or shop, and in part as a dwelling,
not necessary, as regards the Building regard should be had to the guidance in
Regulations, to upgrade access to the Sections 1 to 5 of this Approved Document
building entrance from the site boundary in relation to the relevant non-domestic
and from on-site car parking where provided. accommodation and to the common parts
However, attention is drawn to the note in (see also MIXED USE DEVELOPMENT
paragraph 1, above about the Equality Act. under Use of Guidance).
Material changes of use Car parking and setting down
0.10 Under regulation 6, as amended, 0.13 Part M applies to those features,
where there is a material change of use of outside the building, which are needed to
the whole of a building to a hotel or boarding provide access to the building from the
house, an institution, a public building or edge of the site and from car parking and
a shop, the building must be upgraded, setting down points within the site.
if necessary, so as to comply with M1
(Access and use). The terms ‘institution’,
What requirements apply
‘public building’ and ‘shop’ are explained 0.14 If Part M applies, reasonable provision
in regulation 2. In particular, it should be should be made:
noted that ‘shop’ includes use as a a. so that people, regardless of disability,
restaurant, bar or public house. age or gender, can reach the principal
0.11 Under regulation 6, as amended, if entrance to the building and other
an existing building undergoes a change entrances described in this Approved
of use such that part is used as a hotel or Document from the site boundary,
boarding house, an institution, a public
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
12
GENERAL GUIDANCE M
from car parking within the site, and historical interest and which are referred
from other buildings on the same site to as a material consideration in a local
(such as a university campus, a school authority’s development plan,
or a hospital); d. buildings of architectural and historic
b. so that elements of the building do not interest within national parks, areas of
constitute a hazard to users, especially outstanding natural beauty and world
people with impaired sight, but rather heritage sites,
assist in wayfinding; e. vernacular buildings of traditional form
c. so that people, regardless of disability, and construction.
age or gender, can have access into, 0.18 The need to conserve the special
and within, any storey of the building characteristics of such historic buildings
and to the building’s facilities, subject must be recognised. They are a finite
to the usual gender-related conventions resource with cultural importance. In
regarding sanitary accommodation; such work the aim should be to improve
d. for suitable accommodation for people accessibility where and to the extent that it
in wheelchairs, or people with other is practically possible, always provided that
disabilities, in audience or spectator the work does not prejudice the character
seating; of the historic building, or increase the risk
e. for aids to communication for people of long-term deterioration to the building
with an impairment of hearing or sight fabric or fittings. In arriving at an appropriate
in auditoria, meeting rooms, reception balance between historic building
areas, ticket offices and at information conservation and accessibility, it would be
points; and appropriate to take into account the advice
of the local authority’s conservation and
f. for sanitary accommodation for the access officers, and English Heritage, as
users of the building. well as the views of local access groups, in
Educational establishments order to make the building as accessible
as possible.
0.15 From 1 April 2001, maintained schools
ceased to have exemption from the Building 0.19 Particular issues relating to work in
Regulations. Certain school-specific historic buildings that warrant sympathetic
standards relating to Parts K and M treatment and where advice from others
contained in the DfES 1997 Constructional could therefore be beneficial include:
Standards as described in Circular a. restoring the historic character of
DfES/0142/2001 are subsumed in this a building that had been subject to
revision to AD M (see 1.33 – Note re: (l) and previous inappropriate alteration,
(m), 1.36, 1.37 (b). e.g. replacement windows, doors
0.16 Purpose-built student living and rooflights;
accommodation, including that in the form b. rebuilding a former historic building
of flats as defined in regulation 2(1), should (e.g. following a fire or filling in a gap
be treated as hotel/motel accommodation site in a terrace);
in respect of space requirements and c. the choice of appropriate construction
internal facilities (see 4.17 to 4.24). materials and techniques, e.g. making
Historic buildings provisions enabling the fabric to ‘breathe’
to control moisture and potential long-
0.17 Historic buildings include: term decay problems: see Information
a. listed buildings, Sheet No. 4 from The Society for the
b. buildings situated in conservation areas, Protection of Ancient Buildings (SPAB).
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
13
M GENERAL GUIDANCE
Access strategy focus should be on ensuring that
applicants and building control bodies are
0.20 It is important that applicants clearly
agreed as to the appropriate level of
communicate to the building control body
provision in the completed building work.
how their chosen approach to meeting the
accessibility needs of the likely end-users 0.24 In smaller or simpler works this could
of a building and its facilities demonstrates be achieved by having a conversation to
compliance with the requirements of Part review the proposals and recording the
M of the Building Regulations. The outcome of discussions by
guidance in this Approved Document is correspondence. In large, complex works
designed to indicate only one way in which or where there are significant constraints
those requirements may be met. Whilst imposed by an existing site, this might
alternative, equally satisfactory ways of involve a written document setting out key
meeting the requirements can be adopted aspects of the access approach,
depending on the size, scale, nature and supported by annotated drawings as well
intended use of the building they must still as face to face meetings to resolve key
demonstrate compliance with the relevant issues. It is for the building control body
functional requirement. and applicant to agree which, if any of
these proposed approaches should be
0.21 Where alternative solutions are
used on a case by case basis to ensure
proposed, the onus remains with the
that the functional requirements of Part M
applicant to demonstrate that those
of the Building Regulations are satisfied.
solutions are appropriate and meet the
Whichever approach is adopted, the
requirements, for example by showing that
agreed level of provision should be clearly
it is equivalent to the provisions set out in
recorded.
this Approved Document. This should
include the use of appropriate research 0.25 It should be noted that approval of
evidence or reference to recognised British proposed works by a building control body
Standards as necessary to support the does not by necessity indicate compliance
chosen approach. It is advisable to ensure with duties under the Equalities Act 2010.
that the appropriate level of provision is Applicants need to consider these wider
agreed with the building control body equality obligations when undertaking
prior to commencing building work, as building work and whether provision in
retrospective alterations can be costly some circumstances should exceed that
and disruptive. set out within this Approved Document.
The relationship between Part M of the
0.22 Applicants should therefore seek to
Building Regulations and the Equality Act
engage with building control bodies at the
2010 is set out on page 7 of this Approved
earliest possible stage to identify key
Document.
issues and risks, and to discuss the best
way to demonstrate the access strategy for Definitions
the building work taking place. To ensure
0.26 The following meanings apply to
satisfactory outcomes, communication
terms throughout this Approved Document.
between applicants and building control
bodies should focus on areas where Access, approach, entry or exit.
proposals diverge from the guidance in this Accessible, with respect to buildings
Approved Document rather than providing or parts of buildings, means that people,
an exhaustive explanation where features regardless of disability, age or gender,
are in accordance with the guidance. are able to gain access.
0.23 Provision of a written Access Contrast visually, when used to indicate
strategy is not required to accompany a the visual perception of one element of
building control application though it may the building, or fitting within the building,
be useful in some circumstances. The key against another means that the difference
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
14
GENERAL GUIDANCE M
in light reflectance value between the two Utility stair, a stair used for escape,
surfaces is greater than 30 points. Where access for maintenance, or purposes other
illuminance on surfaces is greater than 200 than as a usual route for moving between
lux, a difference in light reflectance value levels on a day-to-day basis.
should be a minimum of 20 points. Where
door opening furniture projects beyond the
face of the door or otherwise creates
enhanced differentiation and shade, a
minimum difference in light reflectance
value of 15 points is considered adequate.
For further information, reference should
be made to Colour, contrast and
perception – Design guidance for internal
built environments – Reading University.
Dwelling, means a house or a flat (‘flat’
is defined in regulation 2(1)). However,
new blocks of flats built as student
accommodation are to be treated as though
they are hotel/motel accommodation in
respect of space requirements and internal
facilities (see 4.17 to 4.24).
General access stair, a stair intended for
all users of a building on a day-to day-
basis, as a normal route between levels.
Illuminance, the amount of light falling on
a surface, measured in lumens per square
metre (lm/m2) or lux (lx).
Level, with respect to the surfaces of a
level approach, access routes and landings
associated with steps, stairs and ramps means
predominantly level, but with a maximum
gradient along the direction of travel of 1:60.
Light reflectance value (LRV), the total
quantity of visible light reflected by a
surface at all wavelengths and directions
when illuminated by a light source.
Principal entrance, the entrance which a
visitor not familiar with the building would
normally expect to approach.
Suitable, with respect to means of access
and facilities, means that they are designed
for use by people regardless of disability,
age or gender, but subject to the usual
gender-related conventions regarding
sanitary accommodation.
Usable, with respect to buildings or
parts of buildings, means that they are
convenient for independent use.
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
15
M1/M2
Section 1: Access to buildings other
than dwellings
OBJECTIVES or, if either of these is not accessible, to any
alternative accessible entrances. If access
1.1 The aim is to provide a suitable
is generally required between entrances, or
means of access for people from the
between alternative accessible entrances
entrance point at the boundary of the site,
outside the building, this access should
and from any car parking that is provided
as far as possible be level. The site level
on the site, to the building. It is also
of accessible entrances should be
important that routes between buildings
determined accordingly.
within a complex are also accessible.
1.7 Where a difference in level between
1.2 In designing an approach to the
the boundary of the site or car parking
building, it should be recognised that
designated for disabled people and the
changes in level are difficult for many
building is unavoidable due to site constraints,
people to negotiate, including wheelchair
the approach may have a gentle gradient
users, people who need to use walking
over a long distance (for all or part/s of the
aids and people with impaired sight. Access
approach) or it may incorporate a number
routes that are too narrow can also make it
of shorter parts at a steeper gradient, with
difficult for people to pass each other.
level landings at intervals as rest points.
1.3 It is important to be aware that Generally, gradients within the approach
people’s capabilities vary. For example, should be as gentle as possible.
for some people, a stair is easier to use
1.8 Where the gradient of the approach,
than a ramp.
whether over its whole length or in part, is
1.4 The building should be designed, 1:20 or steeper, that part of the approach
within the overall constraints of space, should be designed as ramped access.
so that the difference in level between the
1.9 All access routes to principal, or
entrance storey and the site entry point
alternative accessible, entrances should be
is minimised.
surfaced so that people are able to travel
1.5 It is also important that potential along them easily, without excessive effort
hazards on access routes adjacent to and without the risk of tripping or falling.
buildings, e.g. open windows, are avoided
1.10 There should be sufficient space for
so that people, particularly children and
people to approach the building, pass
those with impaired sight or hearing, are
others who are travelling in the opposite
not injured.
direction and carry out all necessary
Note: The publication ‘Inclusive Mobility: manoeuvres.
A Guide to Best Practice on Access to
1.11 A surface width of 1800mm can
Pedestrian and Transport Infrastructure’
accommodate any amount of non-vehicular
gives detailed guidance on designing the
traffic without the need for passing places.
external environment.
A surface width of 1200mm may be
Level approach from the boundary acceptable on restricted sites, subject to
of the site and car parking agreement with the building control body.
1.12 It is important to reduce the risks to
Design considerations
people, particularly people with impaired
1.6 As far as possible, access should sight, when approaching and passing
be level from the boundary of the site, around the perimeter of the building under
and from any car parking designated for all lighting conditions.
disabled people, to the principal entrance
and any entrance used exclusively for staff
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
16
ACCESS TO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
Provisions
Diagram 1 Tactile paving and an
1.13 A ‘level approach’ (from the boundary example of its use at an
of the site and from car parking spaces uncontrolled crossing
designated for disabled people to the
principal entrance, to a staff entrance or
to an alternative accessible entrance) will
satisfy Requirement M1 or M2 if:
a. it has a surface width of at least 1.5m,
with passing places, free of obstructions
to a height of 2.1m;
b. passing places at least 1.8m wide and
at least 2m long are provided within
sight of each other (the width of the
passing place may be included in the
width of the level approach), but in any
case spaced at a distance no greater
than 50m;
c. the gradient along its length is either
no steeper than 1:60 along its whole
length, or less steep than 1:20 with level
landings (see 1.26(k)) introduced for
each 500mm rise of the access (where
necessary, between landings), in all
cases with a cross-fall gradient no
steeper than 1:40;
d. its surface is firm, durable and slip
resistant, with undulations not exceeding
3mm under a 1m straight edge for
formless materials. Inappropriate
materials might be loose sand or gravel;
e. where there are different materials along
the access route, they have similar
frictional characteristics;
f. the difference in level at joints between
paving units is no greater than 5mm,
with joints filled flush or, if recessed, On-site car parking and
no deeper than 5mm and no wider than setting down
10mm or, if unfilled, no wider than 5mm;
Design considerations
g. the route to the principal entrance
(or alternative accessible entrance) is 1.14 People who need to travel to
clearly identified and well lit; buildings by car need to be able to park,
have sufficient space to enter and leave
h. the danger of inadvertently walking into
their vehicle, on occasions move to the
a vehicular access route is minimised
rear of their vehicle, then walk, travel in a
by providing a separate pedestrian
wheelchair or with pushchairs or luggage,
route and, where there is an uncontrolled
etc. to the principal entrance, the staff
crossing point across the vehicular route,
entrance or any alternative accessible
this is identified by a buff coloured blister
entrance of the building.
surface (see Diagram 1, and ‘Guidance
on the use of Tactile Paving Surfaces’).
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
17
M1/M2 ACCESS TO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
1.15 The surface of a parking bay
Diagram 2 Parking bay designated for
designated for disabled people, in particular
disabled people
the area surrounding the bay, should allow
the safe transfer of a passenger or driver to
a wheelchair and transfer from the parking
bay to the access route to the building
without undue effort, barriers to wheelchairs
or hazards from tripping.
1.16 If people need to obtain tickets
for pay and display parking, the ticket
dispensing machines should be located in
a way that allows a person in a wheelchair,
or a person of short stature, to gain access
close to the machine and reach the payment
and ticket dispensing functions.
1.17 People with mobility impairments
who arrive as passengers should be able
to alight from a vehicle close to the
principal entrance, or alternative accessible
entrance, of the building in a way that is
convenient for entry into the building.
Note: Guidance is available in BS 8300 on:
– the provision of parking bays
designated for disabled people in
different building types;
c. the surface of the accessibility zone
– ticket dispensing machines;
is firm, durable and slip resistant, with
– vehicular control barriers; and undulations not exceeding 3mm under a
– multi-storey car parks. 1m straight edge for formless materials.
Inappropriate materials might be loose
Provisions sand or gravel;
1.18 Car parking and setting down will d. ticket machines, where necessary for
satisfy Requirement M1 or M2 if: wheelchair users and people of short
a. at least one parking bay designated for stature, are adjacent to the designated
disabled people is provided on firm and parking bays for disabled people and
level ground as close as feasible to the have controls between 750mm and
principal entrance of the building; 1200mm above the ground and a plinth
which does not project in front of the
b. the dimensions of the designated face of the machine in a way that
parking bays are as shown in Diagram 2 prevents its convenient use;
(with a 1200mm accessibility zone
between, and a 1200mm safety zone on e. a clearly sign-posted setting down point
the vehicular side of, the parking bays, is located on firm and level ground as
and with a dropped kerb when there is close as practicable to the principal or
a pedestrian route at the other side of alternative accessible entrance with its
the parking bay); surface level with the carriageway at
that point to allow convenient access to
and from the entrance for people with
walking difficulties or people using a
wheelchair.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
18
ACCESS TO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
Ramped access Provisions
Note: Where there appears to be a conflict 1.26 A ramped access will satisfy
between the guidance in Part M and Part K, Requirement M1 or M2 if:
Part M takes precedence; see the Notes to a. either it is readily apparent or the
the Requirements. approach to it is clearly sign-posted;
Design considerations b. the gradient of a ramp flight and its going
1.19 If site constraints necessitate an between landings are in accordance
approach of 1:20 or steeper, an approach with Table 1 and Diagram 3;
incorporating ramped access should be c. no flight has a going greater than 10m,
provided. Ramps are beneficial for or a rise of more than 500mm;
wheelchair users and people pushing
prams, pushchairs and bicycles.
1.20 Gradients should be as shallow as Table 1 Limits for ramp gradients
practicable, as steep gradients create Going of a flight Maximum gradient Maximum rise
difficulties for some wheelchair users who 10m 1:20 500mm
lack the strength to propel themselves up 5m 1:15 333mm
2m 1:12 166mm
a slope or have difficulty in slowing down
or stopping when descending. Note:
For goings between 2m and 10m, it is acceptable to interpolate
1.21 Ramps are also not necessarily safe between the maximum gradients, i.e. 1:14 for a 4m going or 1:19 for
a 9m going (see Diagram 3).
and convenient for ambulant disabled people.
For example, some people who can walk but
have restricted mobility find it more difficult
to negotiate a ramp than a stair. In addition, Diagram 3 Relationship of ramp
adverse weather conditions increase the gradient to the going of
risk of slipping on a ramp. It is therefore a flight
beneficial to have steps as well as a ramp.
1.22 Some people need to be able to stop
frequently; for instance to regain strength
or breath, or to ease pain.
1.23 Wheelchair users need adequate
space to stop on landings, to open and
pass through doors without having to
reverse into circulation routes or to face
the risk of rolling back down slopes.
1.24 Some people have a weakness on
one side. This leads to a requirement for
support at both sides of ramps.
1.25 If the total rise of a ramped approach
is too high, it can be unacceptably tiringfor
wheelchair users and some people with d. there is an alternative means of access
walking difficulties, even if a number of rest for wheelchair users, e.g. a lift, when
landings are provided. the total rise is greater than 2m;
Note: Guidance is given in BS 8300 on: e. it has a surface width between walls,
– lighting ramped access. upstands or kerbs of at least 1.5m;
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
19
M1/M2 ACCESS TO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
f. the ramp surface is slip resistant, 1.28 The warning should be placed
especially when wet, and of a colour sufficiently in advance of the hazard to
that contrasts visually with that of the allow time to stop and not be so narrow
landings; that it might be missed in a single stride.
g. the frictional characteristics of the ramp 1.29 Materials for treads should not
and landing surfaces are similar; present a slip hazard, especially when
h. there is a landing at the foot and head the surface is wet.
of the ramp at least 1.2m long and clear 1.30 People should be able to appreciate
of any door swings or other obstructions; easily where to place their feet by
i. any intermediate landings are at least highlighting nosings and avoiding
1.5m long and clear of any door swings open rises.
or other obstructions; 1.31 People who wear callipers or who
j. intermediate landings at least 1800mm have stiffness in hip or knee joints are
wide and 1800mm long are provided as particularly at risk of tripping or catching
passing places when it is not possible their feet beneath nosings. People with
for a wheelchair user to see from one a weakness on one side or with a sight
end of the ramp to the other or the impairment need the dimensions of the
ramp has three flights or more; tread to be sufficient for them to be able
to place their feet square onto it. If the
k. all landings are level, subject to a going is towards the upper end of the
maximum gradient of 1:60 along their dimensional range, the flight may rise to
length and a maximum cross-fall a greater height without the need for an
gradient of 1:40; intermediate landing, as the tread is
l. there is a handrail on both sides; sufficiently deep to allow a person to stand
and rest at any point within the flight. It
m. there is a kerb on the open side of any
should be noted that excessive rounding
ramp or landing at least 100mm high,
of nosings reduces the effective going.
which contrasts visually with the ramp
or landing in addition to any guarding 1.32 Many ambulant disabled people find
required under Part K; it easier to negotiate a flight of steps than a
ramp and, for these people, the presence
n. clearly sign-posted steps are provided,
of handrails for support is essential.
in addition, when the rise of the ramp
is greater than 300mm (equivalent to Note: Guidance is given in BS 8300 on:
2 x 150mm steps). – lighting stepped access; and
Stepped access – slip resistance (Annex C).
Note: Where there appears to be a conflict Provisions
between the guidance in Part M and Part K,
Part M takes precedence; see the Notes to 1.33 A stepped access will satisfy
the Requirements. Requirement M1 or M2 if:
a. a level landing is provided at the top
Design considerations and bottom of each flight;
1.27 People with impaired sight risk b. the unobstructed length of each landing
tripping or losing their balance if there is is not less than 1200mm;
no warning that steps provide a change
in level. The risk is most hazardous at the c. a ‘corduroy’ hazard warning surface
head of a flight of steps when a person is provided at top and bottom landings
is descending. of a series of flights to give advance
warning of a change in level in
accordance with Diagram 4;
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
20
ACCESS TO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
Diagram 4 Stepped access – key dimensions and use of hazard warning surface
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
21
M1/M2 ACCESS TO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
22
ACCESS TO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
a. the vertical height to the top of the
Diagram 7 Handrail design
upper handrail from the pitch line of the
surface of a ramp, or a flight of steps, Non-circular handrail
is between 900mm and 1000mm, and Circular handrail
32mm to 50mm diameter
50mm wide and 39mm
deep having rounded edges
from the surface of a landing is between
900 and 1100mm (see Diagram 5);
b. where there is full height structural
guarding, the vertical height to the top of
a second lower handrail from the pitch
line of the surface of a ramp, or a flight
of steps, is 600mm, where provided;
c. it is continuous across the flights and
landings of ramped or stepped access;
d. it extends at least 300mm horizontally
beyond the top and bottom of a ramped
access, or the top and bottom nosing
of a flight or flights of steps, while not
projecting into an access route;
e. it contrasts visually with the background
against which it is seen, without being
highly reflective;
f. its surface is slip resistant and not cold
to the touch, in areas where resistance
to vandalism or low maintenance are
key factors, use of metals with relatively
low thermal conductivity may be
appropriate;
g. it terminates in a way that reduces the Hazards on access routes
risk of clothing being caught; Design considerations
h. its profile is either circular with a diameter 1.38 Features of a building that occasionally
between 32 and 50mm, or non-circular, obstruct an access route, particularly if
50mm wide and 39 mm deep having they are partially transparent and therefore
rounded edges with a radius a minimum indistinct, or cause a danger overhead,
of 15mm (see Diagram 7); should not present a hazard to building users.
i. it protrudes no more than 100mm into
Provisions
the surface width of the ramped or
stepped access where this would 1.39 Requirement M1 or M2 will be
impinge on the stair width requirement satisfied in relation to hazards on access
of Part B1; routes where Approved Document K,
sections 6 and 10 are complied with.
j. there is a clearance of between 50 and
75mm between the handrail and any Note: Diagram 8 has been moved to
adjacent wall surface; Approved Document K, Section 10, all
other numbering remains the same.
k. there is a clearance of at least 50mm
between a cranked support and the
underside of the handrail;
l. its inner face is located no more than
50mm beyond the surface width of the
ramped or stepped access.
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
23
M1/M2
Section 2: Access into buildings other
than dwellings
OBJECTIVES immediate environment, e.g. by lighting
and/or visual contrast;
2.1 The aim for all new buildings is for
the principal entrance or entrances and c. any structural supports at the entrance
any main staff entrance, and any lobbies, do not present a hazard for visually
to be accessible. impaired people;
2.2 Where it is not possible, e.g. in an d. there is a level landing at least 1500 x
existing building, for the principal or main 1500mm, clear of any door swings,
staff entrance or entrances to be accessible, immediately in front of the entrance and
an alternative accessible entrance should of a material that does not impede the
be provided. movement of wheelchairs;
2.3 It is important to reduce the risks to e. the threshold is level or, if a raised
people when entering the building. threshold is unavoidable, it has a total
height of not more than 15mm, a
Accessible entrances minimum number of upstands and
Design considerations slopes, with any upstands higher than
5mm chamfered or rounded;
2.4 Steeply sloping or restricted sites
sometimes make it impossible for the f. any door entry systems are accessible
principal or main staff entrance to be to deaf and hard of hearing people, and
accessible, in which case an alternative people who cannot speak;
accessible entrance may be necessary. g. weather protection is provided at
2.5 Accessible entrances should be manual non-powered entrance doors;
clearly sign-posted and easily recognisable. h. internal floor surfaces adjacent to the
Any structural elements, for example threshold are of materials that do not
supports for a canopy, are useful in impede the movement of wheelchairs,
identifying the entrance, but should not e.g. not coir matting, and changes in
present a hazard. floor materials do not create a potential
2.6 The route from the exterior across trip hazard;
the threshold should provide weather i. where mat wells are provided, the
protection, and not present a barrier for surface of the mat is level with the
wheelchair users or a trip hazard for other surface of the adjacent floor finish;
people. A level threshold is preferred,
j. where provided as an alternative
especially for doors in frequent use.
accessible entrance, an accessible
Note: Guidance on sign-posting is given in internal route is provided to the spaces
BS 8300, Inclusive mobility and the Sign served by the principal or main staff
design guide. entrances.
Provisions Doors to accessible entrances
2.7 Accessible entrances will satisfy Design considerations
Requirement M1 or M2 if:
2.8 Doors to the principal, or alternative
a. they are clearly sign-posted, incorporating accessible, entrance should be accessible
the International Symbol of Access, to all, particularly wheelchair users and
from the edge of the site and from the people with limited physical dexterity.
principal entrance (if this is not accessible); Entrance doors may be manually operated
b. they are easily identified among the without powered assistance, or power
other elements of the building and the operated under manual or automatic
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
24
ACCESS INTO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
control. Entrance doors should be capable to 30° open, and not more than 22.5N
of being held closed when not in use. at the leading edge from 30° to 60° of
2.9 A non-powered manually operated the opening cycle;
entrance door, fitted with a self-closing b. the effective clear width through a
device capable of closing the door against single leaf door, or one leaf of a double
wind forces and the resistance of draught leaf door, is in accordance with Table 2,
seals is unlikely to be openable by many and the rules for measurement are in
people, particularly those who are wheelchair accordance with Diagram 9;
users or who have limited strength. c. they are installed in accordance with
2.10 A powered door opening and closing Approved Document K, section 10.
system, either manually controlled or
automatically operated by sensors, is the
most satisfactory solution for most people. Table 2 Minimum effective clear
An automatic sliding door arrangement is widths of doors
particularly beneficial as it avoids the risks Direction and New Existing
associated with automatic swing doors width of approach buildings buildings
(mm) (mm)
and its use can make it possible to reduce
Straight-on (without a turn or 800 750
the length of any entrance lobby. oblique approach)
2.11 Once open, all doors to accessible At right angles to an access route 800 750
at least 1500mm wide
entrances should be wide enough to allow
unrestricted passage for a variety of users, At right angles to an access route 825 775
at least 1200mm wide
including wheelchair users, people carrying
luggage, people with assistance dogs, and External doors to buildings used
by the general public
1000 775
Provisions Provisions
2.17 Manually operated non-powered 2.21 Powered entrance doors will satisfy
entrance doors will satisfy Requirement M1 Requirement M1 or M2 if:
or M2 if: a. they have a sliding, swinging or folding
a. the opening force at the leading edge action controlled:
of the door is not more than 30N at the – manually by a push pad, card swipe,
leading edge from 0° (the door in the coded entry or remote control, or
closed position) to 30° open, and not – automatically by a motion sensor
more than 22.5N at the leading edge or other proximity sensor, e.g. a
from 30° to 60° of the opening cycle; contact mat;
b. there is an unobstructed space of at b. when installed, automatic sensors are set
least 300mm on the pull side of the door so that automatically operated doors
between the leading edge of the door open early enough, and stay open long
and any return wall, unless the door is a enough, to permit safe entry and exit;
powered entrance door (see Diagram 9);
c. when they are swing doors that open
c. where fitted with a latch, the door opening towards people approaching the doors,
furniture can be operated with one hand visual and audible warnings are provided
using a closed fist, e.g. a lever handle; to warn people of their automatic operation
d. all door opening furniture contrasts when both opening and shutting;
visually with the surface of the door and d. they incorporate a safety stop that is
is not cold to the touch. activated if the doors begin to close
Powered entrance doors when a person is passing through;
e. they revert to manual control or fail safe
Design considerations
in the open position in the event of a
2.18 Activation (e.g. motion sensors and power failure;
push buttons), safety features and the
f. when open, they do not project into any
time-lapse allowed for entry and exit
adjacent access route;
through powered door systems should
be carefully considered to suit the needs g. any manual controls for powered door
of people who cannot react quickly. systems are located between 750mm
and 1000mm above floor level, operable
2.19 Manual controls for powered entrance
doors should be clearly distinguishable with a closed fist and, when on the
against the background and not located opening side of the door, are set back
so that a person, having used the control, 1400mm from the leading edge of the
door when fully open and contrast
visually with the background against
which they are seen.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
26
ACCESS INTO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
Glass doors and glazed screens door size, the swing of each door, the
projection of the door into the lobby and
Design considerations
the size of an occupied wheelchair with a
2.22 People with visual impairment should companion pushing. Where both doors of
be in no doubt as to the location of glass a lobby are automatic sliding doors, the
doors, especially when they are within a length can be reduced as no door swings
glazed screen. The choice of a different are involved, nor is space required for
style of manifestation for the door and the manual operation. Similarly, if ‘reduced
glazed screen can help to differentiate swing’ door sets are used, the length can
between them. be reduced because the projection of the
2.23 The presence of the door should be door into the lobby is reduced.
apparent not only when it is shut but also 2.28 The aim should be to reduce
when it is open. Where it can be held open, potential hazards from local obstructions
steps should be taken to avoid people within the lobby and minimise distracting
being harmed by walking into the door. reflections from glazing. It is also desirable
if rainwater from shoes or the wheels of
Provisions
wheelchairs is not taken into the building
2.24 Glass doors and glazed screens will where it becomes a potential slip hazard,
satisfy Requirement M1 or M2 if they comply e.g. by the use of cleaning mats.
with Approved Document K, Section 7.
Provisions
Entrance lobbies
2.29 Entrance lobbies will satisfy
Design considerations Requirement M1 or M2 if:
2.25 There are a number of reasons for a. their length with single swing doors is
providing a lobby: in accordance with Diagram 10;
• to limit air infiltration b. their length with double swing doors is
at least (DP1 + DP2 + 1570mm);
• to maintain comfort by controlling draughts
c. their width (excluding any projections
• to increase security
into the space) is at least 1200mm (or
• to provide transitional lighting. (DL1 or DL2) + 300mm) whichever is the
2.26 The provision of a lobby may make greater when single leaf doors are used,
it possible for an external door to have a and at least 1800mm when double leaf
self-closing device with a lower power size doors are used;
rating than might otherwise be the case. d. glazing within the lobby does not create
However, even in these circumstances, it distracting reflections;
may not be possible for the entrance door
e. floor surface materials within the
to meet the opening force criterion of 30N
lobby do not impede the movement of
at the leading edge from 0° (the door in the
wheelchairs, e.g. not coir matting, and
closed position) to 30° open, and not more
changes in floor materials do not create
than 22.5N at the leading edge from 30° to
a potential trip hazard;
60° of the opening cycle (see 2.9).
f. the floor surface helps to remove
2.27 The lobby should be large enough and
rainwater from shoes and wheelchairs;
of a shape to allow a wheelchair user or a
person pushing a pram to move clear of one g. where mat wells are provided, the
door before opening the second door. surface of the mat is level with the
The lobby should also be capable of surface of the adjacent floor finish;
accommodating a companion helping a h. any columns, ducts and similar full height
wheelchair user to open doors and guide elements that project into the lobby by
the wheelchair through. The minimum more than 100mm are protected by a
length of the lobby is related to the chosen visually contrasting guard rail.
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
27
M1/M2 ACCESS INTO BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
28
M1/M2
Section 3: Horizontal and vertical circulation
in buildings other than dwellings
OBJECTIVE a. any reception point is located away
from the principal entrance (while still
3.1 The objective is for all people to
providing a view of it) where there is a
travel vertically and horizontally within
risk that external noise will be a problem;
buildings conveniently and without
discomfort in order to make use of all b. any reception point is easily identifiable
relevant facilities. This objective relates from the entrance doors or lobby, and
in the main, but not exclusively, to the the approach to it is direct and free from
provision of sufficient space for wheelchair obstructions;
manoeuvre and design features that make it c. the design of the approach to any
possible for people to travel independently reception point allows space for
within buildings. wheelchair users to gain access to
Entrance hall and reception area the reception point;
d. the clear manoeuvring space in front
Design considerations
of any reception desk or counter is
3.2 As the entrance hall is the first point 1200mm deep and 1800mm wide if
of contact with a building’s activities and there is a knee recess at least 500mm
resources, the reception area in particular deep, or 1400mm deep and 2200mm
should not only be easily accessible but wide if there is no knee recess;
also convenient to use.
e. any reception desk or counter is designed
3.3 Where a service building has a to accommodate both standing and
reception or sales counter, there should seated visitors such that at least one
be convenient access to it and part of it section of the counter is at least 1500mm
should be at a level suitable for a wheelchair wide, with its surface no higher than
user or a seated person. Any lower section 760mm, and a knee recess, not less
should also be wheelchair-accessible on than 700mm, above floor level;
the reception side.
f. any reception point is provided with a
3.4 Designers should also be aware that hearing enhancement system, e.g. an
glazed screens in front of the reception induction loop;
point, or light sources or reflective wall
g. the floor surface is slip resistant.
surfaces, such as glazed screens, located
behind the reception point, could Internal doors
compromise the ability of a person with
a hearing impairment to lip read or follow Design considerations
sign language. 3.7 Since doors are potential barriers,
3.5 It should be possible for information their use should be avoided whenever
about the building to be easily obtained appropriate. If doors are required, the use
from a reception point or gathered from of self-closing devices should be minimised
notice boards and signs. (particularly in parts of buildings used by
the general public) since, as described in
Note: Guidance on aids to communication 2.14, they disadvantage many people who
is available in BS 8300, and on the use of have limited upper body strength, are
signs in the Sign design guide. pushing prams or are carrying heavy objects.
Provisions Where closing devices are needed for fire
control, electrically powered hold-open
3.6 An entrance hall and reception area devices or swing-free closing devices
will satisfy Requirement M1 or M2 if: should be used as appropriate. These are
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
29
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL CIRCULATION IN BUILDINGS
M1/M2 OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
devices whose closing mechanism is only e. all door opening furniture contrasts
activated in case of emergency. Low energy visually with the surface of the door;
powered door systems may be used in f. the door frames contrast visually with
locations not subject to frequent use or the surrounding wall;
heavy traffic as the opening and closing
action is relatively slow. g. the surface of the leading edge of any
door that is not self-closing, or is likely
3.8 The presence of doors, whether open to be held open, contrasts visually
or closed, should be apparent to visually with the other door surfaces and its
impaired people through the careful choice surroundings;
of colour and material for the door and its
surroundings. For example, when a door is h. where appropriate in door leaves or side
open, people with impaired sight should be panels wider than 450mm, vision panels
able to identify the door opening within the towards the leading edge of the door
wall, as well as the leading edge of the door. have vertical dimensions which include
at least the minimum zone, or zones, of
3.9 Other design considerations for visibility between 500mm and 1500mm
internal doors are as set out in 2.14 to 2.16 from the floor, if necessary interrupted
under ‘Manually operated non-powered between 800mm and 1150mm above
entrance doors’ and should be referred to the floor, e.g. to accommodate an
for guidance. intermediate horizontal rail (see
Note: Guidance is available in BS 8300 on: Approved Document K, Section 10);
– electrically powered hold-open devices i. when of glass, they are clearly defined
– swing-free systems with manifestation on the glass that
complies with Approved Document K,
– low energy powered door systems. section 7;
Provisions j. when of glass or fully glazed, they are
3.10 Internal doors will satisfy Requirement clearly differentiated from any adjacent
M1 or M2 if: glazed wall or partition by the provision
of a high-contrast strip at the top and
a. where needing to be opened manually, on both sides;
the opening force at the leading edge
of the door is not more than 30N from k. fire doors, particularly those in corridors,
0° (the door in the closed position) to are held open with an electro-magnetic
30° open, and not more than 22.5N device, but self-close when:
from 30° to 60° of the opening cycle; – activated by smoke detectors linked to
b. the effective clear width through a the door individually, or to a main fire/
single leaf door, or one leaf of a double smoke alarm system;
leaf door, is in accordance with Table 2 – the power supply fails;
and Diagram 9; – activated by a hand-operated switch;
c. there is an unobstructed space of at l. fire doors, particularly to individual rooms,
least 300mm on the pull side of the are fitted with swing-free devices that
door between the leading edge of the close when activated by smoke detectors
door and any return wall, unless the or the building’s fire alarm system, or
door has power-controlled opening or when the power supply fails;
it provides access to a standard hotel
bedroom; m. any low energy powered swing door
system is capable of being operated in
d. where fitted with a latch, the door manual mode, in powered mode or in
opening furniture can be operated with power-assisted mode.
one hand using a closed fist, e.g. a
lever handle;
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
30
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL CIRCULATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
Corridors and passageways d. the floor is level or predominantly level
(with a gradient no steeper than 1:60),
Design considerations with any section with a gradient of 1:20
3.11 Corridors and passageways should or steeper designed as an internal ramp
be wide enough to allow people with and in accordance with Table 1 and
buggies, people carrying cases or people Diagram 3;
on crutches to pass others on the access e. where a section of the floor has a
route. Wheelchair users should also have gradient, in the direction of travel,
access to adjacent rooms and spaces, steeper than 1:60, but less steep than
be able to pass other people and, where 1:20, it rises no more than 500mm
necessary, turn through 180°. Corridors without a level rest area at least 1500mm
narrower than indicated in this guidance, long (with a gradient no steeper than 1:60);
or localised narrowing (e.g. at archways),
might be reasonable in some locations, f. any sloping section extends the full
such as in existing buildings or in some width of the corridor or, if not, the
extensions. exposed edge is clearly identified by
visual contrast and, where necessary,
3.12 In order to help people with visual protected by guarding;
impairment to appreciate the size of a
space they have entered, or to find their g. any door opening towards a corridor,
way around, there should be a visual which is a major access route or an
contrast between the wall and the ceiling, escape route, should be recessed so
and between the wall and the floor. Such that, when fully open, it does not project
attention to surface finishes should be into the corridor space, except where
coupled with good natural and artificial the doors are to minor utility facilities,
lighting design. such as small store rooms and locked
duct cupboards;
3.13 Good acoustic design should be
employed to achieve an acoustic environment h. any door from a unisex wheelchair-
that is neither too reverberant nor too accessible toilet projects when open
absorbent so that announcements and into a corridor that is not a major
conversations can be heard clearly. access route or an escape route,
provided the corridor is at least
Provisions 1800mm wide at that point;
3.14 Corridors and passageways will i. on a major access route or an escape
satisfy Requirement M1 or M2 if: route, the wider leaf of a series of
a. elements such as columns, radiators double doors with leaves of unequal
and fire hoses do not project into the width is on the same side of the corridor
corridor, or where this is unavoidable, a throughout the length of the corridor;
means of directing people around them, j. floor surface finishes with patterns that
such as a visually contrasting guard rail, could be mistaken for steps or changes
is provided; of level are avoided;
b. they have an unobstructed width k. floor finishes are slip resistant;
(excluding any projections into the space)
l. any glazed screens alongside a corridor
along their length of at least 1200mm;
are clearly defined with manifestation
c. where they have an unobstructed width on the glass that complies with Approved
of less than 1800mm, they have passing Document K, section 7.
places at least 1800mm long and with
an unobstructed width of at least 1800mm
at reasonable intervals, e.g. at corridor
junctions, to allow wheelchair users to
pass each other;
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
31
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL CIRCULATION IN BUILDINGS
M1/M2 OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
Note: In respect of 3.14(b), for school 3.18 Signs indicating the location of
buildings, the preferred corridor width a lifting device accessible by mobility-
dimension is 2700mm where there are impaired people should be clearly visible
lockers within the corridor. from the building entrance. Additionally, a
sign identifying the floor reached should be
Internal lobbies provided on each landing in a location that
Design considerations can be easily seen from the lifting device
and is designed so that it contrasts visually
3.15 An internal lobby should allow a with its surrounding.
wheelchair user, with or without a companion,
or a person pushing a pram or buggy to 3.19 Whatever lifting device is chosen,
move clear of one door before attempting internal stairs should always be provided
to open the second door, as indicated in as an alternative means of vertical access,
2.27, under ‘External lobbies’. and designed to suit ambulant disabled
people and those with impaired sight.
Provisions
3.20 A ramp may also be provided on an
3.16 Internal lobbies will satisfy internal circulation route to a suitable lifting
Requirement M1 or M2 if: device, if a change of level is unavoidable.
a. their length with single swing doors is Provision of lifting devices
in accordance with Diagram 10;
b. their length with double swing doors is Design considerations
at least (DP1 + DP2 + 1570mm); 3.21 For all buildings, a passenger lift
c. their width (excluding any projections is the most suitable form of access for
into the space) is at least 1200mm (or people moving from one storey to another.
(DL1 or DL2) + 300mm) whichever is the 3.22 For existing buildings, and in
greater when single leaf doors are used, exceptional circumstances for new
and at least 1800mm when double leaf developments with particular constraints
doors are used; (e.g. a listed building or an infill site in a
d. glazing within the lobby does not create historic town centre), where a passenger
distracting reflections; lift cannot be accommodated, a vertical
lifting platform (platform lift), although not
e. any junctions of floor surface materials equivalent to a passenger lift, may be
at the entrance to the lobby area do not considered as an alternative option to
create a potential trip hazard; provide access for persons with impaired
f. any columns, ducts and similar full mobility.
height elements that project into the 3.23 In exceptional circumstances in an
lobby by more than 100mm are protected existing building, a wheelchair platform
by a visually contrasting guard rail. stairlift may be considered, provided
Vertical circulation within its installation does not conflict with
requirements for means of escape.
the building
Provisions
Design considerations
3.24 The provision of lifting devices will
3.17 A passenger lift is the most suitable satisfy Requirement M1 or M2 if:
means of vertical access and should be
provided wherever possible. However, a. new developments have a passenger lift
given the space constraints in some serving all storeys;
buildings, it may not always be possible
to install the type and size of passenger lift
that would be suitable for use by all, and
other options may need to be considered
to provide for users with mobility impairments.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
32
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL CIRCULATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
b. new developments, where due to site b. the landing call buttons are located
constraints a passenger lift cannot be between 900mm and 1100mm from the
accommodated to provide access to floor of the landing and at least 500mm
persons with impaired mobility, have a from any return wall;
lifting platform, of a type designed for c. the landing call button symbols, where
the vertical height to be travelled; provided, and lifting device control
c. existing buildings have a passenger lift button symbols are raised to facilitate
serving all storeys or, if a passenger lift tactile reading;
cannot reasonably be accommodated d. all call and control buttons contrast
to provide access to persons with visually with the surrounding face plate,
impaired mobility, they have a lifting and the face plate similarly contrasts
platform, of a type designed for the with the surface on which it is mounted;
vertical height to be travelled;
e. the floor of the lifting device should not
d. existing buildings have a wheelchair be of a dark colour and should have
platform stairlift serving an intermediate frictional qualities similar to, or higher
level or a single storey, only in exceptional than, the floor of the landing;
circumstances.
f. a handrail is provided on at least one
General requirements for wall of the lifting device with its top
lifting devices surface at 900mm (nominal) above the
floor and located so that it does not
Design considerations obstruct the controls or the mirror;
3.25 In selecting the appropriate lifting g. a suitable emergency communication
device care should be taken to ensure it is system is fitted.
fit for purpose. Relevant legislation includes
the Lift Regulations 1997 SI 1997/831, the Passenger lifts
Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment
Design considerations
Regulations 1998 SI 1998/2307, the
Provision and Use of Work Equipment 3.29 A wheelchair user needs sufficient
Regulations 1998 SI 1998/2306 and the space and time to enter and leave a
Management of Health and Safety at Work passenger lift, particularly when sharing
Regulations 1999 SI 1999/3242. it with other people. Lift sizes should
therefore be chosen to suit the anticipated
3.26 The illumination in the passenger
lift car, on the lifting platform or on the density of use of the building and the
wheelchair platform stairlift should minimise needs of disabled people. The minimum
glare, reflection, confusing shadows or size lift car shown in the provisions below
pools of light and dark. accommodates a wheelchair user with an
accompanying person. A larger lift size
3.27 All users including wheelchair users (2000mm wide by 1400mm deep) will
should be able to reach and use the controls accommodate any type of wheelchair
that summon and direct the lifting device. together with several other passengers.
Note: Further guidance is available in It will also allow a wheelchair user or a
BS 8300. person with a walking frame to turn
through 180°.
Provisions
3.30 Lift door systems should be designed
3.28 The installation of lifting devices will to allow adequate time for people, and any
satisfy Requirement M1 or M2 if: assistance dogs, to enter or leave the lift
a. there is an unobstructed manoeuvring without coming into contact with closing doors.
space of 1500mm x 1500mm, or a 3.31 People using or waiting for a lift need
straight access route 900mm wide, audible and visual information to tell them
in front of each lifting device; that a lift has arrived, which floor it has
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
33
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL CIRCULATION IN BUILDINGS
M1/M2 OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
reached and where in a bank of lifts it c. the minimum dimensions of the lift cars
is located. are 1100mm wide and 1400mm deep
3.32 The use of visually and acoustically (see Diagram 11);
reflective wall surfaces can cause d. for lifts of a size that does not allow a
discomfort for people with visual and wheelchair user to turn around within
hearing impairment. the lift car, a mirror is provided in the lift
3.33 Where planning allows, lift cars (used car to enable a wheelchair user to see
for access between two levels only) may the space behind the wheelchair;
be provided with opposing doors to allow a e. power-operated horizontal sliding doors
wheelchair user to leave without reversing out. provide an effective clear width of at
least 800mm (nominal);
Provisions
f. doors are fitted with timing devices and
3.34 Passenger lifts will satisfy Requirement re-opening activators to allow adequate
M1 or M2 if: time for people and any assistance
a. they conform to the requirements of dogs to enter or leave;
the Lift Regulations 1997, SI 1997/831 g. car controls are located between 900mm
(Note: These regulations may be met by and 1200mm (preferably 1100mm) from
compliance with, among other things, the car floor and at least 400mm from
the relevant British Standards, EN 81 any return wall;
series of standards, in particular BS EN
81-70:2003 Safety rules for the construction h. landing call buttons are located between
and installation of lifts. Particular 900mm and 1100mm from the floor of
applications for passenger and good the landing and at least 500mm from
passenger lifts, or, where necessary, any return wall;
by product certification issued by a i. lift landing and car doors are
Notified Body); distinguishable visually from the
b. they are accessible from the remainder adjoining walls;
of the storey;
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
34
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL CIRCULATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
j. audible and visual indication of lift 3.42 The use of visually and acoustically
arrival and location is provided in the lift reflective wall surfaces should be minimised
car and the lift lobby; within the lifting platform to prevent
k. areas of glass are identifiable by people discomfort for people with visual and
with impaired vision; hearing impairment.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
36
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL CIRCULATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M2
Internal stairs Handrails to internal steps,
Design considerations stairs and ramps
3.50 With the exception of the need for Design considerations
hazard warning surfaces on landings, other 3.54 The design considerations for handrails
design considerations for internal stairs are are as those for ‘Handrails to external
as those for ‘Stepped access’ (see 1.29 stepped and ramped access’ in 1.34 to 1.36.
to 1.32). It is not reasonable to require a
hazard warning surface at the head of Provisions
internal stairs since there is no recognised 3.55 Handrails to internal steps, stairs and
warning surface for use internally which ramps will satisfy Requirement M1 or M2 if
can be guaranteed not to constitute a trip they comply with Approved Document K,
hazard when used alongside flooring sections 1–3.
surfaces with different frictional resistance
characteristics. However, designers should
be aware of the potential risk of having a
stair directly in line with an access route.
For mobility-impaired people, a going of
at least 300mm is preferred.
Provisions
3.51 Internal stairs will satisfy Requirement
M1 or M2 if they comply with Approved
Document K, section 1.
Note: Diagram 12 has been moved to
Approved Document K, Section 1, all other
numbering remains the same.
Internal ramps
Design considerations
3.52 With the exception of issues relating
specifically to the external environment,
the design considerations for internal ramps
are as those for ‘Ramped access’ (see 1.19
to 1.25). It is worth reiterating that ramps
are not necessarily safe and convenient for
ambulant disabled people. For example, some
people who can walk but have restricted
mobility find it more difficult to negotiate a
ramp than a stair. Unless, therefore, a ramp
is short, has a shallow gradient and the rise
is no more than the minimum that can be
provided by two risers, steps should be
provided as well as a ramp.
Provisions
3.53 Internal ramps will satisfy
Requirement M1 or M2 if they comply with
Approved Document K, section 2.
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
37
M1
Section 4: Facilities in buildings other
than dwellings
OBJECTIVES Audience facilities generally
4.1 The aim is for all people to have 4.6 Wheelchair users and those with
access to, and the use of, all the facilities mobility or sensory impairment may need
provided within buildings. They should also to view or listen from a particular side, or
be able to participate in the proceedings sit in the front for lip reading or to read sign
at lecture/conference facilities and at interpreters. They should be provided with
entertainment or leisure and social venues, spaces into which they can manoeuvre
not only as spectators, but also as easily, and which offer them a clear view
participants and/or staff. of an event, while ensuring they are not
segregated into special areas. Wheelchair
4.2 Where permanent or removable
users, people who have difficulty in using
seating is provided as part of the design,
seats with fixed arms and those with
allowance should be made for disabled
assistance dogs should also have the
people to have a choice of seating location
choice of sitting next to a conventionally
at spectator events. It should also be
seated person or a companion wheelchair
possible for them to have a clear view of the
user. Consideration should be given to
activity taking place while not obstructing
providing an area next to certain seats for
the view of others.
an assistance dog to rest. By having some
4.3 In refreshment facilities, bars and removable seating at the front and back
counters (or sections of them) should be of blocks of seats (possibly in complete
at a level suitable for wheelchair users. All rows), greater flexibility in location can be
floor areas, even when located at different achieved and a greater number of wheelchair
levels, should be accessible. users than the minimum provision shown in
4.4 A proportion of the sleeping Table 3 can be accommodated.
accommodation in hotels, motels and 4.7 Greater spacing between rows of
student accommodation should be designed seats at the rear of a block of seating, or at
for independent use by wheelchair users. the end of rows, may provide extra legroom
The remainder should include facilities that for people of large stature. With several
make them suitable for people who do not seats removed, these locations may also
use a wheelchair, but may have mobility, be suitable for wheelchair users. It is
sensory, dexterity or learning difficulties. desirable for seating to contrast visually
with the surroundings.
Audience and spectator facilities
4.8 All users of facilities should be able
Design considerations to locate suitable seating and move safely
4.5 Audience and spectator facilities fall and easily to and from the seating area and
primarily into three categories: ancillary accommodation, such as lavatories,
dining rooms and bedroom suites.
a. lecture/conference facilities
Lecture/conference facilities
b. entertainment facilities (e.g. theatres/
cinemas) 4.9 People with hearing impairments
should be able to participate fully in
c. sports facilities (e.g. stadia).
conferences, committee meetings and
Note: The guidance here relates mainly to study groups. All people should be able to
seating. For guidance on reception and use presentation facilities. Consideration
sales counters, refer to 3.2 to 3.5. should be given to good sight lines and the
design and location of lecture equipment
(demonstration table, lectern, projection
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
38
FACILITIES IN BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1
screen) to ensure that patterned walls,
Table 3 Provision of wheelchair space
poor interior lighting or very bright natural
in audience seating
back-lighting does not have a detrimental
effect on the ability of people to receive Seating Minimum provision of
capacity spaces for wheelchairs
information from a sign language interpreter Permanent Removable
or a lip speaker (see 4.32 to 4.34).
Up to 600 1% of total seating Remainder to make
Entertainment, leisure and social facilities capacity (rounded up) a total of 6
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
39
M1 FACILITIES IN BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
i. some seats are located so that an Provisions
assistance dog can accompany its 4.16 Refreshment facilities will satisfy
owner and rest in front of, or under, Requirement M1 if:
the seat;
a. all users have access to all parts of
j. standard seats at the ends of rows the facility;
and next to wheelchair spaces have
detachable, or lift-up, arms; b. part of the working surface of a bar or
serving counter is permanently accessible
For seating on a stepped terraced floor to wheelchair users, and at a level of
k. wheelchair spaces at the back of a not more than 850mm above the floor
stepped terraced floor are provided and, where necessary, part at a higher
in accordance with Diagram 14 or 15, level for people standing;
the arrangement in Diagram 15 being c. the worktop of a shared refreshment
particularly suitable for entertainment facility (e.g. for tea making) is at 850mm
buildings, such as theatres or cinemas, above the floor with a clear space
subject to the approval of the licensing beneath at least 700mm above the floor
authority; (see Diagram 16) and the delivery of
For lecture/conference facilities water complies with 5.4(a) and (b);
l. where a podium or stage is provided, d. a wheelchair-accessible threshold
wheelchair users have access to it by (see 2.7(e)) is located at the transition
means of a ramp or lifting platform; between an external seating area and
m. a hearing enhancement system in the interior of the facility.
accordance with 4.36 is provided for
people with impaired hearing.
Refreshment facilities
Design considerations
4.13 Refreshment facilities, such as
restaurants and bars, should be designed so
that they can be reached and used by all
people independently or with companions.
Staff areas should also be accessible.
4.14 All public areas, including lavatory
accommodation, public telephones and
external terraces should be accessible.
Where premises contain self-service and
waiter service, all patrons should have
access to both.
4.15 In many refreshment facilities,
changes in level are used to differentiate
between different functions or to create a
certain atmosphere through interior design.
Changes of floor level are acceptable
provided the different levels are accessible.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
40
FACILITIES IN BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1
Diagram 14 Possible location of wheelchair spaces in front of a rear aisle
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
41
M1 FACILITIES IN BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
4.19 Wheelchair-accessible bedrooms
Diagram 16 An example of a shared
should be sufficiently spacious to enable a
refreshment facility
wheelchair user to transfer to one side of a
bed, with or without assistance. Wheelchair
users should be able to manoeuvre around
and use the facilities in the room, and
operate switches and controls. They
should also be able to gain access to and
conveniently use sanitary accommodation
and, where provided, balconies. En-suite
sanitary facilities are the preferred option
for wheelchair-accessible bedrooms.
Unless there are compelling reasons for
not doing so, there should be at least as
many en-suite shower rooms as en-suite
bathrooms, as mobility-impaired people
may find it easier to use a shower than a
bath. An en-suite shower room or bathroom
would benefit from having a finger rinse
basin adjacent to the WC, as well as a
wash basin or basin in a vanity unit.
4.20 It is also important to ensure that,
Sleeping accommodation in all bedrooms, built-in wardrobes and
shelving are accessible and convenient
Design considerations to use. It is an advantage if curtains and
4.17 Sleeping accommodation, where blinds are provided with automatic or other
provided for a significant number of remotely controlled opening devices such
people, e.g. in hotels, motels and student as rods or pull cords.
accommodation, should aim to be convenient 4.21 Wheelchair users should also be able
for all. People who use wheelchairs are likely to visit companions in other bedrooms,
to require greater provision of space and for example when attending conferences
access to en-suite sanitary accommodation. or when on holiday with their families. In
A proportion of rooms will, therefore, need these instances, bedrooms not designed
to accommodate wheelchair users. In for independent use by a person in a
student accommodation, it is beneficial to wheelchair need to have the outer door
have a wheelchair-accessible toilet available wide enough to be accessible to a
for use by disabled visitors. wheelchair user.
4.18 Wheelchair users should be able to 4.22 For a proportion of wheelchair-
reach all the facilities available within the accessible bedrooms, it would be useful to
building. In general, accessible bedrooms provide a connecting door to an adjacent
should be no less advantageously situated bedroom for a companion.
than other bedrooms. It would be beneficial
if entrance doors to wheelchair-accessible 4.23 For people with limited manual
bedrooms were powered opening, as this dexterity, electronic card-activated locks
could avoid the need for the 300mm for bedroom entrance doors and lever taps
access space adjacent to the leading in sanitary accommodation can be an
edge of the door. advantage.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
42
FACILITIES IN BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1
Provisions l. the size of wheelchair-accessible
4.24 Sleeping accommodation will satisfy bedrooms allows for a wheelchair user
Requirement M1 if: to manoeuvre at the side of a bed, then
transfer independently to it. An example
For all bedrooms of a wheelchair-accessible bedroom
a. the effective clear width of the door layout is shown in Diagram 17;
from the access corridor complies m. sanitary facilities, en-suite to a
with Table 2; wheelchair-accessible bedroom,
b. swing doors, where provided for built-in comply with the provisions of 5.15
wardrobes and other storage systems, to 5.21 for ‘Wheelchair-accessible
open through 180°; bathrooms’ or ‘Wheelchair-accessible
shower facilities’;
c. handles on hinged and sliding doors are
easy to grip and operate and contrast n. wide angle viewers, where provided
visually with the surface of the door; in the entrance door to a wheelchair-
accessible bedroom, are located at
d. openable windows and window controls
1050mm and 1500mm above floor level,
are located between 800 and 1000mm
to enable viewing by people who are
above the floor and are easy to operate
seated or standing;
without using both hands simultaneously;
o. a balcony, where provided to a
e. all bedrooms have a visual fire alarm
wheelchair-accessible bedroom, has a
signal, in addition to the requirements
door whose effective clear width complies
of Part B;
with Table 2, has a level threshold and
f. any room numbers are indicated in has no horizontal transoms between
embossed characters; 900mm and 1200mm above the floor;
For wheelchair-accessible bedrooms p. there are no permanent obstructions
g. at least one wheelchair-accessible in a zone 1500mm back from any
bedroom is provided for every 20 balcony doors;
bedrooms, or part thereof; q. an emergency assistance alarm
h. wheelchair-accessible bedrooms are (together with a reset button) is located
located on accessible routes that lead in a wheelchair-accessible bedroom
to all other available facilities within and activated by a pull cord, sited so
the building; that it can be operated both from the
bed and from an adjacent floor area;
i. wheelchair-accessible bedrooms
are designed to provide a choice of r. an emergency assistance call signal
location and have a standard of amenity outside an accessible bedroom is located
equivalent to that of other bedrooms; so that it can be easily seen and heard
by those able to give assistance and,
j. the door from the access corridor to a in any case, at a central control point.
wheelchair-accessible bedroom complies
with the relevant provisions of ‘Internal Switches, outlets and controls
doors’ (see 3.10), in particular the
Design considerations
maximum permissible opening force,
Table 2 and the need for a clear space 4.25 The key factors that affect the use of
of 300mm from the leading edge of the switches, outlets and controls are ease of
door to the side wall; operation, visibility, height and freedom
from obstruction. However, there will be
k. the effective clear width of any door to
exceptions to height requirements for
an en-suite bathroom or shower room
some outlets, e.g. those set into the floor
within the wheelchair-accessible
in open plan offices.
bedroom complies with Table 2;
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
43
M1 FACILITIES IN BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
44
FACILITIES IN BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1
e. pull cords for emergency alarm systems the boundaries of rooms or spaces, identify
are coloured red, located as close to access routes and receive information. For
a wall as possible and have two red example, glare and reflections from shiny
50mm diameter bangles, one set at surfaces, and large repeating patterns,
100mm and the other set between should be avoided in spaces where visual
800mm and 1000mm above the floor; acuity is critical as they will hamper
f. controls that need close vision are communication for people with impaired
located between 1200mm and 1400mm vision, and those who lip read or use sign
above the floor so that readings may be language. This would apply to locations
taken by a person sitting or standing (with such as reception areas with enquiry desks
thermostats at the top of the range); and speakers’ rostrums in lecture halls.
g. socket outlets are located consistently 4.33 The type and quality of public address,
in relation to doorways and room hearing enhancement and telephone
corners, but in any case no nearer systems should be chosen carefully to
than 350mm from room corners; ensure intelligibility. The design of the
acoustic environment should also ensure
h. light switches for use by the general that audible information can be heard clearly.
public have large push pads and align
horizontally with door handles within 4.34 Artificial lighting should be designed
the range 900 to 1100mm, for ease of to give good colour rendering of all surfaces,
location when entering a room; without creating glare or pools of bright light
and strong shadows. Where appropriate,
i. where switches described in 4.30(h) lighting should illuminate the face of a
cannot be provided, lighting pull cords person speaking, to make lip reading
are set between 900mm and 1100mm easier where one-to-one communication
above floor level, and fitted with a is necessary. Uplighters mounted at low
50mm diameter bangle visually or floor level can disorientate some visually
contrasting with its background and impaired people and should be avoided.
distinguishable visually from any
emergency assistance pull cord; 4.35 In order to obtain the full benefit of
attending public performances or taking
j the operation of switches, outlets and part in discussions, a person with impaired
controls does not require the simultaneous hearing needs to receive a signal that is
use of both hands, except where this amplified in both volume and signal to
mode of operation is necessary for noise ratio. The three systems commonly
safety reasons; used to provide this enhanced level of
k. switched socket outlets indicate sound are induction loop, infrared and radio.
whether they are ‘on’; Sound field systems are also increasingly
being used, particularly in educational
l. mains and circuit isolator switches
establishments. In larger spaces, provision
clearly indicate that they are on or off;
needs to be made for a permanent system,
m. front plates contrast visually with their but in small meeting rooms, a portable
backgrounds. induction loop would be acceptable. It
should be recognised that there is the
Aids to communication danger where adjacent spaces each have
Design considerations an induction loop system that the signals
may overlap.
4.31 People will benefit most if there is an
integrated system for wayfinding, public Note: Detailed guidance on surface
address and hearing enhancement. finishes, visual, audible and tactile signs, as
well as the characteristics and appropriate
4.32 The appropriate choice of floor, wall
choice and use of hearing enhancement
and ceiling surface materials and finishes
systems, is available in BS 8300.
can help visually impaired people appreciate
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
45
M1 FACILITIES IN BUILDINGS OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
Provisions
4.36 Aids to communication will satisfy
Requirement M1 if:
a. a clearly audible public address system
is supplemented by visual information;
b. provision for a hearing enhancement
system is installed in rooms and spaces
designed for meetings, lectures, classes,
performances, spectator sport or films,
and at service or reception counters
when they are situated in noisy areas
or they are behind glazed screens;
c. the presence of an induction loop or
infrared hearing enhancement system
is indicated by the standard symbol;
d. telephones suitable for hearing aid users
are clearly indicated by the standard
ear and ‘T’ symbol and incorporate an
inductive coupler and volume control;
e. text telephones for deaf and hard of
hearing people are clearly indicated by
the standard symbol;
f. artificial lighting is designed to be
compatible with other electronic and
radio frequency installations.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
46
M1/M3
Section 5: Sanitary accommodation in
buildings other than dwellings
OBJECTIVES for Water Fittings, of the Water Supply
(Water Fittings) Regulations 1999,
5.1 In principle, suitable sanitary
SI 1999/1148;
accommodation should be available to
everybody, including sanitary accommodation c. door handles and other ironmongery
designed for wheelchair users, ambulant comply with provisions 3.10 (d) and (e)
disabled people, people of either sex of ‘Internal doors’;
with babies and small children or people d. WC compartment doors, and doors
encumbered by luggage. to wheelchair-accessible unisex toilets,
5.2 In multi-storey buildings, the consistent changing rooms or shower rooms are
location of toilets on each floor can help fitted with light action privacy bolts so
people with learning difficulties to locate that they can be operated by people
these facilities easily. with limited dexterity and, if required to
self-close, can be opened using a force
Sanitary accommodation generally at the leading edge of not more than
Design considerations 30N from 0° (the door in the closed
position) to 30° open, and not more
5.3 A number of issues need to be than 22.5N from 30° to 60° of the
considered in connection with all forms of opening cycle;
sanitary accommodation. These relate to
the needs of people with visual or hearing e. WC compartment doors, and doors
impairments, people with learning difficulties to wheelchair-accessible unisex toilets,
and people whose lack of tactile sensitivity changing rooms or shower rooms have
can cause them to be injured by touching an emergency release mechanism so
hot surfaces. Taps and WC cubicle doors that they are capable of being opened
should be operable by people with limited outwards, from the outside, in case of
strength or manual dexterity and doors emergency;
to cubicles should be capable of being f. doors, when open, do not obstruct
opened if a person has collapsed against emergency escape routes;
them while inside the cubicle. Preferably,
g. any fire alarm emits a visual and audible
all doors to WC cubicles and wheelchair-
signal to warn occupants with hearing
accessible unisex toilets open out or, if
or visual impairments;
they open in, the door swing should not
encroach into the wheelchair turning space h. any emergency assistance alarm
or minimum activity space. Where possible, system has:
light switches with large push pads should i. visual and audible indicators to
be used in preference to pull cords (see 4.28). confirm that an emergency call has
Provisions been received;
5.4 Sanitary accommodation will satisfy ii. a reset control reachable from a
Requirement M1 or M3 if: wheelchair and the WC, or from
the wheelchair and the shower/
a. any bath or washbasin tap is either changing seat;
controlled automatically, or is capable
of being operated using a closed fist, iii. a signal that is distinguishable
e.g. by lever action; visually and audibly from the
fire alarm.
b. terminal fittings comply with Guidance
Note G18.5 of the Guidance Document I. any lighting controls comply with the
relating to Schedule 2: Requirements provisions for ‘Switches and controls’,
see 4.30;
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
47
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
M1/M3 OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
j. any heat emitters are either screened or diagram 48 and Annexes F and G of BS
have their exposed surfaces kept at a 8300-2:2018.
temperature below 43°C; Note: For specific guidance on the provision of
k. the surface finish of sanitary fittings sanitary accommodation in sports buildings,
and grab bars contrasts visually with refer to ‘accessible sports facilities’.
background wall and floor finishes, and
there is also visual contrast between Provisions
wall and floor finishes. 5.7 The provision of toilet accommodation
will satisfy Requirement M1or M3 if:
Provision of toilet accommodation
a. where there is space for only one toilet
Design considerations in a building, it is of a wheelchair-
5.5 Toilet accommodation needs to be accessible unisex type, but of greater
suitable, not only for disabled people, but for width to accommodate a standing
all people who use the building. For disabled height wash basin;
people, suitable toilet accommodation may b. at least one wheelchair-accessible
take the form of a specially designed cubicle unisex toilet is provided at each location
in separate-sex toilet washrooms, or a self- in a building where sanitary facilities
contained unisex toilet. For wheelchair users are provided for use by customers and
in particular, a self-contained unisex toilet visitors to a building, or by people
is always the preferred option since, if working in the building;
necessary, a partner or carer of a different
c. at least one WC cubicle is provided in
sex can enter to give assistance. Wheelchair-
separate-sex toilet accommodation for
accessible unisex toilets should always be
use by ambulant disabled people;
provided in addition to any wheelchair-
accessible accommodation in separate-sex d. where there are four or more WC
toilet washrooms. Wheelchair-accessible cubicles in separate-sex toilet
unisex toilets should not be used for baby accommodation, one of these is an
changing. enlarged cubicle for use by people
who need extra space, in addition to
5.6 The provision of an enlarged cubicle
in a separate-sex toilet washroom can be any provision under 5.7(c);
of benefit to ambulant disabled people, as e. at least one changing places toilet is
well as parents with children and people provided in the following types of
(e.g. those with luggage) who need an building:
enlarged space. In large building i. assembly, recreation and
developments, separate facilities for baby entertainment buildings (see note)
changing and an enlarged unisex toilet with a capacity for 350 or more
incorporating an adult changing table are people; or a collection of smaller
desirable. Changing places toilets, facilities buildings associated with a site used
designed for individuals with complex and for assembly, recreation or
multiple impairments who may require the entertainment, such as zoos, theme
assistance of up to two assistants, should parks and venues for sport and
be provided in addition to any wheelchair- exhibitions, with a capacity of 2000
accessible accommodation in separate- people or more;
sex toilet washrooms, wheelchair-
accessible unisex toileting facilities and ii. shopping centres/malls or retail
baby changing facilities. Further guidance parks with a gross floor area of
on layout and equipment is available from 30,000m2 or more;
the Changing Places Consortium campaign iii. retail premises with a gross floor
website (www.changing-places.org) and by area of 2500m2 or more;
reference to guidance in section 18.6,
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
48
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M3
iv. sport and leisure buildings with a Wheelchair-accessible
gross floor area more than 5000m2; unisex toilets
v. hospitals and primary care centres;
Design considerations
vi. crematoria and cemetery buildings.
5.8 Wheelchair users should be able to
Note: Places of assembly, recreation approach, transfer to and use the sanitary
and entertainment can be defined as facilities provided within a building. This
buildings such as: requires the provision of a wheelchair-
– amusement arcades; accessible unisex toilet. The relationship of
the WC to the finger rinse basin and other
– art galleries; accessories should allow a person to wash
– cinemas; and dry hands while seated on the WC. The
space provided for manoeuvring should
– concert halls;
enable wheelchair users to adopt various
– conference centres; transfer techniques that allow independent
– further education colleges; or assisted use. It is important that the
transfer space alongside the WC is kept
– hotels that provide function, sport or clear to the back wall. When transferring
leisure facilities; to and from their wheelchair, some people
– libraries open to the public; need horizontal support rails. The rail on
– motorway service areas; the open side is a drop-down rail, but on
the wall side, it can be a wall-mounted
– museums; grab rail (which is thought to give a more
– places of worship; rigid handhold) set at a greater distance
than normal from the wall or, alternatively,
– theatres;
a second drop-down rail in addition to the
– university buildings open to the wall-mounted grab rail where the grab rail
public; is spaced at the minimum distance from
r any other buildings or sites as defined
o the wall and therefore does not give the
by these thresholds, which same degree of support.
are open to the public and used for the 5.9 A unisex toilet is approached separately
purpose of assembly, recreation or from other sanitary accommodation. It is
entertainment. Capacities should be more easily identified than a wheelchair-
derived from the combined total of a accessible cubicle in a separate-sex toilet
building’s publicly accessible facilities. washroom and, provided it is used only by
Alternatively, the capacity number may disabled people, it is more likely to be
be taken as the number of fixed seats available when required. This is particularly
provided, if the occupants of the building important as some disabled people need to
will normally be seated. Approved use a toilet more frequently than other users.
Document B, Volume 2 provides a The time needed to reach a wheelchair-
method for estimating the capacity of accessible toilet should therefore be kept
a building where this is not known. to a minimum when considering the
he Department for Education will
T location of unisex toilet accommodation. In
publish separate guidance regarding addition, a unisex toilet enables one or two
changing places toilets in schools assistants of either sex to assist a disabled
providing community facilities in 2021. person. Consideration should be given
to installing a chemical sanitary waste
disposal unit in wheelchair-accessible WC
accommodation. Some wheelchair users
find it difficult to use a standard height WC
seat and, for them, it is important that the
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
49
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
M1/M3 OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
WC pan can accept a variable height toilet floor of the building, but is accessible
seat riser. WC pans manufactured to the by passenger lift (if a lifting platform
key dimensions given in BS EN 997:2012 is installed, vertical travel to a unisex
WC pans and WC suites with integral trap toilet is limited to one storey);
would be acceptable. i. the minimum overall dimensions of,
Note: More detailed guidance on the various and the arrangement of fittings within,
techniques used to transfer from a wheelchair a wheelchair-accessible unisex toilet
to a WC, as well as appropriate sanitary comply with Diagram 18;
and other fittings, is given in BS 8300. j. where the horizontal support rail on the
Provisions wall adjacent to the WC is set with the
minimum spacing from the wall, an
5.10 Wheelchair-accessible unisex toilets additional drop-down rail is provided
will satisfy Requirement M1 or M3 if: on the wall side at a distance of 320mm
a. one is located as close as possible to from the centre line of the WC;
the entrance and/or waiting area of k. where the horizontal support rail on the
the building; wall adjacent to the WC is set so that its
b. they are not located in a way that centre line is 400mm from the centre
compromises the privacy of users; line of the WC, there is no additional
c. they are located in a similar position drop-down rail;
on each floor of a multi-storey building, l. the heights and arrangement of fittings
and allow for right- and left-hand in a wheelchair-accessible unisex toilet
transfer on alternate floors; comply with Diagram 19 and, as
d. when more than one unisex toilet is appropriate, Diagram 20;
available in other than multi-storey m. an emergency assistance alarm system
buildings, a choice of layouts suitable is provided, complying with 5.4;
for left-hand and right-hand transfer n. the emergency assistance call signal
is provided; outside the toilet compartment is
e. when it is the only toilet facility in the located so that it can be easily seen and
building, the width is increased from heard by those able to give assistance;
1.5m to 2m and it includes a standing o. an emergency assistance pull cord
height washbasin, in addition to the is easily identifiable (see 4.30(e)) and
finger rinse basin associated with the WC; reachable from the WC and from the
f. they are located on accessible routes floor close to the WC;
that are direct and obstruction free; p. any heat emitters are located so that
g. doors are preferably outward opening they do not restrict the minimum clear
and are fitted with a horizontal closing wheelchair manoeuvring space, nor the
bar fixed to the inside face; space beside the WC used for transfer
h. any wheelchair user does not have from the wheelchair to the WC;
to travel: q. WC pans conform to BS EN 997:2012
i. more than 40m on the same floor, in terms of key dimensions in order to
unless a greater distance can be agreed accommodate the use of a variable
with the building control body on the height toilet seat riser (see 5.9);
grounds that the circulation route is r. cisterns for WCs that will be used by
unobstructed, e.g. by the installation wheelchair users have their flushing
of doors with hold-open devices; mechanism positioned on the open or
ii. more than a 40m combined transfer side of the space, irrespective
horizontal distance where the unisex of handing.
toilet accommodation is on another
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
50
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M3
Diagram 18 Unisex wheelchair-accessible toilet with corner WC
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
51
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
M1/M3 OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
52
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M3
and, for men, at least one urinal with its
Diagram 21 WC cubicle for ambulant
rim set at 380mm above the floor, with
disabled people
two 600mm long vertical grab bars with
their centre lines at 1100mm above the
floor, positioned either side of the urinal.
Wheelchair-accessible changing
and shower facilities
Design considerations
5.15 A choice of shower layout combined
with the correct location of shower controls
and fittings will allow disabled people to
use the facilities independently or be
assisted by others when necessary. For
guidance on the provision of en-suite
shower facilities associated with hotel
bedrooms, see 4.19.
5.16 In buildings where changing facilities
are associated with showering facilities,
many disabled people will be content to
use changing and shower areas that are
open but provided with subdivisions,
whereas some will require the privacy and
convenience of an individual self-contained
cubicle or compartment. The dimensions
of the self-contained compartment allow
c. doors to compartments for ambulant space for a helper. Any combined facility
disabled people are preferably outward should be divided into distinct ‘wet’ and
opening and are fitted with a horizontal ‘dry’ areas. In open changing and shower
closing bar fixed to the inside face; areas, it may be difficult to provide a
configuration of handrails, controls and
d. an enlarged compartment for those
seat suitable for all disabled people to use.
who need extra space (based on the
Individual self-contained accommodation
compartment for ambulant disabled
is therefore preferred although, if it contains
people) is 1200mm wide and includes
a WC, it should not be the only wheelchair-
a horizontal grab bar adjacent to the
accessible toilet accommodation.
WC, a vertical grab bar on the rear wall
and space for a shelf and fold-down 5.17 In the case of individual changing
changing table; rooms not associated with showering,
e.g. in clothes shops, the dimensions and
e. any compartment for use by ambulant
fittings recommended for an individual
disabled people has a WC pan that
self-contained changing cubicle in a sports
conforms to BS EN 997:2012 in terms
building should be provided. In large
of key dimensions, in order to
building complexes, such as retail parks and
accommodate the use of a variable
large sports centres, there should be one
height toilet seat riser (see 5.9 and 5.11);
wheelchair-accessible unisex toilet capable
f. a wheelchair-accessible compartment of including an adult changing table.
(where provided) has the same layout
Note 1: For sports buildings, details of
and fittings as the unisex toilet;
different types of changing and shower
g. any wheelchair-accessible washroom facilities are given in ‘accessible sports
has at least one washbasin with its rim facilities’.
set at 720 to 740mm above the floor
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
53
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
M1/M3 OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
Note 2: More detailed guidance on or communal changing areas;
appropriate sanitary and other fittings For shower facilities
is given in BS 8300.
k. individual self-contained shower
Provisions facilities comply with Diagram 23;
5.18 Wheelchair-accessible changing and l. where showers are provided in
shower facilities will satisfy Requirement commercial developments for the
M1 or M3 if: benefit of staff, at least one wheelchair-
For changing and shower facilities accessible shower compartment
complying with Diagram 23 should
a. a choice of layouts suitable for left-hand be provided;
and right-hand transfer is provided when
more than one individual changing m. a shower curtain, which encloses the
compartment or shower compartment seat and the rails when they are in a
is available; horizontal position, can be operated
from the shower seat;
b. they are provided with wall-mounted
drop-down support rails and wall- n. a shelf that can be reached from the
mounted slip-resistant tip-up seats shower seat or from the wheelchair,
(not spring loaded); before or after transfer, is provided
for toiletries;
c. in communal shower facilities and
changing facilities, they are provided o. the floor of the shower and shower area
with subdivisions that have the same is slip resistant and self-draining;
configuration of space and equipment p. a shower terminal fitting complies with
as for self-contained facilities but Guidance Note G18.5 of the Guidance
without doors; Document relating to Schedule 2:
d. in sports facilities, individual self- Requirement for Water Fittings, of the
contained shower facilities and changing Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations
facilities are available in addition to 1999, SI 1999/1148, and the markings on
communal separate-sex facilities; the shower control are logical and clear;
e. an emergency assistance pull cord, q. where wheelchair-accessible shower
complying with 4.30(e), is easily facilities are available in communal
identifiable and reachable from the areas, shower controls are positioned
wall-mounted tip-up seat, or from the between 750 and 1000mm above
floor; the floor;
f. an emergency assistance alarm system For shower facilities incorporating a WC
complying with 5.4(h) is provided; r. the minimum overall dimensions of, and
g. facilities for limb storage are included the arrangement of fittings within, an
for the benefit of amputees; individual self-contained shower area
incorporating a corner WC, e.g. in a
For changing facilities sports building, comply with Diagram 24;
h. the minimum overall dimensions of, s. a choice of left-hand and right-hand
and the arrangement of equipment and transfer layouts is available when more
controls within, individual self-contained than one shower area incorporating a
changing facilities comply with Diagram 22; corner WC is provided.
i. when associated with shower facilities, Note: Guidance prepared by the Health
the floor of a changing area is level and and Safety Executive on the slip resistance
slip resistant when dry or when wet; of floor surfaces is given in Annex C of
j. there is a manoeuvring space 1500mm BS 8300.
deep in front of lockers in self-contained
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
54
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M3
Diagram 22 An example of a self-contained changing room for individual use
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
55
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
M1/M3 OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
56
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M3
Diagram 24 An example of a shower room incorporating a corner WC for individual use
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
57
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
M1/M3 OTHER THAN DWELLINGS
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
58
SANITARY ACCOMMODATION IN BUILDINGS
OTHER THAN DWELLINGS M1/M3
Diagram 26 Grab rails and fittings associated with a bath
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
59
M
Standards referred to
BS EN 81-70:2003
Safety rules for the construction and
installation of lifts. Particular applications
for passenger and good passengers lifts.
Accessibility to lifts for persons including
persons with disability. AMD 14675 2003,
AMD 14751 2003.
BS 3402:1969
Specification for quality of vitreous china
sanitary appliances. AMD 714 1971,
AMD 4922 1989.
BS 5395-1:2000
Stairs, ladders and walkways. Code of
practice for the design, construction and
maintenance of straight stairs and winders.
BS 5588-8:1999
Fire precautions in the design, construction
and use of buildings, Code of practice for
means of escape for disabled people.
AMD 14922 2004.
BS 7594:1993
Code of practice for audio-frequency
induction-loop systems (AFILS).
BS 8300:2001
Design of buildings and their approaches
to meet the needs of disabled people –
Code of practice. AMD 15617 2005,
AMD 15982 2005.
BS 8300: 2009 +A1:2010
Design of buildings and their approaches
to meet the needs of disabled people.
Code of practice.
BS 8300-2:2018
Design of an accessible and inclusive built
environment. Buildings. Code of practice.
BS EN 997:2012
WC pans and WC suites with integral trap.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
60
M
Other publications referred to
Department for Education and Disabled Persons Transport Advisory
Employment (DfEE) Committee (DPTAC)
Building Bulletin 91 Access for disabled Access directory – an online directory and
people to school buildings. Management search tool for references on accessibility
and design guide, 1999. ISBN 0 11271 062 X guidance for the built environment.
Building Bulletin 94 Inclusive school design. Available to download from
Accommodating pupils with special www.dptac.gov.uk/
educational needs and disabilities in District Surveyors Association (DSA)
mainstream schools, 2001. ISBN 0 11271 109 X and Association of British Theatre
Department for Environment, Food and Technicians (ABTT)
Rural Affairs (DEFRA) Technical standards for places of
Water supply (water fittings) regulations entertainment, 2002. ISBN 1 90403 105 6
1999. Guidance document relating to Football Stadia Improvement Fund (FSIF)
Schedule 1: Fluid categories and Schedule and Football Licensing Authority (FLA)
2: Requirements for water fittings.
Available to download from www.defra.gov. Sports Ground and Stadia Guide No 1
uk/environment/water/industry/wsregs99/ Accessible stadia, 2003. ISBN 0 95462 930 2
guide/section8.htm Available to download from
www.sportengland.org/disabled.pdf
Department for Transport (DfT)
JMU Access Partnership and Sign
Inclusive mobility: A guide to best practice Design Society
on access to pedestrian and transport
infrastructure, 2002. Available to download Sign design guide, 2000.
from www.dft.gov.uk/stellent/groups/dft_
mobility/documents/page/dft_mobility_
503282-01.hcsp as hardcopy from DfT free
literature service on 0870 1226236 (ref:
IM/01) or as an audio cassette from the DfT
Mobility and Inclusion Unit on 020 7944
6100 or Minicom 020 7944 3277
Department of National Heritage (DNH)
Guide to safety at sports grounds
(The green guide). 4th edition, 1997.
ISBN 0 11300 095 2
Department of the Environment
Transport and the Regions (DETR)
Guidance on the use of tactile paving
surfaces, 1998.
Available to download
from www.dft.gov.uk/stellent/groups/
dft_mobility/documents/pdf/dft_mobility_
pdf_503283.pdf
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
61
M OTHER PUBLICATIONS REFERRED TO
Office of the Deputy Prime
Minister (ODPM)
Planning and access for disabled people.
A good practice guide, 2003.
ISBN 1 85112 604 X
Available to download from www.odpm.
gov.uk/index.asp?id=1144644
Research Group for Inclusive
Environments
Colour, contrast and perception. Design
guidance for internal built environments, 2004.
Available from Research Group for Inclusive
Environments, School of Construction
Management, University of Reading,
tel 0118 9316734, textphone 0118 9864253
Sport England
Accessible sports facilities, 2010
(Formerly known as Access for Disabled
People). Available to download from
http://www.sportengland.org/facilities__
planning/design_and_cost_guidance/idoc.
ashx?docid=62299267-f2a5-451f-8731-
4bcfdafa08ea&version=-1
The Stationery Office (TSO)
Accessible thresholds in new housing.
Guidance for house builders and designers,
1999. ISBN 0 11702 333 7
Legislation
Equality Act 2010
Equality Act 2010 (Disability) Regulations 2010
Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment
Regulations 1998, SI 1998/2307.
Lifts Regulations 1997, SI 1997/831.
Management of Health and Safety at Work
Regulations 1999, SI 1999/3242.
Provision and Use of Work Equipment
Regulations 1998, SI 1998/2306.
Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations
1999, SI 1999/1148.
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
62
M
Index
A B
Access – definition 0.26 Baby changing facilities 5.5–5.6, 5.12
Access into buildings 2.1–2.29 Balconies 4.19, 4.24
Access routes to buildings, see Approaches Bars – refreshment facilities 4.3, 4.13–4.16
Access routes within buildings 0.5, 0.11, 3.14 Bathrooms, see Sanitary accommodation
Access strategy 0.20–0.25 Bedrooms 4.4, 4.17–4.24
Accessible – definition 0.26 Bedrooms – balconies 4.19, 4.24
Accessible entrances 1.6, 2.1–2.7 Bedrooms – doors 3.10, 4.22–4.24
Acoustic design 3.13 Bedrooms – en-suite bedrooms 4.19, 4.24
Alterations, see Material alterations Bedrooms – hotels and motels 4.17–4.24
Application of Part M 0.1–0.13 Bedrooms – wardrobes 4.20
Approaches – hazards 1.5, 1.38–1.39 Bedrooms – wheelchair accessible
Approaches – level (non-domestic) 1.6–1.13 4.17–4.24
Approaches – surfaces 1.13 BS 8300 0.9, 3.5 note, 3.9 note, 3.27 note,
4.35 note, 5.17 note, 5.18 note, 5.21 note
Approaches – widths 1.2, 1.10–1.11, 1.13
BS EN 997 5.9-5.10, 5.14
Artificial lighting, see Lighting
Assistance dogs 2.20, 4.6 C
Audible emergency assistance call signals Car parking 0.5, 0.9, 0.13, 1.14–1.18
4.24, 5.4 Change of use 0.10–0.12
Audible information – lifting devices 3.31, Ceilings – surface materials 4.32
3.34, 3.37, 3.43
Changing rooms, see Sports facilities
Audible signs 4.35 note
Cinemas 4.10, 4.12
Audible warnings – doors 2.21
Clothes shops – changing facilities 5.17
Audience seating 4.2, 4.5–4.8, 4.12
Colour contrast, see Visual contrast
Audience seating – legroom 4.7
Communication aids 0.14, 3.6, 4.31–4.36
Audience seating – sight lines 4.9
Conference facilities 4.1, 4.5, 4.9, 4.36
Audience seating – wheelchair spaces
4.6–4.7, 4.10–4.12 Connecting doors 4.22
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
63
M INDEX
Controls 4.25–4.30 Doors – handles 4.24, 5.4
Controls – height 4.25, 4.30, 5.18 Doors – internal 3.7–3.10
Controls – lifting devices 3.27–3.28, 3.43, Doors – lifting platforms 3.41, 3.43
3.49 Doors – low energy powered door systems
Controls – lighting 4.30, 5.4 3.7, 3.9 note, 3.10
Controls – powered doors 2.21 Doors – manually operated 2.9,
Controls – showers 5.18 2.14–2.17, 3.9
Counters – reception desks 3.3, 3.6 Doors – powered 2.10, 2.13, 2.18–2.21,
3.10, 4.18
Counters – refreshment facilities 4.3, 4.16
Doors – privacy bolts 5.4
Curtain opening devices 4.20
Doors – revolving 2.20
D Doors – safety stops 2.21
Definitions 0.26 Doors – self-closing devices 2.9, 2.14,
Department for Transport 1.5 2.26, 3.7
Dimensions – doors 2.13, 3.10 Doors – sliding doors 2.10, 2.27, 4.24
Dimensions – entrance lobbies 2.27, 2.29 Doors – swing 2.21, 2.29, 4.24
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
64
INDEX M
Emergency assistance pull cords 4.30, Entrances 0.14
5.10, 5.18, 5.21 Equality Act 2010 0.1, 0.9, 0.25
Emergency communication systems – Escape routes – internal corridors 3.14
lifting devices 3.28
Extensions – dwellings 0.2–0.4
Emergency escape routes 3.14, 5.4
Extensions – non-domestic buildings
Emergency evacuation – passenger lifts 3.34 0.5–0.8
En-suite facilities – hotel rooms 4.19, 4.24
English Heritage 0.18 F
Enquiry desks, see also Reception Finger rinse basins, see Sanitary
desks 4.32 accommodation
Entertainment facilities, see also Cinemas, Fire alarms, see also Emergency
Theatres 4.1, 4.5, 4.10, 4.12, 4.36 assistance alarms 3.10, 4.24, 5.4
Entrance doors, see also Doors, Principal Fire doors, see Doors
entrance 2.8–2.24 Floor levels – refreshment facilities 4.15
Entrance doors – audible warnings 2.21 Floor surfaces, see also Surfaces 2.7,
Entrance doors – card swipes 2.21 2.29, 3.6, 3.14, 3.16, 5.18, 5.21
Entrance doors – powered 2.10, 2.13, Glazed screens 2.22, 2.24, 3.4, 3.14
2.18–2.21 Goings – stepped access 1.33
Entrance doors – powered – manual Grab bars, see Sanitary accommodation
controls 2.21 Grab rails, see Sanitary accommodation
Entrance doors – safety stops 2.21 Gradients – approaches 1.7–1.8, 1.13,
Entrance doors – self-closing devices 1.19–1.20, 1.26
2.9, 2.14, 2.26 Guard rails – hazards in lobbies 3.16
Entrance doors – swing doors 2.29
Entrance doors – thresholds 2.6–2.7 H
Entrance doors – visual warnings 2.21 Habitable rooms – definition 0.26
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
65
M INDEX
Hazards – internal lobbies 3.16 Lifting devices – speeds 3.43, 3.49
Hazards – warning surfaces 1.13, 1.33, 3.50 Lifting devices – visual contrast 3.18,
Hearing enhancement systems, see 3.28, 3.34, 3.43
Communication aids Lifting devices – visual information 3.31,
Heat emitters 5.4, 5.10 3.34, 3.37, 3.43
Historic buildings 0.17–0.19, 3.22 Lifting devices – wall surfaces 3.32, 3.42
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
66
INDEX M
P S
Parking 1.15–1.18 Sales counters 3.3
Parking ticket machines 1.16, 1.18 Sanitary accommodation 0.8, 0.14, 4.19,
Passageways, see Corridors 4.24, 5.1–5.21, 10.1–10.3
Reception desks, see also Enquiry desks Sanitary accommodation – lever taps 4.23
3.2–3.6, 4.32 Sanitary accommodation – mixer taps 5.4
Reflective wall surfaces, see Wall surfaces Sanitary accommodation – outward
Refreshment facilities 4.13–4.16 opening doors 5.3, 5.14, 10.3
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
67
M INDEX
S Sanitary accommodation – toilet seat
risers 5.9, 5.11
Sales counters 3.3
Sanitary accommodation – toilets 4.19,
Sanitary accommodation 0.8, 0.14, 4.19,
5.5–5.14
4.24, 5.1–5.21
Sanitary accommodation – transfer
Sanitary accommodation –
seats 5.21
bathrooms 4.19, 4.24, 5.19–5.21
Sanitary accommodation – transfer
Sanitary accommodation – changing rooms
space 5.8, 5.18, 5.21
5.15–5.18
Sanitary accommodation – unisex toilets
Sanitary accommodation – cubicle doors
5.5, 5.7, 5.8–5.10
5.3, 5.4
Sanitary accommodation – urinals
Sanitary accommodation – dimensions
5.13–5.14
5.7, 5.10
Sanitary accommodation – washbasins
Sanitary accommodation – en-suite hotel
5.4, 5.8, 5.10, 5.13–5.14
rooms 4.19, 4.24
Sanitary accommodation – wheelchair-
Sanitary accommodation – enlarged
accessible facilities 4.17, 4.19, 5.3–5.4,
cubicles 5.6, 5.7, 5.12, 5.14
5.15–5.21
Sanitary accommodation – finger rinse
School buildings 0.15, 0.16
basins 5.8
School buildings – corridors 3.14 note
Sanitary accommodation – grab bars
5.4, 5.14 School buildings – steps 1.33 note
Sanitary accommodation – grab rails Schools, see School buildings
5.8, 5.10, 5.11, 5.18 Seating areas – refreshment facilities 4.16
Sanitary accommodation – hoists Shelving – hotel rooms 4.20
5.20 note
Shower facilities, see Sanitary
Sanitary accommodation – inward opening accommodation – showers
doors 5.3, 5.14
Sight lines 4.9
Sanitary accommodation – lever taps 4.23
Sign language 3.4, 4.6, 4.9, 4.32
Sanitary accommodation – outward
opening doors 5.3, 5.14 Sign language interpreters 4.6, 4.9
Sanitary accommodation – provision Sign-posting 2.5, 2.7
0.14, 5.2, 5.5–5.7, 5.13 Signals, see Audible signs, Visual
Sanitary accommodation – refreshment fire-alarm signals
facilities 4.14, 4.16 Signs 2.5, 2.7, 3.5, 3.18, 4.35 note
Sanitary accommodation – separate-sex Signs – accessible entrances 2.5
washrooms 5.11–5.14
Signs – lifting devices 3.18
Sanitary accommodation – showers 4.19,
Signs – tactile 4.35 note
4.24, 5.15–5.18
Site boundary 0.5, 1.1, 1.6
Sanitary accommodation – taps 4.23,
5.3–5.4 Sleeping accommodation, see Bedrooms
Sanitary accommodation – toilet doors Sliding doors – handles 4.24
3.14, 5.3–5.4 Slip-resistant floor surfaces, see Floor
Sanitary accommodation – toilet pans surfaces – slip resistant
5.9–5.11 Slip-resistant seats 5.18
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
68
INDEX M
Smoke detectors 3.10 Surfaces – blister 1.13
Social facilities 4.1 Surfaces – corduroy hazard warning 1.33
Society for the Protection of Ancient Surfaces – finishes 4.32, 4.35 note
Buildings 0.19 Surfaces – hazard warning 1.13, 1.33, 3.50
Socket outlets 4.25–4.30 Surfaces – lifting devices 3.32, 3.42
Sound field systems, see Communication aids Surfaces – materials 4.32
Spectator events 4.2, 4.11, 4.36 Surfaces – parking bays 1.15, 1.18
Spectator facilities 4.5, 4.12 Surfaces – reception area floors 3.6
Spectator seating 0.14, 4.2, 4.5–4.8, 4.12 Surfaces – sanitary accommodation 5.4,
Sport England 2.13, 4.11, 5.6 note, 5.18 note, 5.21 note
5.17 note Surfaces – slip-resistant floors 3.6, 3.14,
Sports facilities 2.13, 4.5, 4.11, 5.6 note, 5.18, 5.21
5.16–5.18 Surfaces – tactile paving 1.13, 1.33
Sports facilities – changing rooms Swing doors, see Doors
5.16–5.18
Swing-free closing devices, see Doors
Sports facilities – doors 2.13
Switches 4.25–4.30
Sports facilities – showers 5.16–5.18
Symbols 4.36
Sports facilities – spectators 4.11
Sports facilities – stadia 4.11 T
Sports facilities – toilets 5.6 note Tactile paving, see Surfaces
Stages, see also Rostrums 4.12 Tactile signs 4.35 note
Stairs, see also Goings, Rises and Taps, see Sanitary accommodation
Steps 1.33, 3.19, 3.50–3.51 Telephone systems, see Communication aids
Stairs – hazard warning surfaces 1.33, 3.50 Telephones 4.14
Stairs – internal 3.19, 3.50–3.51 Terraces 4.14
Stepped terraced floors 4.12 Terraces – auditoria 4.12
Steps, see also Goings, Rises and Stairs Text telephones, see Communication aids
Steps – approach routes 1.21, 1.27–1.37 Theatres 4.10, 4.12, 4.35–4.36
Steps – internal stairs 3.51 Thresholds, see Entrance doors –
Steps – school buildings 1.33 note thresholds
Storeys – accessibility 0.14 Toilets, see Sanitary accommodation
Student accommodation 0.16 Touch plates 4.29
Student accommodation – bedrooms
4.4, 4.17–4.24 U
Support rails, see Sanitary accommodation Uplighters 4.34
– grab rails
V
Surfaces, see also Floor surfaces, Wall
surfaces 4.32 Vertical circulation 3.1, 3.17–3.55
Surfaces – approaches 1.9, 1.13, 1.26, Vertical lifting platforms, see Lifting devices
1.33 Vision panels 3.10
Approved Document M Volume 2 Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings
69
M INDEX
Visual contrast 0.26, 2.17, 3.8, 3.10, 3.12, Provision of toilet accommodation 48
3.18, 3.28, 3.34, 3.43, 4.28, 5.4 Wheelchair-accessibile unisex toilets 49
Visual contrast – controls 4.28 Toilets in separate-sex washrooms 51
Visual contrast – definition 0.26 Wheelchair-accessible changing
Visual contrast – door furniture 2.17 and shower facilities 52
Visual contrast – internal doors 3.8, 3.10 Wheelchair-accessible bathrooms 56
Visual contrast – lifting devices 3.18, Standards referred to 59
3.28, 3.34, 3.43
Visual contrast – push pads 4.28 Other publications referred to 60
Visual contrast – sanitary fittings 5.4 Index 63
Visual contrast – seating 4.7 Provision of toilet accommodation 48
Visual fire alarm signals 4.24 Wheelchair-accessibile unisex toilets 49
Visual information – lifting devices 3.31, Toilets in separate-sex washrooms 52
3.34, 3.37, 3.43
Wheelchair-accessible changing
Visual warnings – entrance doors 2.21 and shower facilities 53
W Wheelchair-accessible bathrooms 56
Standards referred to 60
Access to and use of buildings other than dwellings Approved Document M Volume 2
70
LIST OF APPROVED DOCUMENTS
The following publications give practical Approved Document M
guidance on how to meet the Building Access to and use of buildings
Regulations. You can find the date of the Volume 1: Dwellings
edition approved by the Secretary of State Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings
at www.gov.uk. Approved Document P
Approved Document A Electrical safety – Dwellings
Structure Approved Document Q
Approved Document B Security – Dwellings
Fire safety Approved Document R
Volume 1: Dwellings Physical infrastructure for high-speed
Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings electronic communications networks
Approved Document C Approved Document 7
Site preparation and resistance to Materials and workmanship
contaminants and moisture
Approved Document D
Toxic substances
Approved Document E
Resistance to the passage of sound
Approved Document F
Ventilation
Approved Document G
Sanitation, hot water safety and water
efficiency
Approved Document H
Drainage and waste disposal
Approved Document J
Combustion appliances and fuel storage
systems
Approved Document K
Protection from falling, collision and impact
Approved Document L1A
Conservation of fuel and power in new
dwellings
Approved Document L1B
Conservation of fuel and power in existing
dwellings
Approved Document L2A
Conservation of fuel and power in new
buildings other than dwellings
Approved Document L2B
Conservation of fuel and power in existing
buildings other than dwellings
The Building Regulations 2010, Approved Documents are available from:
RIBA Books
Online: www.architecture.com/ribabooks
Telephone: +44 (0)20 7496 8383
Email: sales@books.architecture.com
Copyright in the typographical arrangement, excluding logos, of the cover and internal page
layouts of this publication rests with the Publisher.
ISBN 97819-1-412-419-8
9 781914 124198
The Building Regulations 2010
O
Overheating
APPROVED DOCUMENT
This section deals with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (linings)
B2. (1) To inhibit the spread of fire within the building,
the internal linings shall—
(a) adequately resist the spread of flame over
their surfaces; and ➊
(b) have, if ignited, either a rate of heat release
or a rate of fire growth, which is reasonable in
the circumstances.
(2) In this paragraph “internal linings” means the
materials or products used in lining any partition,
wall, ceiling or other internal structure.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B2 is met by achieving a restricted spread of flame
over internal linings. The building fabric should make a limited contribution to fire growth,
including a low rate of heat release.
It is particularly important in circulation spaces, where linings may offer the main means by which
fire spreads and where rapid spread is most likely to prevent occupants from escaping.
Requirement B2 does not include guidance on the following.
➋
a. Generation of smoke and fumes.
b. The upper surfaces of floors and stairs.
c. Furniture and fittings.
Key
For further information about the use of technical guidance, see Chapter 7 in Volume 1 and Chapter F
in Volume 2 of the Manual to the Building Regulations.
Introduction i
What is an approved document? i
How is construction regulated in England? i
How do you comply with the Building Regulations? i
What do the Building Regulations cover? ii
When must a building control body be notified? ii
How to use this approved document iii
Where to get further help iv
Section 0: Introduction 1
Summary 1
Application 1
Alternative approaches 2
Selected key interactions with other parts of the Building Regulations 2
Requirement O1 4
Intention 4
Requirement O1(2)(a) 11
Intention 11
Summary
0.1 This approved document is Approved Document O: Overheating. It gives guidance on how to
comply with Part O of the Building Regulations.
0.2 This approved document contains the following sections.
Application
0.3 The guidance in this approved document applies to new residential buildings only. Residential
buildings within the scope of Part O and this approved document are detailed in Table 0.1.
Live/work units
0.5 A unit that contains both living accommodation and space for commercial purposes (e.g. as a
workshop or office) should be treated as a residential building, as long as the commercial part can
revert to residential use.
0.6 The commercial part of a building can revert to residential use if all of the following apply.
a. There is direct access between the commercial space and the residential accommodation.
b. The commercial space and the residential accommodation are within the same thermal
envelope.
c. The residential accommodation comprises a substantial proportion of the total area of the unit.
What constitutes a ‘substantial proportion’ should be assessed on a case-by-case basis by the
building control body.
NOTE: A large non-residential building that contains a small flat for a manager is not treated as a
residential building. A residential building that contains a room used as an office or utility space is
still treated as a residential building.
Mixed-use developments
0.7 The guidance in this approved document applies only to the parts of a mixed-use building that are
for residential purposes and any corridor that serves residential units.
Alternative approaches
0.8 The guidance in this approved document is the suggested approach to meet the requirements of
the Building Regulations. Alternative approaches are possible but they should be discussed and
agreed with a building control body before building work starts.
0.9 The legal requirements of the Building Regulations must be met, regardless of whether the
guidance in this approved document is followed or alternative measures are taken.
0.10 If alternative ways of mitigating overheating are adopted, the overall level of overheating risk
reduction should not be lower than the approved document provides. It is the responsibility of
those undertaking the work to demonstrate compliance.
This section deals with requirement O1 of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
O1 Overheating mitigation
(1) Reasonable provision must be made in respect
of a dwelling, institution or any other building
containing one or more rooms for residential
purposes, other than a room in a hotel
(“residences”) to—
(a) limit unwanted solar gains in summer;
(b) provide an adequate means to remove heat
from the indoor environment.
(2) In meeting the obligations in paragraph (1)—
(a) account must be taken of the safety of any
occupant, and their reasonable enjoyment of
the residence; and
(b) mechanical cooling may only be used where
insufficient heat is capable of being removed
from the indoor environment without it.
Intention
The aim of requirement O1 is to protect the health and welfare of occupants of the building by
reducing the occurrence of high indoor temperatures.
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement O1 is met by designing and constructing the building to
achieve both of the following.
a. Limiting unwanted solar gains in summer.
b. Providing an adequate means of removing excess heat from the indoor environment.
NOTE: The guidance and regulations are written for the purposes of protecting health and welfare.
Following this guidance does not guarantee the comfort of building occupants.
In the Secretary of State’s view, compliance with requirement O1 can be demonstrated by using one
of the following methods.
a. The simplified method for limiting solar gains and providing a means of removing excess heat, as
set out in Section 1.
b. The dynamic thermal modelling method, as set out in Section 2.
1.1 This section details a simplified method for demonstrating compliance with requirement O1. It is
suitable for any building within the scope of requirement O1.
NOTE: Appendix B of this approved document includes a compliance checklist. The designer may
use this checklist to demonstrate compliance to building control bodies.
Largest glazed Maximum area of Maximum area of Maximum area of Maximum area of
façade orientation glazing glazing in the most glazing glazing in the most
(% floor area) glazed room (% floor area) glazed room
(% floor area of room) (% floor area of room)
North 15 37 18 37
East 18 37 18 37
South 15 22 15 30
West 18 37 11 22
NOTE:
1. Floor area and floor area of room are as defined in Appendix A.
1.8 Buildings or parts of buildings with no cross-ventilation should not exceed the maximum glazing
areas in Table 1.2.
Table 1.2 Limiting solar gains for buildings or parts of buildings without cross-ventilation(1)
Largest glazed Maximum area of Maximum area of Maximum area of Maximum area of
façade orientation glazing glazing in the most glazing glazing in the most
(% floor area) glazed room (% floor area) glazed room
(% floor area of room) (% floor area of room)
North 15 26 18 26
East 11 18 18 26
South 11 11 15 15
West 11 18 11 11
NOTE:
1. Floor area and floor area of room are as defined in Appendix A.
1.9 Residential buildings in the high risk location should, in addition to following the maximum glazing
areas in Table 1.1 and Table 1.2, provide shading for glazed areas between compass points north-east
and north-west via the south. Shading should be provided by one of the following means.
a. External shutters with means of ventilation.
b. Glazing with a maximum g-value of 0.4 and a minimum light transmittance of 0.7.
c. Overhangs with 50 degrees altitude cut-off on due south-facing façades only.
Total minimum free area(1) The greater of the following: The greater of the following:
a. 6% of the floor area(2) a. 9% of the floor area(2)
b. 70% of the glazing area(3) b. 55% of the glazing area(3)
Bedroom minimum free area 13% of the floor area of the room(4) 4% of the floor area of the room(4)
NOTES:
1. The total minimum free area is the free area for the whole dwellinghouse, residential unit, shared communal room
or common space, including any bedrooms.
2. ‘Floor area’ is a key term. See Appendix A.
3. ‘Glazing area’ is a key term. See Appendix A.
4. ‘Floor area of the room’ is a key term. See Appendix A.
1.11 Buildings or parts of buildings with no cross-ventilation should equal or exceed the minimum free
areas in Table 1.4.
Table 1.4 Minimum free areas for buildings or parts of buildings without cross-ventilation
Total minimum free area(1) The greater of the following: The greater of the following:
a. 10% of the floor area(2) a. 12% of the floor area(2)
b. 95% of the glazing area(3) b. 80% of the glazing area(3)
Bedroom minimum free area 13% of the floor area of the room(4) 4% of the floor area of the room(4)
NOTES:
1. The total minimum free area is the free area for the whole dwellinghouse, residential unit, shared communal room
or common space, including any bedrooms.
2. ‘Floor area’ is a key term. See Appendix A.
3. ‘Glazing area’ is a key term. See Appendix A.
4. ‘Floor area of the room’ is a key term. See Appendix A.
1.12 Openings should be designed to achieve the free areas in paragraphs 1.10 and 1.11. The equivalent
area of the opening should meet or exceed the free area of the opening. The equivalent area of the
opening should be assessed by either of the following means.
a. Measurement of the product to BS EN 13141-1.
b. Calculation using Appendix D.
NOTE: A system for purge ventilation should be provided in each habitable room to demonstrate
compliance with Part F of the Building Regulations. The guidance in Section 1 of Approved
Document F, Volume 1: Dwellings gives minimum standards for purge ventilation. When following
this simplified method, applying the guidance in paragraphs 1.10 to 1.12 will usually result in free
areas that exceed the free areas in Approved Document F, Volume 1: Dwellings.
1.13 The simplified method is not suitable for buildings with more than one residential unit which use a
communal heating or hot water system with significant amounts of horizontal heating or hot water
distribution pipework. Main distribution routes should be through vertical risers to minimise heat
gains into common spaces.
2.1 This section details a dynamic thermal modelling method for demonstrating compliance with
requirement O1. It provides a standardised approach to predicting overheating risk for residential
buildings using dynamic thermal modelling as an alternative to the simplified method in Section 1.
2.2 The methodology is suitable for all residential buildings. It may offer the designer additional design
flexibility over the solutions in Section 1 in the following situations.
a. Residential buildings with very high levels of insulation and airtightness.
b. Residential buildings with specific site conditions that mean the building is not well represented
by the two locations in paragraph 1.3, for example Manchester city centre (see Appendix C).
NOTE: Local microclimates may not be well reflected by the geographically closest weather file.
c. Residential buildings that are highly shaded by neighbouring properties, structures or landscape.
This section deals with requirement O1(2)(a) of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
O1 Overheating mitigation
(1) Reasonable provision must be made in respect
of a dwelling, institution or any other building
containing one or more rooms for residential
purposes, other than a room in a hotel
(“residences”) to—
(a) limit unwanted solar gains in summer;
(b) provide an adequate means to remove heat
from the indoor environment.
(2) In meeting the obligations in paragraph (1)—
(a) account must be taken of the safety of any
occupant, and their reasonable enjoyment of
the residence; and
(b) mechanical cooling may only be used where
insufficient heat is capable of being removed
from the indoor environment without it.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement O1(2)(a) is met in a new residential building if the
building’s overheating mitigation strategy for use by occupants takes account of all of the following.
a. Noise at night – paragraphs 3.2 to 3.4.
b. Pollution – paragraph 3.5.
c. Security – paragraphs 3.6 and 3.7.
d. Protection from falling – paragraphs 3.8 to 3.10.
e. Protection from entrapment – paragraph 3.11.
3.1 The standards in this section may mean that the standards of the simplified method cannot be
met. For example, if external noise is an issue, it is unlikely that windows would be opened by an
occupant and therefore the minimum free areas of the simplified method cannot be met. In such
cases, dynamic thermal modelling should be used.
Noise
3.2 In locations where external noise may be an issue (for example, where the local planning authority
considered external noise to be an issue at the planning stage), the overheating mitigation strategy
should take account of the likelihood that windows will be closed during sleeping hours (11pm to 7am).
3.3 Windows are likely to be closed during sleeping hours if noise within bedrooms exceeds the
following limits.
a. 40dB LAeq,T, averaged over 8 hours (between 11pm and 7am).
b. 55dB LAFmax, more than 10 times a night (between 11pm and 7am).
3.4 Where in-situ noise measurements are used as evidence that these limits are not exceeded,
measurements should be taken in accordance with the Association of Noise Consultants’
Measurement of Sound Levels in Buildings with the overheating mitigation strategy in use.
NOTE: Guidance on reducing the passage of external noise into buildings can be found in the
National Model Design Code: Part 2 – Guidance Notes (MHCLG, 2021) and the Association of Noise
Consultants’ Acoustics, Ventilation and Overheating: Residential Design Guide (2020).
Pollution
3.5 Buildings located near to significant local pollution sources should be designed to minimise
the intake of external air pollutants. Guidance is given in Section 2 of Approved Document F,
Volume 1: Dwellings.
Security
3.6 When determining the free area available for ventilation during sleeping hours, only the proportion
of openings that can be opened securely should be considered to provide useful ventilation. This
particularly applies in the following locations, where openings may be vulnerable to intrusion by a
casual or opportunistic burglar.
a. Ground floor bedrooms.
b. Easily accessible bedrooms.
3.7 Open windows or doors can be made secure by using any of the following.
a. Fixed or lockable louvred shutters.
b. Fixed or lockable window grilles or railings.
NOTES:
1. This approved document has increased levels of protection from falling compared to Approved Document K.
Where applicable, the higher standard applies.
2. Guarding should be sized to prevent the passage of a 100mm sphere.
3.10 Guarding for large openings could include, but is not limited to, either of the following.
a. Shutters with a child-proof lock.
b. Fixed guarding.
This section deals with the requirements of regulation 40B of the Building Regulations 2010.
Regulation
Information about overheating
40B. (1) This regulation applies to building work in respect of a building where Part O of Schedule 1 applies.
(2) The person carrying out the work must, not later than five days after the work has been completed, give
sufficient information to the owner about the provision made in accordance with Part O so that the
systems in place further to Part O can be operated in such a manner as to protect against overheating.
Intention
When a new residential building is erected, information about the building must be given to the
owner of the building to allow them to use the overheating mitigation strategy effectively.
In the Secretary of State’s view, regulation 40B is met by providing information in accordance with
Section 4.
4.1 Sufficient information about the overheating mitigation strategy and its maintenance requirements
must be given to owners so that it can be used effectively. The information should be provided in a
clear manner, for a non-technical audience.
4.2 The following information should be provided, where relevant.
a. The overall overheating mitigation strategy. Examples of possible strategies are given below.
i. Appropriately sized windows that do not let in too much direct sun, and therefore increase
the internal temperature, but which open fully to allow cool air in.
ii. Roller shutters with ventilation louvres.
b. The location of each element of the overheating mitigation strategy.
c. Instructions for the operation of each element of the overheating mitigation strategy.
d. The time of day that different parts of the strategy should be used. For example, the shutters
should be used in the day and the windows opened only when it is cooler outside.
e. The time of year when the strategy should be used. For example, all summer from May to
September or only in hot weather.
f. Manufacturer’s contact details.
g. The location of controls and instructions for setting of controls, e.g. timer controls.
h. The location of sensors and how to recalibrate them.
i. Cleaning and maintenance instructions.
The definitions below apply to this document Floor area of the room The area of the room,
only and are not intended to be applied in other measured to the internal face of the perimeter
circumstances. walls. Where a room serves more than one activity,
Building control body A local authority or an e.g. open-plan kitchen and living room, the area
approved inspector. with the largest glazing area should be assessed
and the room area calculated based on a room
Common spaces Spaces which are used mainly for depth no greater than 4.5m from the glazed façade.
circulation, e.g. a corridor or lift lobby.
Free area The geometric open area of a ventilation
Cross-ventilation The ability to ventilate using opening. This area assumes a clear sharp-edged
openings on opposite façades of a dwelling. Having orifice that would have a coefficient of discharge
openings on façades that are not opposite is not (Cd) of 0.62.
allowing cross-ventilation, e.g. in a corner flat.
Glazing area The area of transparent material, not
Dynamic thermal modelling A method of building including the window frame.
modelling that predicts the internal conditions and
energy demands of a building at short time intervals Guarding A barrier that denies people access to
using weather data and building characteristics. another area, for example the floor below.
Easily accessible Defined as one of the following. Louvre A set of angled slats that allow air or light
to pass through.
· A window or doorway, any part of which is
within 2m vertically of an accessible level Passive means Any means of cooling a building
surface, such as the ground or basement level, which is not mechanical cooling (e.g. air
or an access boundary. conditioning). Openable windows or mechanical
ventilation fans are considered to be passive means
· A window within 2m vertically of a flat or of cooling.
sloping roof (with a pitch of less than 30
degrees) that is within 3.5m of ground level. Purge ventilation Ventilation of rooms or spaces
at a relatively high rate to rapidly dilute pollutants
Effective area The area through which air flows and/or disperse water vapour.
after the resistance of airflow has been taken into
account. Residential units Habitable rooms or a suite of
habitable rooms. Examples of a residential unit
Equivalent area A measure of the aerodynamic include, but are not limited to, a flat or rooms that
performance of an opening. It is the area of a are similar to a flat in care homes or student halls
sharp-edged circular orifice through which air of residence.
would pass at the same volume flow rate, under an
identical applied pressure difference, as through Shared communal rooms Rooms in buildings
the opening under consideration. containing dwellings or residential units, which
provide facilities for the residents, e.g. a shared
Floor area The area of the residential unit, living room, kitchen or laundry room.
measured to the internal face of the perimeter
walls at each floor level.
NOTE: This area is the gross internal area as
measured in accordance with the Code of
Measuring Practice by the Royal Institution of
Chartered Surveyors (RICS).
NOTE:
1. All references to paragraphs are to Approved Document O.
NOTE:
1. All references to paragraphs are to Approved Document O.
C1 This appendix provides a list of the areas deemed to have a high risk of the buildings within them
overheating.
C2 This appendix should be used with the simplified method to categorise residential buildings,
following paragraph 1.3.
C3 The postcodes in Table C1 are in the high risk part of London. Diagram C1 also shows the high risk part
of London, where a higher standard of risk mitigation is needed.
NOTE: Central Manchester (postcodes M1, M2, M3, M5, M15, M16 and M50) may also have elevated
night time temperatures. Consider following the guidance for higher risk locations for buildings in
these postcodes.
Table C1 Overheating risk at postcode area level in the high risk part of London
CR4 E17 EC3R KT6 N22 SE8 SE27 SW11 TW10 W1F W12
CR7 E18 EC3V KT7 NW1 SE9 SE28 SW12 TW11 W1G W13
E1 E20 EC4A KT8 NW2 SE10 SW1A SW13 TW12 W1H W14
E1W EC1A EC4M IG11 NW3 SE11 SW1E SW14 TW13 W1J WC1A
E2 EC1M EC4N N1 NW5 SE12 SW1H SW15 TW14 W1K WC1B
E3 EC1N EC4R N1C NW6 SE13 SW1P SW16 TW15 W1S WC1E
E4 EC1R EC4V N2 NW8 SE14 SW1V SW17 TW19 W1T WC1H
E5 EC1V EC4Y N4 NW10 SE15 SW1W SW18 UB1 W1U WC1N
E6 EC1Y HA0 N5 NW11 SE16 SW1X SW19 UB2 W1W WC1R
E7 EC2A HA9 N6 RM8 SE17 SW1Y SW20 UB3 W2 WC1V
E8 EC2M IG1 N7 RM9 SE18 SW2 TW1 UB4 W3 WC1X
E9 EC2N IG2 N8 RM10 SE19 SW3 TW2 UB5 W4 WC2A
E10 EC2P IG3 N9 SE1 SE20 SW4 TW3 UB6 W5 WC2B
E11 EC2R IG4 N13 SE2 SE21 SW5 TW4 UB7 W6 WC2E
E12 EC2V KT1 N15 SE3 SE22 SW6 TW5 UB8 W7 WC2H
E13 EC2Y KT2 N16 SE4 SE23 SW7 TW6 UB11 W8 WC2N
E14 EC3A KT3 N17 SE5 SE24 SW8 TW7 W1B W9 WC2R
E15 EC3M KT4 N18 SE6 SE25 SW9 TW8 W1C W10
E16 EC3N KT5 N19 SE7 SE26 SW10 TW9 W1D W11
Diagram C1 Overheating risk at postcode area level in the high risk part of London
D1 The free areas in Section 1 of this approved document are geometric open areas that assume a clear
sharp-edged orifice with a 0.62 coefficient of discharge (Cd). Different opening types will reduce the
amount of air flow by both affecting the way air flows and reducing the physical area. Accounting for
these factors gives the equivalent area.
D2 The equivalent area of a window can be calculated using one of the following.
a. The discharge coefficient calculator, available online at: https://www.gov.uk/government/
publications/classvent-and-classcool-school-ventilation-design-tool.
b. Tables D1 to D9.
NOTE: As stated in paragraph 1.12, measurement of equivalent area to BS EN 13141-1 is also
appropriate. Measurement of equivalent area is more accurate than calculation and is therefore
preferable.
D3 Using Tables D1 to D9 to calculate equivalent area is appropriate for the following types of window.
a. Side, top or bottom hung windows. The opening hinge length is referenced as ‘h’ in the tables
– Diagram D1 shows this for a side hung window. To use the tables for bottom and top hung
windows, the ‘h’ and ‘w’ should be reversed.
b. Centre pivot windows. Each of the two sections of the centrally hinged window should be
assessed as a single side, bottom or top hung window.
c. Sash windows. The opening should be assessed using Table D9, assuming an opening angle of
90 degrees.
P
Electrical safety – Dwellings
APPROVED DOCUMENT
* This approved document gives guidance for compliance with the Building Regulations for building
work carried out in England. It also applies to building work carried out on excepted energy
buildings in Wales as defined in the Welsh Ministers (Transfer of Functions) (No. 2) Order 2009.
The approved documents
The following is a high level summary of the Building Regulations relevant to most types of building
work. Where there is any doubt you should consult the full text of the regulations, available at
www.legislation.gov.uk.
Building work
Regulation 3 of the Building Regulations defines ‘building work’. Building work includes:
a. the erection or extension of a building
b. the provision or extension of a controlled service or fitting
c. the material alteration of a building or a controlled service or fitting.
Regulation 4 states that building work should be carried out in such a way that, when work is
complete:
a. for new buildings or work on a building that complied with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations: the building complies with the applicable requirements of the Building
Regulations
b. for work on an existing building that did not comply with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations:
(i) the work itself must comply with the applicable requirements of the Building Regulations
(ii) the building must be no more unsatisfactory in relation to the requirements than before
the work was carried out.
This approved document deals with the following requirement from Part P of Schedule 1 to the
Building Regulations 2010.
Requirements
Requirement Limits on application
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, the requirements of Part P will be met if low voltage and extra-low
voltage electrical installations in dwellings are designed and installed so that both of the following
conditions are satisfied.
a. They afford appropriate protection against mechanical and thermal damage.
b. They do not present electric shock and fire hazards to people.
General
1.1 Electrical installations should be designed and installed in accordance with BS 7671:2008
incorporating Amendment No 1:2011.
Provision of information
1.2 Sufficient information should be provided to ensure that people can operate, maintain or alter an
electrical installation with reasonable safety.
The information should comprise items listed in BS 7671 and other appropriate information
including:
a. electrical installation certificates or reports describing the installation and giving details of the
work carried out
b. permanent labels, for example on earth connections and bonds, and on items of electrical
equipment such as consumer units and residual current devices (RCDs)
c. operating instructions and logbooks
d. for unusually large or complex installations only, detailed plans.
Functionality requirements
1.3 Part P of the Building Regulations covers the safety of electrical installation work; it does not
cover system functionality. Other parts of the Building Regulations and other legislation cover the
functionality of electrically powered products such as fire alarm systems, fans and pumps.
New dwellings
1.4 Wall-mounted socket-outlets, switches and consumer units in new dwellings should be easy to
reach, in accordance with Part M of the Building Regulations (Access to and use of buildings).
NOTE: Approved Document M recommends that in new dwellings only, switches and socket-
outlets for lighting and other equipment should be between 450mm and 1200mm from finished
floor level. Approved Document M does not recommend a height for new consumer units.
However, one way of complying with Part M in new dwellings is to mount consumer units so that
the switches are between 1350mm and 1450mm above floor level. At this height, the consumer unit
is out of reach of young children yet accessible to other people when standing or sitting.
General
2.1 All electrical installation work carried out in a dwelling is subject to requirement P1, and should
comply with the design and installation guidance in Section 1. Section 2 sets out:
a. the types of building and electrical installation that are within the scope of Part P
b. the types of electrical work that are notifiable and must be certified as complying with the
Building Regulations.
Certification procedures are set out in Section 3.
Scope
2.2 Part P applies to electrical installations:
a. in a dwelling-house or flat, and to parts of the installation that are:
(i) outside the dwelling – for example fixed lighting and air conditioning units attached to
outside walls, photovoltaic panels on roofs, and fixed lighting and pond pumps in gardens
(ii) in outbuildings such as sheds, detached garages and domestic greenhouses.
b. in the common access areas of blocks of flats such as corridors and staircases
c. in shared amenities of blocks of flats such as laundries, kitchens and gymnasiums
d. in business premises (other than agricultural buildings) connected to the same meter as the
electrical installation in a dwelling – for example shops and public houses below flats.
2.3 Part P does not apply to electrical installations:
a. in business premises in the same building as a dwelling but with separate metering
b. that supply the power for lifts in blocks of flats (but Part P does apply to lift installations in
single dwellings).
NOTE: Schedule 2 to the Building Regulations identifies buildings – for example unoccupied,
agricultural, temporary and small detached buildings – that are generally exempt from the
requirements of the Regulations. However, conservatories, porches, domestic greenhouses, garages
and sheds that share their electricity with a dwelling are not exempt from Part P (by virtue of
regulation 9(3)) and must comply with its requirements.
2.4 The scope of Part P is illustrated in Diagram 1.
M
Business
unit ✓
M M
✕
Business
unit
Common
M
Dwellings
✓
Lifts
✓
✕
access M
✓ Shared facilities
such as laundries,
M kitchens and
gymnasiums ✓
Loft ✓
Dwellings
Dwelling
M ✓
✓
Garden
electrics
✓
M ✕
Business
unit
M Out-
building Intake switchgear
✓
Source of electricity supply
M Electricity supply meter
Reproduced with the permission of the Electrical Contractors’ Association
Notifiable work
2.5 Electrical installation work that is notifiable is set out in regulation 12(6A).
12.—(6A) A person intending to carry out building work in relation to which Part P of
12.—(6A)
Schedule 1 imposes a requirement is required to give a building notice or deposit full
plans where the work consists of—
(a) the installation of a new circuit;
(b) the replacement of a consumer unit; or
(c) any addition or alteration to existing circuits in a special location.
—(9) In this regulation “special location” means—
(a) within a room containing a bath or shower, the space surrounding a bath tap
or shower head, where the space extends—
(i) vertically from the finished floor level to—
(aa) a height of 2.25 metres; or
(bb) the position of the shower head where it is attached to a wall or
ceiling at a point higher than 2.25 metres from that level; and
(ii) horizontally—
(aa) where there is a bath tub or shower tray, from the edge of the bath
tub or shower tray to a distance of 0.6 metres; or
(bb) where there is no bath tub or shower tray, from the centre point
of the shower head where it is attached to the wall or ceiling to a
distance of 1.2 metres; or
(b) a room containing a swimming pool or sauna heater.
600mm
600mm
2.25m
Bath tub or
shower tray
Non-notifiable work
2.7 Regulation 12(6A) sets out electrical installation work that is notifiable. All other electrical
installation work is not notifiable – namely additions and alterations to existing installations outside
special locations, and replacements, repairs and maintenance anywhere.
2.8 Installing fixed electrical equipment is within the scope of Part P, even if the final connection is by
a standard 13A plug and socket, but is notifiable only if it involves work set out in regulation 12(6A).
For example:
a. installing a built-in cooker is not notifiable work unless a new cooker circuit is needed
b. connecting an electric gate or garage door to an existing isolator switch is not notifiable work,
but installing a new circuit from the consumer unit to the isolator is notifiable.
2.9 Installing prefabricated, modular wiring (for example for kitchen lighting systems) linked by plug and
socket connectors is also within the scope of Part P, but again is notifiable only if it involves work
set out in regulation 12(6A).
General
3.1 For notifiable electrical installation work, one of the following three procedures must be used to
certify that the work complies with the requirements set out in the Building Regulations.
a. Self-certification by a registered competent person.
b. Third-party certification by a registered third-party certifier.
c. Certification by a building control body.
3.2 To verify that the design and installation of electrical work is adequate, and that installations will be
safe to use, maintain and alter, the electrical work should be inspected and tested in accordance
with the procedures in BS 7671.
NOTE: Electrical inspection and test forms should be given to the person ordering the work.
Building Regulations certificates should normally be given to the occupier, but in the case of rented
properties may be given to the person ordering the work and copied to the occupier.
BS 7671
Requirements for Electrical Installations
[2008 + A1:2011] (IET Wiring Regulations 17th Edition,
ISBN 978-1-84919-269-9)
Q
Security – Dwellings
APPROVED DOCUMENT
Q1 Unauthorised access
* This approved document gives guidance for compliance with the Building Regulations for building
work carried out in England. It also applies to building work carried out on excepted energy
buildings in Wales as defined in the Welsh Ministers (Transfer of Functions) (No.2) Order 2009.
The
Listapproved documents
of approved documents
The following documents have been published to give guidance on how to meet the Building
Regulations. You can find the date of the edition approved by the Secretary of State at
www.gov.uk.
What is an approved document?
The Secretary
Approved of State
Document A has approved a series of documents
Approvedthat give practical
Document M guidance
about how to meet the requirements of the Building
Structure Regulations
Access to and use2010
of for England.
buildings
Approved documents give guidance on each of the technical parts
Volume 1: Dwellings of the regulations and on
Approved Document B
regulation 7 (see the back of this document). Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellings
Fire safety
Approved
Volume documents set out what, in ordinary circumstances,
1: Dwellinghouses may be accepted
Approved Document P as
reasonable provision for compliance
Volume 2: Buildings other than dwellinghouseswith the relevant requirements of the
Electrical safety – Dwellings Building
Regulations to which they refer. If you follow the guidance in an approved document,
Approved
there willDocument C
be a presumption of compliance with the Approved Document
requirements coveredQ by the guidance.
Site preparation
However, and resistance
compliance to
is not guaranteed; Security
for example, – Dwellings
‘normal’ guidance may not apply if the
contaminants and moisture
particular case is unusual in some way. Approved Document 7
Approved Document D
Note that there may be other ways to comply withMaterials and workmanship
the requirements – there is no obligation
Toxic substances
to adopt any particular solution contained in an approved document. If you prefer to meet
a relevantDocument
Approved requirement
E in some other way than described in an approved document, you
should discuss
Resistance to the this withof
passage thesound
relevant building control body.
In addition
Approved to guidance,
Document F some approved documents include provisions that must be
followed
Ventilation exactly, as required by regulations or where methods of test or calculation have
been prescribed by the Secretary of State.
Approved Document G
Each approved
Sanitation, document
hot water relates
safety and only to the particular requirements of the Building
water
Regulations
efficiency that the document addresses. However, building work must also comply with
any other applicable requirements of the Building Regulations.
Approved Document H
How to use this approved document
Drainage and waste disposal
Approved Document J
This document uses the following conventions.
Combustion appliances and fuel storage
a. Text against a green background is an extract from the Building Regulations 2010 or the
systems
Building (Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (both as amended). These extracts
Approved Document
set out the legal Krequirements of the regulations.
Protection from falling, collision and impact
b. Key terms, printed in green, are defined in Appendix A.
Approved Document L1A
c. When this
Conservation approved
of fuel document
and power in newrefers to a named standard or other document,
the relevant version is listed in Appendix C (documents) or Appendix C (standards).
dwellings
However, if the issuing body has revised or updated the listed version of the standard
Approved Document
or document, youL1Bmay use the new version as guidance if it continues to address the
Conservation of fuel and
relevant requirements power in existing
of the Building Regulations.
dwellings
NOTE: Standards and technical approvals may also address aspects of performance or
Approved Document
matters that are notL2A
covered by the Building Regulations, or they may recommend higher
Conservation
standards thanfuel
of and power
required by theinBuilding
new Regulations.
buildings other than dwellings
Approved Document L2B
Conservation of fuel and power in existing
buildings other than dwellings
The following is a high level summary of the Building Regulations relevant to most types of
building work. Where there is any doubt you should consult the full text of the regulations,
available at www.legislation.gov.uk.
Building work
Regulation 3 of the Building Regulations defines ‘building work’. Building work includes:
a. the erection or extension of a building
b. the provision or extension of a controlled service or fitting
c. the material alteration of a building or a controlled service or fitting.
Regulation 4 states that building work should be carried out in such a way that, when work
is complete:
a. For new buildings or work on a building that complied with the applicable requirements
of the Building Regulations: the building complies with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations.
b. For work on an existing building that did not comply with the applicable requirements of
the Building Regulations:
(i) the work itself must comply with the applicable requirements of the Building Regulations
(ii) the building must be no more unsatisfactory in relation to the requirements than before
the work was carried out.
Section 1: Doors 3
General 3
Design of secure doorsets 3
Installation and fixing of secure doorsets 4
Section 2: Windows 5
General 5
Design of secure windows 5
Installation and fixing of secure windows 5
Summary
0.1 This approved document gives guidance on how to comply with requirement Q1 of the Building
Regulations. It contains the following sections:
Section 1: Doors
Section 2: Windows
Appendix A: Key terms
Appendix B: Bespoke timber secure doorsets
Appendix C: Documents referred to
Appendix D: Standards referred to
Application
0.2 The guidance in this approved document applies to new dwellings only; this includes dwellings
formed by a material change of use.
This approved document deals with the following requirement from Part Q of Schedule 1 to the
Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
PART Q SECURITY
Unauthorised access
Q1 Requirement Q1 applies only in relation to new
Reasonable provision must be made to resist dwellings.
unauthorised access to—
(a) any dwelling; and
(b) any part of a building from which access can be
gained to a flat within the building.
Performance
Requirement Q1 applies to easily accessible doors and windows that provide access in any of the
following circumstances:
a. into a dwelling from outside
b. into parts of a building containing flats from outside
c. into a flat from the common parts of the building.
In the Secretary of State’s view, doors and windows will meet requirement Q1 if they can resist
physical attack by a casual or opportunist burglar by being both:
a. sufficiently robust
b. fitted with appropriate hardware.
General
1.1 All easily accessible doorsets (including garage doorsets and communal entrance doorsets) that
provide access into a dwelling or into a building containing a dwelling should be secure doorsets in
accordance with paragraphs 1.2 to 1.4.
NOTE: If a garage has no interconnecting doorset allowing access into the dwelling, garage
doorsets need not be secure doorsets. Where access to the dwelling can be gained via an
interconnecting doorset from the garage, then either the garage doorset (pedestrian and vehicular)
or the interconnecting doorset should be a secure doorset.
Design of secure doorsets
1.2 Secure doorsets should be either:
a. manufactured to a design that has been shown by test to meet the security requirements of
British Standards publication PAS 24:2012, or
b. designed and manufactured in accordance with Appendix B.
NOTE: Doorsets satisfying other standards that provide similar or better performance are also
acceptable. These standards include:
• STS 201 Issue 5:2013
• LPS 1175 Issue 7:2010 security rating 2
• STS 202 Issue 3:2011 burglary rating 2
• LPS 2081 Issue 1:2015 security rating B.
Further advice is available in Secured by Design’s New Homes 2014.
1.3 Letter plates, where provided, should:
a. have a maximum aperture of 260mm x 40mm, and
b. be located and/or designed to hinder anyone attempting to remove keys with sticks and/or
insert their hand, for example by incorporating a flap or other features to restrict access.
NOTE: Letter plates meeting the requirements of the Door and Hardware Federation’s (DHF) technical
specification TS 008:2012 have been shown to protect against the attacks mentioned above.
1.4 The main doors for entering a dwelling (usually the front door) should have a door viewer unless
other means exist to see callers, such as clear glass within the door or a window next to the
doorset. The same doorset should also have a door chain or door limiter.
NOTE: In some situations a door chain or limiter is not appropriate, for example where a warden
may need emergency access to residents in sheltered housing. Alternative caller-identification
measures, such as electronic audio-visual door entry systems, can be used to identify visitors.
General
2.1 Ground floor, basement and other easily accessible windows (including easily accessible rooflights)
should be secure windows in accordance with paragraphs 2.2 and 2.3.
Design of secure windows
2.2 Windows should be made to a design that has been shown by test to meet the security
requirements of British Standards publication PAS 24:2012.
NOTE: Windows satisfying other standards that provide similar or better performance are also
acceptable. These standards include:
• STS 204 Issue 3:2012
• LPS 1175 Issue 7:2010 security rating 1
• LPS 2081 Issue 1:2015 security rating A.
Further advice is available in Secured by Design’s New Homes 2014.
Installation and fixing of secure windows
2.3 Frames should be mechanically fixed to the structure of the building in accordance with the
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Doorset
A complete door assembly, assembled on site or delivered as a completed assembly, consisting of
the door frame, door leaf or leaves, essential hardware and any integral side panel or fanlight (but
excluding coupled assemblies).
Window
Windows, rooflights, roof windows and similar.
Secure doorset
Either:
• a doorset that is proven to resist physical attack by a casual or opportunist burglar, or
• a bespoke doorset incorporating construction features that are proven to reduce crime.
Secure window
Either:
• a window that is proven to resist criminal attack, or
• a bespoke window incorporating construction features that are proven to reduce crime.
Easily accessible
Either:
• a window or doorway, any part of which is within 2m vertically of an accessible level surface
such as the ground or basement level, or an access balcony, or
• a window within 2m vertically of a flat or sloping roof (with a pitch of less than 30°) that is
within 3.5m of ground level.
Coupled assembly
A doorset and window that are supplied as separate self-contained frames and fixed together on site.
Proven
(In the context of secure doorsets and secure windows) – a product designed and constructed in
accordance with a specification or design shown by test to be capable of meeting the required
performance.
Further information on materials and workmanship is given in Approved Document 7.
NOTE 1: Laboratories accredited by the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) or an equivalent
European national accreditation body should have the necessary expertise to conduct the relevant tests.
NOTE 2: Any test evidence used to confirm the security of a construction should be carefully
checked to ensure that it demonstrates compliance that is adequate and that applies to
the intended use. Evidence passed from one organisation to another can become unreliable
if important details are lost. Small differences in construction can significantly affect the
performance of a doorset or window.
NOTE 3: Schemes that certify compliance with PAS 24:2012 or other standards that offer similar or
better performance may be acceptable for demonstrating compliance. A list of UKAS-accredited
certification bodies is given on the UKAS website. Many recognised schemes are also listed in
Secured by Design’s New Homes 2014, Section 2.
B.1 A timber doorset constructed in accordance with this appendix is considered a secure doorset for
the purposes of requirement Q1.
NOTE: The information in this appendix applies to doors of up to 1000mm wide and 2000mm high.
Additional measures may be necessary for larger doorsets.
Material
B.2 The doorset should be manufactured from solid or laminated timber with a minimum density of
600kg/m3.
Dimensions
B.3 Door rails, stiles and muntins should be at least 44mm thick. After rebating, frame components
should retain at least 32mm of timber.
B.4 Any panel within the doorset should be at least 15mm thick. The panel should be securely held in
place. Beading should be mechanically fixed and glued in position.
B.5 The smaller dimension of each panel – which can be either the width or height of the panel –
should be 230mm or less.
Glazing
B.11 Any glazing which, if broken, would permit someone to insert their hand and release the locking
device on the inside of the door should be a minimum of class P1A in accordance with BS EN
356:2000. Double- or triple-glazed units need to incorporate only one pane of class-P1A glass.
British Standards
BS EN 356
Glass in building. Security glazing. Testing and classification of resistance against manual attack [2000]
BS 3621
Thief resistant lock assembly. Key egress [2007+A2:2012]
BS 8621
Thief resistant lock assembly. Keyless egress [2007+A2:2012]
BS 10621
Thief resistant dual-mode lock assembly [2007+A2:2012]
R
Physical infrastructure
for high-speed electronic
communications networks
APPROVED DOCUMENT
* This approved document gives guidance for compliance with the Building Regulations for building
work carried out in England. It also applies to building work carried out on excepted energy
buildings in Wales as defined in the Welsh Ministers (Transfer of Functions) (No.2) Order 2009.
The approved documents
The following is a high level summary of the building regulations relevant to most types of building
work. Where there is any doubt you should consult the full text of the regulations, available at
www.legislation.gov.uk.
Building work
Regulation 3 of the Building Regulations 2010 defines ‘building work’. Building work includes:
a. the erection or extension of a building
b. the provision or extension of a controlled service or fitting
c. the material alteration of a building or a controlled service or fitting
Regulation 4 states that building work should be carried out in such a way that, when work is
complete:
a. For new buildings or work on a building that complied with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations: the building complies with all the applicable requirements of the Building
Regulations
b. For work on an existing building that did not comply with the applicable requirements of the
Building Regulations:
(i) the work itself must comply with all the applicable requirements of the Building
Regulations
(ii) the building must be no more unsatisfactory in relation to the requirements than before
the work was carried out
Notification of work
Most building work and material changes of use must be notified to a building control body (local
authority or approved inspector) unless one of the following applies.
a. It is work that can be self-certified by a registered competent person scheme installer, or
certified by a registered third party certifier
b. It is work exempted from the need to notify by regulation 12(6A) of, or Schedule 4 to, the
Building Regulations 2010
This approved document deals with the following requirement from Part R of Schedule 1 to the
Building Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Part R Physical infrastructure for high-speed
electronic communications networks
In-building physical infrastructure
R1
(1) Building work must be carried out so as to ensure Requirement R1 applies to building work that consists of–
that the building is equipped with a high-speed-
ready in-building physical infrastructure, up to a (a) the erection of a building; or
network termination point for high-speed electronic (b) major renovation works to a building.
communications networks.
(2) Where the work concerns a building containing
more than one dwelling, the work must be carried
out so as to ensure that the building is equipped in
addition with a common access point for high-speed
electronic communications networks.
Performance
In the Secretary of State’s view, a building will meet requirement R1 if it is designed and constructed
so that high-speed electronic communications networks can be installed in the future.
Introduction
1.1 Requirement R1 applies to new buildings and to existing buildings that are subject to major
renovation works. The requirement applies both to dwellings and to buildings other than dwellings.
See paragraph 1.5 for types of building and building work that are exempt.
1.2 Requirement R1 is to provide the in-building physical infrastructure so that, in future, copper or
fibre-optic cables or wireless devices capable of delivering broadband speeds greater than 30 Mbps
can be installed.
NOTE: A standard copper telephone cable, when connected to a service provider’s fibre network,
can deliver broadband speeds up to 70 Mbps.
1.3 The requirement is to provide only the in-building physical infrastructure, from the service
provider’s access point to the occupier’s network termination point. Multi-dwelling buildings must
be equipped with a common access point capable of serving all the dwellings within the building.
1.4 It is not a requirement to provide any network cabling or equipment, or any in-building
infrastructure that extends internally beyond the network termination point. Nor is it a requirement
to provide any external or site-wide infrastructure beyond the access point. The developer and
broadband service provider should agree who will install such external infrastructure.
Application
1.5 Requirement R1 does not apply to the following types of building or building work:
a. buildings and work described in Classes 2 to 7 of Schedule 2 (exempt buildings and work) to the
Building Regulations
– for example, sheds, domestic greenhouses, garages, conservatories and other small detached
buildings with no sleeping accommodation
b. buildings included in the schedule of monuments maintained under section 1 of the Ancient
Monuments and Archaeological Areas Act 1979
c. buildings for which compliance with Requirement R1 would unacceptably alter their character
or appearance and that are:
(i) listed in accordance with section 1 of the Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) Act 1990, or
(ii) in a conservation area designated in accordance with section 69 of the Planning (Listed Buildings and
Conservation Areas) Act 1990
d. buildings occupied by the Ministry of Defence or the armed forces of the Crown, or otherwise
occupied for purposes connected to national security
e. buildings in isolated areas where the prospect of a high-speed connection is considered
too remote to justify equipping the building with high-speed-ready in-building physical
infrastructure or an access point
Further information
1.11 Publicly Available Specification (PAS) 2016, Next generation access for new build homes – Guide,
provides best practice guidance on infrastructure and cabling for broadband networks in new
homes.
NOTE: Developers should refer to PAS 2016 and manufacturers’ specifications for guidance on the
duct dimensions, bending radii, etc., required to allow copper and fibre-optic cables to be installed
in the future.
1.12 The NHBC Foundation’s Connected Home guide covers the benefits of current and future smart
technologies. The Guide recommends that house builders ‘future proof’ new homes by including
additional hard wiring.
1 Under the Electronic Communications (Universal Service) Order 2003, which transposed Directive 2002/22/EC, British Telecommunications plc (BT) and Kingston
Communications plc are required to provide connections upon reasonable request and at uniform prices, irrespective of geographical location. This requirement
helps customers in remote rural areas who might otherwise not be served by the market. Where installation of a new line costs £3,400 or less, BT sets a standard
charge. Where installation costs over £3,400, BT requires the customer to pay the excess costs (plus BT’s standard connection charge).
2 The diagrams show underground ducts for network cables outside the building, but this does not preclude the use of overhead lines.
3 For copper cables, the duct may simply be a hole drilled in the wall. Note the downwards slope to outside to prevent rainwater ingress.
Access Network
point termination
point
Terminal chamber
Service
provider’s
duct
Network Ducting/
termination trays in
point in each riser
dwelling
Common
access point
Diagram 2 Schematic example of the in-building physical infrastructure for a multi-dwelling building
The following are key terms used in this document and defined in regulation 44C of the Building
Regulations 2010 (as amended):
Access point Network termination point
A physical point, located inside or outside the A physical point at which an occupier is
building, accessible to undertakings providing or provided with access to high-speed electronic
authorised to provide public communications communications networks.
networks, where connection to the high-speed- NOTE: The ‘occupier’ is the subscriber to the
ready in-building physical infrastructure is made broadband service. The termination point is
available. typically inside the building, but may be outside
High-speed electronic communications network the building for wireless connections.
An electronic communications network which is
capable of delivering broadband access services at
speeds of at least 30 Mbps.
High-speed-ready in-building physical
infrastructure
In-building physical infrastructure intended to
host elements, or enable delivery, of high-speed
electronic communications networks.
In-building physical infrastructure
Physical infrastructure or installations at the end-
user’s location, including elements under joint
ownership, intended to host wired or wireless
access networks, where such access networks are
capable of delivering electronic communications
services and connecting the building access point
with the network termination point.
Major renovation works
Works at the end-user’s location encompassing
structural modifications of the entire in-building
physical infrastructure, or of a significant part of it.
Legislation
Building Regulations 2010 (S.I. 2010/2219)
Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas)
Act 1990 c. 9
Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Areas Act
1979 c. 46
All legislation is available at www.legislation.gov.uk
Standards
PAS 2016:2010, Next generation access for
new build homes – Guide. Publicly Available
Specification produced by BIS and the British
Standards Institution (BSI). Available at www.gov.
uk/government/publications/pas-2016-2010-next-
generation-access-for-new-build-homes-guide
Other guidance
The connected home: Designing and building
technology into today’s new homes. NHBC
Foundation guide NF67, January 2016. Available at
www.nhbcfoundation.org/Publications
S
Infrastructure for
the charging of
electric vehicles
APPROVED DOCUMENT
• There may be other ways to comply with the requirements than those described in an approved
document. If those responsible for meeting the requirements prefer to meet a requirement in some other
way than described in an approved document, they should seek to agree this with the relevant building
control body at an early stage.
This section deals with the following requirement from Part B of Schedule 1 to the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Requirement Limits on application
Internal fire spread (linings)
B2. (1) To inhibit the spread of fire within the building,
the internal linings shall—
(a) adequately resist the spread of flame over
their surfaces; and ➊
(b) have, if ignited, either a rate of heat release
or a rate of fire growth, which is reasonable in
the circumstances.
(2) In this paragraph “internal linings” means the
materials or products used in lining any partition,
wall, ceiling or other internal structure.
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement B2 is met by achieving a restricted spread of flame
over internal linings. The building fabric should make a limited contribution to fire growth,
including a low rate of heat release.
It is particularly important in circulation spaces, where linings may offer the main means by which
fire spreads and where rapid spread is most likely to prevent occupants from escaping.
Requirement B2 does not include guidance on the following.
➋
a. Generation of smoke and fumes.
b. The upper surfaces of floors and stairs.
c. Furniture and fittings.
Key
For further information about the use of technical guidance, see Chapter 7 in Volume 1 and Chapter F
in Volume 2 of the Manual to the Building Regulations.
Introduction i
What is an approved document? i
How is construction regulated in England? i
How do you comply with the Building Regulations? i
What do the Building Regulations cover? ii
When must a building control body be notified? ii
How to use this approved document iii
Where to get further help iv
Section 0: Introduction 1
Summary 1
Application 1
Selected key interactions with other parts of the Building Regulations 2
Section 6: Standards for electric vehicle charge points and cable routes 27
Introduction 27
Technical requirements for electric vehicle charge points 27
Cable routes and locations for electric vehicle charge points 28
Future connection locations 31
Summary
0.1 This approved document is Approved Document S. It gives guidance on how to comply with Part S
of Schedule 1 to the Building Regulations.
0.2 This approved document contains the following sections:
Application
0.3 The guidance in Approved Document S applies to the following types of building work.
a. New residential buildings.
b. New non-residential buildings.
c. Buildings undergoing material change of use.
d. Residential buildings undergoing major renovation.
e. Non-residential buildings undergoing major renovation.
f. Mixed-use buildings undergoing relevant building work.
0.4 Details of the application of the Part S requirements, including exemptions, are set out in the
relevant sections of this document.
This section deals with requirement S1 from Part S of Schedule 1 and regulation 44D of the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
The erection of new residential buildings
S1. (1) A new residential building with associated parking must have access to electric vehicle charge points as
provided for in paragraph (2).
(2) The number of associated parking spaces which have access to electric vehicle charge points must be—
(a) the total number of associated parking spaces, where there are fewer associated parking spaces than
there are dwellings contained in the residential building; or
(b) the number of associated parking spaces that is equal to the total number of dwellings contained in
the residential building, where there are the same number of associated parking spaces as, or more
associated parking spaces than, there are dwellings.
(3) Cable routes for electric vehicle charge points must be installed in any associated parking spaces which do
not, in accordance with paragraph (2), have an electric vehicle charge point where—
(a) a new residential building has more than 10 associated parking spaces; and
(b) there are more associated parking spaces than there are dwellings contained in the residential building.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 8 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement S1 and regulation 44D are met if building work complies
with all the following.
a. For a new residential building where requirement S1 applies (paragraph 1.4), electric vehicle
charge points are installed in accordance with paragraph 1.1.
b. For new residential buildings where both of the following conditions apply, cable routes are installed.
i. The requirement to install electric vehicle charge points does not apply to all associated
parking spaces (paragraph 1.4).
ii. The building has more than 10 associated parking spaces.
New dwellings
1.1 Where associated parking spaces are provided for a new residential building, the number of
associated parking spaces that have access to an electric vehicle charge point must be a minimum
of either of the following.
a. The number of associated parking spaces.
b. The number of dwellings that the car park serves.
See paragraphs 1.4 to 1.7 for the application of these requirements.
NOTE: Where no associated parking spaces are provided, there is no requirement to install an
electric vehicle charge point.
1.2 If some associated parking spaces are not required to install electric vehicle charge points
following paragraphs 1.4 to 1.7, then cable routes may need to be installed. If either:
a. the average connection cost for an electric vehicle charge point connection is greater
than £3600
b. some of the associated parking spaces associated with the new residential building are within
a covered car park
the total number of associated parking spaces which have access to either an electric vehicle
charge point or cable routes must be a minimum of either of the following.
a. The number of associated parking spaces.
b. The number of dwellings that the car park serves.
1.3 If the number of associated parking spaces for the new residential building is both
a. more than 10
b. more than the number of dwellings
cable routes must be provided for all associated parking spaces which do not have access to an
electric vehicle charge point.
Garden Garden
Parking
space 3
NOTES:
1. Parking space 1, despite being separated from dwelling 1 by a garden, is within the site boundary and contains a parking space associated
with dwelling 1.
2. Parking space 2 is within the site boundary of dwelling 1 and contains a parking space associated with dwelling 1.
3. Parking space 3 is outside the site boundary of dwelling 1. In this example, parking space 3 is separated from dwelling 1 by a public highway
or a road that does not belong to the owners of dwelling 1.
4. Garage/Car port 1 is within the site boundary of dwelling 1, despite being separated from the building by a garden; therefore, parking
space within the garage/car port is associated with dwelling 1.
Note that some garages do not contain parking spaces (for example, if a car cannot reasonably be expected to be parked inside the garage).
5. Parking space 4 is outside the site boundary of dwelling 1. Parking space 4 is on land that belongs to the owners of dwelling 2.
Diagram 1.1 Determining associated parking spaces and site boundaries, example 1
On-street
parking
Car park 4
NOTES:
1. Car park 1 is within the site boundary for building 1 and contains parking spaces associated with building 1.
2. Car park 2 is outside the site boundary, and the parking spaces do not therefore need to be considered. The car park may be associated
with a different building or under different ownership to building 1.
3. Car park 3, despite being separated from building 1 by vegetation/landscaping, is within the site boundary. If the parking spaces are for the
use of the occupants/users of building 1, they are therefore associated with building 1.
4. Car park 4 is outside the site boundary of building 1. In this example, the car park is separated from the building by a public highway or a
road under different ownership to that of the building.
5. The on-street parking is outside the site boundary of the building. In this example, the parking spaces are on a public highway or a road
that does not belong to the owners of the building.
6. Car park 1 and car park 3 each contain seven parking spaces. The new building therefore has 14 associated parking spaces. The
requirements for buildings with a minimum of 11 associated parking spaces apply.
Diagram 1.2 Determining associated parking spaces and site boundaries, example 2
This section deals with requirement S2 from Part S of Schedule 1 and regulation 44E of the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Dwellings resulting from a material change of use
S2. Where one or more dwellings with associated parking result from a building, or a part of a building,
undergoing a material change of use at least one associated parking space for the use of each such dwelling
must have access to an electric vehicle charge point.
Regulation
Application of paragraph S2 of Schedule 1 (dwellings resulting from a material change of use)
44E. (1) The requirements of paragraph S2 of Schedule 1 apply to a building, or a part of a building, undergoing a
material change of use to result in one or more dwellings as follows.
(2) The requirements of paragraph S2 of Schedule 1 apply—
(a) if—
(i) the circumstances specified in regulation 5(a), (b) or (g) apply; and
(ii) the material change of use involves building work being done which includes work being done to
any of the following—
(aa) to a car park that is located within the site boundary of the building, where the nature of
the work is such that it would be reasonable to expect that work to include enabling the
requirements of paragraph S2 of Schedule 1 to be fulfilled;
(bb) the electrical infrastructure of a car park, where that car park is located within the site
boundary of the building;
(cc) the electrical infrastructure of the building, where a car park is located inside the building;
(b) subject to paragraph (3), if an electric vehicle charge point for each dwelling resulting from a building,
or a part of a building, undergoing a material change of use can be accommodated within the incoming
electrical supply to the building without having to upgrade the capacity of the incoming electrical
supply to the building; and
(c) if the building is not one in relation to which paragraph (4) applies.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 8 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement S2 and regulation 44E is met if both of the following
are met.
a. Where dwellings are created through or result from a material change of use of the type
described in paragraph 2.1, electric vehicle charge points and cable routes are installed
following the guidance in paragraphs 2.7 to 2.9 and for covered car parks in paragraphs 2.16
and 2.17.
b. For historic and traditional buildings, the guidance in paragraphs 2.3 to 2.6 has been followed.
This section deals with requirement S3 from Part S of Schedule 1 and regulation 44F of the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Residential buildings undergoing major renovation
S3. Where a residential building undergoing major renovation will have more than 10 associated parking spaces
after the major renovation is completed—
(a) at least one associated parking space for the use of each dwelling must have access to an electric vehicle
charge point;
(b) cable routes for electric vehicle charge points must be installed in all additional associated parking spaces.
Regulation
Application of paragraph S3 of Schedule 1 (residential buildings undergoing major renovation)
44F. (1) The requirements of paragraph S3 of Schedule 1 apply to a residential building undergoing major
renovation as follows.
(2) The requirements of paragraph S3 of Schedule 1 apply if—
(a) the major renovation involves building work being done which includes work being done to any of the
following—
(i) a car park that is located within the site boundary of the building, where the nature of the work
is such that it would be reasonable to expect that work to include enabling the requirements of
paragraph S3 of Schedule 1 to be fulfilled;
(ii) the electrical infrastructure of a car park, where the car park is located within the site boundary of
the building;
(iii) the electrical infrastructure of the building, where a car park is located inside the building;
(b) the residential building will have more than 10 associated parking spaces upon completion of that
work;
(c) subject to paragraph (3), all the required electric vehicle charge points can be accommodated within
the incoming electrical supply to the building;
(d) the cost of installing all the required electric vehicle charge points and cable routes for electric
vehicle charge points does not exceed 7% of the total cost of the major renovation; and
(e) the residential building is not one in relation to which paragraph (5) applies.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 8 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement S3 and regulation 44F is met if building work complies
with the following.
a. Where a residential building undergoes a major renovation of the type described in paragraph
2.10, electric vehicle charge points and cable routes are installed following the guidance in
paragraphs 2.13 to 2.15 and for covered car parks in paragraphs 2.16 and 2.17.
This section deals with requirement S4 from Part S of Schedule 1 and regulation 44G of the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Erection of new buildings which are not residential buildings or mixed-use buildings
S4. Where a new building which is not a residential building or a mixed-use building has more than 10 parking
spaces—
(a) one of those parking spaces must have access to one electric vehicle charge point; and
(b) cable routes for electric vehicle charge points must be installed in a minimum of one fifth of the total
number of remaining parking spaces.
Regulation
Application of paragraph S4 of Schedule 1 (erection of new buildings which are not residential buildings or
mixed-use buildings)
44G. (1) The requirements of paragraph S4 of Schedule 1 apply to the erection of a new building which is not a
residential building or a mixed-use building (“new building”) as follows.
(2) If such a new building has, or will have, within its site boundary, more than 10 parking spaces—
(a) if there are or will be any parking spaces situated in a position other than in a covered car park—
(i) the requirements of paragraph S4 of Schedule 1 must first be applied in relation to those parking
spaces; then
(ii) if the number of parking spaces which are situated in a position other than in a covered car park
is insufficient to completely fulfil the requirements of paragraph S4 of Schedule 1, cable routes
for electric vehicle charge points must be installed in a sufficient number of parking spaces in
the covered car park in order to ensure compliance with the requirements of paragraph S4(b) of
Schedule 1;
(b) if all the parking spaces are situated in a covered car park, cable routes for electric vehicle charge
points must be installed in a minimum of one fifth of the total number of those parking spaces.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 8 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement S4 and regulation 44G will be met if building work
complies with the following.
a. For new buildings other than residential or mixed-use buildings with more than 10 parking
spaces, both of the following are provided.
i. At least one electric vehicle charge point, as set out in paragraphs 3.1 to 3.4.
ii. Cable routes for at least one in every five parking spaces, as set out in paragraphs 3.1 to 3.4.
3.1 For new buildings other than residential or mixed-use buildings with more than 10 parking spaces, both
of the following apply.
a. One electric vehicle charge point must be provided for the building.
b. At least one in every five remaining parking spaces must be provided with cable routes.
NOTE: A minimum of one in every five means that, for example, if there are 11 parking spaces, two
parking spaces must have access to cable routes in addition to the one parking space with access
to an electric vehicle charge point.
This section deals with requirement S5 from Part S of Schedule 1 and regulation 44H of the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
Buildings undergoing major renovation which are not residential buildings or mixed-use buildings
S5. Where a building undergoing major renovation, which is not a residential building or a mixed-use building, will
have more than 10 parking spaces after the major renovation is completed—
(a) one of those parking spaces must have access to one electric vehicle charge point; and
(b) cable routes for electric vehicle charge points must be installed in a minimum of one fifth of the total
number of remaining parking spaces.
Regulation
Application of paragraph S5 of Schedule 1 (buildings undergoing major renovation which are not residential
buildings or mixed-use buildings)
44H. (1) The requirements of paragraph S5 of Schedule 1 apply to a building undergoing major renovation, which is
not a residential building or a mixed-use building, as follows.
(2) The requirements of paragraph S5 of Schedule 1 apply to such a building if—
(a) the major renovation involves building work being done which includes work being done to any of the
following—
(i) a car park that is located within the site boundary of the building, where the nature of the work is
such that it would be reasonable to expect the requirements of paragraph S5 of Schedule 1 to be
fulfilled;
(ii) the electrical infrastructure of a car park, where the car park is located within the site boundary of
the building;
(iii) the electrical infrastructure of the building, where a car park is located inside the building;
(b) upon completion of that major renovation, the building will have more than 10 parking spaces situated
within the site boundary of the building;
(c) the cost of installing the required electric vehicle charge point and cable routes for electric vehicle
charge points does not exceed 7% of the total cost of the major renovation.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 8 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement S5 and regulation 44H will be met if building work
complies with the following.
a. For major renovations to buildings other than dwellings with more than 10 parking spaces, both
of the following are provided.
i. One electric vehicle charge point, as described in paragraphs 4.1 to 4.6.
ii. Cable routes for at least one in every five remaining parking spaces, as described in
paragraphs 4.1 to 4.6.
4.1 For a building other than a residential or mixed-use building where all of the following apply, cable
routes and electric vehicle charge points must be provided.
a. Major renovation work is being done.
b. After work is complete, more than 10 parking spaces within the site boundary will be available
for the use of building users.
c. The major renovation work includes any of the following within the site boundary.
i. Substantial work to the car park, such as resurfacing or installing electrical infrastructure.
ii. Where the car park is outside the building but within the site boundary of the building, the
electrical infrastructure of the car park.
iii. Where the car park is inside the building, the electrical infrastructure of the building.
4.2 Where the criteria in paragraph 4.1 are met, the following apply.
a. One electric vehicle charge point must be installed.
b. A minimum of one in five of the remaining parking spaces must have access to cable routes.
NOTE: A minimum of one in every five means that, for example, if there are 11 parking spaces,
two parking spaces must have access to cable routes in addition to the one parking space with an
electric vehicle charge point.
This section deals with requirement S6 from Part S of Schedule 1 and regulation 44I of the Building
Regulations 2010.
Requirement
The erection of new mixed-use buildings and mixed-use buildings undergoing major renovation
S6. (1) The requirements of paragraph S1 apply in respect of the part of the new mixed-use building that contains
one or more dwellings and the associated parking spaces that are assigned to those dwellings.
(2) The requirements of paragraph S3 apply in respect of the part of the mixed-use building that is undergoing
major renovation that contains one or more dwellings and the associated parking spaces that are assigned to
those dwellings.
(3) The requirements of paragraph S4 apply in respect of the part of the new mixed-use building that contains
one or more new premises that are not dwellings and the parking spaces that are assigned to those premises.
(4) The requirements of paragraph S5 apply in respect of the part of the mixed-use building that is undergoing
major renovation that contains one or more premises that are not dwellings and the parking spaces that are
assigned to those premises.
Regulation
Application of paragraph S6 of Schedule 1 (the erection of new mixed-use buildings and mixed-use buildings
undergoing major renovation)
44I. (1) The requirements of paragraph S6 of Schedule 1 apply to the erection of a new mixed-use building and a
mixed-use building undergoing major renovation as follows.
(2) The requirements of paragraph S6 of Schedule 1 apply if, upon completion, such a mixed-use building will
have at least one parking space situated within the site boundary of the building.
(3) If such a mixed-use building has, or will have, within its site boundary, a covered car park—
(a) if there are or will be any parking spaces situated in a position other than in a covered car park—
(i) the requirements of paragraph S6 of Schedule 1 must first be applied in relation to those parking
spaces; then
(ii) if the number of parking spaces, which are situated in a position other than in a covered car park,
is insufficient to completely fulfil the requirements of paragraph S6 of Schedule 1, cable routes for
electric vehicle charge points must be installed in accordance with—
(aa) regulation 44D(4)(a), in relation to the associated parking spaces for one or more dwellings in
a new mixed-use building;
(bb) regulation 44F(6)(a), in relation to the associated parking spaces for one or more dwellings in a
mixed-use building undergoing major renovation;
(cc) regulation 44G(2)(a), in relation to the parking spaces for one or more premises that are not
dwellings in a new mixed-use building;
(dd) regulation 44H(4)(a), in relation to the parking spaces for one or more premises that are not
dwellings in a mixed-use building undergoing major renovation;
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 8 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, requirement S6 and regulation 44I will be met if building work
complies with the following.
a. For new mixed-use buildings.
i. Requirement S1 and regulation 44D are followed (paragraphs 1.1 to 1.7) relating to parts of
the premises that include new dwellings.
ii. Requirement S4 and regulation 44G are followed (paragraphs 3.1 to 3.4) relating to parts of
the premises that are not dwellings.
b. For mixed-use buildings undergoing major renovation work.
i. Requirement S3 and regulation 44F are followed (paragraphs 2.10 to 2.15) relating to parts of
the premises that include dwellings.
ii. Requirement S5 and regulation 44H are followed (paragraphs 4.1 to 4.6) relating to parts of
the premises that are not dwellings.
Regulation
Minimum standards of an electric vehicle charge point
44J. (1) For the purposes of this Part and Part S of Schedule 1, an electric vehicle charge point must meet the
following minimum standards.
(2) It must be capable of providing a reasonable power output for each parking space for which it is intended
to be used.
(3) It must be run on a dedicated circuit.
(4) It must be compatible with all vehicles which may require access to it.
NOTE: Where the building control body is an approved inspector, see regulation 8 of the Building
(Approved Inspectors etc.) Regulations 2010 (as amended).
Intention
In the Secretary of State’s view, regulation 44J will be met if the electric vehicle charge points
installed to meet any of the requirements S1 to S6 meet paragraph 6.2.
Cable routes installed to meet any of the requirements S1 to S6 should meet paragraphs 6.3 to 6.12.
NOTE: Paragraphs 6.3 to 6.6 provide guidance on the location of electric vehicle charge points and
future connection locations.
Introduction
6.1 This section sets out standards that electric vehicle charge points and cable routes should meet
when installed to meet the requirements set out in this Approved Document.
NOTE: This Approved Document does not provide guidance on electrical or fire safety. Electrical
and fire safety requirements are likely to apply when carrying out electrical work. Relevant
regulations and guidance include the following.
a. Building Regulations Part B (Fire Safety), Approved Document B.
b. Building Regulations Part P (electrical safety – dwellings), Approved Document P.
c. The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989, HSE’s HSR25: The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989:
Guidance on Regulations.
Access zone
4.8m
Parking bay
1.2m
Diagram 6.1 Electric vehicle charge points serving accessible parking spaces
A
3
B 2
Diagram 6.2 Electric vehicle charge point locations which may serve more than one parking space
6.7 For each parking space that requires cable routes, the following apply.
a. Cable routes should be provided from a metered electricity supply point to the future
connection location.
b. All of the following should be provided.
i. Sufficient space for a new electrical connection at a metered supply point such as a
consumer unit or feeder pillar.
ii. A dedicated safe and unobstructed route to distribute electricity from the electrical supply
point to the future connection location.
Dedicated position
for electric vehicle
charge point
Diagram 6.3 Label for future connection location example (not to size)
6.12 The future connection location should have space to install an electric vehicle charge point as
described in paragraph 6.2, including space for all the following.
a. Access for recharging an electric vehicle.
b. Access for installing and maintaining the electric vehicle charge point.
c. Vehicle barriers if these will be required for the future electric vehicle charge point. Where
vehicle barriers are necessary, sufficient space (for example 500mm) should be allowed around
the future connection location.
Diagram 6.4 shows the minimum space requirements for a floor-mounted electric vehicle charge
point. Diagram 6.5 shows the minimum space requirements for a wall-mounted electric vehicle
charge point.
NOTE: Guidance on the accessibility requirements of the Building Regulations, including on the
location of sockets and switches, is given in Approved Document M.
Floor- Floor-
Free
Free space mounted Free space mounted
space
≥1200mm
charge point charge point
Floor
Diagram 6.4 Minimum space requirements for floor-mounted charge point location
Wall/object
≥800mm ≥400mm ≥800mm ≥200mm
Wall- Wall-
≥500mm
mounted mounted
Free space Free space
charge point charge point
700 to 1000mm
Floor
Diagram 6.5 Minimum space requirements for wall-mounted charge point location
NOTE: Except for the items marked * (which Electric vehicle charge point A device intended
are from the Building Regulations 2010), these for charging a vehicle that is capable of being
definitions apply only to Approved Document S. propelled by electrical power derived from a
storage battery (or for discharging electricity stored
Accessible parking space A parking space that
in such a vehicle).
meets the provisions in Approved Document M.
Associated parking space Any parking space Covered car park Any car park which is enclosed
that is available within the site boundary of the by a roof, except garages or carports that are
building, for the use by the occupant of, or a intended to be used solely by the occupant of,
visitor to, a dwelling in the building, including any or a visitor to, a dwelling or carports that cover
parking space which is for the use of any occupant otherwise open parking spaces.
of, or any visitor to, any dwelling in a building Future connection location An identified location at
containing more than one dwelling. which an electric vehicle charge point may be installed
Boundary The boundary of the land and/or in future to serve the relevant parking spaces.
buildings belonging to and under the control of the
building owner. *Major renovation The renovation of a building
where more than 25% of the surface area of the
Building control body A local authority or building envelope undergoes renovation.
approved inspector NOTE: The surface area of the whole building must
be included when assessing whether the works
Cable route A safe, unobstructed route from the
constitute a major renovation, even if the building is
power supply to the envisaged electric vehicle
mixed use.
charge point location, for electrical cabling to be
installed in the future. Mixed-use building
NOTE: In this document, cable routes are described A building which contains:
only in the context of where electric vehicle charge • one or more dwellings, and
points have not yet been installed. Where electric
• one or more premises that are not dwellings.
vehicle charge points have been installed, they should
be considered to have adequate cable routes. Parking space A space in which occupants of or
visitors to the building may reasonably expect to
Connection cost The cost of upgrades needed to
park a passenger car.
the electricity system in order to accommodate
a charge point, excluding the cost of any building Residential building
work or the cost of the charge point itself. A building which:
NOTE: For the purposes of this approved a. contains one or more dwellings, and
document, the connection cost should exclude VAT.
b. does not contain any premises that are not
Dwelling A self-contained unit designed to dwellings.
accommodate a single household e.g. types of
dwelling include dwellinghouses and flats.
Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity HSG 47 Avoiding Danger from Underground
Regulations 2002, SI 2002/2665 Services, Third Edition [2014]
Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) HSR 25 The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989:
Act 1990, c. 9 Guidance on Regulations, Third Edition [2015]
Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET)
(www.theiet.org)
Code of Practice: Electric Vehicle Charging
Equipment Installation, Fourth Edition [2020]
National Joint Utilities Group (NJUG)
(www.streetworks.org.uk)
Streetworks UK Guidelines on the Positioning and
Colour Coding of Underground Utilities’ Apparatus,
Issue 9 [2018]. Available at: http://streetworks.
org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2018/11/VOL-1-
reviewed.pdf